3592C06 Mi 20110826 Mi.95p8957

IBM System Storage TS1120 Tape Controller
3592 C06 Maintenance Information

IBM 3592 Model C06
Note!
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the information in Chapter 9 “Notices” on page 9–1.
August 19, 2011
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law. Some
states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may
not apply to you.
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do
not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply
to you.
When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
© Copyright IBM Corporation 2003, 2011.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Read This First
This is the IBM System Storage TS1120 Controller 3592 C06 Maintenance Information (MI).
About This Information

Changes are shown by a | on the left margin.
v This information is intended for use only by trained service personnel.
v Go to "Start" on page 1-1 to begin all service procedures.
Send Us Your Feedback

Send us your comments by e-mail to starpubs@us.ibm.com or use the Readers' Comments form at the
back of this document. When sending your comments, be sure to include:
v Exact publication title
v Part number and EC level (located on the back cover)
v Page number to which you are referring
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 iii

iv 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information
Contents
Read This First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
About This Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Send Us Your Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Safety Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi

Rack Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Laser Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv

Laser Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Chapter 1. Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Installation Starting Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
3592 C06 Controller Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Tape Drive Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Miscellaneous Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Chapter 2. Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
pSeries 9131 - 52A Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Controller Supported Host Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Adjacent Frame Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Call Home Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
3592 C06 controller Supported Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
3592 J1A Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
3592 E05, E06 and E07 Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Write Once Read Many (WORM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Encryption Key Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
3592 E05 (TS1120), 3592 E06/EU6 Tape Drive (TS1130), and 3592 E07 (TS1140) Encryption
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
System-Managed Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
About Encryption Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Bulk Rekey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
3953 F05 Frame features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
3952 F05 Frame and associated features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller and associated frame features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
3592 C06 Controller and associated frame features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
3592 C06 Controller and associated frame feature descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Features for the Fibre Channel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Features for External Fabric Support (FC 3492, FC 9492) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Artwork, Diagrams, Graphics, and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
3592 C06 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
3592 C06 Controller Plug Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
1.86Gib (2Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
3.72Gib (4Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 v

RAS Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Serviceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
3592 C06 controller Maintenance Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Host (SIM and MIM) Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Field Microcode Support Using 3592 C06 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Security Precautions for EBTERM, NetTerm, and Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Security Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Security For Local Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Security for Remote Support Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Remote Login For Microcode Level 1.16.2.8 Or Above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Hierarchy of Remote Support Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Service Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
ESD Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Wrap Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Chapter 3. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Before Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
About Installation of a 3592 C06 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3592 C06 controller Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
IBM 3494 D24 Frame or 3494 D22 Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
IBM Rack Subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
IBM 3953 F05 Tape Frame with 3592 C06 controllers attached to a Model C20 Frame . . . . 3-2
IBM 3953 F05 Tape Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3592 C06 controller and 3577 L5U Tape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Verify Checkout instructions for a 3592 C06 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3953 F05 Base Frame with a 3592 C06 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Check out a 3592 C06 controller in a 3953 F05 Base Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Diagnostic Checkout of ESCON or FICON Adapters before Host Attach – 3953 F05 Base Frame 3-15
3953 F05 Expansion Frame with 3592 C06 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Description of 3953 F05 Expansion Frame LAN Network Connections . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Check out a 3592 C06 controller in a 3953 F05 Expansion Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
IP Chart for 3592 C06 controller Attachment in 3953 F05 Tape Frames . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Diagnostic Checkout of ESCON or FICON Adapters before Host Attach – 3953 F05 Expansion
Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3952 F05 Frame (Outbound) with a 3592 C06 controller cabled to D24 and D22 Frames . . . . . 3-29
Installing a 3592 C06 controller connected to a 3494 D24 Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Check out a 3592 C06 controller attached to 3494 D24 and D22 frame . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Attaching 3494 Tape Library cables to 3592 C06 controller - 3494 D24 Frame . . . . . . . . 3-39
Diagnostic Checkout of ESCON or FICON Adapters before Host Attach – 3494 D24 Frame 3-40
3952 F05 Frame (Outbound) with a 3592 C06 controller cabled to 3494 D22 Frames. . . . . . . 3-41
Install a 3592 C06 controller connected to a 3494 D22 Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Check out a 3592 C06 controller attached to a 3494 D22 Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Attach 3494 Library Manager cables to 3592 C06 controller - 3494 D22 Frame . . . . . . . . 3-54
Diagnostic Checkout Of ESCON Or FICON Adapters before Host Attach – 3494 D22 Frame 3-54
3952 F05 Frame with a 3592 C06 controller cabled to a C20 Tape Library . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Install a 3592 C06 controller connected to a C20 Tape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Check out a 3592 C06 controller attached to a C20 Tape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Diagnostic Checkout Of ESCON Or FICON Adapters before Host Attach – C20 . . . . . . . . 3-62
Rack with a 3592 C06 controller and 3592 Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Check out a 3592 C06 controller in a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Diagnostic Checkout Of ESCON Or FICON Adapters before Host Attach – Rack . . . . . . . 3-68
3592 C06 controller attached to a 3577 L5U Tape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Attach 3577 L5U Tape Library(s) to the 3592 C06 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
vi 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Verify Cabling to an External Switch (Director) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
LAN Configuration Matrix (Quick Reference For Dual LAN In 3494 or 3953 Environment) . . . . . 3-77
LAN Configuration Matrix (Quick Reference For Single LAN In 3494 / 3953 Environment) . . . . . 3-81
LAN Configuration Matrix (Quick Reference for 3577 L5U Tape Library environment) . . . . . . . 3-84
Field Merge 3592 C06 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Relocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
Chapter 4. Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Adding tape drives to 3592 C06 controller - Concurrently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Adding New Microcode Images To 3592 C06 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Using the TSSC to add Microcode to 3592 C06 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Analyze the AIX Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Checking Number of Attached Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Making Entries On 3494 or 3953 LM Panel For Path To Out-Of-Band EKM . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Configure Attachment to 3494, 3584, 3577 Library; or 'None' for C20 Tape Library and Rack mounted
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Configure LAN for 3494 Tape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Configure LAN for 3592 C06 controller in a 3953 F05 Tape Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Configure LAN for 3577 L5U Tape Library with a microcode update . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Configure LAN for 3577 L5U Tape Library with FC 5248 (no Router) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Configure LAN for C20 Tape Library, or Rack Mounted Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Configure Rack Mount Controller LAN for FC 5248 (no Router) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Firmware Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Drive Checkout in the 3584 Tape Library (External Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Drive Setup for External Switch (3494 or 3592 C06 controller attach to C20, or Rack) . . . . . . 4-41
EBTERM Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Configure EBTERM for Terminal Emulator use (OS/2 Platform) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Using EBTERM in a 3953 or 3494 Tape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Using EBTERM in the 3953 F05 Base Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
NetTerm Connection as a Service Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Configure NetTerm Terminal Emulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
NetTerm Direct Connect to S1 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
NetTerm Connection to Remote Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Enabling Encryption On Encryption-Capable Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
End-of-call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Firmware Update via AIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Install Information Center on Service Terminal (PC, Laptop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Installing AIX and 3592 C06 controller microcode on the 3592 C06 controller. . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Dual LAN Configuration in 3494 Tape Library environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Single LAN Configuration in 3494 Tape Library environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Subsystem Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Activate Microcode in 3592 C06 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Microcode Configuration for 3592 C06 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Ping Hardware Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Point-to-Point Drive Attach (Direct Attachment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Point-to-Point Drive Attach on 3584 Tape Library (Direct Attachment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Power Off 3592 C06 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Power Off 3592 C06 controller (Alternate Method). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Power On 3592 C06 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Power ON 3592 C06 controller by using ASMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Preparing 3592 C06 controller for Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Restart AIX and 3592 C06 controller Microcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Retrieving Engineering and Dump Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Show / Change TSSC connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Running Fibre Switch setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Contents vii
Running FICON Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Run SCSI / Fibre Channel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Running Online Diagnostics from 3592 C06 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Service Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Connecting the Service Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Windows Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
OS/2 Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Setting Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Service Mode Boot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Run Standalone Diagnostics By Booting In Service Mode From Custom Boot List . . . . . . 4-105
Setting Correct Time On Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Setting Number of Drives On Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Setting DNS IP address fields on absence of Customer DNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Encryption Router Configuration (For Library-Managed Controllers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Set 251 Encryption Router Configuration (For Library-Managed Controllers) . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Make Entries on 3494 or 3953 Library Manager Panel For Path To Out-Of-Band Encryption
Key Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Set 250 Encryption Router Configuration (For Library-Managed Controllers) . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Controller Routes for using pre-configured Encryption Routers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Set Controller Routes To Use Pre-configured 251 Encryption Router . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Set Controller Routes to use pre-configured 250 Encryption Router . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Second Encryption Routers configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Set second 251 Encryption Router configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Set second 250 Encryption Router configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Ninth through Fourteenth IP Routes to second Encryption Routers, 3494 Tape Library only . . . . 4-138
Set Ninth through Fourteenth Controller IP Routes to second 251 and 250 Encryption Routers
3494 Tape Library only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
Set Controller Routes for the second 251 Encryption Router (Ninth through Fourteenth
Controllers). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
Set Controller Routes for the second 250 Encryption Router (Ninth through Fourteenth
Controllers). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Set Encryption Key Manager IP Addresses in the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
Run Encryption Key Manager Path Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Show/Change SIM and MIM Reporting Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
System Firmware Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
General Information on System Firmware Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Determining Level of System Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Commit Temporary Firmware Image To Permanent Firmware Image . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Updating System Firmware from AIX Command Line by using Locally-Available Image. . . . . 4-153
Copying 3592 Tape Drive microcode from CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
3592 Tape Drive Microcode Activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
Turn OFF the System Attention LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
Updating System Firmware From AIX Service Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
Updating System Firmware From AIX Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
Accessing Information Center through Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
Accessing Information Center Through Service Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Vary On or Off 3592 C06 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
Varying On or Off 3592 Tape Drives from 3592 C06 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
View SIMs In Tape CU SIM Log in 3592 C06 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
View SIMs in 3592 C06 controller SIM Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
Close SIMs in 3592 C06 controller SIM Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
Chapter 5. Removal and Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Handling Static-Sensitive Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Place Controller in Service Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
viii 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Remove Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Reinstall Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Service Access Cover – Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Returning Controller To Operating Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Battery removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Control panel removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Control (Operator) Panel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Vital Product Data (VPD) module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Disk Drive Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Disk Drive Backplane Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Disk Drive Backplane Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Disk Drive Bezels and Fillers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Removing a disk drive bezel from a disk drive or filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Installing a disk drive bezel to a disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Disk Drives Hot Swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
3592 Tape Drive replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Fan Tray Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Fan Tray Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Fan Tray Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Fans Hot-Swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Fan Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Hot-Swap Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Fibre Channel switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Concurrent Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Removing the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Replacing the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Concurrent Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . 5-29
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Memory DIMM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Memory DIMM Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Memory DIMM Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Power Distribution Unit (PDU) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
PCI Adapter Card – Hot Swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Installing a power supply with the system power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Removing Power Supply With System Powered ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Replacing Power Supply With System Powered ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Removing Power Supply With System Powered ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Replacing Power Supply With System Powered ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Service Processor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Removing Service Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Replacing Service Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
SFP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Installing SFPs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Replacing SFPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Slim-Line Media Devices (DVD-ROM, or DVD-RW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Removing Slim-Line Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Replacing Slim-Line Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
System Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Contents ix
Removing Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Replacing Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Voltage Regulator Modules (VRMs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Removing Voltage Regulator Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Replacing Voltage Regulator Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Location Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Finding Location Codes (Information Center). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Chapter 6. Service and Media Information Messages (SIMs and MIMs) . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
3592 C06 controller SIM/MIM Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
I/O Subsystem Service Information Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Device Service Information Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Media Information Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Decoding SIM Refcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Refcode 1, 2, and 3:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
ES/9000 EREP Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
SIM EREP Report (Format 71) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
MIM EREP Report (Format 70). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
JES2 Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Event History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
ES/9000 EREP Reports for ERA 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Chapter 7. Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Materials Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Safety Inspection Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
3592 C06 Controller AC Grounding Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
3592 Tape Drive AC Grounding Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Completion Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Chapter 8. Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

AIX Problem Aanalysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Control Panel Display – Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Collecting Reference Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
System LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
System Attention LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
FRU Identify LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Controller Condition Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Perform This Action – 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch IP Setup (serial interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Perform This Action – 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Setting Cisco Router to factory defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Verify 3577 L5U Tape Library configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Ping Hardware Test for 3577 L5U Tape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Checkout Of ESCON Or FICON Adapters Before Host Attach – 3577 L5U Tape Library . . . . . . 8-14
Chapter 9. Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
All Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
x 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Chapter 10. Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Communication Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

People's Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Avis de conformité à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
European Union (EU) Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Japan VCCI Class A ITE Electronic Emission Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Taiwan Class A Electronic Emission Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Taiwan Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Part number index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Parts Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Parts Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Assemblies List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Assembly 1: 3592 C06 Controller Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Assembly 2: Cable List and Miscellaneous Hardware Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1
Contents xi
xii 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information
Figures
2-1. In-Band Key Path Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2. Out-of-Band Key Path Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-3. Out-of-Band Key Path Flowchart, including TS7700 Virtualization Engine . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-4. 3592 Tape Drive Encryption Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-5. Rear View of the SMC Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2-6. Controller Controls and Connections – Rear View of Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2-7. Controller Controls and Connections — Front View, With Operator Panel . . . . . . . . 2-16
2-8. 1.86Gib (2Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-9. One 1.86Gib (2Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch in a base frame. . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2-10. One 1.86Gib (2Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch in an expansion frame . . . . . . . . 2-19
2-11. Two 1.86Gib (2Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches in 3953 Base frame . . . . . . . . 2-20
2-12. Two 1.86Gib (2Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2-13. 3.72Gib (4Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2-14. One 3.72Gib (4Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch in a 3953 F05 Base Frame . . . . . . 2-22
2-15. One 3.72Gib (4Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch in an expansion frame . . . . . . . . 2-23
2-16. Two 3.72Gib (4Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2-17. ESD Grounding Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2-18. ESCON Wrap Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
3-1. Rear View of 3953 F05 Base Frame - Opposite Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-2. 3592 C06 controller in Base Frame with Dual LAN Cabling for two 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-3. 3592 C06 controller In Base Frame With Dual LAN Cabling for Two 4Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-4. Expansion Frame Cabling with maximum number of 3592 C06 controllers and 2Gb 20-Port
Fibre Channel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3-5. Expansion Frame Cabling with maximum number of 3592 C06 controllers and 4Gb 20-Port
Fibre Channel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-6. One 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-7. Two 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches With 3592 Tape Drives in 3494 D24/D22 Frame 3-34
3-8. Two 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Ports in the 3494 D24 Frame . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3-9. Teach — Box Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3-10. Teach — Device Identifiers Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3-11. Two 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches, with 3592 Tape Drives in D22/D22 Frame 3-45
3-12. One 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3-13. Two 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Ports in 3494 D22 Frame . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3-14. One 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Ports in a 3494 D22 Frame . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3-15. Teach — Box Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3-16. Teach — Device Identifiers Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3-17. F05 Frame to C20 Frame Fibre Connections for the single 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3-18. Non Router configuration without library (FC 5248) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3-19. Non Router configuration (FC 5248) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
3-20. Cisco Router 1811 (FC 5247) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
3-21. Example – External Switch With Single Zone (2 Port HBA Cards) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3-22. Example – External Switch With Two Zones (2 Port HBA Cards) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3-23. Two Tape Controllers (3592 C06 controller and 3590 A60) with Dual LAN Cabling Layout,
3592 C06 controller and Router are located in outbound 3952 F05 Frame . . . . . . . . 3-79
3-24. Single 3592 C06 controller with Single LAN Cabling Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
3-25. Attach Support Knobs To C06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
3-26. Attach Rails To System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
3-27. Release Safety Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
3-28. Secure System To Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
3-29. Install Cable Management Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 xiii
4-1. Control Unit Encryption Information Menu – 3494 or 3953 LM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-2. Set EKM 25x Router Configuration Menu – For Out-Of-Band EKM . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-3. Select Library Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-4. Change Library Attachment Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-5. Change Library Attachment Configuration Screen, when 'lan' is selected . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-6. Change Library Attachment Configuration Screen (for CU LAN Address) . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-8. Change Library Attachment Configuration Screen (Command Status) . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-9. Screen to Select Location of 3592 C06 and Dual Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-10. Select Where 3953 F05 Frame Located – Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-11. Select Controller Position In F05 Frame – Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-12. Change 3577 Tape Library Router Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-13. Change Library Attachment Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-14. Change Library Attachment Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-15. Select FCP Fibre Switch Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-16. Show / Change FICON WWNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-17. Show / Change TS3400 Library Sequence (Order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-18. Show / Change No Router TS3400 Library Sequence (Order) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-19. Show / Change TS3400 Library Sequence (Order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-20. Screen continues to scroll down (use arrow keys)...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-21. Set Encryption Key Manager 25x Router Configuration – For Non-LM Environments 4-24
4-22. Set Network Interface connection for Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-24. Minimum Configuration and Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4-25. List All Network Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4-26. Change / Show an IPV6 Standard Ethernet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4-27. Add an IPV6 Static Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4-28. Show / Change Direct Connection IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4-29. Change Library Attachment Configuration Screen, when 'None' is selected . . . . . . . 4-29
4-30. Change Library Attachment Configuration Screen (for CU LAN Address) . . . . . . . . 4-29
4-32. Change Library Attachment Configuration Screen (Command Status) . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4-33. Select FCP Fibre Switch Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4-34. Show / Change FICON WWNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4-35. Non Router configuration without library (FC 5248) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4-37. Minimum Configuration & Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4-39. List All Network Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-40. Change / Show an IPV6 Standard Ethernet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-41. IPV6 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4-42. Add an IPV6 Static Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4-43. Show / Change Direct Connection IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4-44. Service Menu (NetTerm PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4-45. 3592 C06 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4-46. Subsystem Maintenance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4-47. Controller Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4-48. NetTerm Remote Modem Screen – Password Requested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4-49. NetTerm Remote Modem Screen – Password Included . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4-50. NetTerm Remote Modem Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4-51. NetTerm Remote Modem Screen – Requested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4-52. NetTerm Remote Modem Screen – Granted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4-55. Authenticate User Login Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4-56. Select Language Menu - Older Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
xiv 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

4-57. Language Selection Menu - Newer Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4-58. Welcome to Base Operating System Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4-59. Microcode Installation Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4-60. Two Controllers (3592 C06 controller and 3590 A60) with Dual LAN Cabling Layout 4-65
4-61. Single LAN TCP or IP Addressing With Optional Dual Library Manager . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4-62. Subsystem Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4-63. Diagnostic Operating Instructions Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4-64. Diagnostic Function Selection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
4-65. Resource Selection List Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4-66. Microcode Maintenance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4-67. List Code Images Available for Activation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4-68. Command Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4-69. Microcode Maintenance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4-70. Active Code Image Screen 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4-71. Activate Code Image Screen for code level selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4-72. Single 3592 C06 controller With Single LAN Cabling Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4-73. 3592 C06 controller and 3590 A60 Tape Controllers With Dual LAN Cabling Layout 4-81
4-74. LAN Configuration on Standalone Frame with TSSC System Console . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4-75. Example of Direct Connect / Point-to-Point Connections - One Drive . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
4-76. Example of Direct Connect / Point-to-Point Connections - Two Drives . . . . . . . . . 4-85
4-77. Example of Direct Connect / Point-to-Point Connections - Three Drives . . . . . . . . . 4-86
4-78. Example of Direct Connect / Point-to-Point Connections - Four Drives . . . . . . . . . 4-86
4-79. Show / Change TSSC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
4-80. Set/Test Router Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
4-81. Set Router Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
4-82. Screen to Set 251 Router in Expansion Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
4-83. FICON Diagnostic Without Errors - Screen One . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
4-84. FICON Diagnostic Without Errors - Screen Two . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
4-85. FICON Error Screen One . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
4-86. FICON Error Screen Two . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
4-87. AIX Error Log With the Above Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
4-88. FICON Error Screen One . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
4-89. FICON Error Screen Two . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
4-90. AIX Error Log With the Above Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
4-91. Slot Location Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
4-92. Subsystem Maintenance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
4-93. Use DAYLIGHT SAVINGS Time? Pop-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
4-94. CUT (Coordinated Universal Time) Time Zone Pop-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
4-95. Change Time Zone Screen (DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME) Screen. . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
4-96. Command Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
4-97. Change Time Zone (No DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME) Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
4-98. Change/Show Day and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
4-99. Change/Show Day and Time Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
4-100. Set/Test Encryption Key Manager Router Configuration Pop-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . 4-113
4-101. Set 251 Encryption Router Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
4-102. Connecting to 251 Encryption Router and 250 Encryption Router. . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
4-103. Control Unit Encryption Information Menu – 3494 or 3953 Library Manager . . . . . . . 4-116
4-104. Show / Change Encryption Configuration – For Out-Of-Band Encryption Key Manager 4-117
4-105. Set / Test Encryption Router Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
4-106. Set 250 Encryption Router Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
4-107. 3953 Base and Expansion Frame Encryption Router Connections . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
4-108. Test Encryption Router Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
4-109. Testing 251 Encryption Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
4-111. Show / Change IPv4 or IPv6 Encryption Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
Figures xv
4-114. Connecting To Second 251 Encryption Router. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
4-117. Connecting to Second 250 Encryption Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
4-118. Connecting to Second 250 and 251 Encryption Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
4-121. Testing Second 251 Encryption Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
4-124. Connecting to Second 250 Encryption Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
4-126. Run Test to Encryption Key Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
4-127. Run IPv4 Test to Encryption Key Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
4-128. Run IPv6 Encryption Key ManagerPath Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
4-129. Copy Subsystem Code from Source Media — Starting Point . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
4-130. Copy Subsystem Code from Source Media — Select Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
4-131. Copy 3592 Subsystem Code from Source Media — Enter Code Level . . . . . . . . . 4-155
4-132. Copy Tape Drive Code from Source Media — Begin Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
4-133. Activate Code Image Choice Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
4-134. Activate Code Image Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
4-135. Activate Tape Drive Code Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
4-136. Activate Tape Drive Code Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
4-137. Activate Tape Drive Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
5-1. 3592 C06 controller Extended From Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-2. Removing Controller Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-3. Service Access Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-4. Service Processor Assembly with battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-5. Service Processor Assembly with battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-6. Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-7. VPD module on sysplanar board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-8. Disk Drive Backplane and Filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5-9. Disk Drive Bezel and Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-10. Filler Panel, Upside Down with Bezel Attached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-11. Removal/Replacement Menus Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5-12. Select hdisk Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5-13. Selecting Defective hdisk Pop-up Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5-14. Verification Screen to Continue Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5-15. Status Screen for Replacement of hdisk1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5-16. Disk Drives and Fillers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5-17. Verification Screen to continue procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5-18. Fan Tray Assembly – Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5-19. Fan Tray Assembly – Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5-20. Fans, Fan Tray Assembly, and Fan Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5-21. Fans, Fan Tray Assembly and Fan cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5-22. Memory DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5-23. Locking Tabs Open and Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5-24. PCI Adapter Card and Retainer Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5-25. PCI Adapter Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5-26. Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
5-27. Fibre Channel Switch (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5-28. Fibre Channel Switch (rear view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5-29. Service Processor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5-30. Slim-Line Media Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5-31. 3592 C06 controller Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
xvi 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

5-32. Voltage Regulator Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5-33. Voltage Regulator Module Connector Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
5-34. Locking Tabs in Locked and Unlocked Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
6-1. Main 3592 Subsystem Maintenance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-2. SIM Maintenance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-3. SIM Summary Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
7-1. IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Controller 3592 Maintenance Information Model C06 AC
Grounding Diagram (50 Hz and 60 Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
8-1. 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-2. Invalid Password - IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8-3. 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8-4. Ethernet LEDs – 4 Gb Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8-5. System LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-6. Power Supply/Fan LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-7. Port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8-8. Show / Change 3577 Tape Library Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-9. COMMAND STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Figures xvii
xviii 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information
Tables
1-1. 3592 C06 Subsystem Installation Start Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2. 3592 C06 controller Start Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-3. 3592 Suspected Tape Drive b Failures Start Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-4. 3592 Miscellaneous Start Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
2-1. 3953 F05 Frame Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-2. Feature codes for 3952 F05 Frame and associated features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-3. Feature codes for Model C06 control units and associated features . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-4. Feature codes for 3592 C06 controllers and associated features . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-5. Plug Chart - Device Adapter Cards (FCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-6. Allowable FICON/ESCON Adapter Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-7. Drive to Fibre Switch Address Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
3-1. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table with 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch . . . . . . 3-10
3-2. Fibre Channel Cable Connection, With 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches To 3592 tape
drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3-3. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table with the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch 3-21
3-4. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table – 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch to Tape Drives 3-21
3-5. 250 LAN IP Settings in 3953 F05 Tape Frames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3-6. 251 LAN IP Settings in 3953 F05 Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3-8. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table With 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch to 3592 Tape
Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3-9. 3494 D24 and D22 Frame Drive AL_PA Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-10. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table with 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches 3-42
3-11. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table with dual 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches 3-43
3-12. Dual Port Cards with Dual 2 Gb Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-13. Dual Port Cards with Single 2Gb Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-14. Dual Port Cards with Dual 4 Gb Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-15. Dual Port Cards with Single 4Gb Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-16. D22 and D22 Frame Drive AL_PA Addresses - Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3-17. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table With One or Two 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3-18. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table With 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch To 3592
Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3-19. C20 Frame Drive AL_PA Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
3-21. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table with 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch to 3592 Tape
Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3-22. Drive AL_PA Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3-23. 3577 L5U Tape Library ID's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
3-24. Information sheet for 3592 C06 controller with FC 5247 (Router) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
3-25. Information sheet for 3592 C06 controller with FC 5248 (no Router) . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
3-26. Information sheet for 3592 C06 controller with FC 5248 (no Router) . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
3-27. Information sheet for Encryption Router setup (FC 5247 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
3-28. Configure Controller For LAN Operations In Dual LAN Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3-29. Configure 3592 C06 controller For LAN Operations In Single LAN Mode . . . . . . . . 3-81
3-30. Configure 3592 C06 controller For LAN Operations In Single LAN Mode . . . . . . . . 3-84
4-1. D24 and D22 Frame Sense ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4-2. Reset SMC (TSSC) Router to Factory Defaults – LAN or WAN Configuration. . . . . . . 4-89
4-3. 3592 C06 controller PCI Adapter Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
4-4. Procedure to Reset SMC Router to Factory Defaults – 251 Encryption Router Configuration 4-112
4-5. Procedure to Reset SMC Router to Factory Defaults – 250 Encryption Router Configuration 4-118
4-6. 251 and 250 Encryption Router Port Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
4-7. Required IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 xix
4-8. Required IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
4-9. Procedure to Reset SMC Router to Factory Defaults – Second 251 Encryption Router 4-131
4-10. 250 and 251 Encryption Router Port Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
5-1. Location Codes – Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5-2. Location Codes – Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
6-1. ESCON/FICON I/O Subsystem Service Information Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-2. ESCON or FICON Device Service Information Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-3. C06 Controller SIM Sense Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-4. ESCON / FICON Media Information Message Console Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6-5. C06 Controller MIM Sense Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6-6. 3592 C06 controller SIM Source Decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-7. Error code listing and identification (Call Home LM, Reference only) . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-8. 2 Gb 20-port Fibre Channel Switch Reported Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-9. 4 Gb 20-port Fibre Channel Switch Reported Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-10. External Switch (Director) Reported Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6-11. ESCON / FICON Service Information Message (SIM) format description . . . . . . . . 6-18
6-12. ESCON /FICON Media Information Message (MIM) Format Description . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6-13. ESCON/FICON JES2 Job Log Format Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6-14. RS/6000 SIM Sense Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6-15. RS/6000 MIM Sense Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
8-1. Controller Condition Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-2. 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8-3. Additional Fibre Channel Switch LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8-4. 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Ethernet LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8-5. 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch System LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-6. 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Power Supply/Fan LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-7. 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
xx 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Safety Notices
A danger notice indicates the presence of a hazard that has the potential of causing death or serious
personal injury. Danger notices appear in the following section:
v “Electrical Safety” on page xxii
A caution notice indicates the presence of a hazard that has the potential of causing moderate or minor
personal injury. Caution notices appear in the following sections:
v “Electrical Safety” on page xxii
v “Laser Safety Information” on page xxv
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 xxi

Rack Safety
v Do not install this unit in a rack where the internal, rack ambient temperatures will exceed 35°C (95°F).
v Do not install this unit in a rack where the air flow is compromised. Any surface of the unit used for air
flow through the unit must not be in direct contact with the rack.
v Care should be taken to ensure that a hazardous condition is not created due to uneven mechanical
loading when installing this unit in a rack. If the rack has a stabilizer it must be firmly attached before
installing or removing this unit.
v Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit so that
overloading of circuits does not compromise the supply wiring or overcurrent protection. To provide the
correct power connection to the rack, refer to the rating labels located on the equipment in the rack to
determine the total power requirement for the supply circuit.
v An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous voltage on the metal parts of the
system or the devices that attach to the system. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that
the outlet is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical shock.
Electrical Safety
Observe the following safety instructions any time you are connecting or disconnecting devices attached to
the workstation.
In the system you are about to setup or service:

v The AC power interface connector is considered the main power disconnect device.
v This system has redundant power supply capabilities, meaning that it has the ability to have two power
supplies running simultaneously in the same system unit. When instructed to disconnect the power
source, ensure that all power cables have been unplugged.
DANGER
To prevent a possible electrical shock from touching two surfaces with different protective
ground (earth), use one hand, when possible, to connect or disconnect signal cables.
D01
DANGER
An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous voltage on metal parts of
the 3592 C06 controller or the devices that attach to the 3592 C06 controller. It is the
responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and grounded to
prevent an electrical shock.
Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power cables for the 3592 C06
controller unit and all attached devices are unplugged.
When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the 3592 C06 controller, ensure that
the power cables for those devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If
possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing 3592 C06 controller before you add a
device.
Use one hand, when possible, to connect or disconnect signal cables to prevent a possible
shock from touching two surfaces with different electrical potentials.
During an electrical storm, do not connect cables for display stations, printers, telephones, or
station protectors for communications lines. D05
xxii 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

CAUTION:
This product is equipped with a three-wire (two conductors and ground) power cable and plug. Use
this power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock.
C18
CAUTION:
A lithium battery can cause fire, explosion, or severe burn. Do not recharge, disassemble, heat
above 100°C (212°F), solder directly to the cell, incinerate, or expose cell contents to water. Keep
away from children. Replace only with the part number specified for your 3592 C06 Controller. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.
The battery connector is polarized; do not attempt to reverse polarity.
Dispose of the battery according to local regulations.
DANGER
Do not attempt to open the covers of the power supply. Power supplies are not serviceable and
are to be replaced as a unit.
Safety Notices xxiii

xxiv 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information
Laser Safety Information
CAUTION:
This product may contain a CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, or laser module, which are Class I laser products.
Please note the following:
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could result in exposure to
hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts inside the device.
v Use of the controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified
herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
C26
Laser Compliance
All lasers are certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class
I laser products. Outside the U.S., they are certified to be in compliance with the IEC 60825 (Second
Edition 2000) as a Class I laser product. Consult the label on each part for laser certification numbers and
approval information.
CAUTION:
Data processing environments can contain equipment transmitting on system links with laser
modules that operate at greater than Class I power levels. For this reason, never look into the end
of an optical fiber cable or open receptacle.
C27
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 xxv

xxvi 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information
Introduction
IBM service personnel use this manual to service, maintain, remove, diagnose, repair, and test the IBM
System Storage TS1120 (3592 C06) Tape Controller.
Related Information
Additional information related to the controller is available in the following publications:
| v IBM System Storage 3592 Tape Drives and TS1120 Controller Introduction and Planning Guide: 3592
| Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6, and E07
v IBM 3494 Tape Library Dataserver Maintenance Information
| v IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance
| Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07
v Enterprise Systems Connection Adapter: User's Guide and Service Information
v IBM Care and Handling of the IBM Magnetic Tape Cartridge
v IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library Controllers Maintenance Information
v IBM System Storage TS3000 (TSSC) Maintenance Information System Console for Service
v IBM System Storage Encryption Key Manager Introduction, Planning, and User's Guide
| v IBM System Storage 3592 Tape Drives and TS1120 Controller Operator Guide 3592 Models J1A, E05,
| E06, and EU6
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 xxvii

xxviii 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information
Chapter 1. Start
The Start chapter is the beginning point for all maintenance actions.
For general product knowledge, see Chapter 2, “Product Overview,” on page 2-1.
Find your symptom in the left column and follow the actions in the right column.
Installation Starting Point

Before beginning the installation, read section “3592 C06 controller Configurations” on page 3-1.
Table 1-1. 3592 C06 Subsystem Installation Start Table
If you are here for this
reason... Perform this action...
Install 3953 F05 Base Go to “3953 F05 Base Frame with a 3592 C06 controller” on page 3-3.
Frame with a 3592 C06
controller
Install 3953 F05 Expansion Go to “3953 F05 Expansion Frame with 3592 C06 controller” on page 3-16.
Frame with 3592 C06
controllers
Install 3952 F05 Frame with Go to “3952 F05 Frame (Outbound) with a 3592 C06 controller cabled to D24 and D22
a 3592 C06 controller that Frames” on page 3-29.
will electronically connect to
a 3494 D24 Frame with
3592 Tape Drives
Install 3952 F05 Frame with Go to “3952 F05 Frame (Outbound) with a 3592 C06 controller cabled to 3494 D22
a 3592 C06 controller that Frames” on page 3-41.
a 3494 D22 Frame with
3592 Tape Drives
Install 3952 F05 Frame with Go to “Check out a 3592 C06 controller attached to a C20 Tape Library” on page 3-55.
a 3592 C06 controller that
a C20 Tape Library with
3592 Tape Drives
Install 3592 C06 controller in Go to “Check out a 3592 C06 controller in a Rack” on page 3-63.
a rack with 3592 Tape
Drives
Install 3592 C06 controller in Go to “3592 C06 controller attached to a 3577 L5U Tape Library” on page 3-70
a rack with a 3577 L5U Tape
Library
Upgrade the configuration, Refer to the appropriate Installation Instructions. Use the Maintenance Information
add features, or install new manual instructions only to install existing code due to a part malfunction or
code replacement. Also use this Maintenance Information manual when Installation
Instructions are not available.
Add additional tape drives to 1. Go to “Adding tape drives to 3592 C06 controller - Concurrently” on page 4-1.
the 3592 C06 controller
2. Go to “End-of-call” on page 4-55 after checkout is complete.
concurrent with customer
operation
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 1-1

Table 1-1. 3592 C06 Subsystem Installation Start Table (continued)
Enable 3592 Tape Drive v Refer to the IBM® System Storage Encryption Key Manager Introduction, Planning,
encryption for and User's Guide.
system-managed Encryption
| on 3592 C06 controller
v Refer to the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th
| Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6
| and E07 to read about enabling encryption on the drive.
Field Merge Go to “Field Merge 3592 C06 controller” on page 3-86.
3592 C06 Controller Start

Table 1-2. 3592 C06 controller Start Table
You are installing a controller Go to Chapter 3, “Installation,” on page 3-1.
in a 3953 or 3952 F05
Frame.
The control panel display is This is usually normal operation. When this display is shown and the green LED on
similar to: the control panel blinks, the 3592 C06 controller is in standby mode. Go to “Control
01.....N.. V=F... Panel Display – Description” on page 8-2 for a detailed description of each indicator
and its meaning.
............T...
“0507” displayed on the This is a normal operating condition. This is the condition code indicating that a “soft
controller LCD Op panel shutdown” has been initiated and the 3592 C06 controller is now offline. Regardless of
whether this 3592 C06 controller will be completely powered off, or the system will be
powered back on with no intervening power off in this frame, perform the following
steps to bring the 3592 C06 controller to standby mode:
1. Press and hold the power ON/OFF button on the Operator Panel (see
14Figure 2-7 on page 2-16), for approximately 5 seconds. You will see the
number in the upper right corner of the op panel display decrement by 1 from 4 to
0 to no number. Release the power on/off button.
2. If the power off process stops prior to reaching standby mode, repeat the
procedure of step 1.
3. The display returns to normal, and the green LED on the op panel blinks,
indicating the 3592 C06 controller is now in standby mode.
If the 3592 C06 controller is to be powered on now (from standby mode), press the
power on/off button again to initiate a power on sequence in the controller.
Upgrade the configuration, Refer to the appropriate Installation Instructions. Use the Maintenance Information
add features, or install new only to install existing code due to a part malfunction or replacement.
code
Your controller malfunctioned 1. Go to “Installing AIX and 3592 C06 controller microcode on the 3592 C06
and you repaired it. controller” on page 4-58.
However, you determined
that the AIX operating
system is corrupt and you
decided to install the existing
microcode level in order to
make the controller
functional again.
1-2 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Table 1-2. 3592 C06 controller Start Table (continued)
You enabled 3592 E05 Tape You must re-configure the 3592 C06 controller whether it is in a library environment
Drives to system-managed (3494 or 3584) or in a standalone frame 3952 F05 Frame or rack. To reflect the new
encryption. You must now state of encryption, follow these steps:
re-configure the controller. 1. Ensure that the 3592 C06 controller has the required level of microcode with the
Note: The fact that the encryption proxy loaded (1.21.x.xx) and activated. If not, you should have received
customer has ordered FC FC 5595/9595. Proceed to that FC before continuing.
5595/9595 indicates that the 2. Ensure that the system administrator stops all operations through the 3592 C06
customer has planned for controller, and varies off the 3592 C06 controller and the attached drives.
the controller to support 3. Connect the Service Terminal. See “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page
encryption-enabled drives. 4-102.
| Note: All 3592-E06 / EU6 4. At the Main Service Menu, select Subsystem Maintenance –> Control Unit
| and 3592-E07 Tape Drives Service Utilities –> SCSI/FCP Utilities Menu –> Run SCSI/FCP Configurator.
| must always be enabled for 5. When the current drive path and drive type configuration has completed
| System Managed encryption successfully, vary the controller online. Beginning at the Main service Menu, select
| to be recognized. Subsystem Maintenance –> Control Unit and Tape Drive Online Offline
Control –> Vary Control Unit Online.
6. Inform the system administrator of how many drives are encryption-enabled for this
3592 C06 controller.
7. Return this re-configured 3592 C06 controller subsystem to the customer for the
resumption of customer operations.
FICON card status indicates 1. You have the Service Terminal connected to the 3592 C06 controller. See
that at least one card has “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102 to read about connecting the
come up DEAD after new Service Terminal.
microcode was loaded to the
2. If a FICON card is in the DEAD state, you first must vary the controller offline. You
cards. Cards came online
can force the controller offline by selecting Subsystem Maintenance > Control
after 3592 C06 controller
Unit and Tape Drive Online Offline Control > Force Control Unit Offline.
microcode was activated.
Note: If the card is still online, do not take the controller offline.
After the controller goes
online or offline again, cards 3. Select Subsystem Maintenance > Removal/Replacement Menus >
will come up DEAD. Remove/Replace Defective Host Adapter Card (Concurrent).
4. Select yes.
5. Select the slot with the first FICON card, and press Enter.
6. Do not replace the card when you are prompted to replace the card, but press
Enter.
7. Repeat Steps 3, 4, 5, and 6 for each FICON card.
8. Vary the controller back online, if necessary. Select Subsystem Maintenance >
Control Unit and Tape Drive Online Offline Control > Vary Control Unit
Online.
After you activated "Run v The fact that hdisk1 is the boot disk should be of no concern unless the "Run
Control Unit Checkout" Control Unit Checkout" also indicates that mirroring is broken between hdisk0 and
menu option, you received a hdisk1. If this occurs, replace hdisk0. See “Disk Drives Hot Swap” on page 5-15 to
warning message that replace the failing hdisk.
hdisk1 is the boot disk. The – – OR – –
checkout procedure v If "Run Control Unit Checkout" indicates that mirroring between hdisk0 and hdisk1 is
expected hdisk0 to be the OK, no further action is required. Hdisk1 may have become the boot disk when
boot disk at all times. hdisk0 was replaced previously.
You can reassign boot disk status from hdisk1 to hdisk 0. Perform “Disk Drives Hot
Swap” on page 5-15 located in the Removal/Replacement chapter to replace
hdisk1, but leave hdisk1 in place. You will only simulate hdisk1 replacement. If you
reassigned boot disk status, reboot the controller.
Chapter 1. Start 1-3

You have the SIM message Decode the SIM error codes (Refcodes) 1-3 (see “Decoding SIM Refcodes” on page
that was sent to the host 6-11).
console (see “I/O Subsystem v If a 3592 C06 controller SRN is decoded: Record the SRN (Refcode 2, lower nibble
Service Information and Refcode 3) and go to the RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus
Message” on page 6-3). Systems, SA38-0509, or go to “Accessing Information Center through Internet” on
page 4-160 or “Accessing Information Center Through Service Terminal” on page
4-161.
v If an Unknown CU hardware error is decoded:
1. Record the AIX error log sequence number (Refcodes 2 and 3).
2. Go to “Preparing 3592 C06 controller for Service” on page 4-88
Return here when complete.
3. If this procedure fails to isolate the problem, use the AIX error log entry to
diagnose and fix this problem. See “Analyze the AIX Log” on page 4-2.
v If a drive SIM is decoded, determine the FID code (Refcode 1, lower nibble) and go
| to the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition
| - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07 to
find the problem.
v If a control unit MDE (Microcode Detected Error) is decoded, determine the MDE
code (Refcode 2), and go to “Retrieving Engineering and Dump Data” on page 4-88
to get dump information, then call your next level of support.
v If a Fibre Channel Switch problem is decoded, go to “4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch” on page 8-10 for a 4 Gb switch problem or go to “2Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switch” on page 8-5 for a 2 Gb switch problem.
v When the problem has been resolved, go to the "Subsystem Maintenance
Screen," and select Run Control Unit Checkout. This should verify that the control
unit is functional and that the drives can communicate with the switches.
v Go to “End-of-call” on page 4-55 after checkout is complete.
You have the MIM message Determine the Refcode from the MIM message. Use the first 2 digits as the ASCII
that was sent to the host Message code to determine a description for the MIM Message. See Chapter 6,
console (see “Media “Service and Media Information Messages (SIMs and MIMs),” on page 6-1 for further
Information Message” on information.
page 6-8)

You have the SIM sense Decode the SIM ref codes 1-3 (see “Decoding SIM Refcodes” on page 6-11)
record from a host EREP v If a 3592 C06 controller SRN is decoded: Record the SRN (Refcode 2, lower nibble
report (see “SIM EREP and Refcode 3) and refer to RS/6000 pSeries Diagnostic Information for Multiple
Report (Format 71)” on page Bus Systems, SA38-0509 Start of Call MAP.
6-17)
v If an unknown CU hardware error is decoded:
1. Go to “Preparing 3592 C06 controller for Service” on page 4-88.
3. For 3592 C06 controller, refer to RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple
Bus Systems Start of Call MAP, and perform the procedure to verify correct
system operation.
4. If this procedure fails to isolate the problem, use the AIX error log entry to
v If a drive SIM is decoded, determine the FID code (Refcode 1 lower nibble), and go
| to the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition
| - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07
START section to find the problem.
v If a control unit MDE (Microcode Detected Error) is decoded, determine the MDE
code (Refcode 2). Go to “Retrieving Engineering and Dump Data” on page 4-88 to
get dump information, and call your next level of support.
v If a Fibre Channel Switch problem is decoded, go to “4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch” on page 8-10 for a 4Gb switch or go to “2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch”
on page 8-5 for a 2Gb switch problem.
You have the MIM message Determine the Refcode from the MIM message and use the first 2 digits as the ASCII
that was sent to the host Message code to determine a description for the MIM Message. See Chapter 6,
EREP report (see “ES/9000 “Service and Media Information Messages (SIMs and MIMs),” on page 6-1 for further
EREP Reports” on page information.
6-17)

SRN199–123 surfaced on a SRN 199–123 Represents “A noncritical power supply failure” of the 3592 C06
3592 C06 controller in a D24 controller.
frame with a single PDU or 1. In a single PDU frame it means that one of the two 3592 C06 controller power
in a D24 with Dual PDU supplies has lost power. This is caused by one of the following FRU/components in
power feature order of descending probability:
a. Failing 3592 C06 controller power supply
b. Faulty power cord to 3592 C06 controller
– – OR – –
c. Faulty power outlet on PDU
2. Isolate the failure by plugging the power cord into another hot outlet on the PDU. If
this has no effect on the 3592 C06 controller power supply, replace the power
cord.
3. If power is still not restored at the power supply, replace the failing power supply.
1. In a Dual PDU D24 frame, it also means that one of the two 3592 C06 controller
power supplies has lost power. In this case, loss of power is due to the following
FRU/components, in order of descending probability:
a. Failing redundant PDU in frame
b. Faulty 3592 C06 controller power supply
c. Faulty power cord to the 3592 C06 controller
– – OR – –
d. Faulty power outlet on the PDU
2. Isolate the failure by checking the redundant PDU which provides power to the
failing 3592 C06 controller power supply. If this PDU is shut off or failing, go no
further. This PDU must be replaced.
3. If the PDU appears to be in good operating order, continue by plugging the power
cord into another hot power outlet on the PDU. If this has no effect on the 3592
C06 controller power supply, replace the power cord.
4. If power is still not restored at the power supply, replace the failing 3592 C06
controller power supply.
5. When the problem has been resolved, go to the Subsystem Maintenance Screen,
and select Run Control Unit Checkout. This should verify that the controller is
functional and that the drives can communicate with the switches.

Operator tells you an Connect the Service Terminal (see “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102),
Intervention Required and view the 3592 SIM log (see “Menu Tree” on page 4-67).
message was sent to the
console. View the detailed data for the appropriate SIM entry, and record Refcodes 1-3.
Note: If you have an ERA
code 48, use this record for If multiple OPEN SIMs exist:
the actions required (see 1. Select the SIM entry with the occurrence that most closely corresponds to the time
“ES/9000 EREP Reports for that the problem was first seen at the host.
ERA 48” on page 6-22) to 2. If this can not be determined, select the SIM entry with the earliest time
decode ERA 48. View the occurrence.
detailed data for the
appropriate SIM entry, and Decode the Refcodes (see “Decoding SIM Refcodes” on page 6-11).
record the Refcodes 1-3. 1. If a 3592 C06 controller SRN is decoded: Record the SRN (Refcode 2, lower
nibble and Refcode 3) and go to the RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple
Bus Systems, SA38-0509.
3. If an Unknown CU hardware error is decoded:
a. Record the AIX error log sequence number (Refcodes 2 and 3).
b. Go to “Preparing 3592 C06 controller for Service” on page 4-88, and return
here when complete.
c. For 3592 C06 controllers, refer to RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple
system operation.
d. If this procedure fails to isolate the problem, use the AIX error log entry to
diagnose and fix this problem (see “Analyze the AIX Log” on page 4-2).
4. If a drive SIM is decoded, determine the FID code (Refcode 1 lower nibble), and
| go to the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th
| Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6
| and E07 START section to continue with isolation. Also use “Tape Drive Start” on
page 1-14 to check for identification of correct drive model when E05 drives are in
static J1A emulation mode.
5. If a 3592 C06 controller MDE (Microcode Detected Error) is decoded, determine
the MDE code (Refcode 2), and go to “Retrieving Engineering and Dump Data” on
page 4-88 to get Dump information. Call your next level of support.
6. If a fibre channel switch problem is decoded, go to “4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch” on page 8-10 for a 4 Gb switch, or go to “2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch” on page 8-5 for a 2 Gb switch problem.
and select Run Control Unit Checkout. This should verify that the controller is
You have error data as a To identify the error data as either an SRN, SRC, or an Error Code and to determine
result of diagnostic problem how to isolate the associated failure, go to “Accessing Information Center through
determination, system Internet” on page 4-160 or “Accessing Information Center Through Service Terminal”
verification, or error log on page 4-161. Select Start of call procedure, and perform the procedure to identify
analysis, but you are unsure the error.
if the error data is a System
Reference Code or an
Error Code.

3592 C06 controller error The FSP (Flexible Service Processor) needs to be replaced. Go to “Removing Service
code indicates that the Processor” on page 5-43 and “Replacing Service Processor” on page 5-44.
service processor detected
corrupted firmware at
power-ON to standby mode.
A problem is reported on the 1. If possible, check for an AIX error log entry for this controller or for an attached
3592 C06 controller, but drive to diagnose and fix this problem. See “Analyze the AIX Log” on page 4-2.
there is No SIM information
2. If the first procedure fails to isolate the problem, check to see if there is any FID
available.
information on any attached tape drive panel.
3. If you do find a tape drive with FID information displayed, go to the “Start” section
| of the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition
| - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07.
4. If tape drive panels show no error information, go to the operator panel display on
the 3592 C06 controller to check for any error information in the LCD display.
5. If the error code (four digit code) has not been found in this maintenance manual
or in the Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems document, go to
“Controller Condition Codes” on page 8-4 to see what further action is required.
6. If the problem has not been fixed, contact your next level of support.
and select Run Control Unit Checkout. This should verify that the control unit is
functional, and that the drives can communicate with the switches.
Library puts tape in wrong This is either a host software problem or a data base problem and is not caused by
drive the 3592 C06 controller.
Power or power-up problems Go to “Accessing Information Center through Internet” on page 4-160 or “Accessing
Information Center Through Service Terminal” on page 4-161. Select Start of call
procedure and use the System Reference Code to perform the procedure to
determine what type of problem exists for the 3592 C06 controller.

A PCC failure has been 1. Ensure that both PCC's main circuit breakers are in the OFF position.
reported in a D24/D22 frame
2. On an upper PCC failure, replace lower PDU J18 sequence cable with the J18
with Dual PCC power
sequence cable removed from the upper (failing) PDU.
feature in a non-HA 3494
v Set CB1 in the lower PDU to the ON position.
library
v If frames following this frame fail to sequence power on, reset each frame's PCC
Notes:
CB1.
v The purpose of this action
v If power still does not sequence up in the remaining frames, return the J18
plan is to restore use of
sequence cable from the lower to upper PCC, and inform the system
the subsystem to the
administrator that the subsystem is not available until the upper PCC is replaced
customer, if possible, until
(approximately 8 hours of subsystem outage).
deferred maintenance can
v If power does sequence up in the remaining frames, inform the administrator
be scheduled to replace
that approximately 4 hours of subsystem downtime will have to be scheduled to
the failing component.
replace the upper (failing) PCC.
v Refer to Chapter 4 of the
IBM System Storage 3. On a lower PCC failure, replace upper PCC J17 sequence cable with the J17
Automated Tape Library sequence cable removed from the lower (failing) PCC.
(3494) Base 3494 Tape v Set CB1 on the upper PCC to the ON position.
Library Maintenance v If frames following this frame fail to sequence power on, reset each frame's PCC
Information for removal or CB1.
replacement instructions v If power still does not sequence up in the remaining frames, return the J17
for the PCC. sequence cable from the upper to the lower PCC,and inform the system
administrator that the subsystem is not available until the lower PCC is replaced.
v If power does sequence up in the remaining frames, inform the administrator
that approximately four hours of subsystem downtime will have to be scheduled
to replace the lower (failing) PCC.
functional, and that the drives can communicate with the switches.
A problem was reported to Connect the Service Terminal (See “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102)
the host, but you do not and view the 3592 SIM log (see “Menu Tree” on page 4-67).
have the SIM information
needed above View the detailed data for the appropriate SIM entry, and record the Refcodes 1-3.

You suspect a problem with Connect the Service Terminal (see “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102),
the 3592 C06 controller or a and view the 3592 SIM log (see “Menu Tree” on page 4-67).
drive connected through the
3592 C06 controller, but you View the detailed data for the appropriate SIM entry, and record the Refcodes 1-3.
do not have any error
information from the host If multiple OPEN SIMs exist;
1. Select the SIM entry with the occurrence that most closely corresponds to the time
that the problem was first seen at the host.
2. If this cannot be determined, select the SIM entry with the earliest time occurrence.
Decode the Refcodes (see “Decoding SIM Refcodes” on page 6-11).

1. If a 3592 C06 controller SRN is decoded: Record the SRN (Refcode 2, lower
nibble and Refcode 3) and go to the RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple
Bus Systems, SA38-0509.
2. If an Unknown CU hardware error is decoded:
a. Go to “Preparing 3592 C06 controller for Service” on page 4-88, and return
here when complete.
b. Record the AIX error log sequence number (Refcodes 2 and 3).
c. For 3592 C06 controllers, refer to RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple
system operation.
d. If this procedure fails to isolate the problem, use the AIX error log entry to
3. If a drive SIM is decoded, determine the FID code (refcode 1, lower nibble), and
| go to the Start section of the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140
| Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A,
| E05, E06, EU6 and E07.
Notes:
a. If a procedure requires a drive to be taken offline, go to “Varying On or Off
3592 Tape Drives from 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-162. Go to “End-of-call”
on page 4-55 after repair completion.
b. If problems occur varying a new drive online, go to “Varying On or Off 3592
Tape Drives from 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-162.
4. If a 3592 C06 controller MDE (Microcode Detected Error) is decoded, determine
the MDE code (Refcode 2). Go to “Retrieving Engineering and Dump Data” on
page 4-88 to get dump information, and call your next level of support.
5. If a fibre channel switch problem is decoded, go to “4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch” on page 8-10 for a 4Gb switch or go to “2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch” on page 8-5 for a 2Gb switch problem.
You decoded the SIM 1. Check for the associated AIX error log entry for this decoded SIM to diagnose and
Refcode, and the resultant fix this problem. See “Analyze the AIX Log” on page 4-2.
SRN is NOT listed in the
2. Check for faulty Fibre cables attached to an adapter, if an adapter is indicated in
information center
the AIX error record.

You decoded SIM Refcodes The error may be caused by a problem with:
which indicate that the 3592 v Customer net – For FC 5248 (no router), go directly to “Run Encryption Key
C06 controller is unable to Manager Path Test” on page 4-147.
communicate with the fibre
v Ethernet path from the controller, through the
channel switch
1. Check for the associated AIX error log entry (if available) for this decoded SIM, to
2. If it is a 2Gb fibre switch and the SMC Router is installed, check for errors on the
router.
3. Check for faulty ethernet cables (such as between the controller, the SMC Router,
and the 2Gb fibre channel switch).
4. Check for errors on the fibre channel switch.
You decoded SIM Refcodes 1. Check for the associated AIX error log entry for this decoded SIM to diagnose and
which indicate a path or fix this problem. See “Analyze the AIX Log” on page 4-2.
interface failure for 3592
2. For additional, detailed information and analysis of the failure, see Note 1 following
C06 controller attachment to
Table 6-10 on page 6-16.
3592 tape drives, via an
External Switch (director) 3. If the failed path or failed interface CANNOT be reenabled after repairs have been
completed, check with the (site) system administrator for evaluation of the following
settings on the external switch:
v “Switch Management Settings Policy” may have been implemented to disable
the switch port or path upon detection of errors on that port. Ask the system
administrator to re-enable the disabled path (port) via the switch server.
v Ask the system administrator to verify correct zoning at the switch for the
affected drive path or for the complete (primary or alternate) interface.

You decoded a SIM Refcode The error may be caused by a problem with:
which shows an MDE error v Customer net – For FC 5248 (no router), go directly to “Run Encryption Key
code of 1C00. This indicates Manager Path Test” on page 4-147.
a broken Ethernet path to
v Ethernet path from the controller, through the 251 or 250 Encryption Router (FC
the out-of-band Encryption
5595 or FC 5247).
Key Manager, by way of the
251 or 250 Encryption 1. Ping the 251 Encryption Router's LAN address of 192.168.251.5 or 192.168.251.6
Router, or via the direct for FC 5595, or ping the 251 Encryption Router's LAN address of 192.168.251.25
route (FC 5248). The error for FC 5247. If successful, it verifies good Ethernet cabling to the Router and a
appears to be solid, rather functioning LAN address.
than intermittent 2. Ping the WAN IP address (System Administrator provided) of the 251 Encryption
Router for FC 5595 and FC 5247. A successful ping indicates the router is good.
The error then must be traced on the Customer network.
If the WAN IP ping does not receive responses from the router, replace the 251 or
250 Encryption Router. To replace either of the Encryption Routers:
a. Ask the customer to stop operations to the controller which previously
configured the failing router.
b. Replace the failing router. Ensure that all Ethernet cable connections to the
WAN port and all LAN ports are reestablished on the new router.
c. Go to “Set 251 Encryption Router Configuration (For Library-Managed
Controllers)” on page 4-112 or to “Set 250 Encryption Router Configuration (For
Library-Managed Controllers)” on page 4-118, if this router handles out-of-band
key flow for controllers in the 3953 F05 Tape Frame, or for controllers one
through seven in a 3494 Tape Library, or for controllers in a standalone frame
environment.
3. When configuration of the Encryption Router is successful, go to “Run Encryption
Key Manager Path Test” on page 4-147.
4. Notify the customer that they may resume operations on the controller.
Control Paths in several or Regardless whether 3953 L05 Library Manager operations were paused or not, the
all drives attached to a 3592 3592 C06 controller must be re-configured to reflect currently enabled control paths in
C06 controller have been its drives. Perform the following steps:
disabled in the 3584 library 1. Ensure that the system administrator stops all operations through the 3592 C06
(intentionally or controller and varies off the 3592 C06 controller and attached drives.
inadvertently). This may
2. Connect the Service Terminal. See “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page
have caused the 3953 L05
4-102.
Library Manager to go into
Pause mode, if no other 3. Starting at the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select: Control Unit Service
(spare) control paths were Utilities > SCSI/FCP Utilities Menu > Run SCSI/FCP Configurator
available through other tape 4. When the current drive path and control path configuration has completed
controllers. successfully, bring the controller back online by selecting from the Subsystem
Note: If four or less than Maintenance menu: Control Unit and Tape Drive Online Offline Control > Vary
four 3592 Tape Drives in the Control Unit Online:
3584 Tape Library are 5. Inform the system administrator of how many (or any) control paths are enabled for
attached to a 3592 C06 this 3592 C06 controller.
controller, the control path
for each tape drive must be 6. Return this (re-configured) 3592 C06 controller subsystem to the customer for
enabled to allow the tape resumption of customer operations.
drives to be configured.

A permanent hardware error Follow these steps if the previous error event was a redundant AC Power Supply
has been posted in the AIX failure. The redundant AC Power Supply failure serves as an example for what may
error log indicating the 3592 have caused deconfiguration of a memory bank by the system.
C06 controller CEC (system)
has deconfigured a system This error is called a predictive failure which occurred immediately after the redundant
resource due to a previous AC Power Supply failure. To prevent a system interruption, the 3592 C06 controller
error event. firmware is enabled to deconfigure half of memory as a predictive failure even though
there were no actual memory failures.
In this case, the power supply repair and memory reconfiguration, in tandem, must be
scheduled for non-concurrent replacement.
Perform these steps;

1. Be sure the Service Terminal is connected. See “Connecting the Service
Terminal” on page 4-102.
2. Power on the 3592 C06 controller after replacing the failing power supply. Power
on the Controller from standby mode by pressing the power ON button or via
ASMI. See “Power On 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-87 or “Power ON 3592
C06 controller by using ASMI” on page 4-87.
3. Wait for the "Welcome to AIX" heading on the Service Terminal screen. The
system will display "number of processors: 2" and "size of memory: 896 MB". This
is confirmation that half of memory is deconfigured. Normally the size of memory
will be 1904 MB.
4. Allow the system to fully boot up. Then power it down via Control Unit
Shutdown and Restart menu > Shutdown AIX and Control Unit Code (use
prior to power off).
5. Disconnect all power line cords from the 3592 C06 controller.
6. Prepare to swap the two outermost memory DIMMs with the two innermost
memory DIMMs. Swap the memory DIMMs in DIMM slots 1 and 3 (location code
P1-C9 and P1-C11), and swap the memory DIMMs in DIMM slots 6 and 8
(location codes P1-C14 and P1-C16). Refer to “Memory DIMM Removal” on page
5-31 and “Memory DIMM Replacement” on page 5-32.
7. Reconnect the power cords to the 3592 C06 controller and allow the system to
reach standby mode.
8. Power on the 3592 C06 controller by pressing the power ON button or via ASMI.
See “Power On 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-87 or “Power ON 3592 C06
controller by using ASMI” on page 4-87.
9. Wait for the "Welcome to AIX" heading on the Service Terminal screen. The
system should now display "number of processors: 2" and "size of memory: 1904
MB". This will be proof the deconfigured memory bank has been re-configured,
and usable memory is restored to the normal 1904 MB.
10. Allow the system to fully boot up and go online.
End of procedure.

Tape Drive Start
Table 1-3. 3592 Suspected Tape Drive b Failures Start Table
reason... Perform this action
You are asked to locate a 1. Connect the Service Terminal. See “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page
3592 Tape Drive in a 3584 4-102 to the appropriate 3592 C06 controller.
Tape Library. The drive's
Perform the following if the drive's rmtxpriA designation is known;
rmtxpriA designation or the
drive's serial number is v From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Control Unit Service Utilities
known. The 3592 C06 > SCSI/FCP Utilities Menu > Display all 3584 Tape Drive Locations.
controller in the 3953 F05 Perform the following if the drive's serial number is known;
Tape Frame is also known. v Make the following selections sequentially, starting at the Subsystem
Note: The entry point for Maintenance menu, select Control Unit Service Utilities > SCSI/FCP Utilities
any 3584 activity should be Menu > Display SCSI/FCP Configuration
the 3584 MI.
v The screen output will display each 3592 Tape Drive's rmtx designation and
serial number. Match up the drive's serial number to the drive's rmtx
designation.
v Determine the location by returning to SCSI/FCP Utilities Menu.
v Select Display all 3584 Tape Drive Locations.
Jobs are failing when For ESCON or FICON, all drives must be either Extended High Performance
selected drives are allocated Cartridge or non-Extended High Performance Cartridge. ESCON or FICON cannot
to do a read or write handle mixed pools. As an example, if you have Extended High Performance Cartridge
on a 3494 Tape Library, all drives must be Extended High Performance Cartridge
capable.
You are asked to add 1. Go to “Adding tape drives to 3592 C06 controller - Concurrently” on page 4-1.
additional tape drives to the
3592 C06 controller
concurrent with customer
operation.
One or more tape drives in 1. If a Control Unit SIM is decoded (see “Decoding SIM Refcodes” on page 6-11)
the 3584 Tape Library went pointing to a Fibre Switch/Path failure, follow these instructions to fix the problem.
offline from a 3592 C06
2. If the first procedure fails to isolate the problem, check for an AIX® error log entry
controller. The host console
for this drive (or drives) to diagnose and fix the problem. See “Analyze the AIX
received a “tape alert”
Log” on page 4-2.
message.
3. If the AIX error logs show “TAPE–ERR4” errors with explanatory description “No
response from drive on SCSI/FC Bus”, check with the system administrator if drive
code had been loaded by the 3584 Tape Library while customer jobs were
executing.
4. Drive microcode load by the 3584 Tape Library while the drives are online to the
3592 C06 controller is not supported. If this occurred on the drive or the problem,
due to another cause, has been fixed, attempt to vary the drives online by going to
“Varying On or Off 3592 Tape Drives from 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-162.
5. When the problem has been resolved, from the Subsystem Maintenance screen,
select Run Control Unit Checkout. This will verify that the Control Unit is
functional and all drives are online and can again communicate with the 3592 C06
controller.

Table 1-3. 3592 Suspected Tape Drive b Failures Start Table (continued)
Tape drive will not go online 1. If a drive SIM is decoded, determine the FID code (refcode 1, lower nibble). Go to
| to the 3592 C06 controller. the “Start” section of the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape
| Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05,
| E06, EU6 and E07.
2. If the first procedure fails to isolate the problem, check for an AIX error log entry
for this drive to diagnose and fix this problem. See “Analyze the AIX Log” on page
4-2.
3. Check for faulty Fibre cables attached to the tape drive, and replace any failing
cables.
Note: The controller needs to be offline to do this step. Go to “Run SCSI / Fibre
Channel Configuration” on page 4-100 to check for possible addressing conflicts.
Select Display SCSI/FCP Configuration from the SCSI/FCP Utilities Menu, then
select Run SCSI/FCP Configurator.
4. Ensure that the World Wide Name ID and Node ID is unique for each 3592 Tape
Drive. This can be checked via options Subsystem ConfigurationShow/Change
control Unit DefinitionsShow/Change Vital Product Data (VPD) for each 3592
Tape Drive. The WW Name and Node IDs also can be checked by using “Display
| WW Names Procedure” in the Procedures chapter of the IBM System Storage
| TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance
| Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07.
5. After fixing any problem at the 3592 Tape Drive, attempt to vary the drive online by
going to “Varying On or Off 3592 Tape Drives from 3592 C06 controller” on page
4-162.
6. When the problem has been resolved, from the Subsystem Maintenance Screen,
select Run Control Unit Checkout. This will verify that the controller is functional
and that the drives can communicate with the switches.
| Customer reports a problem Go to the “Start” section of the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140
| with media on a 3592 Tape Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A,
| Drive. E05, E06, EU6 and E07 to resolve the problem.
Access “oc_MIM.log” file to Enhanced authority access to the 3592 C06 controller is required to open
identify a list of suspect bad “oc_MIM.log” file in /var/adm/ras directory.
media used on tape drives
connected to the 3592 C06
controller
| Customer reports a problem Go to the “Start” section of the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140
| with WORM media on a Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A,
| 3592 Tape Drive E05, E06, EU6 and E07 to resolve the problem.

Table 1-3. 3592 Suspected Tape Drive b Failures Start Table (continued)
A 3592 Tape Drive error was 1. Locate the drive error record in the controller AIX error log, and analyze it
logged in the AIX error log immediately.
and a tape drive SIM was v Focus on the drive VPD data stored in the error record.
created. The drive VPD in v The VPD will indicate that the drive is a 3592 J1A.
the error record identified a v The VPD also displays the drive microcode level. Parse the drive microcode
3592 J1A, but you are level, which is recorded in four digits. The last three characters show the actual
seeking to determine if this drive microcode level, such as, X81A. Look at the first digit.
is really a 3592 E05 Tape – If X = 0, the drive is a 3592 J1A.
Drive in Static J1A – If X = 1, the drive is an 3592 E05 Tape Drive in static J1A emulation mode.
Emulation Mode.
2. The tape drive SIM will only indicate that a 3592 drive is failing, and it shows the
FID and two FSCs. The SIM also includes a “Unit Identifier” which carries the drive
microcode level in four digits similar to the VPD in the AIX error record. The last
three characters of the “Unit Identifier” indicate the actual code level of the drive,
but the first digit cannot be parsed reliably to indicate the drive model.
Analysis of the AIX error record is vital in identifying the drive model (prior to
physical examination of the failing drive).
3. Read the information in “3592 Tape Drive replacement” on page 5-20 before you
start to replace the 3592 Tape Drive. Return here.
If you are replacing an 3592 E05 Tape Drive in static J1A emulation mode, verify
that the new drive is an 3592 E05 Tape Drive and set the new drive to static J1A
emulation mode.
Entry Point With No SIM 1. Check first to see if there is any FID information on the 3592 Tape Drive service
| Information panel. If you find FID information, go the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130
| and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592
| Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07 START section to find the problem.
2. If the 3592 Tape Drive panel shows no error information, go to the back of the
frame that contains the control unit to view the LED display on the front of the
RS/6000 control unit. Use the value in this LED display to determine the problem
and its resolution.
3. If the display shows a steady number, go to RS/6000 pSeries Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems to determine what type of error the 3592 C06
controller is displaying.
4. When the problem has been resolved, from the Subsystem Maintenance Screen,
select Run Control Unit Checkout. This will verify that the controller is functional
and the drives can communicate with the switches.
Miscellaneous Start
Table 1-4. 3592 Miscellaneous Start Table
Problem with the 2Gb Go to “2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch” on page 8-5.
20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch.
2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Go to “2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch IP Setup (serial interface)” on page 8-7.
Switch, setup with the serial
interface.

Table 1-4. 3592 Miscellaneous Start Table (continued)
Problem with the 4Gb Go to “4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch” on page 8-10.
20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch.
You have no SIM/SRN/AIX Go to “Running FICON Diagnostics” on page 4-94.
log entry, but you suspect a
FICON problem (for
example, one of the FICON
paths is unavailable)
You have no SIM/SRN/AIX Go to “Running Online Diagnostics from 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-101.
log entry, but you suspect an
ESCON problem (for
example, one of the ESCON
paths is unavailable)
Problem with Dual LAN Go to “LAN Configuration Matrix (Quick Reference For Dual LAN In 3494 or 3953
configuration in the 3494 Environment)” on page 3-77.
Tape Library environment
Problem with Single LAN Go to “LAN Configuration Matrix (Quick Reference For Single LAN In 3494 / 3953
configuration in the 3494 Environment)” on page 3-81.
Tape Library environment
Cisco Router, set to factory Go to “Setting Cisco Router to factory defaults” on page 8-12.
defaults.
Tape Drive Replacement Go to “3592 Tape Drive replacement” on page 5-20.
Verify 3577 L5U Tape Go to “Verify 3577 L5U Tape Library configuration” on page 8-13.
Library configuration
Ping Hardware test for 3577 Go to “Ping Hardware Test for 3577 L5U Tape Library” on page 8-13.
L5U Tape Library
Checkout of ESCON or Go to “Checkout Of ESCON Or FICON Adapters Before Host Attach – 3577 L5U Tape
FICON Adapters before Host Library” on page 8-14.
attach – 3577 L5U Tape
Library

Chapter 2. Product Overview
This section contains general information about the 3592 C06 controller, also known as TS1120 (C06)
Controller.
General Description
The 3592 C06 controller;
v Acts as a tape subsystem host attachment for 3592 Tape Drives
v Supports the intermix of FICON and ESCON attachments, which allows sharing drives between each
environment. The FICON maximum channel link speed of 100 Mb/second full duplex may increase the
performance beyond that of the 17 Mb/second simplex of ESCON
v Can be attached directly to host systems up to 10 kilometers away, or up to 100 kilometers with a Fibre
Channel Switch with appropriate repeaters
Fibre Channel adapters provide support for 3592 Tape Drives. Two FCP (Fibre Channel Dual Port)
adapters are available on the 3592 C06 controller.
pSeries 9131 - 52A Information

The following publications are associated with the 3592 C06 controller:
v pSeries Adapters, Devices, and Cable Information for Multiple Bus Systems, SA38-0516, contains
information about adapters, devices, and cables for your system. This manual is intended to supplement
the service information found in the RS/6000 eServer pSeries Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus
Systems.
v pSeries Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems, SA38-0509 contains diagnostic information,
service request numbers (SRNs), and failing function codes (FFCs).
v System Unit Safety Information, SA23–2652 This supplement provides updates to the System Unit
Safety Information.
v Supplement to System Unit Safety Information, SN32-9089 This supplement provides updates to the
System Unit Safety Information.
v 7014 Model S00 Rack Installation and Service Guide, SA38-0550, contains information regarding the
7014 Model S00 Rack, in which the pSeries 615 Models 6C3 and 6E3 may be installed.
This manual is not shipped with the 3592 C06 controller.
Controller Supported Host Attachments

v FICON (0 to 4 interfaces)
v ESCON (0 to 8 interfaces). Each channel can have up to 64 logical channels, and supports multiple
logical paths per MVS image.
Adjacent Frame Support

| The Adjacent Frame Support features (3592-E07 Drives not supported in the 3494 environment) on a 3494
Tape Library allow a 3592 C06 controller in a 3952 F05 Frame to attach to an adjacent 3494 D22 Frame.
| As many as sixteen 3592 J1A, or E05 or E06 / EU6 Tape Drives can be attached to a single 3592 C06
controller (eight 3592 Tape Drives in the 3494 D24 Frame and eight more 3592 Tape Drives in the
adjacent 3494 D22 Frame or L22 frame).
The 3952 F05 Frame also will cable to the D22/D22 combination with as many as twelve 3592 Tape
Drives in the first 3494 D22 Frame, and an additional four drives in the adjacent 3494 D22 Frame.

The 3952 F05 Frame will cable to an IBM Model C20 library.
Call Home Support

When, or if activated, the Call Home function automatically creates a service alert when a problem occurs
with the 3592 C06 controller. A service representative can go to the installation, and status information can
be transmitted to the Support Center for problem evaluation. In addition, Call Home allows these alerts to
be sent to a pager service so that multiple people, including the customer, can be notified. Call Home is
supported on the TSSC System Console with code level at 1.16.1 or above. Refer to the IBM Call Home
for Automated Tape Library Controllers Maintenance Information manual for additional information.
TSSC microcode level must be 5.0.x or above.
3592 C06 controller Supported Drives

v 3592 J1As.
v 3592 E05 Tape Drives, (also known as TS1120 Tape Drives)
| v 3592 E06/EU6 Tape Drives, (also known as TS1130 Tape Drives)
v 3592 EU6 Tape Drives
| v 3592 E07 Tape Drives, (also known as TS1140 Tape Drives)
3592 J1A Tape Drive

The IBM 3592 J1A provides high capacity, performance, reliability and a wide range of direct attach host
connectivity using fibre channel technology. This drive is supported by the IBM 3494 Tape Library, and
may be attached to a 3592 J70 Controller, or to a 3592 C06 controller. They are connected to FICON or
ESCON host machines.
3592 E05, E06 and E07 Tape Drives

| For more information on the 3592 E05, E06 and E07 Tape Drives see the 3592 Introduction chapter in the
| IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance
| Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07 manual.
|
| Write Once Read Many (WORM)
| The 3592 C06 controller supports the WORM (Write Once Read Many) function of the 3592 Tape Drives.
| All 3592 Tape Drives are WORM-capable with microcode release level D310_48E or later. No physical
| changes are required to make the drive WORM-capable. For additional information on the WORM
| function, refer the “Introduction” section of the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape
| Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07
| manual.
Encryption Key Paths

There are multiple encryption key paths supported by the 3592 C06 controllercontroller. For more
information about encryption and about customer and service representative responsibilities, refer to the
PFE website:
http://snjlnt02.sanjose.ibm.com/tape/tapetec.nsf
In-Band Key Flow
See the Figure 2-1 on page 2-3.

v The in-band key flow is between the Encryption Key Manager and the 3592 Tape Drive, through
a FICON proxy on the FICON/ESCON interface. Impact on controller availability and
serviceability is minimal.
v The 3592 C06 controller reports drive status in SMIT displays.
v The 3592 C06 controller passes encryption-related errors from the drive to the host.
v The 3592 C06 controller must be re-configured whenever new encryption drives are attached or
when an encryption-capable drive is enabled for encryption.
v 3592 C06 controllers use system-managed encryption.
Z server
Encryption 3494
Key Manager 3953
LM
Library Manager
Interface
Host Key
Exchange Subsystem 3592
Interface Proxy E05s-EE
FICON Drive
Proxy Interface
FICON
ESCON
Encryption
Interface 3592
Control c0600078
C06/J70
Figure 2-1. In-Band Key Path Flowchart
Out-of-Band Key Flow

See Figure 2-2 on page 2-4.
v The out-of-band key flow is between the Encryption Key Manager and the 3592 Tape Drive,
through a controller proxy on the Encryption Key Manager interface. The impact on controller
availability and serviceability is increased due to the two routers for the TCP or IP ethernet key
path to the Encryption Key Manager on the interface, to and from the 3592 C06 controller.
v The controller:
– Supports fail-over to the secondary key path on failure of first-specified Encryption Key
Manager path addresses
– Reports drive status in SMIT displays
– Passes encryption-related errors from the 3592 Tape Drive to the host
– Reports to the host 'key-exchange failure unit checks'
v As many as two Encryption Key Manager IP/domain addresses (and as many as two ports)
may be entered for each controller, as well as two Domain Name Server IP addresses.
v The controller must be re-configured whenever new encryption drives are attached or when an
encryption-capable drive is enabled for encryption.
v 3592 C06 controller use system-managed encryption.
Chapter 2. Product Overview 2-3

Encryption
Encryption Key 3494
Key Manager Manager 3953
(EKM) LM
Interface
Library Manager
Interface
Z server
Host
Subsystem 3592
FICON FICON Proxy Drive E05s-EE
Proxy ESCON Interface
Interface
Encryption 3592
Control
c0600096
C06/J70
Figure 2-2. Out-of-Band Key Path Flowchart
TS7700
Virtualization
Engine
Encryption Key Manager Interface
Subsystem
Encryption 3494 Proxy
Key Manager 3953
E
M ncr LM
an yp
ag tio Drive
er n
In Ke Interface
te y Library Manager
rfa
ce Interface
3592
Z server E05s-EE
(back end)
Host
Subsystem
FICON FICON Proxy
Proxy ESCON
Interface Drive
3592 C06/J70 Interface
Encryption 3592
Controller E05s-EE
Control
c0600077
Figure 2-3. Out-of-Band Key Path Flowchart, including TS7700 Virtualization Engine

3592 E05 (TS1120), 3592 E06/EU6 Tape Drive (TS1130), and 3592 E07
(TS1140) Encryption Overview
| The 3592 E05, 3592 E06/EU6 and 3592-E07 are capable of encrypting data as it is being written to
| standard 3592 Tape Cartridges. Encryption is performed at full line-speed in the tape drive, after
| compression. This function adds security to stored data, without the processing overhead and performance
| degradation associated with encryption on the server or on a dedicated appliance.
| These elements comprise the 3592 E05, 3592 E06/EU6 and 3592-E07 Tape Drive encryption solution:
| Encryption-enabled tape drive
| All 3592 E05, 3592 E06/EU6 and 3592-E07 Tape Drives delivered after September 8, 2006 are
| encryption-capable. This means they are functionally capable of performing hardware encryption. In
| order to perform hardware encryption, the 3592 E05, 3592 E06/EU6 and 3592-E07 Tape Drives must
| be encryption-enabled. This process consists of having an IBM representative set up the tape drive for
| encryption. Only encryption-enabled 3592 E05, 3592 E06/EU6 and 3592-E07 Tape Drives can be used
| to read and write encrypted 3592 Tape Cartridges.
| Note: All 3592 E05, 3592 E06/EU6 and 3592-E07 Tape Drives must always be enabled for System
| Managed encryption to be recognized.
| Encryption key management
| Encryption involves use of several kinds of keys, in successive layers. Keys are explained in “About
| Encryption Keys.” How these keys are generated, maintained, controlled, and transmitted depends
| upon the operating environment where the 3592 E05, 3592 E06/EU6 and 3592-E07 Tape Drive is
| installed. Some applications are capable of performing key management.
System-Managed Encryption
| This method is best for zOS and AIX operating systems where no application capable of key management
| runs. Encryption policies are set up in zOS IBM Distributed File Storage Management Subsystem
| (DFSMS), or in a device driver for AIX. Additional programs, such as IBM Integrated Crytographic Service
| Facility (ICSF) and IBM Resource Access Control Facility (RACF), also may be used. Key generation and
| management is performed by the Encryption Key Manager, a Java application running on the host. The
| policies and keys pass through the data path between the system layer and the 3592 E05 and 3592 E05,
| 3592 E06/EU6 and 3592-E07 Tape Drives. Encryption is transparent to the applications.
| For details on setting up system-managed encryption on 3592 E05, 3592 E06/EU6 and 3592-E07 Tape
| Drives in an AIX environment, refer to the IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide and the
| IBM Tape Device Drivers Programmers Reference.
About Encryption Keys

An encryption key is a complex string of alphanumeric characters that are used to scramble and
unscramble (encrypt) data. Encryption keys are created using algorithms designed to ensure that each key
is unique and unpredictable. The longer the key string, the harder it is to break the encryption code. 3592
Tape Drive encryption uses 256-bit AES keys to encrypt data. This 256-bit AES is the standard currently
recognized by the U.S. Government.
Some encryption algorithms generate only one unique key while others generate a pair of two different,
unique keys. When the same key is generated to both encrypt and decrypt data, the key is referred to as
a symmetric key. When two different keys are generated, one to encrypt and another to decrypt, they are
referred to as asymmetric, or public/private keys. 3592 Tape Drive encryption uses both key types.
When un-encrypted data (clear text) is sent to the 3592 Tape Drive for encryption, it is converted to
ciphertext, using a symmetric Data Key (DK), and then written to tape. The Data Key also is encrypted, or
wrapped, using the private key from an asymmetric Key Encrypting Key (KEK) pair to create an Externally

Encrypted Data Key (EEDK). This EEDK is stored in the 3592 Tape Cartridge. The 3592 Tape Cartridge
now has both the encrypted data and the means to decrypt it for anyone who holds the private KEK.
The DK also may be wrapped a second time, using the public key of another party, to create an additional
EEDK. This is known as rekeying. In this way, the tape cartridge can be shipped to a business partner
holding the corresponding private key that would allow the DK to be unwrapped and the tape decrypted on
a different 3592 Tape Drive.
Encryption keys are generated by applications such as TSM, RACF, and ICSF.
Clear
Data
Cipher
Esym{data,DK}
Text
DK Encrypted
Tape
Easy{DK,KEK} EEDK
a14m0176
KEK
Figure 2-4. 3592 Tape Drive Encryption Keys
The 3592 Tape Drive also generates a Session Key (SK), which is used to wrap the Data Key while it is
passed between the Encryption Key Manager and the tape drive. This adds another measure of security to
protect the DK while it is outside the tape drive. Session Keys are of short duration and transparent to all
other operations.
Bulk Rekey
For customers using Library-Managed Encryption and IBM tape and changer drivers running on open
systems platforms (AIX, HP-UX, Linux, Solaris, Windows), information for bulk rekey is available in the
IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide, see ftp://ftp.software.ibm.com/storage/devdrvr/Doc/
IBM_Tape_Driver_IUG.pdf
3953 F05 Frame features

Table 2-1 on page 2-7 provides the following information regarding features for the 3953 F05 Frame:
v feature code and name
v whether the feature is required or not
v any prerequisite feature codes
v maximum and minimum number
v how the feature can be installed (plant or field)
A detailed description of each feature follows Table 2-1 on page 2-7.

Table 2-1. 3953 F05 Frame Features
Prerequisites /
Feature Required? Corequisites Minimum Maximum Installation
FC 1903, Dual AC No (required None 0 (1 is required if 1 Plant or Field
Power when encryption encryption is
is enabled, or if enabled or if VTS
VTS or TS7700 or TS7700
Virtualization Virtualization
engine is Engine is
attached) attached))
FC 1904, No FC 1903 and FC 0 1 Plant or Field
Redundant AC 5505
Power
FC 2714, Console See Minimum and FC 5505 1 of FC 2714, FC 1 of FC 2714, FC Plant or Field
Expansion Maximum 2718, or FC 2721 2718, FC 2721
FC 2718, Master See Minimum and FC 5505 and 1 of FC 2714, FC 1 of FC 2714, FC Plant or Field
Console for Maximum either FC 5510 or 2718, or FC 2721 2718, FC 2721
Service FC 5511
(withdrawn from
marketing June
2006 and
replaced by FC
2721)
FC 2719, Console See Minimum and Prerequisites: FC 0 (1 required 1 Plant or Field
Upgrade Maximum 2718, 2720, and when FC 2718 is
2721. attached to a
Note: This must TS7700
be ordered as an Virtualization
MES against the Engine)
machine
type/model serial
number that the
original FC 2718,
Master Console
for Service, FC
2721, TS3000
System Console,
or FC 2720 was
ordered with.
FC 2721, TS3000 See Minimum and FC 5505 and 1 of FC 2714, FC 1 of FC 2714, FC Plant or Field
System Console Maximum either FC 5510 or 2718, or FC 2721 2718, FC 2721
FC 5511
FC 3487, 2 Gb No 1 FC 4888 for 0 6 Plant or Field
Fibre Channel Each Pair of FC
Switch (withdrawn 3487
from marketing on
16 June 2006)
FC 3488, 3.72 No 1 FC 4888 for 0 6 Plant or Field
Gib (4Gb) Fire Each Pair of FC
Channel switch 3488
FC 3491, External No None 0 6 Field Only
Fabric Support
(Field)
FC 4865, Control No None 0 3 Field Only
Unit Removal

Table 2-1. 3953 F05 Frame Features (continued)
Prerequisites /
4780, Replace No None 0 For FC 5505: 1 of Field Only
Controller with FC 4870, 5875,
C06 5876, 5877, 5878,
5879, or 5880.
For FC 5506: 3 of
FC 4870, 5875,
5876, 5877, 5878,
5879, or 5880.
FC 4888, Fibre No None 0 3 Plant or Field
Channel Switch
Mount Kit
FC 4889, No 1 FC 4888 for 0 6 Plant or Field
Reinstall 2 Gb Each Pair of FC
Fibre Channel 4889
Switch
Reinstall 2109 Each Pair of FC
Model F16 Switch 4890. This feature
is only available
for the 3592 J70
Tape Controller.
Reinstall 3.72 Gib Each Pair of FC
(4Gb) Fibre 4897
Channel Switch
FC 5065, Plant No FC 1903, FC 0 1 of FC 5065 plus Plant Only
Install 2nd 3953 5505, and FC FC 5066 plus FC
L05 Library 5510 or FC 5511 5067
Manager in a
3953 F05 Frame
FC 5066, Field No FC 1903, FC 0 1 of FC 5065 plus Plant Only
Merge 2nd 3593 5505, and FC FC 5066 plus FC
L05 Library 5510 or FC 5511 5067
Manager in a
3953 F05 Frame
FC 5067, Field No FC 1903, FC 0 1 of FC 5065 plus Field Only
Install 2nd 3953 5505, and FC FC 5066 plus FC
L05 Library 5510 or FC 5511 5067
Manager in a
3953 F05 Frame
FC 5505, Base 1 of either FC 1 FC 9065 Not Applicable Not Applicable Plant Only
User Interface 5505 or FC 5506 ordered against 1
Library Manager
FC 5506, 1 of either FC Between 1 and 3 Not Applicable Not Applicable Plant Only
Expansion 5505 or FC 5506 of FC 5875, FC
Connectivity 5876, or FC 5877,
FC 5878, FC
5879, and FC
5880
FC 5510, Plant No FC 5505 0 1 of FC 5510 or Plant Only
Install KVM FC 5511
Switch

Prerequisites /
FC 5511, Field No FC 5505 0 1 of FC 5510 or Field Only
Install KVM FC 5511
Switch
FC 5593, Router No 1 of FC 1903; FC 0 1 of FC 5593 Field or Plant
for EKM Attach 5505; 1 of FC
5875, FC 5876,
FC 5877, FC
5878, FC 5979,
FC 5880, or FC
4870; Corequisite:
FC 9875 on the
3592 J70 or C06
Tape Controller
FC 5875, Field No Corequisite: FC 0 For FC 5505: 1 of Plant Only
Merge 3592 J70 5595 on the 3592 FC 4870, 5875,
Controller in a J70 Tape 5876, 5877, 5878,
3953 F05 Frame Controller 5879, or 5880.
For FC 5506: 3 of
FC 4870, 5875,
5876, 5877, 5878,
5879, or 5880.
FC 5876, Plant No Corequisite: FC 0 For FC 5505: 1 of Plant Only
Install 3592 J70 9876 (withdrawn FC 4870, 5875,
Controller in a from marketing 5876, 5877, 5878,
3953 F05 Frame June 2006) on the 5879, or 5880.
(withdrawn from 3592 J70 Tape For FC 5506: 3 of
marketing on 16 Controller FC 4870, 5875,
June 2006) 5876, 5877, 5878,
5879, or 5880.
FC 5877, Field No Corequisite: FC 0 For FC 5505: 1 of Field Only
Install 3592 J70 9875 on the 3592 FC 4870, 5875,
Controller in a J70 Tape 5876, 5877, 5878,
For FC 5506: 3 of
FC 4870, 5875,
5876, 5877, 5878,
5879, or 5880.
FC 5878, Field No Corequisite: FC 0 For FC 5505: 1 of Plant Only
Merge 3592 C06 9887 on the FC 4870, 5875,
Controller in a TS1120 Tape 5876, 5877, 5878,
For FC 5506: 3 of
FC 4870, 5875,
5876, 5877, 5878,
5879, or 5880.
FC 5879, Plant No Corequisite: FC 0 For FC 5505: 1 of Plant Only
Install 3592 C06 9888 on the FC 4870, 5875,
For FC 5506: 3 of
FC 4870, 5875,
5876, 5877, 5878,
5879, or 5880.

Prerequisites /
FC 5880, Field No Corequisite: FC 0 For FC 5505: 1 of Field Only
Install 3592 C06 9887 on the FC 4870, 5875,
For FC 5506: 3 of
FC 4870, 5875,
5876, 5877, 5878,
5879, or 5880.
FC 9013, Attach No 2 of either FC 0 Maximum of 2 FC Plant or Field
to TS7740 3488 or FC 4897; 9020 and FC
FC 1903 9013
FC 9020, VTS No 2 of either FC 0 2 Plant or Field
Attachment 3487 or FC 4889
(for the 2-Gbps
Fibre Channel
switch) or FC
3488 or FC 4897
(for the 4-Gbps
Fibre Channel
switch); FC 5505
FC 9491, External No None 0 6 Plant Only
Fabric Support
(Plant)
3952 F05 Frame and associated features

The topics in this section describe the feature codes for the 3952 F05 Frame and associated features.
For features listed in numerical order, refer to the table below and to “TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller and
associated frame features” on page 2-11.
Feature codes using the term Field merge instruct the plant to leave a mounting slot available in the frame
for merging a device at the customer site. Feature codes using the term Field install indicate that an
existing rack or frame at the customer site requires a mounting slot.
Table 2-2. Feature codes for 3952 F05 Frame and associated features
Feature Code Machine Type/Model Description
3492 3952 F05 Frame External Fabric Support - Field
3493 3952 F05 Frame Direct Connect Drives - Field
3516 3952 F05 Frame Fibre Channel Switch Mount Kit
3517 3952 F05 Frame Redundant Fibre Channel Attach
4870 3952 F05 Frame Replace controller with TS1120 (C06)
Controller
5593 3952 F05 Frame Router for EKM attach
5594 3952 F05 Frame Attach additional CU to Router
5595 3952 F05 Frame Control Unit Encryption Key Manager
configuration / Field
5875 3952 F05 Frame Field Merge 3592 J70 Controller

Table 2-2. Feature codes for 3952 F05 Frame and associated features (continued)
5877 3952 F05 Frame Field install 3592 J70 Controller
5878 3952 F05 Frame Field merge TS1120 (C06) Controller
5879 3952 F05 Frame Plant Install TS1120 (C06) Controller
5880 3952 F05 Frame Field Install TS1120 (C06) Controller in a 3952
F05 Frame
7315 3952 F05 Frame TS7640 Silo Compatible Controller Attachment
7316 3952 F05 Frame Enterprise Tape Library Attachment (3494
Outbound Controller Frame)
9492 3952 F05 Frame External Fabric Support - Plant
9493 3952 F05 Frame Direct Connect Drives - Plant
9959 3952 F05 Frame Unterminated Power Cord
9966 3952 F05 Frame China Unterminated Power Cord
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller and associated frame features

For features listed in numerical order, refer to Table 2-3.
Table 2-3. Feature codes for Model C06 control units and associated features
0520 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller, 3592 Model Functional Enhancement Field
J70, 3494 Models Lxx
2714 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Console Expansion
2715 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Console Attachment
2719 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller IBM System Storage® TS3000 System
Console Upgrade
2720 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller IBM System Storage TS3000 System Console
3062 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Drive-to-Switch Cables / Rack
3440 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Dual ESCON Attachment for C06
3441 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller FICON Short Wavelength Attachment
3442 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller FICON Long Wavelength Attachment
3443 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller FICON 10km Long Wavelength Attachment
3478 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Two Dual Ported Fibre Drive Adapters
3488 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch
3492 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller, 3952 Frame External Fabric Support (Field)
F05
3493 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller, 3952 Frame Direct Connect Drives (Field)
F05
3494 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Fibre Channel Switch Rack Mount Kit
3495 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Redundant Fibre Channel Attach
4641 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Install Controller in Rack

Table 2-3. Feature codes for Model C06 control units and associated features (continued)
4887 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Reinstall 2 Gb Fibre Channel Switch
4897 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Reinstall 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch
5247 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Enhanced Router
5248 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Network 16-Port Switch for IPv4/IPv6
5593 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Router for EKM attach
5595 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Control Unit Encryption configuration / Field
9000 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Attach to S/390, zSeries System
9014 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Attach TS3400 to Controller
9478 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller 3592 Drive Attach to C06 Controller
9492 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller, 3952 F05 External Fabric Support (Plant)
Frame
9493 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller, 3952 F05 Direct Connect Drives (Plant)
Frame
9595 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Control Unit Encryption configuration / Plant
9885 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Field Merge C06 into 3952 F05
9886 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Plant Install C06 into 3952 F05 for Silo
9887 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Field Merge C06 into 3953 F05
9888 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Plant Install C06 into 3953 F05
9889 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Plant Install C06 in 3952 F05 for 3494
9906 TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller IPv6 Configuration
3592 C06 Controller and associated frame features

For features listed in numerical order, refer to Table 2-4 and refer to “3592 C06 Controller and associated
frame feature descriptions” on page 2-13.
For features listed according to supported Fibre Channel environments, refer to the following sections:
v “Features for the Fibre Channel Switches” on page 2-13
v “Features for External Fabric Support (FC 3492, FC 9492)” on page 2-14
Table 2-4. Feature codes for 3592 C06 controllers and associated features
0520 3592 C06 controller, 3592 J70 Controller, 3494 Functional Enhancement Field
Tape Library Models Lxx
2714 3592 C06 controller Console Expansion
2715 3592 C06 controller Console Attachment
2719 3592 C06 controller IBM System Storage TS3000 System Console
Upgrade
2720 3592 C06 controller IBM System Storage TS3000 System Console
3062 3592 C06 controller Drive-to-Switch Cables / Rack

Table 2-4. Feature codes for 3592 C06 controllers and associated features (continued)
3440 3592 C06 controller Dual ESCON Attachment for C06
3441 3592 C06 controller FICON Short Wavelength Attachment
3442 3592 C06 controller FICON Long Wavelength Attachment
3443 3592 C06 controller FICON 10 km Long Wavelength Attachment
3478 3592 C06 controller Two Dual Ported Fibre Drive Adapters
3488 3592 C06 controller 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
3492 3592 C06 controller, 3952 Frame F05 External Fabric Support (Field)
3493 3592 C06 controller, 3952 Frame F05 Direct Connect Drives (Field)
3494 3592 C06 controller Fibre Channel Switch Rack Mount Kit
3495 3592 C06 controller Redundant Fibre Channel Attach
4641 3592 C06 controller Install Controller in Rack
4887 3592 C06 controller Reinstall 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
4897 3592 C06 controller Reinstall 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
5247 3592 C06 controller Enhanced Router, Cisco 1811
5248 3592 C06 controller Direct connection without a Router
5593 3592 C06 controller Router for Encryption Key Manager attach
5595 3592 C06 controller Control Unit Encryption Key Manager
configuration / Field
7004 3952 F05 Frame Install TS3400 Rack mount kit
9000 3592 C06 controller Attach to S/390, zSeries System
9014 3592 C06 controller Attach TS3400 to 3592 C06 controller
9478 3592 C06 controller 3592 Drive Attach to 3592 C06 controller
9492 3592 C06 controller, 3952 F05 Frame External Fabric Support (Plant)
9493 3592 C06 controller, 3952 F05 Frame Direct Connect Drives (Plant)
9595 3592 C06 controller Control Unit Encryption Key Manager
configuration / Plant
9885 3592 C06 controller Field Merge 3592 C06 controller into 3952
F05
9886 3592 C06 controller Plant Install 3592 C06 controller into 3952 F05
for C20 Library
9887 3592 C06 controller Field Merge 3592 C06 controller into 3953
F05
9888 3592 C06 controller Plant Install 3592 C06 controller into 3953 F05
9889 3592 C06 controller Plant Install 3592 C06 controller in 3952 F05
for 3494 Tape Library
3592 C06 Controller and associated frame feature descriptions

Features for the Fibre Channel Switches
When a 2Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch is used, all mounting hardware, twenty GBICs, dual
power, and cooling fans are installed. The following requirements apply in the specified environments:

Features for External Fabric Support (FC 3492, FC 9492)
When connecting 3592 Tape Drives to a 3592 C06 controller using external fabric (FC 3492 - field
installed, FC 9492 - Plant installed), the following requirements apply in the specified environments:

Artwork, Diagrams, Graphics, and Tables
Router
100-240VAC 50-60Hz 0.5A
j70m0073
Printer WAN Console
Figure 2-5. Rear View of the SMC Router
3592 C06 Controller
1 2 3 4
j70m0124
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
Figure 2-6. Controller Controls and Connections – Rear View of Controller
v 1 — P1-C7-T4 SPCN 1

v 2 — P1-C7-T3 SPCN 0
v 3 — P1-C7-T2 HMC connector 2
v 4 — P1-C7-T1 HMC connector 1
v 5 — P1-C1 through P1-C6 PCI slots (for card slot configurations refer to Table 2-5 on page 2-17).
v 6 — P1-T9 RACK indicator connector
v 7 — P1-T8 Integrated USB port 1
v 8 — P1-T7 Integrated USB port 0
v 9 — P1-T6 Integrated dual 1 Gb Ethernet port 2
v 10 — P1-T5 Integrated dual 1 Gb Ethernet port 1
v 11 — Power supply 2 power input
v 12 — Power supply 1 power input
v 13 — P1-T2 Serial port 2
v 14 — P1-T1 Serial port 1

1 2 3 4
5
6
j70m0125
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Figure 2-7. Controller Controls and Connections — Front View, With Operator Panel. Items 7 through 14 comprise
the operator panel.
v 1 — HD1
v 2 — HD0
v 3 — Dummy disk drive
v 4 — Dummy disk drive
v 5 — DVD-ROM drive 0
v 6 — DVD-CRW-ROM drive 1
v 7 — Function / data display
v 8 — Ethernet connector
v 9 — Increment
v 10 — Enter push button
v 11 — Decrement
v 12 — System attention light
v 13 — Power on light
A blinking light indicates standby power to the unit.
A constant light indicates full system power to the unit.
v 14 — Power push button

3592 C06 Controller Plug Chart
Table 2-5 lists the various combinations of Host Adapter cards that may be installed in the 3592 C06
controller when the device adapter cards are FCP.
Table 2-5. Plug Chart - Device Adapter Cards (FCP)
Slot 1 Device Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Device Slot 5 Slot 6
Adapter Adapter
FCP* ESCON Note 1 FCP* Note 1 Note 1
FCP* ESCON ESCON FCP* Note 1 Note 1
FCP* ESCON ESCON FCP* ESCON Note 1
FCP* ESCON ESCON FCP* ESCON ESCON
FCP* Note 2 Note 2 FCP* Note 2 FICON
FCP* Note 2 Note 2 FCP* FICON FICON
FCP* Note 2 FICON FCP* FICON FICON
FCP* FICON FICON FCP* FICON FICON
Note 1. Slot can contain a FICON Adapter. Note 2. Slot can contain an ESCON Adapter.
* Slot 1 and Slot 4 will contain a dual port card.
The 3592 C06 controller can have either 4 ESCON cards or a combination of ESCON and FICON, as
shown in Table 2-6. This table shows the matrix for FICON adapter support with an intermix of ESCON.
Table 2-6. Allowable FICON/ESCON Adapter Combinations
Number of adapters
FICON 0 1 2 3 4
ESCON 1–4 0–3 0–2 0–1 0
1.86Gib (2Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
2
System LEDs
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2
j70m0070
Serial Port Ethernet LEDs Port LEDs
Figure 2-8. 1.86Gib (2Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch

Figure 2-9. One 1.86Gib (2Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch in a base frame
Dual Port Cards with Single 1.86Gib (2Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
3592 C06 Adapter 2Gb Switch Port
1 A (priA = Top port on dual port adapter in Slot 1) 20
1 B (priB = Bottom port on dual port adapter in Slot 1) 18
4 A (altA = Top port on dual port adapter in Slot 4) 19
4 B (altB = Bottom port on dual port adapter in Slot 4) 17

Drv 15 Port 0
251
FC Switch Drv 8 Port 0
Eth
Drv 0 Port 0
To 251
Router
Drv 7 Port 0
C06
Eth
Eth 1 2 3 4 5 6
To 251
PDU
Router
c0600059
To 250
Router
Figure 2-10. One 1.86Gib (2Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch in an expansion frame

Figure 2-11. Two 1.86Gib (2Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches in 3953 Base frame
Dual Port Cards with Dual 1.86Gib (2Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches
1 A (priA = Top port on dual port adapter in Slot 1) 1 251 / PRY (lower)
1 B (priB = Bottom port on dual port adapter in Slot 1) 2 251 / PRY (lower)
4 A (altA = Top port on dual port adapter in Slot 4) 1 250 / PRY (upper)
4 B (altB = Bottom port on dual port adapter in Slot 4) 2 250 / PRY (upper)

Drive 15 Port 1
2nd (Upper)
FC Switch Drive 8 Port 1
Eth
Drive 7 Port 1
Slot 4A
Slot 4B
To Router
Lan Port
Drive 0 Port 1
Drive 15 Port 0
1st (Lower)
FC Switch Drive 8 Port 0
Eth
Drive 7 Port 0
Slot 1A
Slot 1B
c0600070
To Router
Lan Port
Drive 0 Port 0
Figure 2-12. Two 1.86Gib (2Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches
3.72Gib (4Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
j70m0107
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3
Figure 2-13. 3.72Gib (4Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
1 Power LED 3 Temp Error LED

2 System Fault LED

Drive 0 Port 0 Drive 3 Port 0
Drive 6 Port 0
Drive 7 Port 0
Drive 8 Port 0
Drive 9 Port 0
C06
Eth
To 251 LAN Eth 1 2 3 4 5 6
c0600056
Network
PDU
Switch
WAN LAN Router
Figure 2-14. One 3.72Gib (4Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch in a 3953 F05 Base Frame

Drive 6 Port 0
Drive 7 Port 0
Drive 8 Port 0
Drive 9 Port 0
C06
Eth
Eth 1 2 3 4 5 6
PDU
To 251 Router
c0600060
To 250 Router
Figure 2-15. One 3.72Gib (4Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch in an expansion frame

Slot 4B Drive 6 Port 1
Drive 7 Port 1
Drive 8 Port 1 Slot 4A

Drive 9 Port 1

Drive 6 Port 0
Slot 1A Drive 7 Port 0
Drive 8 Port 0
Drive 9 Port 0 Slot 1B
j70m0109

Figure 2-16. Two 3.72Gib (4Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches
Dual Port Cards with Dual 3.72Gib (4Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches
1 A (priA = Top port on dual port adapter in Slot 1) 1 / PRY (lower)
1 B (priB = Bottom port on dual port adapter in Slot 1) 19 / PRY (lower)
4 A (altA = Top port on dual port adapter in Slot 4) 20 / ALT (upper)
4 B (altB = Bottom port on dual port adapter in Slot 4) 2 / ALT (upper)
Table 2-7. Drive to Fibre Switch Address Labels

Drive 00 Port 0 Drive 06 Port 0 Drive 12 Port 0 Drive 18 Port 0
Drive 02 Port 0 Drive 08 Port 0 Drive 14 Port 0 Adapter 0 Port 0

RAS Characteristics
Availability
v The 3592 C06 controller provides SIM/MIM messages and Service Request Numbers (SRNs).
v Preventive maintenance (via a SIM or MIM message) can highlight hardware and media problems
before they are disclosed.
v The 3592 C06 controller is an RS/6000 control unit, and does support concurrent maintenance (hot
swap) for the internal hard drive and adapter cards in the controller. Some control unit service will be
disruptive to customer operation for hardware replacement operations.
v The service representative has the ability to concurrently interrogate controller error logs, and perform
certain microcode-related service.
v SIM support enables controller hardware replacement operations to avoid service impacts during peak
usage, and can be scheduled for the customer's convenience.
Serviceability
v No host resources or support are required for service.
v Service Terminal actions can be performed through the TSSC System Console. Attachment of the 3592
C06 controller to the TSSC is required.
v Service Terminal service actions are initiated from the Service Terminal.
Note: The service terminal can either be carried by the service representative or the Library Manager in
the 3494 Tape Library or the 3953 F05 Tape Frame.
v Using the Service Terminal, there will be a combination of RS/6000 SMIT menus and unique 3592 C06
controller menus. For consistency and to prevent unique training of service representatives, all actions
performed will be menu-driven, versus forcing service representatives to use a command line entry in
the AIX operating system.
v Some problems will exist with the RS/6000 that cannot post on the Service Terminal or in a SIM
message. These will be indicated by a flashing indicator on the 3592 C06 controller and will require that
the service representative read the System Reference Code (SRC) from the operator panel on the 3592
C06 controller.
v When necessary, the service representative will be directed to the existing RS/6000 documentation for
the 3592 C06 controller to create a cohesive service flow.
v When the 3592 C06 controller is part of a library subsystem, use the existing library service
documentation to resolve library problems
v Wrap tools are provided to test all external interfaces.
v Non-disruptive microcode update from the 3592 C06 controller for the drives, FICON, ESCON, and
SCSI adapters.
v You must take the entire subsystem down to update controller code.
v Use the CD-ROM to update 3592 C06 controller microcode, or for an AIX code load or upgrade. See
the Procedures section in this manual.
v Support functions will be included on the Service Terminal to handle microcode traces and dumps. This
support will be limited to routing the dump from the hard disk and copying it to a CD, for later analysis
at the development lab.
v Error information such as SIMs, MIMs, and SRNs are sent to the host. Some SRNs are available only
by opening the covers, and reading the SRN directly from the Controller operator panel.

3592 C06 controller Maintenance Strategy
The 3592 C06 controller maintenance package does not use diagnostics for problem recreation. The
hardware and microcode capture and isolate failures when they occur. The fault symptom code (FSC)
generated either by the functional microcode or diagnostic microcode, is converted into a FRU identifier
(FID) and displayed to the operator and the service representative by sending service information
messages (SIMs), media information messages (MIMs), or service request numbers (SRNs).
The controller diagnostics are based on existing RS/6000 diagnostics. In addition, there are POST
(Power-On Self Tests), Built-In Self Tests, and concurrent diagnostics that operate in the background. If the
host system does not support SIMs and MIMs, sense data is available if the subsystem is able to present
it. The maintenance strategy described here is for all configurations of the 3592 C06 controller.
v Remote support is available through the TSSC System Console.
v The maintenance package uses the Service Terminal at the control unit, the 3494 Library Manager, or
the TSSC System Console.
v For problem determination of SRNs or System Reference Codes in the 3592 C06 controller you have
access to the Information Center through the Internet or through the Service Terminal.
v The control unit can access many of the functions in the drives by using the fibre interface.

Host (SIM and MIM) Messages
Service information messages (SIM) and media information messages (MIM) are incorporated into the
3592 C06 controller. These messages provide the Customer and the service representative with diagnostic
and repair information before he or she makes the service call. The intent is to prevent unnecessary
service calls.
Note: When possible, the SRN from the 3592 C06 controller is part of the SIM that is sent to the host.
Field Microcode Support Using 3592 C06 controller

See “Adding New Microcode Images To 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-2.
Security Precautions for EBTERM, NetTerm, and Library
Security Controls
Customer security and data integrity on the 3592 C06 controller is safeguarded in several ways. The intent
is to prevent unauthorized viewing or altering of data. The 3592 C06 controller has the following security
measures for the service package and support structures.
Security For Local Access

Service is performed on the 3592 C06 controller through local access, by using a serial port. This access
is available either through the Library Manager or from the TSSC.
| Note: If installing 1.21.7.x or higher set the terminal emulator to VT100.
If the Library Manager is used for service, the terminal emulator program, EBTERM (OS2), is only
available in the password-protected service mode. Once the program is invoked from a service window in
the Library Manager, the main service window appears. The service representative's PC or lap top can be
used for service access also.
The following functions are examples of the service menu content:

v Subsystem control functions (offline for service, online, and so forth)
v Diagnostics on devices and components (when in an offline state)
v Exercisers for extended testing
v Access to error logs, including SIMs (service information messages) and MIMs (media information
messages)
v Code upgrade functions
v Encryption activation
Note: The above service options never provide the service representative access to customer data or
pointers, nor grant AIX command-line authority.
Security for Remote Support Access

Remote access service has been implemented to diagnosis and correct hardware problems, and to
provide microcode problem analysis. This allows for faster microcode correction, and affords the ability to
resolve field problems by dialing from the IBM Support Center. See “Remote Login For Microcode Level
1.16.2.8 Or Above” on page 2-28.

Several layers of protection are available and in place:
v Security of the dial-up hardware (modem and WTI switch)
v Security for the 3592 C06 controller, as described in “Security For Local Access” on page 2-27
The modem can be:

v Configured to have password protection
v Made to accept up to 50 unique passwords
v Tailored by you or the customer through the use of EBTERM or a similar modem-terminal program
facility
When the password is set by the customer, your remote service access is blocked until the password is
verbally given to you. The password could be left standardized to block access to only those who have not
been granted access.
The WTI switch (Feature Code 2711), if multiple 3592 C06 controller or VTS II's are present, has
password-protection, as well. It allows selection of one unique password. This would typically be inline with
the modem, and either or both could be password-enabled. Having both enabled would be unnecessarily
redundant, but possible.
Remote Login For Microcode Level 1.16.2.8 Or Above

You must use a revised remote Authentication method to login to a 3592 C06 controller, This method
requires the use of a manager-approved Authentication ID. The Authentication ID is a personal userID.
Like the Retain userID, it cannot be shared between people. If an Authentication ID is needed, contact
your next level of support for information on acquiring an ID. When approval of an ID is granted,
instructions on accessing IBM's Authentication Servers is provided.
Hierarchy of Remote Support Access

Microcode at level 1.16.2.8 and above has various levels of remote access authority. Remote access
includes a requirement to authenticate access with IBM.
Service Level
The Service Menus are available remotely to authorized IBM employees, and are tailored to
prevent actions detrimental to the customer's data security. The following functions are examples
of the service menu content:
v Subsystem control functions (offline for service, online, and so forth)
v Diagnostics on devices and components (when in an offline state)
v Exercisers for extended testing
v Access to error logs, including SIMs (service information messages) and MIMs (media
information messages)
v Code upgrade functions
Support Center
This next level of support interfaces with the service representative. Support personnel can
remotely perform all functions described in the Service, Support, and Extended menus. With their
product-specific technical knowledge, they aid the service representative with further problem
isolation. They do not have access to customer data nor do they have command-line authority in
the 3592 C06 controller. They have the same passwords as the service representatives.
Development Personnel
This group is comprised of groups such as Product Field Engineers (PFE) and microcode
developers. They have additional password authority, not granted elsewhere, to perform root
access functions. They often have full, command-line authority. This password authority is
controlled and is limited to a select group.

You can find the procedures for setting up remote access using password protection in IBM Call Home for
Automated Tape Library Controllers Maintenance Information.
Special Tools
A Service Terminal is needed for maintenance with all 3592 C06 controllers that are not part of a 3494
Tape Library. This Service Terminal is not part of the subsystem, and is not shipped with any models. The
service representative is expected to arrive at the account with this tool.
Service Terminal
The Service Terminal for the 3592 C06 controller is a portable PC. It must be equipped to act as an IBM
3151 Emulator. The diagnostic microcode to drive the menus and diagnose the subsystem comes installed
on the 3592 C06 controller. See “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102.
Note: The library manager can be used as the service terminal if the 3592 C06 controller is electronically
attached to the 3494 Tape Library.
ESD Kit
The ESD kit (PN is available in General SSR Tools Reference Summary) is used to prevent damage when
you work with electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive parts. This tool (Figure 2-17) is not shipped with
the subsystem and must be ordered.
Figure 2-17. ESD Grounding Strap
Wrap Tool
Use the ESCON wrap tool to verify the ESCON channel in the 3592 C06 controller. This tool (Figure 2-18
on page 2-30) is a unique part and cannot be swapped with other wrap tools.
Use the FICON wrap tool to verify the FICON channel in the 3592 C06 controller.
Note:

v The 3592 C06 controller comes with two of these tools for the ESCON adapters. When running
the ESCON diagnostics, BOTH ESCON wrap tools must be connected for the diagnostics to run
correctly.
v The 3592 C06 controller comes with two of these tools for the FICON adapters. When running
the FICON diagnostics, BOTH FICON wrap tools must be connected for the diagnostics to run
correctly.
Figure 2-18. ESCON Wrap Tool

Chapter 3. Installation
Use this Installation chapter when you install the 3592 C06 controller in various configurations.
Before Installation
Ensure you received the following items so that you can adequately support this installation.
1. Power cables (two for each 3592 C06 controller)
2. ESCON and FICON cables
3. Control unit-to-drive fibre channel cables
Check with the branch office or physical planning representative to ensure the installation planning
specifications have been met and a solutions assurance process was completed.
Ensure the customer has the correct Host software levels and correct Host PTFs for 3592 and C06
attachment.
Ensure the length of the ESCON or FICON cables and power cables are adequate to connect to the host.
To complete the installation, you may be referred to:

| v IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance
| Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07
v IBM System Storage TS3000 System Console (TSSC) Maintenance Information
v IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library Controllers Maintenance Information
for procedures that are required for the 3592 Tape Drive models, Call Home setup, and TSSC System
Console setup. Have these books available before you begin the installation.
About Installation of a 3592 C06 controller

| The 3592-C06 with 3494 or 3577 or C20 attached libraries do not support 3592-E07 drives.
This installation information addresses different frames and conditions in which the 3592 C06 controller is
used. It covers only the 3592 C06 controller installation checkout, configuration checkout, and customer
cable hookup. The physical installation of the 3592 C06 controller may be accomplished in the factory as a
plant install, or in the field as a field install by using MES Installation Instructions. Use Installation
Instructions supplied through an MES if you have 3592 Tape Drives to install in the same frame at this
| time. Refer to the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition - June
| 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07 for additional information.
3592 C06 controller Configurations

The 3592 C06 controller allows the 3592 Tape Drives to be directly attached to a host through an ESCON
or FICON channel.
The 3592 C06 controller provides for Fibre Channel attached drives and the ESCON- or FICON-based
host channels with the proper Feature Codes installed.
The 3592 C06 controller can be installed in the following environments:
IBM 3494 D24 Frame or 3494 D22 Frame

v The 3592 C06 controller can functionally replace a 3592 J70 Controller in a 3494 D24 Frame by
installing an outbound frame, the 3952 F05 Frame, which can contain as many as three 3592 C06

controllers, with or without adjacent frame support. The 3592 C06 controller in the outbound 3952 F05
frame also may be attached to a new 3494 D24 Frame or to a new 3494 D22 Frame.
v The in an outbound frame attached to an existing can have adjacent frame support.
| v Only 3592 Tape Drives, J1A, E05, E06 and EU6 are supported.
IBM Rack Subsystem

The 3592 C06 controller can be installed in a new Rack.
| Note: If installing a 3592 C06 controller in a new Rack, refer to the Installation Instruction (Feature Code
| 4641) for that activity. The IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th
| Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07 provides
| additional drive information. Once the hardware is installed, proceed to “Rack with a 3592 C06
| controller and 3592 Tape Drives” on page 3-63.
IBM 3953 F05 Tape Frame with 3592 C06 controllers attached to a Model C20
Frame
| v The Model C20 frame can contain as many as twenty 3592 J1A, E05, E06 and EU6 Tape Drives. The
| C20 does not support 3592-E07 drives.
v The 3953 F05 Tape Frame can electronically hook up to a Model C20 frame.
v The 3953 F05 Tape Frame for this configuration can contain up to three 3592 C06 controllers.
IBM 3953 F05 Tape Frame

| v One 3592 C06 Controller can be installed in a 3953 F05 Base Frame, controlling 3592 J1A, E05, E06
| EU6 or 3592-E07 Tape Drives in the 3584 Tape Library.
v As many as three 3592 C06 controllers can be installed in the 3953 F05 Expansion Frame.
| v All the 3592 drives in a 3584 logical library must be for the same model.
3592 C06 controller and 3577 L5U Tape Library

| The 3592 C06 controller supports from one to seven 3577 L5U Tape Library's with one or two 3592-J1A,
| E05, E06 or EU6 drives each. Mixed drive models are not allowed. Refer to “3592 C06 controller attached
| to a 3577 L5U Tape Library” on page 3-70.
Tools
The following tools are contained in a ship group. Some tools in the list are in the 3494 Tape Library ship
group.
v Two Fibre Channel Adapter wrap blocks, PN 12R9314
v Two ESCON wrap tools
v One Null Modem Serial cable, PN 24R0831 will be shipped with each new Frame or new Rack.
Verify Checkout instructions for a 3592 C06 controller

This section addresses installation checkout of the 3592 C06 controller in frames which support it. The
3592 C06 controller can attach to four different tape drives;
v 3592 J1A
v 3592 E05 Tape Drive
v 3592 E06 Tape Drive
v 3592 EU6 Tape Drive
| v 3592 E07 Tape Drive

Attention: All drives attached to a 3592 C06 controller must be the same type and model.
3953 F05 Base Frame with a 3592 C06 controller
Check out a 3592 C06 controller in a 3953 F05 Base Frame

You are checking out a 3592 C06 controller in the 3953 F05 Tape Frame with up to sixteen 3592 Tape
Drives in the 3584 Tape Library.
v The 3953 F05 Tape Frame may have arrived from the factory with a 3592 C06 controller installed.
v A 3592 C06 controller may have been installed after the frame was shipped.
v The 3953 F05 Base Frame is positioned in place with underfloor power connected and is ready to be
connected to the 3584 Tape Library.
v Multiple Fibre Channel Switches may be installed in this frame. They are;
– (one_2Gb) 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
– (two_2Gb) 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches
Note: A 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch has no connection to the Ethernet LANs.
– (EXT) External Switch (director) provided by the customer
– (P_to_P) Point to Point attach
Important: The following Installation steps with the above designators apply to that switch only. The
following Unmarked steps apply regardless of switch type installed.
v The 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch was either added through field installation or it already existed in
the frame.
Note: The 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch has a total of twenty ports; they are numbered from right
to left starting at one.
v The 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch was either added through a field installation or it already exists
in the frame.
Note: The 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch has a total of twenty ports; they are numbered from left
to right and top to bottom starting at one.
v You may be asked to check out Fibre connectivity to an External Switch (director) provided by the
customer, or to check out Fibre connections for a “Point-to-Point” attach to one, two, three, or four 3592
Tape Drives in the 3584 Tape Library.
v See Figure 3-1 on page 3-4 for the location of the 3592 C06 controller 9 and other components in the
3953 F05 Base Frame.
Chapter 3. Installation 3-3

3
1 12
6
2
7
10
11
j70m0119
Figure 3-1. Rear View of 3953 F05 Base Frame - Opposite Side
1 Fibre Channel Switches, lower 2 attached to 3592 C06 controller, bottom switch is the 251 Fibre
Switch (2Gb switch), upper switch is the 250 Fibre Switch (2Gb switch). The upper 4 Fibre switches, if
installed, are attached to a 3494 B10 or B20 VTS or a 3957-V06.
2 Keyboard Video Mouse (KVM) Switch
3 250 Lan Network Switch
4 251 Lan Network Switch
5 Library Manager B (7581)
6 System Console Switch
7 Keyboard, Video, Mouse
8 Library Manager A (7581)
9 3592 C06 controller
10 System Console
11 SMC Router, attached to 3592 C06 controller
12 When 4Gb Fibre Switches are installed, the bottom switch is the Primary Fibre Switch and the
upper switch is the Alternate Fibre Switch. The upper four Fibre switches, if installed, are attached to a
3494 B10 or B20 VTS or 3957-V06.
The following steps apply to checkout of a 3953 F05 Base Frame.

1. If the 3592 C06 controller is not present in the frame and you are here to do a Field Merge, first go to
“Field Merge 3592 C06 controller” on page 3-86. Return here when complete.
2. Verify the SMC router is physically installed beneath the 3592 C06 controller. See item 11 in
Figure 3-1.

3. Verify the power cord is connected to the SMC router and the PDU (Power Distribution Unit). When a
single PDU is installed in the 3953 F05 Base Frame, the 3592 C06 controller is powered by one
bifurcated power cable.
4. If dual PDUs are installed in the 3953 F05 Base Frame, perform this step.
a. Verify one of the two 3592 C06 controller power cords is connected to the PDU on one side of the
frame and the second power cord is connected to the PDU on the other side of the frame.
Refer to Figure 2-9 on page 2-18 for a single 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch for the next step.
5. Verify the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch (251 Fibre Switch) is cabled correctly to the 251 Lan
Network Switch, and the 3592 C06 controller is cabled correctly to the SMC router LAN port located
beneath the controller (See item 11 in Figure 3-1 on page 3-4.
Note: The 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches will NOT have connections to either the 250 LAN or
the 251 LAN. For the remaining LAN connections, when Dual 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switches are installed, see Figure 3-3 on page 3-8. The remaining LAN connections are shown
in Figure 3-2 on page 3-6.
6. See items 7 and 3 in Figure 3-2 on page 3-6 for correct LAN cabling to the 251 Fibre Switch
(2Gb switch) and 3592 C06 controller to the Router, respectively. There is no Ethernet connection to
an External Fibre Channel Switch (director).
If Dual Fibre Channel Switches are installed, the second fibre switch 250 Fibre Switch) is connected
to the 250 Lan Network Switch. See 8 for correct cabling.

Dual LAN TCP/IP Addressing for C06 in 3953 F05 Base Frame
Assume C06 is
in Base Frame en0
(Position 10)
192.168.251.10
1 C06 3
192.168.250.10
en1
8
192.168.251.12 192.168.251.15 2 192.168.250.13

251 6 250
4 Router 10
Fibre Fibre 5
Switch Switch
172.31.1.15
WAN
7 9 MC SW 11
12
172.31.1.1
192.168.250.244 192.168.251.244
MC 13
250 251
14 LAN Network LAN Network 15
Switch Switch
19
20
192.168.251.1 192.168.251.2
16 17
c0600003
LMA 18 LMB
192.168.250.1 21 192.168.250.2
Figure 3-2. 3592 C06 controller in Base Frame with Dual LAN Cabling for two 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches
1 3592 C06 controller in the 3953 F05 Base Frame

2 3.2 m Ethernet cable, 3592 C06 controller Ethernet Port #2 (en1 on Integrated Ethernet port
2) to 250 Lan Network Switch. See 9 for location of Ethernet Port #2 on Figure 2-6 on page
2-15.
3 1 m Ethernet cable 3592 C06 controller Integrated Ethernet Port #1 (en0) to an SMC Router
LAN port (SMC Router located beneath 3592 C06 controller). See 10 for location of Ethernet
Port #1 on Figure 2-6 on page 2-15.
4 251 Fibre Switch (2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch) on 251 net in Base Frame
5 250 Fibre Switch (2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch), alternate fibre switch on 250 net in
Dual Switch configuration with 3592 C06 controller
6 SMC Router with 3592 C06 controller in Base Frame
7 1 m Ethernet cable, 251 Fibre Switch to 251 Lan Network Switch
8 1 m Ethernet cable, 250 Fibre Switch to 250 Lan Network Switch
9 3.2 m Ethernet cable, from SMC Router WAN port to System Console Network Switch (SC
Sw) in the Base Frame. If the SC is located externally to the Base Frame, use 50 ft (15M)
Ethernet cable, to the internal SC Switch.
10 3.2 m Ethernet cable, from an SMC Router LAN port on 251 net to the 251 (3COM) LAN
Network Switch

11 System Console Switch (16 port SMC router in Frame, FC 2714)
12 3.2 m Ethernet cable, for connection from the SC Network switch to the internal System
Console. Use 50 ft (15M) Ethernet cable, between the SC Network switch and the System
Console if the System Console is external to the Base Frame.
13 System Console, either internal (FC 2718 or 2721) or external (FC 2713 or 2720) to the
Base Frame
14 250 LAN Network Switch (3COM)
15 251 Lan Network Switch (3COM)
16 Library Manager A
17 Library Manager B (optional HA1 ONLY)
18 3.2 m Ethernet cable, 250 Lan Network Switch to Library Manager A slot 12
20 3.2 m Ethernet cable, 251 Lan Network Switch to Library Manager B slot 11
Note:
v The last (fourth) octet of the TCP or IP address for the 3592 C06 controller, SMC Router,
and Fibre Channel Switch is dependent on frame and location, such as '10' in the 3953 F05
Base Frame.
v Ethernet port en0 on the 3592 C06 controller is provided by the Integrated Ethernet Port 1.
v The SMC 7008ABR Router is configured for LAN or WAN IP address for TS3000 System
Console connection.
v The following TCP or IP addresses are reserved addresses and cannot be used:
– 192.168.251.254
– 172.31.1.254
v If two out-of-band encryption routers (251 Encryption Router and 250 Router which are
SMC 8-port routers) are installed in the 3953 F05 Base Frame, the Ethernet cable 10 will
be routed from the SMC Router 6 LAN port on the 251 Lan Network to the first LAN port
on the 251 Encryption Router. 251 Encryption Router LAN port #8 is connected to the 251
Lan Network Switch.
Ethernet cable 2 will be routed from 3592 C06 controller Ethernet port #2 to the first LAN
port on the 250 Encryption Router. 250 Encryption Router LAN port #8 is connected to the
250 Lan Network Switch.
v Dotted lines in the diagram indicate connection to optional features.

Dual LAN TCP/IP Addressing for C06 in 3953 F05 Base Frame with 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switches
Assume C06 is
in Base Frame en0
(Position 10)
192.168.251.10
1 C06 3
192.168.250.10
en1
Primary 192.168.251.15 2 Alternate

Fibre Fibre
4 Router 6 10 5
Switch Switch
(4 Gb) (4 Gb)
172.31.1.15
WAN
9 SC SW 11
12
172.31.1.1
192.168.250.244 192.168.251.244
SC 13
250 251
14 LAN Network LAN Network 15
Switch Switch
19
20
192.168.251.1 192.168.251.2
16 17
c0600006
LMA 18 LMB
192.168.250.1 21 192.168.250.2
Figure 3-3. 3592 C06 controller In Base Frame With Dual LAN Cabling for Two 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches
1 3592 C06 controller in the 3953 F05 Base Frame

2 3.2 m Ethernet cable, 3592 C06 controller Ethernet Port #2 (en1 on Integrated
Ethernet port 2) to 250 Lan Network Switch. See 9 for location of Ethernet Port #2 in
Figure 2-6 on page 2-15.
3 1 m Ethernet cable 3592 C06 controller Integrated Ethernet Port #1 (en0) to an SMC
Router LAN port (SMC Router located beneath 3592 C06 controller). See 10 for
location of Ethernet Port #2 in Figure 2-6 on page 2-15.
4 Primary Fibre Switch (4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch) in Base Frame
5 Alternate Fibre Switch (4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch), alternate fibre switch in
Dual Switch configuration with 3592 C06 controller, located above Primary Fibre Switch.
There is no Ethernet connection.
6 SMC Router with 3592 C06 controller in Base Frame
9 3.2 m Ethernet cable, from SMC Router WAN port to System Console Network
Switch (SC Sw) in the Base Frame. If the SC is located externally to the Base Frame,
use 50 ft (15M). Ethernet cable, to the internal SC Switch.
10 3.2 m Ethernet cable, from an SMC Router LAN port on 251 net to the 251 Lan
Network (3COM) Switch
11 System Console Switch (16 port SMC router in Frame, FC 2714)

12 3.2 m Ethernet cable, for connection from the SC Network switch to the internal
System Console. Use 50 ft (15M) Ethernet cable, between the SC Network switch and
the System Console if the System Console is external to the Base Frame.
13 System Console, either internal (FC 2721) or external (FC 2713) to the Base
Frame
17 Library Manager B (optional HA1 ONLY)
Note:
a. The last (fourth) octet of the TCP or IP address for the 3592 C06 controller, SMC
Router and Fibre Switch is dependent on frame and location, such as '10' in the
3953 F05 Base Frame.
b. Ethernet port en0 on the 3592 C06 controller is provided by the Integrated
Ethernet Port 1.
c. The SMC 7008ABR Router is configured for LAN or WAN IP address for TS3000
System Console connection.
d. The following TCP or IP addresses are reserved addresses, and cannot be used:
– 192.168.251.254
– 172.31.1.254
e. If two out-of-band encryption routers (251 Encryption Router and 250 Router
which are SMC 8-port routers) are installed in the 3953 F05 Base Frame,
Ethernet cable 10 will connect from the SMC Router 6 LAN port on the 251
Lan Network to the first LAN port on the 251 Encryption Router. 251 Encryption
Router LAN port #8 is connected to the 251 Lan Network Switch.
Ethernet cable 2 will be routed from 3592 C06 controller Ethernet port #2 to the
first LAN port on the 250 Encryption Router. 250 Encryption Router LAN port #8
is connected to the 250 Lan Network Switch.
f. Dotted lines in the diagram indicate connection to optional features.
7. The WAN port shown on the SMC Router is located at the rear of the router. See Figure 2-5 on page
2-15. The WAN port is used for Ethernet connection to the TS3000 System Console. Verify this
connection to the System Console Switch which is located in the 3953 F05 Base Frame. See Item
9 in Figure 3-2 on page 3-6. The System Console may be imbedded in the 3953 F05 Base Frame,
or it may be located externally to the frame.
8. Verify LAN port 8 on the front of the Ethernet SMC router is connected to the 251 Lan Network
Switch located in the 3953 F05 Base Frame. See Item 10 in Figure 3-2 on page 3-6.
9. Verify the Ethernet connection from the 3592 C06 controller Ethernet Port #2 to the 250 Lan Network
Switch in the 3953 F05 Base Frame. See Item 2 in Figure 3-2 on page 3-6.
Cable labels should be attached to both ends of the Ethernet cables if shipped from the factory, The
red stripe on the label indicates the cable is connected to the 250 (LAN) net, the blue striped labels
are used on 251 (LAN) net cables.
10. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb) Identify if the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch or the
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch is installed in the 3953 F05 Base Frame. See Figure 2-11 on page
2-20 and Figure 2-13 on page 2-21.
11. Verify the bifurcated power cords are connected to the Fibre Channel Switches, and to the PDU.
12. The 3592 C06 controller may have up to sixteen 3592 Tape Drives in a 3584 logical library. Some of
the drives may be in different 3584 Tape Library frames. Identify where the drives are located for
correct fibre cable connections and labeling. The correct location of the drives will be checked at the
end of 3592 C06 controller checkout and configuration.

13. (one_2Gb) (one_4Gb) The 3592 C06 controller may be connected to a maximum of sixteen 3592
Tape Drives. SeeTable 3-1 and Figure 2-9 on page 2-18 to verify drives 0 to 15 are cabled correctly if
(one_2Gb) Fibre Channel Switch is installed. See Figure 2-14 on page 2-22 if (one_4Gb) Fibre
Channel Switch is installed. If one 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch is installed, the drives 0 through
15 will be cabled, starting in Port 3 through Port 18 of the Fibre Channel Switch.
14. (two_2Gb) (two_4Gb) The 3592 C06 controller may be connected to a maximum of sixteen 3592
Tape Drives. See Table 3-1 and Figure 2-11 on page 2-20 to verify drives 0 to 15 are cabled correctly,
if (two_2Gb) Fibre Channel Switches are installed. See Table 3-2 on page 3-11 to verify drives 0 to
15 are cabled correctly if (two_4Gb) Fibre Channel Switches are installed.
15. (one_2Gb) (one_4Gb) See Figure 2-9 on page 2-18 to verify the Fibre Channel Adapters are cabled
correctly if (one_2Gb) Fibre Channel Switch is installed. See Figure 2-14 on page 2-22 if (one_4Gb)
Fibre Channel Switch is installed.
16. (two_2Gb) (two_4Gb) See Figure 2-11 on page 2-20 and Figure 2-16 on page 2-24 to verify the
Fibre Channel Adapters are cabled correctly if (two_2Gb) or (two_4Gb)Fibre Channel Switches are
installed.
Table 3-1. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table with 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
First 2Gb 20-Port Second 2Gb
Fibre Channel 20-Port Fibre
Switch port # Connects to 3592 Channel Switch Connects to 3592
Lower tape drive # Port 0 port # Upper tape drive # Port 1 Location
1 Drive 0 1 Drive 0 3584 Logical Library
17 See Note 17 Reserved
19 3592 C06 controller 19 3592 C06 controller
Slot 1B Slot 4B
Slot 1A Slot 4A
Note: If only one fibre switch is installed:

Plug 3592 C06 controller slot 1A (priA) to switch port 20
Plug 3592 C06 controller slot 1B (priB) to switch port 18
Plug 3592 C06 controller slot 4A (altA) to switch port 19
Plug 3592 C06 controller slot 4B (altB) to switch port 17

Table 3-2. Fibre Channel Cable Connection, With 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches To 3592 tape drives
Primary 4Gb Alternate 4Gb
20-Port Fibre 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switch Connects to 3592 Channel Switch Connects to 3592
port # Lower tape drive # Port 0 port # Upper tape drive # Port 1 Location
1 priA 1 Reserved 3584 Logical Library
2 See Note 2 altB 3584 Logical Library
19 priB 19 Reserved
20 See Note 20 altA

17. (EXT) To verify correct fibre cable connections from a maximum of 16 drives to an External switch
(director), go to “Verify Cabling to an External Switch (Director)” on page 3-76
18. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb) Route the fibre cables up the right side to the switch,
and plug them into the switch. Use the plastic clamps and hook and loop fastener (velcro) straps as
needed. Route the fibre cables from the switch to the drives in the 3584 Tape Library.
Note: Consult the system administrator regarding availability and routing of the fibre cables from the
Fibre Channel Switch to the tape drives in the 3584 Tape Library. The customer provides the
fibre cables.
19. See 3592 C06 controller Label Usage Instructions manual for labels to be attached to the C06 Fibre
Channel Adapter end and FC switch end of each of the four fibre cables on the 3592 C06
controller FC Adapter to Fibre Channel Switch interface if 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches are
used.
If 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches are used, you may equate the Primary switch to 251 Fibre
Switch and the Alternate switch to 250 Fibre Switch. Use the label with the blue stripe on the fibre
cable connecting the 3592 C06 controller FC Adapter slot 1A (priA) to the 251 Fibre Switch. Two
more of these labels will be applied to the second cable from the bottom port (priB) of the Dual Port
FC Adapter in Slot 1. Use this label again if you have only one Fibre Switch installed and attach it to
the fibre cable from 3592 C06 controller FC Adapter in slot 4A (altA) to the 251 Fibre Switch. Two
more of these labels will be applied to the second cable from the bottom port (altB) of the Dual Port
FC Adapter in Slot 4.
20. Use the label if the Dual Fibre Switch configuration is installed. In this case, the fibre cables connect
the 3592 C06 controller FC Adapter in Slot 4 to the 250 Fibre Switch. Use two labels with the red

stripe for connecting slot 4A (altA) to the 250 Fibre Switch. Two more of these labels will be applied
to the second cable to the Alternate Switch from the bottom port (altB) of the Dual Port FC Adapter in
Slot 4. This label also is used if the 3592 C06 controller is connected to an External switch which is
zoned for redundant pathing (to Port 0 and to Port 1) to the drives in the 3584 Tape Library.
21. Use a ballpoint pen to write 1 on the line next to C06# on each label. The 3592 C06 controller in the
3953 F05 Base Frame is Subsystem Number #1 (SSN 1, the first tape controller attached to the
Library Manager).
See 3592 C06 controller Label Usage Instructions manual for the labels to be attached to the drive
end and Fibre Channel Switch end of each fibre cable on the drive to Fibre Channel Switch
interface.
22. Use the label with the blue stripe on cables connecting the 251 Fibre Switch ports to Port 0 of each
drive.
Use the label with the red stripe only if the Dual Fibre Switch configuration is installed. In this case,
the cables are connecting ports on the 250 Fibre Switch to Port 1 of each drive.
23. Use a ballpoint pen to mark the attached labels, by writing the number 1 on each label next to the
C06#. This indicates each drive is attached to C06#1, the first tape controller attached to the Library
Manager. Fill in the number for the 3584 frame number (FR#) where the tape drive is installed. Then
write in the drive position number (DR#) of the attached drive within the 3584 Tape Library frame.
24. Ensure the PDU is powered ON and you have power to the 3953 F05 Base Frame. If not, go to the
IBM System Storage 3953 Tape Frame F05 and Library Manager Model L05 MI
25. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (EXT) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb) Power on the 2Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switch(s) and the SMC Router. If an External switch (director) is used, ensure it is powered
ON.
26. Ensure the drives in the 3584 library are powered ON. If necessary, refer to the IBM System
Storage TS3500 Tape Library 3584 MI. If not already done, set the control paths for the attached
drives in the 3584 Logical library from the 3584 operator panel or from the 3584 Web Specialist. You
will have to know where the drives are located to enable the control path for each selected drive.
Notes:
v Ensure all of the drives attached to this 3592 C06 controller are in one logical library
controlled by the 3953 L05.
v Ensure the control path is set for each drive on as many as four drives attached to this
3592 C06 controller. If more than four drives are connected to the 3592 C06 controller, set
the four control paths to ensure control path access to 3592 Tape Drives, which may be
located in different frames of the 3584 Tape Library.
27. If these drives are to be used for encryption, verify the 3592 Tape Drives have been enabled for
encryption. For a 3584 Tape Library, verify with the customer the 3592 Tape Drives have been set up
for System Managed Encryption.
| Note: All 3592 E06, EU6 and 3592 E07 Tape Drives must always be enabled for System Managed
| encryption to be recognized.
28. The green LED on the 3592 C06 controller operator panel must blink before powering ON.
29. Power on the 3592 C06 controller with the power-on switch. See item 14 in Figure 2-7 on page
2-16. Alternatively, you can power ON the controller by using the ASMI menu. See “Power ON 3592
C06 controller by using ASMI” on page 4-87.
30. If you are powering ON a field merged 3592 C06 controller, temporarily disconnect the Ethernet
cables at the 3592 C06 controller Ethernet Port #1 (item 10) and at Ethernet Port #2 (item 9 in
Figure 2-6 on page 2-15).
31. (EXT) If the 3592 Tape Drives are connected to an External switch (director), go to“Drive Checkout in
the 3584 Tape Library (External Switch)” on page 4-40. Return here when complete and proceed to
step 33 on page 3-13.

32. (P_to_P) If you are connecting 3592 Tape Drives point-to-point, go to “Point-to-Point Drive Attach on
3584 Tape Library (Direct Attachment)” on page 4-86. Return here when complete.
33. Go to “Setting Number of Drives On Controller” on page 4-111 to tell the 3592 C06 controller the
maximum number of drives that may be cabled to the Controller. The default setting is 16, ensure it is
set to 16. Return here when complete.
34. If there are 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches installed above the 251 and 250 2Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switches attached to the 3592 C06 controller, ensure these Fibre Channel Switches have
been configured by the 3494 B10 or B20 VTS or the 3957-V06. If these switches are not configured,
the Ethernet cables from these fibre switches must be disconnected temporarily from the 251 and
250 Lan Network Switches.
Note: Ensure the 251 Lan Network Switch, the 250 Lan Network Switch, the active Library Manager,
and standby Library Manager, if installed, are powered ON and functioning before continuing to
the next step.
35. Go to “Configure Attachment to 3494, 3584, 3577 Library; or 'None' for C20 Tape Library and Rack
mounted Controller” on page 4-6 to set up the 3592 C06 controller for 3584 Tape Library attachment.
Ensure you reconnected all Ethernet cables at the 3592 C06 controller disconnected in step 30 on
page 3-12.
36. If you want to set a distinct hostname for the controller; from the Subsystem Maintenance menu,
select Control Unit Service Utilities > Configure Control Unit Hostname > Set the Hostname.
Press Enter.
Enter a unique hostname that shows a relationship to the last octet of the 3592 C06 controller IP
address, that is, 10, 20, 30, or 40, and so forth. An example is elcc0620. Press Enter.
37. If you are configuring for no encryption, skip this step.
If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption, and this is the first controller you are going to attach
to the 250 Encryption Router, go to “Set 250 Encryption Router Configuration (For Library-Managed
Controllers)” on page 4-118. Return here when complete.
38. Go to IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library Controllers Maintenance Information to set up Call
Home and System Console Connections. Using that manual, follow instructions for the 3592 J70
Controller to set up the 3592 C06 controller. Return here when complete.
39. Perform this step regardless of whether this 3592 C06 controller is connected to an external TS3000
System Console or to the imbedded TS3000 System Console (FC 2721) in the 3953 F05 Base
Frame, and even if the imbedded Console is not yet powered ON or not yet configured. Go to “Show
/ Change TSSC connection” on page 4-89 to set the 251 Router IP address (LAN IP Address and
WAN IP Address), for the TS3000 System Console connection. Return here when complete.
It is now safe to reconnect the ethernet cables to the 3494 B10 or B20 VTS or 3957-V06 251 and
250 Fibre Switches, if you disconnected them in step 34.
40. Skip this step if this 3592 C06 controller is connected to the imbedded TS3000 System Console (FC
2721) in the 3953 F05 Base Frame and the imbedded TS3000 System Console is not yet powered
ON or not yet configured. In this case, the 3592 C06 controller will be configured to the TS3000
System Console when bring up of the TS3000 System Console is done. Go to the IBM System
Storage TS3000 System Console (TSSC) Maintenance Information to Configure Total Storage
System Console for this 3592 C06 controller. See “Configuration” in the Installation section of that
manual. Return here when complete.
41. If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption, and this is the first controller you are going to attach
Controllers)” on page 4-112. Return here when complete.
42. If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption, and this is the second through the sixteenth
controller to attach to the 251 Encryption Router and 250 Router, go to “Controller Routes for using
pre-configured Encryption Routers” on page 4-121 to set static routes. Return here when complete.

43. Go to “Run SCSI / Fibre Channel Configuration” on page 4-100 and select Run SCSI/FCP
Configurator. This procedure configures the 3592 Tape Drives, and smcx (control) paths, and checks
for correct installation.
a. When SCSI/FCP configuration has completed, the configured, available 3592 Tape Drives
(starting with rmt0priA and rmt0altA) and available smcx (control) paths will be displayed. The
smcx paths will appear at the end of the listing. You should see four smcx paths for every control
path enabled for a drive with Dual Port Fibre Channel Adapters installed in the 3592 C06
controller. The 3584 Tape Library provides the additional fail over paths.
Encryption-enabled drives display as "Enabled."
b. If the drive path and control path configuration is correct, verify the correct location of all drives
connected to this 3592 C06 controller by selecting the following steps sequentially, from the
Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Control Unit Service Utilities > SCSI/FCP Utilities
Menu > Display all 3584 Tape Drive Locations.
c. Ensure each attached drive (with rmtxpriA and rmtxaltA designations as well as rmtxpriB and
rmtxaltB designations, ) is in the correct 3584 Tape Library frame and correct drive position.
d. When drive configuration has checked out successfully, bring the 3592 C06 controller back online
by selecting the following steps. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Control Unit
and Tape Drive Online Offline Control > Vary Control Unit Online.
44. Go to “Run Encryption Key Manager Path Test” on page 4-147 if you have configured for out-of-band
encryption. Return here when complete.
45. If not already done, check if this 3592 C06 controller has been included in the current 3953 L05
configuration. To check, perform the following steps:
a. At the Library Manager screen ensure the Library Manager is offline.
b. Select Configure Library (Full) from the Configure menu.
c. The Volser Ranges–Full Configure screen appears for Volser information. Skip from this screen
by selecting Start Config....
d. The Configure Library–Subsystems screen appears. Remember you are configuring 3592 C06
controller, Subsystem Number 1 (SSN 1) with IP address fourth octet of .10.
e. Observe the row for SSN 1 (IPA of .10) and check if “CU” appears in the “SS Type” column. If
“CU” is the entry in the SS Type column for your subsystem, the controller has been configured to
the Library Manager. Select Exit/Cancel, and continue with Step 46. Return the Library Manager
to the online state.
f. If you see “Not Used” in the row for your subsystem, then your 3592 C06 controller subsystem has
to be configured to the 3953 L05 Library Manager.
g. Click on the down arrow ↓ in the row for your 3592 C06 controller subsystem to select “CU”.
h. Continue by consulting IBM System Storage 3953 Tape Frame F05 and Library Manager Model
L05 MI in section Full Subsystem Configuration.
i. Follow the instructions in the 3953 L05 MI to complete inclusion of the 3592 C06 controller
subsystem in the 3953 L05 configuration.
46. To verify the interface between the 3953 L05 Library Manager and the 3592 C06 controller and its
3592 Tape Drives is functional, perform the following steps:
a. At the Library Manager screen, select Service > Test Interface→Control Unit. Continue with
further selections by consulting IBM System Storage 3953 Tape Frame F05 and Library Manager
Model L05 MI in Chapter 5, Test Interface section. Return here when complete.
47. If the 3592 C06 controller is connected to the TS3000 System Console, and the System Console is
operational, from the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Subsystem Configuration > Call
Home / Remote Services Menu.
a. Go to “Sending Test Call Home” of the IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library Controllers
Maintenance Information to send a Test Call Home from this 3592 C06 controller. Return here
when complete.

48. Checkout and configuration of this 3592 C06 controller is now complete. To verify the installation is
successful, select the following steps. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Run Control
Unit Checkout.
Note: A legitimate error may be displayed for the ping to the TS3000 System Console if step 40 on
page 3-13 had to be skipped.
49. This step requires the 3584 Tape Library door be opened. Perform this step only if it doesn't interfere
with customer operation. Refer to “Running Online Diagnostics from 3592 C06 controller” on page
4-101 and select 'tapeutil' (from the main service menu) to exercise the read and write circuits of
each tape drive installed. The drive must be varied offline for tests with 'tapeutil'.
Note: For additional information on the use of tapeutil, refer to http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/

abstracts/SG244632.html/Open
a. Select the tape utility to access the read/write tests.
b. Run the write and read options.
c. Load and unload tape each time.
d. Remove the scratch cartridge when complete.
Diagnostic Checkout of ESCON or FICON Adapters before Host Attach

– 3953 F05 Base Frame
Adapter checkout for the 3953 F05 Base Frame
Attention: The ESCON adapters used in the 3592 C06 controller each have two ESCON ports. Both
ports on the adapter must have an ESCON wrap tool attached when running the ESCON wrap test. This
also applies to the FICON adapters, if they are installed.
Note: ESCON wrap tools and FICON adapters (if they are installed) are in the ship group.
1. If installed, run the ESCON diagnostics by selecting the diagnostics and selecting the advanced
diagnostics routines > System Verification. From the list presented, select escon0–escon3.
2. If installed, run the FICON diagnostics by selecting the diagnostics, and selecting the advanced
diagnostics routines > System Verification. From the list presented, select the ficon0–ficon3.
3. Connect the ESCON or FICON cables to the adapters. Go to “3592 C06 Controller Plug Chart” on
page 2-17 for card plugging references based on your configuration.
This completes the verify/checkout of the 3592 C06 controller in a 3953 F05 Base Frame. Return to
the process that sent you here.

3953 F05 Expansion Frame with 3592 C06 controller
As many as five 3953 F05 Expansion Frames may be connected to one 3584 Logical Library, and there
can be as many as three 3592 C06 controllers in the Expansion frame. Installation checkout always starts
with the bottom 3592 C06 controller, proceeds to the middle, and then the top 3592 C06 controller if
installed.
Description of 3953 F05 Expansion Frame LAN Network Connections

Two eight-port SMC routers are in the top of the frame to handle Ethernet networks. The 250 Router on
the top is for the 250 Lan Network. The second router, located below the top router, is for the 251 Lan
Network. The System Console Network connection is in the WAN port in the rear of the 251 Router.
Refer to Figure 3-4 on page 3-17 when 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches are installed. Ports 1, 2, and
3 in the lower router 251 Router are used for the Ethernet connections to the 251 Fibre Switches, starting
at the bottom 251 Fibre Switch connecting to Port 1; the middle 251 Fibre Switch to Port 2, and the top
251 Fibre Switch to Port 3. The bottom, middle, and top 251 Fibre Switches connect to the bottom, middle,
and top 3592 C06 controllers respectively. The 251 Fibre Switches may be the only Fibre switches
installed if the Dual Fibre Switch configuration is not ordered. The 1 m Ethernet cable connects the
Ethernet port of each 251 Fibre Switch to the 251 Router ports.
Note: Refer to Figure 3-5 on page 3-18. Note that the 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches don't have an
Ethernet connection to the 251 Router or the 250 Router.
This paragraph applies to all Expansion frames regardless of the type of Fibre switch installed. Ports 4, 5,
and 6 in the lower router 251 Router, are used for the 251 Lan Network connection to the bottom, middle,
and top 3592 C06 controllers respectively. The 3.2 m Ethernet cables, are connected to Ethernet Port #1,
of each 3592 C06 controller in the frame. See 10 in Figure 2-6 on page 2-15. Port 8 of the lower router
is used for connection to the 251 Lan Network Switch in the Base Frame with a 100 ft (30M). Ethernet
cable. The other end of the cable from the first Expansion frame connects to Port 13 of the 251 Lan
Network Switch; the second Expansion frame cable connects to Port 14 and so forth. The fifth Expansion
frame cable connects to Port 17 of the 251 Lan Network Switch. The WAN port (Rear of Router) of this
251 Router connects to the System Console Network Switch located in the 3953 Base Frame via a 100 ft
(30M). Ethernet cable.
Refer to Figure 3-4 on page 3-17 and 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch connections. Aside from the
Ethernet LAN connections; the bottom, middle and top 251 Fibre Switches connects to the bottom, middle
and top 3592 C06 controllers respectively. From Port 1A and Port 1B of the Fibre Channel Adapter in slot
1 of each 3592 C06 controller, to Port 20 and Port 19 respectively, of the 251 Fibre Switch. If dual Fibre
Switches are not implemented (the 250 Fibre Switch is not installed) for any 3592 C06 controller, the fibre
cables from Port 4A and Port 4B of the Fibre Channel Adapter in slot 4 connect to Port 19 and 17
respectively, of the 251 Fibre Switch. Otherwise the 3592 C06 controller Slot 4 (Ports 4A and 4B) connect
to Port 20 and Port 19 respectively, of the 250 Fibre Switch.
Ports 1, 2, and 3 of the 250 Router are used for Ethernet connections to the 2 Gb 250 Fibre Switches, if
dual Fibre Switches are installed. Port 1 of the 250 Router is connected to the bottom 250 Fibre Switch,
Port 2 to the middle 250 Fibre Switch, and Port 3 to the top 250 Fibre Switch, with 1 m Ethernet cables.
The bottom, middle, and top 250 Fibre Switches, if installed, are attached to the bottom, middle and top
3592 C06 controllers respectively, with fibre cables from the Fibre Adapter in slot 4, Ports 4A and 4B, of
each 3592 C06 controller to the appropriate ports (Port 20 and Port 19, respectively).
Note: Refer to Figure 3-5 on page 3-18 when 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches are installed. Note that
the 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches don't have Ethernet cable connections to the 251 Router
or to the 250 Router.

This paragraph applies to all Expansion frames regardless of the type of Fibre switch installed. Ports 4, 5,
and 6 in the top 250 Router, are used for the 250 Lan Network connection to the bottom, middle and top
3592 C06 controller respectively. The 3.2 m Ethernet cables, are connected to Ethernet Port #2, 9 in
Figure 2-6 on page 2-15, of each 3592 C06 controller in the frame. Port 8 of the 250 Router is for
connection to the 250 Lan Network Switch in the Base Frame using a 100 ft (30M). Ethernet cable. Ports
13 through 17 of the 250 Lan Network Switch in the Base Frame are for connecting the 250 Router in the
first through fifth Expansion frames, respectively.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 W 8 Port 250 Router
To Base Frame
250 LAN Network Switch
(Ports 13-17)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 W 8 Port 251 Router

To Master Console Switch
in Base Frame (Ports 9-13)
To Base Frame
(Ports 13-17)
Top Ctlr
250 Fibre SW (20-port) 19 20 To Top
Ctlr Drives
Legend Top Ctlr To Top
251 Fibre SW (20-port) 19 20
Ctlr Drives
Ethernet
Fibre Middle Ctlr To Middle
250 Fibre SW (20-port) 19 20
Ctlr Drives
Middle Ctlr To Middle

251 Fibre SW (20-port) 19 20
Ctlr Drives
Bottom Ctlr
To Bottom
250 Fibre SW (20-port) 19 20
Ctlr Drives
Bottom Ctlr To Bottom

251 Fibre SW (20-port) 19 20
Ctlr Drives
C06 Ctlr (Top)

1 2 1A 1B 4A 4B
C06 Ctlr (Middle)

1 2 1A 1B 4A 4B
c0600009
C06 Ctlr (Bottom)

1 2 1A 1B 4A 4B
Figure 3-4. Expansion Frame Cabling with maximum number of 3592 C06 controllers and 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switches

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 W 8 Port 250 Router
To Base Frame
(Ports 13-17)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 W 8 Port 251 Router

To Master Console Switch
in Base Frame (Ports 9-13)
To Base Frame
251 LAN Network Switch (Ports 13-17)
Top Ctlr
2 Alternate Fibre Switch (4 Gb 20-port) 20
To Top
Ctlr Drives
Legend Top Ctlr To Top

1 Primary Fibre Switch (4 Gb 20-port) 19 Ctlr Drives
Ethernet
Fibre Middle Ctlr
2 Alternate Fibre Switch (4 Gb 20-port) 20 To Middle
Ctlr Drives
Middle Ctlr To Middle

Bottom Ctlr
2 Alternate Fibre Switch (4 Gb 20-port) 20 To Bottom
Ctlr Drives
Bottom Ctlr To Bottom

C06 Ctlr (Top)

1 2 1A 1B 4A 4B
C06 Ctlr (Middle)

1 2 1A 1B 4A 4B
C06 Ctlr (Bottom)

1 2 1A 1B 4A 4B
c0600025
Figure 3-5. Expansion Frame Cabling with maximum number of 3592 C06 controllers and 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switches
Check out a 3592 C06 controller in a 3953 F05 Expansion Frame

You are here to check out and configure up to three 3592 C06 controllers in the 3953 F05 Expansion
Frame and up to sixteen 3592 Tape Drives connected to each 3592 C06 controller. Read “Description of
3953 F05 Expansion Frame LAN Network Connections” on page 3-16.
v The 3953 F05 Expansion Frame may have arrived from the factory with up to three 3592 C06
controllers.
v A 3592 C06 controller may have been installed after the frame was shipped.
v The frame has the underfloor power connected.

– (one_2Gb) 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switchref_3592c06_f05expan.dita
Important: Install steps with these designators are unique to that switch. Unmarked steps apply
regardless of switch type installed.
v (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb) are the four switch configurations that can be installed in
the 3953 F05 Tape Frames. They are powered by two bifurcated power cables. One leg of each cable
is plugged into each of the two power supplies in these Fibre switches. If only one Fibre switch
(one_2Gb) or (one_4Gb) is attached to a 3592 C06 controller, one leg of each bifurcated power cable
will remain free in the frame.
v The 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch was either added through
a field installation or they already exist in the frame.
Note: The 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch and the 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch have twenty
switch positions. They are numbered from right to left starting at one for the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switch. They are numbered from left to right and top to bottom for the 4Gb 20-Port
Fibre Channel Switch.
v You may be asked to check out Fibre connections to an External Switch (director) provided by the
customer or to check out Fibre connections for a “Point–to–Point” attach to one, two, three, or four 3592
Tape Drives in the 3584 Tape Library. There is no Ethernet connection to an External Fibre Switch
(director).
The following steps are checkout of a 3953 F05 Expansion Frame.

1. If the 3592 C06 controller is not present in the Expansion frame and you are here to do a Field
Merge, go to “Field Merge 3592 C06 controller” on page 3-86. Return here when complete.
2. Check all power cabling from the PDU to the 3592 C06 controllers, 251 and 250 2Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switches or Primary and Alternate 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches and to the 251 and
250 Router. Ensure the PDU is on and you have power to this Expansion frame. If power is not on,
go to IBM System Storage 3953 Tape Frame F05 and Library Manager Model L05 MI.
3. Power on the 251 and the 250 Router, as well as all Fibre Switches. The green LED on the operator
panel of the 3592 C06 controller should blink. If dual PDUs are installed in the 3953 F05 Expansion
Frame, verify one of the two 3592 C06 controller power cords is connected to the PDU on one side of
the frame and the second power cord is connected to the PDU on the other side of the frame. Do
NOT power up the 3592 C06 controllers yet.
Note: Perform the following step (Reset of Routers) if you are installing the complete frame with all
3592 C06 controllers. Do NOT reset the Routers if you are adding a 3592 C06 controller or
Fibre Switch to an existing Expansion Frame.
4. Perform this step only as you start checkout of the whole frame in preparation for checkout of the first
(bottom) 3592 C06 controller. Press and hold the Reset button on the front panel of the 251 Router.
Refer to Table 4-2 on page 4-89 to reset the SMC Router. Repeat this procedure on the 250 Router.
5. Refer to Figure 3-4 on page 3-17 or to Figure 3-5 on page 3-18 and to “Description of 3953 F05
Expansion Frame LAN Network Connections” on page 3-16 to verify all LAN cabling from the 3592
C06 controllers in the frame to the 251 Router and 250 Router. Verify Ethernet cabling from the 251
Fibre Switches (2 Gb) to the 251 Router and from the 250 Fibre Switches (2 Gb) to the 250 Router.
Verify the Ethernet connection from the WAN port in the rear of the 251 Router to the System
Console Switch in the 3953 F05 Base Frame. Verify the Ethernet connection from Port 8 of the 251

Router to the 251 Lan Network Switch in the 3953 F05 Base Frame, as well as the Ethernet
connection from port 8 of the 250 Router to the 250 Lan Network Switch in the 3953 F05 Base
Frame.
6. Cable labels should already be attached to both ends of all Ethernet cables if shipped from the
factory. For 3592 C06 controller Field installs the labels will have to be peeled from the “C06–250
labels” and “C06–251 labels” sheets and attached to the appropriate Ethernet cables. The red stripe
on the label indicates the cable is connected to the 250 (LAN) net, the blue striped labels are used on
251 (LAN) net cables. A set of cable labels, including 3592 C06 controller 250 labels and 3592 C06
controller 251 labels are part of the 3592 C06 controller ship group.
Note: The following steps are installation checkout of one 3592 C06 controller at a time. Start with
the bottom 3592 C06 controller, then progress to the middle and top 3592 C06 controller if
they are installed in the 3953 F05 Expansion Frame.
7. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb). Verify the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch or the
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch is physically attached to this 3592 C06 controller. See Figure 2-8
on page 2-17 and Figure 2-13 on page 2-21 to determine which type is installed.
The 3592 C06 controller may have up to sixteen 3592 Tape Drives in a 3584 “logical library”. This
means that some of the drives may be in different 3584 Tape Library frames. Be sure you know
where the drives are located for correct fibre cable connections and labeling. The correct location of
the drives will be checked at the end of the 3592 C06 controller checkout and configuration.
8. (one_2Gb) The 3592 C06 controller may be connected to a maximum of sixteen 3592 Tape Drives.
See Table 3-3 on page 3-21 and Figure 2-10 on page 2-19 to verify drives 0 to 15 are cabled
correctly if one the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch is installed.
9. (one_4Gb) The 3592 C06 controller may be connected to a maximum of sixteen 3592 Tape Drives.
See Table 3-4 on page 3-21 and Figure 2-15 on page 2-23 to verify drives 0 to 15 are cabled
correctly if one 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch is installed.
10. (two_2Gb) (two_4Gb) The 3592 C06 controller may be connected to a maximum of sixteen 3592
Tape Drives. See Table 3-3 on page 3-21 and Figure 2-12 on page 2-21 to verify drives 0 to 15 are
cabled correctly if two the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches are installed. See Figure 2-16 on
page 2-24 and Table 3-4 on page 3-21 if two 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches are installed.
11. (one_2Gb) (one_4Gb) See Figure 2-10 on page 2-19 to verify the Fibre Channel Adapters are cabled
correctly if one the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch is installed. See Figure 2-15 on page 2-23 if
one 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch is installed.
12. (two_2Gb) (two_4Gb) See Figure 2-12 on page 2-21 to verify the Fibre Channel Adapters are cabled
correctly if two the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches are installed. See Figure 2-16 on page 2-24
to verify correct fibre cable connection between the Fibre Channel Adapters and the 4Gb 20-Port
Fibre Channel Switches if two 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches are installed.

Table 3-3. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table with the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
Switch port # Connects to 3592 Channel Switch Connects to 3592
Lower Tape Drive # Port 0 port # Upper Tape Drive # Port 1 Location
Slot 1B Slot 4B
Slot 1A Slot 4A

Table 3-4. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table – 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch to Tape Drives
port # Lower Tape Drive # Port 0 port # Upper Tape Drive # Port 1 Location
1 priA 1 Reserved 3584 Logical Library
2 See Note 2 altB 3584 Logical Library

Table 3-4. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table – 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch to Tape Drives (continued)
19 priB 19 Reserved
20 See Note 20 altA

13. (EXT) To verify correct Fibre cable connections from a maximum of 16 drives to an External Switch
(Director), go to “Verify Cabling to an External Switch (Director)” on page 3-76
14. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb) Route the fibre cables along the right side to the
switch, using the plastic clamps and hook and eye (velcro) straps as needed, and plug into the
switch. Then route the fibre cables from the switch to the drives in the 3584 Tape Library.
Note: Consult the system administrator regarding availability and routing of the fibre cables from the
Fibre Channel Switch to the drives in the 3584 Tape Library. These fibre cables (connecting
Fibre Switch to drive) are provided by the customer.
15. See the 3592 C06 controller Label Usage Instructions manual for labels to be attached to the C06
Fibre Channel Adapter end and FC switch end of each of the four fibre cables on the 3592 C06
controller FC Adapter to FC switch interface. Attach the denoted label with the blue stripe on the fibre
cable connecting the 3592 C06 controller FC Adapter slot 1A(priA) to the251 Fibre Switch (Primary).
Two more of these labels will be applied to the second cable from the bottom port (priB) of the Dual
Port FC Adapter in slot 1. Use this label again if you have only one Fibre Switch installed and attach
it to the fibre cable from 3592 C06 controller FC Adapter in slot 4A(altA) to the 251 Primary Fibre
Switch. Two more of these labels will be applied to the second fibre cable from the bottom port (altB)
of the Dual Port FC Adapter in slot 4.
16. Use the denoted label if the Dual Fibre Switch configuration is installed. In this case the fibre cable
connects the 3592 C06 controller FC Adapter in slot 4 to the 250 Fibre Switch (Alternate). Use two
labels with the red stripe for the cable connecting slot 4A(altA) to the Alternate Fibre Switch. Two
more of these labels will be applied to the second fibre cable from the bottom port (altB) of a Dual
Port FC Adapter in slot 4. This label is also used if the 3592 C06 controller is connected to an
External switch which is zoned for redundant pathing (to Port 0 and to Port 1) to the drives in the
3584 Tape Library.
17. Use a ballpoint pen to write a number X on the line next to C06# on each label. The number X is
determined by the position of the 3592 C06 controller within an 3953 F05 Expansion Frame (Frame 2
to 6). Increment X by 1 for every 3592 C06 controller in additional 3953 F05 Expansion Frames,
progressing from the bottom to the top 3592 C06 controller in the 3953 F05 Expansion Frame.
v For example:
v If you are installing the bottom 3592 C06 controller in the first Expansion frame (Frame 2), X = 2.
v If you are installing the middle 3592 C06 controller, X = 3.
v If you are installing the top 3592 C06 controller, X = 4.
v Always assign X = 5 to the bottom 3592 C06 controller in the second Expansion frame.
v Always assign X = 8 to the bottom 3592 C06 controller in the third Expansion frame.
v Always assign X = 11 for the bottom 3592 C06 controller in the fourth Expansion frame.
v Always assign X = 14 for the bottom 3592 C06 controller in the fifth Expansion frame.

18. Refer to Table 3-5 on page 3-26 for verification. X represents the Subsystem Number (SSN X) of this
3592 C06 controller. It is especially important when you check for correct Library Manager
configuration of this 3592 Tape Controller in a later step.
19. See 3592 C06 controller Label Usage Instructions manual for the labels to be attached to the drive
end and FC switch end of each fibre cable on the drive to FC switch interface. Use the denoted
label on cables connecting the 251 Fibre Switch (Primary) ports to Port 0 of each drive.
20. If the Dual Fibre Switch configuration is installed, the cables are connecting ports on the 250 Fibre
Switch (Alternate) to Port 1 of each drive. This label is also to be used when fibre cables are
connected to Port 1 of drives from an External switch.
21. Use a ballpoint pen to mark the attached labels as shown in the 3592 C06 controller Label Usage
Instructions manual, by writing the letter X (previously determined in Step 17 on page 3-22) on each
label next to C06# , indicating that each drive is attached to C06#X, the Xth 3592 Tape Controller
attached to the Library Manager. Fill in the number for the 3584 Tape Library frame number (FR#)
where the 3592 Tape Drives are installed. Then write in the drive position number (DR#) of the
attached drive within the 3584 Tape Library frame.
22. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb) (EXT) Power on the External switch (director) if it is
used. The 251 Fibre Switches (Primary) and the 250 Fibre Switches (Alternate) should already be
powered on. If an External switch (director) is used, make sure that it is powered on.
23. Ensure the drives in the 3584 Tape Library are powered ON. If necessary, refer to the IBM
System Storage TS3500 Tape Library 3584 MI. Set the control paths for the attached drives in the
3584 Logical Library from the 3584 operator panel or from the 3584 Web Specialist. You will have to
know where the drives are located to enable the control paths for each selected drive.
Note: Ensure all of the drives attached to this 3592 C06 controller are part of one logical library.
Check with the systems administrator to ensure that 3584 Tape Library settings for your drives
are correct. Ensure the control path is set for each drive on up to four drives. If more than four
drives are connected to the 3592 C06 controller, ensure that you set the four control paths, to
assure control path access to drives which may be located in different physical frames of the
3584 Tape Library.
24. If these drives are to be used for encryption, verify the drives have been enabled for encryption. For a
3584 Tape Library, verify with the customer the 3592 Tape Drives have been set up for encryption.
The drives must be set up for System Managed Encryption.
25. Green LED on the 3592 C06 controller operator panel must blink before the controller powers ON.
26. Power on the 3592 C06 controller. See 14 in Figure 2-7 on page 2-16. Alternatively, power ON the
controller via ASMI menu. See “Power ON 3592 C06 controller by using ASMI” on page 4-87.
27. If you are powering ON a field merged C06, disconnect the Ethernet cables at 3592 C06 controller
Ethernet Port #1, 10 and at Ethernet Port #2, 9 in Figure 2-6 on page 2-15, temporarily.
28. (EXT) If the 3592 Tape Drives are connected to an External switch (director), go to “Drive Checkout
in the 3584 Tape Library (External Switch)” on page 4-40. Return here when complete. Continue with
step 30.
29. (P_to_P) If you are connecting 3592 Tape Drives point-to-point, go to “Point-to-Point Drive Attach on
3584 Tape Library (Direct Attachment)” on page 4-86. Return here when complete.
maximum number of drives that may be cabled to the 3592 Tape Controller. The default setting is 16,
ensure it is set to 16. Return here when complete.
mounted Controller” on page 4-6 for 3584 Tape Library attachment, to set up the 3592 C06 controller.

Ensure that you reconnected the Ethernet cables at the 3592 C06 controller, if you disconnected any
in Step 27 on page 3-23.
Note: Ensure you carefully read the opening paragraph of the LAN configuration procedure. This
describes disconnecting the Ethernet cables from uninstalled 251 and 250 2Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switches. A later step in the procedure describes which Ethernet cables should be
reconnected.
32. If you wish to set a distinct hostname for the controller, from the Subsystem Maintenance menu,
Press Enter.
Enter a unique hostname that will show a relationship to the last octet of the controller IP address,
that is, 10, 20, 30, or 40, and so forth. An example is elcc0620. Press Enter.
33. If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption, and this is the first controller that you are going to
attach to the 250 Encryption Router, go to “Set 250 Encryption Router Configuration (For
Library-Managed Controllers)” on page 4-118. Return here when complete.
34. Go to “Call Home Procedure” of the IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library Controllers
Maintenance Information to set up Call Home and TSSC System Console connections. In that
manual, follow the instructions for the J70 controller to set up the 3592 C06 controller. Return here
when complete.
Note: During the TSSC Router configuration by the bottom 3592 C06 controller, both LANs in this
Expansion frame must be isolated from their LANs in other frames. Disconnect the Ethernet
cable from port 8 of both Routers, temporarily. Reconnect the Ethernet cable after successful
configuration of both Routers by the bottom 3592 C06 controller. It is not necessary to
disconnect the Ethernet cables when running the configuration from the middle, or top 3592
C06 controller.
35. Perform this step regardless whether this 3592 C06 controller is connected to an external System
Console or to the imbedded System Console (FC 2721) in the 3953 F05 Base Frame, and even if the
imbedded System Console is not yet powered ON or is not yet configured. Go to “Show / Change
TSSC connection” on page 4-89 to set the 251 Router LAN address and WAN addresses for the
System Console connection. Return here when complete.
36. As described in Step 11 on page 4-92, at the completion of configuration of the bottom 3592 C06
controller, verify the Ethernet cables from each Router to both LAN Network Switches in the Base
Frame have been reconnected to port 8 of each Router.
37. Skip this step if this 3592 C06 controller is connected to the imbedded System Console (FC 2721) in
the 3953 F05 Base Frame and the imbedded System Console is not yet powered ON or not yet
configured. In this case, the 3592 C06 controller will be configured to the System Console at a later
time when bring up of the System Console is completed. Go to the Configuration section of the
Installation chapter in the IBM System Storage TS3000 System Console (TSSC) Maintenance
Information to configure the System Console for this 3592 C06 controller. Return here when
complete.
to the Encryption Key Manager 251 Router, go to “Set 251 Encryption Router Configuration (For
Library-Managed Controllers)” on page 4-112. Return here when complete.
39. If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption, and this is the second through sixteenth controller to
be attached to the Encryption Key Manager 251 Router and 250 Router, go to “Controller Routes for
using pre-configured Encryption Routers” on page 4-121 to set static routes. Return here when
complete.
40. Go to “Run SCSI / Fibre Channel Configuration” on page 4-100 and select Run SCSI/FCP
Configurator. This procedure configures the drives and smcx (control) paths and checks for correct
installation.
a. When SCSI/FCP Configuration completes, the configured, available drives (starting with rmt0priA
and rmt0altA) and available smcx (control) paths display. The smcx paths appear at the end of

the listing. You should see four smcx paths for every control path enabled for a drive with Dual
Port Fibre Channel Adapters installed in the 3592 C06 controller. The 3584 Tape Library provides
the additional failover paths.
b. If the drive path and control path configuration are correct, verify the correct location of all drives
connected to this 3592 C06 controller by selecting the following steps sequentially, from the
Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Control Unit Service Utilities > SCSI/FCP Utilities
Menu > Display all 3584 Tape Drive Locations
c. Ensure each attached drive (with rmtxpriA and rmtxaltA designations as well as rmtxpriB and
rmtxaltB designations, when Dual Port FC Adapters are installed.) is in the correct 3584 Tape
Library frame and correct drive position.
d. When drive configuration has checked out successfully, bring the Control Unit back online. From
the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Control Unit and Tape Drive Online Offline Control
> Vary Control Unit Online
encryption. Return here when complete.
42. If not already done, check if this 3592 C06 controller has been included in the current 3953 L05
configuration. To check, perform the following steps:
a. At the Library Manager screen, verify the Library Manager is offline.
b. Select Configure Library (Full) from the Configure menu.
c. The Volser Ranges–Full Configure screen appears for Volser information. Skip from this screen
by selecting Start Config....
d. The Configure Library–Subsystems screen appears. Remember that you are configuring 3592
C06 controller 3592 Tape Controller, Subsystem Number X (SSN X) with IP address fourth octet
of .X0. Refer to the number X previously determined in Step 17 on page 3-22.
e. Go to the row for SSN X (IPA of .X0), and verify that “CU” appears in the “SS Type” column. If
“CU” appears for your subsystem, the controller has been configured to the Library Manager.
Select Exit/Cancel, and continue with step 43. Return the Library Manager to the online state.
f. If you see “Not Used” in the row for your subsystem, your 3592 C06 controller subsystem has to
be configured to the 3953 L05 Library Manager.
g. Click on the down arrow ↓ in the row for your 3592 C06 controller subsystem to select “CU.”
h. Consult the Vary Control Unit OnlineFull Subsystem Configuration section of the IBM System
Storage 3953 Tape Frame F05 and Library Manager Model L05 MI.
i. Follow the instructions in the 3953 L05 Library Manager MI to complete inclusion of the 3592 C06
controller in the 3953 L05 configuration. Return here when complete.
43. To verify the interface between the 3953 L05 Library Manager and the 3592 C06 controller and its
drives is functional, perform the following steps:
a. At the Library Manager screen select Service > Test Interface→Control Unit. Continue with
further selections by consulting IBM System Storage 3953 Tape Frame F05 and Library Manager
Model L05 MI in Chapter 5, Test Interface section. Return here when complete.
44. Perform this step if the 3592 C06 controller is connected to the System Console, and the System
Console is operational. Select the following options, starting at the Subsystem Maintenance menu
select Subsystem Configuration > Call Home / Remote Services Menu
a. Go to “Sending Test Call Home” in the IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library Controllers
when complete.
45. Checkout and configuration of this 3592 C06 controller is now complete. To verify the installation has
been concluded successfully, make the following selections, from the Subsystem Maintenance
menu, select Run Control Unit Checkout

Note: A legitimate error may be displayed for the ping to the System Console if you skipped step 37
on page 3-24.
46. You have completed installation checkout and configuration of a 3592 C06 controller in the Expansion
Frame. If you have completed configuration of the bottom 3592 C06 controller, return to step 7 on
page 3-20 to start installation checkout (and configuration) of the middle 3592 C06 controller. If you
have completed work on the middle 3592 C06 controller, return to Step 7 on page 3-20 to start
installation checkout of the top 3592 C06 controller. If you have completed installation checkout of all
3592 C06 controllers in the 3953 F05 Expansion Frame, refer to Table 3-5 and Table 3-6 on page
3-27 for IP addressing verification of the 3592 C06 controllers in your 3953 F05 Expansion Frame.
47. Since this step requires the 3584 Tape Library door to be opened, perform this step only if it doesn't
interfere with customer operations. Refer to “Running Online Diagnostics from 3592 C06 controller”
on page 4-101 and select 'tapeutil' (from the main service menu) to exercise the read and write
circuits of each tape drive installed. The drive must be varied offline for tests with 'tapeutil'.

c. Load and Unload tape each time.
IP Chart for 3592 C06 controller Attachment in 3953 F05 Tape Frames
Contains two charts that provide IP addresses for routers and switches.
Table 3-5. 250 LAN IP Settings in 3953 F05 Tape Frames
Frame # Position 250 IP Setting
3592 C06 #1 1 1 (Bottom) 192.168.250.10
3592 C06 #2 2 1 (Bottom) 192.168.250.20
3592 C06 #3 2 2 (Middle) 192.168.250.30
3592 C06 #4 2 3 (Top) 192.168.250.40
3592 C06 #5 3 1 (Bottom) 192.168.250.50
3592 C06 #6 3 2 (Middle) 192.168.250.60
3592 C06 #7 3 3 (Top) 192.168.250.70
3592 C06 #8 4 1 (Bottom) 192.168.250.80
3592 C06 #9 4 2 (Middle) 192.168.250.90
3592 C06 #10 4 3 (Top) 192.168.250.100
3592 C06 #11 5 1 (Bottom) 192.168.250.110
3592 C06 #12 5 2 (Middle) 192.168.250.120
3592 C06 #13 5 3 (Top) 192.168.250.130
3592 C06 #14 6 1 (Bottom) 192.168.250.140
3592 C06 #15 6 2 (Middle) 192.168.250.150
3592 C06 #16 6 3 (Top) 192.168.250.160
or
3592 C06 #14 6 1 (Bottom) 192.168.250.140
3494 Bxx or 3957 N/A N/A 192.168.250.150
V06 #1

Table 3-5. 250 LAN IP Settings in 3953 F05 Tape Frames (continued)
Frame # Position 250 IP Setting
3494 Bxx or 3957 N/A N/A 192.168.250.160
V06 #2
Table 3-6. 251 LAN IP Settings in 3953 F05 Frames

Frame # 251 IP Setting 251 Router LAN 251 Router WAN
3592 C06 #1 1 192.168.251.10 192.168.251.15 172.31.1.15
3592 C06 #2 2 192.168.251.20 192.168.251.25 172.31.1.25
3592 C06 #3 2 192.168.251.30 192.168.251.25 172.31.1.35
3592 C06 #4 2 192.168.251.40 192.168.251.25 172.31.1.45
3592 C06 #5 3 192.168.251.50 192.168.251.55 172.31.1.55
3592 C06 #6 3 192.168.251.60 192.168.251.55 172.31.1.65
3592 C06 #7 3 192.168.251.70 192.168.251.55 172.31.1.75
3592 C06 #8 4 192.168.251.80 192.168.251.85 172.31.1.85
3592 C06 #9 4 192.168.251.90 192.168.251.85 172.31.1.95
3592 C06 #10 4 192.168.251.100 192.168.251.85 172.31.1.105
3592 C06 #11 5 192.168.251.110 192.168.251.115 172.31.1.115
3592 C06 #12 5 192.168.251.120 192.168.251.115 172.31.1.125
3592 C06 #13 5 192.168.251.130 192.168.251.115 172.31.1.135
3592 C06 #14 6 192.168.251.140 192.168.251.145 172.31.1.145
3592 C06 #15 6 192.168.251.150 192.168.251.145 172.31.1.155
3592 C06 #16 6 192.168.251.160 192.168.251.145 172.31.1.165
or
3592 C06 #14 6 192.168.251.140 192.168.251.145 172.31.1.145
3494 Bxx or N/A 192.168.251.150 N/A N/A
3957 V06 #1
3494 Bxx or N/A 192.168.251.160 N/A N/A
3957 V06 #2

– 3953 F05 Expansion Frame
Use this information to perform checkout of adapters for the 3953 F05 Expansion Frame 3592 C06
controllers.
Attention: The ESCON adapters used in the 3592 C06 controller each have two ESCON ports. When
running the ESCON wrap test, both ports on the adapter must have an ESCON wrap tool attached. This
also applies to FICON adapters, if they are installed.
Note: ESCON wrap tools are provided in the ship group. FICON adapters are provided in the ship group,
if they are installed.

3. Connect the ESCON or FICON cables to the Adapters. Go to “3592 C06 Controller Plug Chart” on
This completes the verify/checkout of the 3953 F05 Expansion Frame 3592 C06 controllers. Return to
the procedure that sent you here.

3952 F05 Frame (Outbound) with a 3592 C06 controller cabled to D24
and D22 Frames
| The 3592-C06 with 3494 attached libraries does not support 3592-E07 drives.
Installing a 3592 C06 controller connected to a 3494 D24 Frame

Use this information to install a 3592 C06 controller into the 3953 F05 Tape Frame, connected to a 3494
D24 Frame. The Fibre Channel Switches are in the 3494 D24 Frame.
1. Remove any packing material from the frame. Save any hardware shipped with the frame.
2. Move the 3953 F05 Tape Frame control unit frame in place. If it is installed on a raised floor, ensure
the hole cutout is placed under the rear of the frame.
3. Loosen the locknuts on the leveling pads using the 43 MM wrench supplied with the 3953 F05 Tape
Frame, and lower the leveling pads to the floor.
4. Use the 43 MM wrench to adjust the leveling pads until the frame is approximately level and parallel
with the floor, and the casters are off the floor (approximately one full turn of leveling pad after it
touches the floor). Lock the leveling pads in place by running the locknuts up until they are tight
against underside of frame member.
5. Free up movement for the 3592 C06 controller by removing the bolts from the shipping bracket
attached to the front of the 3592 C06 controller.
6. Install the front cover to the 3592 C06 controller.
Check out a 3592 C06 controller attached to 3494 D24 and D22 frame
You are here to check out a 3592 C06 controller in a 3953 F05 Tape Frame (Outbound) frame cabled to a
3494 D24 Frame containing up to eight 3592 Tape Drives.
v The 3494 D24 Frame already has been connected to the 3494 Tape Library. The frame has the
underfloor power connected.
v The Fibre Channel Switches already have been connected to the 3592 Tape Drives.
– (P-to-P) Point to Point attach
Important: Installation steps with these designators (in bold script) are unique to that switch. Unmarked
steps apply regardless of switch type installed.
v The 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch or the 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch was added through
field installation or it already existed in the 3494 D24 Frame.
Note: The 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch and the 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch have twenty
switch positions, and they are numbered from right to left for the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch. They are numbered from left to right and top to bottom for the 4Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switch.
customer, or to check out Fibre connections for a “point-to-point” attach to one or two 3592 Tape Drives.

The following steps apply to checkout of a 3494 D24 Frame.
1. Verify the Router is physically installed in the outbound 3952 F05 Frame underneath the bottom 3592
C06 controller, and two more on the top of the 3952 F05 Frame for the middle and top 3592 C06
controllers in the outbound frame.
2. Verify the power cord is connected to the Ethernet router and the PDU.
3. Verify the router is cabled correctly to the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch in the 3494 D24 Frame
if the 2Gb Fibre Switch is installed and to the 3592 C06 controller. See Figure 3-7 on page 3-34 for
2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch. There is no Ethernet connection to an External Fibre Channel
Switch (director).
Note: The WAN port shown on the SMC Router is physically located on the rear of the router. The
WAN port is used for ethernet connection to the TSSC System Console. Verify this connection
if feature code FC2720 (TSSC System Console connection) is to be activated. See Figure 2-5
on page 2-15.
4. Verify the router has a connection to the Library Manager (251 Lan Network Switch) located in the
Library Manager frame
5. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb) Verify the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch or the
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch is physically installed in the 3494 D24 Frame. See Figure 2-8 on
page 2-17 and Figure 2-13 on page 2-21 to determine which type is installed.
6. If FC 5245 (Dual LAN) is NOT installed, skip this step. Otherwise, if FC 5245 (Dual LAN) is installed,
verify there is also an ethernet connection from the 3592 C06 controller in the 3952 Model F05 frame
to the 250 Lan Network switch in the Library Manager frame. See “LAN Configuration Matrix (Quick
Reference For Dual LAN In 3494 or 3953 Environment)” on page 3-77 for install verification or see
Figure 4-73 on page 4-81 for locations.
7. Each fibre cable should have a label attached at each end. The Adapter label first digit is the adapter
card designation, Adapter 0 in slot 1, adapter 1 in slot 4. The second digit is the port on the adapter,
if two adapter ports are present.
Note: You have two sheets of labels for installing one Fibre Channel switch, and four sheets of
labels for installing dual Fibre Channel switches or an External switch (director). Refer to
Table 2-7 on page 2-24 for an example.
8. (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) The 3494 D24 Frame contains up to eight 3592 Tape Drives. See Table 3-7 on
page 3-32 for a single 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch or Table 3-8 on page 3-32 to verify drives 0
to 7 are cabled correctly if one 2Gb or one 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch is installed.

3494 D24 3494 D22
FC Switch
Eth
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#7 #5
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#6 #4
3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#3 #1 # 15 # 13
3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#2 #0 # 14 # 12
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

# 11 #9
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

# 10 #8
PCC
PCC
To 250
LAN
Network C06
Switch
Eth
Eth 1 2 3 4 5 6
To 251
LAN
PDU
c0600082
Network WAN LAN Router

Switch
Outbound Frame
Figure 3-6. One 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch. 3592 C06 controller and Router are actually in outbound 3952 F05
Frame
3592 C06 controller Slot 2Gb Switch Port

Dual Port Cards with Single Switch
1 A (priA) = Top port on dual port adapter in Slot 1 20
1 B (priB) = Bottom port on dual port adapter in Slot 1 18
4 A (altA) = Top port on dual port adapter in Slot 4 19
4 B (altB) = Bottom port on dual port adapter in Slot 4 17
9. (two_2Gb) (two_4Gb) The 3494 D24 Frame contains as many as eight 3592 Tape Drives. See
Table 3-7 on page 3-32 and Figure 3-7 on page 3-34 to verify drives 0 to 7 are cabled correctly if two
2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches are installed. See Table 3-8 on page 3-32 and Figure 3-8 on
page 3-35 to verify the 3592 Tape Drives are cabled correctly if two 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switches are installed.

10. (one_2Gb) (one_4Gb) See Figure 3-6 on page 3-31 (2Gb Switch) to verify the Fibre Channel
Adapters are cabled correctly if one 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch is installed. See Table 3-8 and
Figure 2-14 on page 2-22 if one 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch is installed.
Note: Ensure the fibre cables are routed correctly from the 3592 C06 controller Fibre Channel
Adapters in the outbound frame to the fibre switches in the 3494 D24 Frame.
11. (two_2Gb) (two_4Gb) See Figure 3-7 on page 3-34 to verify the Fibre Channel Adapters are cabled
correctly if two 2Gb, or see Figure 3-8 on page 3-35 if two 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches are
installed.
Switch port # Connects to 3592 Tape Channel Switch Connects to 3592 Tape
Lower Drive # Port 0 port # Upper Drive # Port 1 Location
1 Drive 0 1 Drive 0 D24
17 Reserved 17 Reserved
19 Slot 1B 19 Slot 4B F05
20 Slot 1A 20 Slot 4A F05

Table 3-8. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table With 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch to 3592 Tape Drives
1 priA 1 Reserved D24
2 See Note 2 altB D24

Table 3-8. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table With 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch to 3592 Tape
Drives (continued)
19 priB 19 Reserved
20 See Note 20 altA

12. (EXT) To verify correct Fibre cable connections from a maximum of sixteen drives to an External
switch (director), go to “Verify Cabling to an External Switch (Director)” on page 3-76
13. The following four steps apply if a D22 or L22 frame is installed as an adjacent frame to this 3494
D24 Frame. If not, skip to step 17 on page 3-35
14. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb) Route the Fibre Channel cables, from an L22 or D22
frame to the switch in the 3494 D24 Frame. Route the fibre cables up the right side. Using the plastic
clamps and hook and loop fastening (velcro) straps, as needed.
15. (one_2Gb) (one_4Gb) See Table 3-7 on page 3-32 and Table 3-8 on page 3-32 to verify drives 8 to
15 are cabled correctly if one 2Gb or one 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch respectively, is installed.
16. (two_2Gb) (two_4Gb) See Table 3-7 on page 3-32 and Figure 3-7 on page 3-34 for two 2Gb 20-Port
Fibre Channel Switches. See Table 3-8 on page 3-32 and Figure 3-8 on page 3-35 for two 4Gb
20-Port Fibre Channel Switches, to verify drives 8 to 15 are cabled correctly.

3494 D24
FC Switch
Eth
3494 D22
FC Switch
Eth
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#7 #5
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#6 #4
3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#3 #1 # 15 # 13
3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#2 #0 # 14 # 12
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

# 11 #9
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

# 10 #8
PCC
PCC
C06
To 250
LAN
Network
Switch Eth
Eth 1 2 3 4 5 6
To 251
LAN
PDU
Network
c0600083
Switch WAN LAN Router

Outbound Frame
Figure 3-7. Two 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches With 3592 Tape Drives in 3494 D24/D22 Frame. 3592 C06
controller and router are in outbound 3952 F05 Frame.

3494 D24 3494 D22
FC Switch
FC Switch
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#7 #5
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#6 #4
3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#3 #1 # 15 # 13
3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#2 #0 # 14 # 12
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

# 11 #9
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

# 10 #8
PCC
PCC
To 250
LAN C06
Network
Switch
Eth
Eth 1 2 3 4 5 6
To 251
LAN
Network
PDU
c0600084
Outbound Frame
Figure 3-8. Two 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Ports in the 3494 D24 Frame. 3592 C06 controller and router are
physically in the outbound 3952 F05 Frame.
17. Ensure the PDU is powered ON, and the 3952 Model F05 (Outbound) frame is powered ON. If power
is off, go to IBM 3494 Tape Library Dataserver Maintenance Information.

18. Green LED on the 3592 C06 controller operator panel must blink before powering on.
19. Power on the 3592 C06 controller with the power on switch, see 14 in Figure 2-7 on page 2-16.
Alternatively, power up the controller via ASMI menu. See “Power ON 3592 C06 controller by using
ASMI” on page 4-87.
20. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb) (EXT) Power ON the 2Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switch(es) and the SMC Router. If an External switch (director) is used, make sure it is
powered ON.
21. Power ON the drives in the 3494 D24 Frame and the adjacent D22 frame, if installed. Set the
| addresses as specified in Table 3-9. Go to the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140
| Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6
| and E07, “Installation Checkout,” and to “Set Customer Options” to set the AL_PA (Arbitrated Loop
Physical Address) and the speed and L-protocol. Skip to Step 24. If the 3592 Tape Drives are
connected through an External switch (director), or you are installing “point-to-point drive attach,” go
to the next Step.
Table 3-9. 3494 D24 and D22 Frame Drive AL_PA Addresses
Frame Drive # Hard Address Comments
D24 0 43 Base Frame
D24 1 45 Base Frame
D24 2 46 Base Frame
D24 3 47 Base Frame
D24 4 49 Base Frame
D24 5 4A Base Frame
D24 6 4B Base Frame
D24 7 4C Base Frame
D22 8 4D Adjacent Frame
D22 9 4E Adjacent Frame
D22 A 51 Adjacent Frame
D22 B 52 Adjacent Frame
D22 C 53 Adjacent Frame
D22 D 54 Adjacent Frame
D22 E 55 Adjacent Frame
D22 F 56 Adjacent Frame
22. (EXT) If the 3592 Tape Drives are connected to an External switch (director), go to “Drive Setup for
External Switch (3494 or 3592 C06 controller attach to C20, or Rack)” on page 4-41. Return here
when complete, and proceed to step 25.
23. (P_to_P) If you are connecting 3592 Tape Drives point-to-point, go to “Point-to-Point Drive Attach
(Direct Attachment)” on page 4-85. Return here when complete, and proceed to step 25.
24. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb) Ensure you set the tape drives to the L topology only
| when attached to the 2Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches. Refer to IBM System Storage
| TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592
| Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07 to set topology.
number of drives cabled to this controller or will be cabled to the controller in the future. The
recommendation is that you set the controller for 16 devices. Ensure you read the notes at the
beginning of the procedure.
26. If these drives are to be used for encryption, verify the drives have been enabled for encryption. See
“Enabling Encryption On Encryption-Capable Drive” on page 4-54 for instructions to set up the drives
to work with the controller (3592 C06 controller or 3592 J70). Return here when complete.

28. If you want to set a distinct hostname for the controller, from the Subsystem Maintenance menu,
Press Enter.
that is, 10, 20, 30, or 40, and so forth. An example is ibmc0620. Press Enter.
Controllers)” on page 4-118. Return here to continue.
– –OR – –
If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption, and this is the eighth controller you are setting up
for encryption, you cannot connect to the first 250 Encryption Router. Therefore, this is the first
controller you are going to attach to the second 250 Encryption Router. Go to “Set second 250
Encryption Router configuration” on page 4-134. Return here to continue.
when complete.
31. Go to “Show / Change TSSC connection” on page 4-89 to set the router IP addresses for connection
to a TSSC System Console. Return here when complete.
32. Go to the IBM System Storage TS3000 System Console (TSSC) Maintenance Information to
Configure TSSC System Console for this 3592 C06 controller (if it is connected). See the
“Configuration” section in Chapter 2 “Installation” of the TSSC MI to configure the System Console
for this 3592 C06 controller. Return here when complete.
– –OR – –
If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption, and this is the eighth controller, you cannot connect
to the first 251 Encryption Router. Therefore, this is the first controller you are going to attach to the
second 251 Encryption Router. Go to “Set second 251 Encryption Router configuration” on page
4-130. Return here to continue.
34. If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption, and this is the second through seventh controller to
be attached to the 251 Encryption and the 250 Encryption Router, go to “Controller Routes for using
pre-configured Encryption Routers” on page 4-121 to set static routes. Return here to continue.
If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption, and this is the ninth through fourteenth controller to
be attached to the second 250 Encryption Router and to the second 251 Encryption Router, go to
“Set Ninth through Fourteenth Controller IP Routes to second 251 and 250 Encryption Routers 3494
Tape Library only” on page 4-138 to set static routes. Return here to continue.
35. Go to “Run SCSI / Fibre Channel Configuration” on page 4-100. Select Run SCSI/FCP Configurator
to configure the drives and check for correct installation. Encryption-enabled drives display as
"Enabled."
36. When drive configuration has checked out successfully bring the controller back online, from the
Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Control Unit and Tape Drive Online Offline Control > Vary
Control Unit Online
37. See “Attaching 3494 Tape Library cables to 3592 C06 controller - 3494 D24 Frame” on page 3-39.
Verify the LAN cables have been installed properly. Return here when complete.
38. Teach the 3494 Tape Library.

If a Teach was performed when the 3592 Tape Drives were installed, it will not be necessary to do
one now. Proceed to Step 39 on page 3-39.
If a Teach is required, go to the IBM 3494 Tape Library MI for instructions on performing the Teach.
Before you leave this MI, however, note the two examples of Teach screens may not be in the 3494
Tape Library MI you are using. In the first screen depicted in Figure 3-9, note frames 2 and 3, and
frames 5 and 6 are the adjacent 3494 D24 Frames.
a. Ensure frames 2 and 3 (example shown) both have the DU selected.
b. Select either RTIC or LAN, depending on how the controller is connected to the Library Manager.
c. In the block for frame 3, in the LF: block, put in a 2, in the block for frame 2, in the LF: block, put
in a 3. You should see a 2 appear in the block for frame 3.
Repeat Step 38a for frame 5 and frame 6 (example shown).
Note: The example shown in Figure 3-9 depicts frames 2 and 3 as adjacent frames, and frames 5
and 6 as adjacent frames. The 3494 Tape Library you are working on may not be the same.
However, the set up is done the same way using the adjacent frames configuration for your
3494 Tape Library.
D24-8 D22-4 D22-4 D24-8

j70m0023
Figure 3-9. Teach — Box Configuration Screen
When you are finished with the input on the Teach — Box Configuration screen, select OK. The
Teach — Device Identifiers screen is shown. See Figure 3-10 on page 3-39. This shows the
adjacent frames 2 and 3, and adjacent frames 5 and 6 have been added to the subsystem. Wherever
a drive address (three hexadecimal numbers) is blank, you need to put the correct drive identifier in.
If a drive does not exist, remove the check from the check box next to the drive number.
When the Teach - Device Identifiers screen is correct, select OK, and continue as instructed in the
3494 Tape Library MI “Teach” procedure.

Figure 3-10. Teach — Device Identifiers Screen
encryption. Return here to continue.
40. Perform this step if the 3592 C06 controller is connected to an operational TSSC System Console.
From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Subsystem Configuration > Call Home / Remote
Services Menu. Go to “Sending Test Call Home” in the IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library
Controllers Maintenance Information to send a Test Call Home from this 3592 C06 controller. Return
here when complete.
been successful, from the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select: Run Control Unit Checkout.
42. Go to “Running Online Diagnostics from 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-101 and select 'tapeutil'
(from the main service menu) to exercise the read and write circuits of each tape drive installed. The
drive must be varied offline for tests with 'tapeutil'.

abstracts/SG244632.html/Open.
c. Load and unload tape each time.
d. Remove the scratch cartridge from the drive when complete.
Attaching 3494 Tape Library cables to 3592 C06 controller - 3494 D24
Frame
The cables from the Lxx frame should have been installed and routed to the 3952 F05 outbound frame by
using the IBM 3494 Tape Library Dataserver Maintenance Information. If the LAN cables are not at the
outbound frame, return to the 3494 Tape Library MI for the connections and routing from the Library
Manager to the outbound frame. Return here to continue when complete.

Note: For the following steps, you may have one or both LANs. The instructions for cable routing are the
same for both LANs. The 3592 C06 controller connectors are different, and the differences are
noted.
1. The Library Manager cables (LAN) are routed over the 3953 F05 Tape Frame frame support in the
center of the frame, to the 251 Lan Network Switch, and to the 250 Lan Network Switch in the 3494
Tape Library frame.
Note: When out-of-band encryption is used for this controller, these cables will connect to the 251 and
250 Encryption Router in the Library Manager frame. Another Ethernet cable connects the 251
Encryption LAN Port #8 to the 251 Lan Network Switch. 250 Encryption LAN Port #8 is
connected with an Ethernet cable to the 250 Lan Network Switch.
2. Ensure the Library Manager cables follow the service loop to allow the 3592 C06 controller to be
moved into the service position. The cable is held in the service loop, underneath the controller.

– 3494 D24 Frame
Attention: The ESCON adapters used in the 3592 C06 controller, each have two ESCON ports. When
Note: These ESCON wrap tools are in the ship group. This also applies to the FICON wrap tools.
Return to the process that sent you here.

3952 F05 Frame (Outbound) with a 3592 C06 controller cabled to 3494
D22 Frames
Install a 3592 C06 controller connected to a 3494 D22 Frame

Install 3592 C06 controller in the 3952 F05 Frame connected to a 3494 D22 Frame. The FC switches are
in the 3494 D22 Frame.
Remove any packing material from frame. Save any hardware shipped with the frame.
1. Move the 3952 F05 Frame in place. If it is installed on a raised floor, ensure the hole cutout is placed
under the rear of the frame.
2. Loosen the locknuts on the leveling pads using the 43 MM wrench supplied with the 3952 F05 Frame
and lower leveling pads to the floor.
3. Use your 43 MM. wrench to adjust the leveling pads. Adjust leveling pads until the frame is
approximately level and parallel with the floor, and the casters are off the floor (approximately one full
turn of leveling pad after it touches the floor). Lock the leveling pads in place by running locknut up
until it is tight against underside of frame member.
attached to the front of the 3592 C06 controller. Then install the front cover of the 3592 C06 controller.
Check out a 3592 C06 controller attached to a 3494 D22 Frame

You are here to check out a 3592 C06 controller installed in a 3952 F05 (Outbound) frame which will be
cabled to a 3494 D22 Frame containing up to twelve 3592 Tape Drives.
v The 3494 D22 Frame already has been connected to the 3494 Tape Library. The frame has the
underfloor power connected.
v The Fibre Channel Switches may have already been connected to the 3592 Tape Drives.
v Multiple Fibre Channel Switches may be installed for this frame. They are:
– (one_or_two_2Gb) 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches
– (one_or_two_4Gb) 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches
Note: A 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch has no connection to Ethernet LANs.
Important: Install steps with these designators (in bold script) are unique to that switch. Unmarked
steps apply regardless of the switch type installed.
v The 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch or the 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch was added through
field installation in the 3494 D22 Frame or they already existed in the 3494 D22 Frame.
Note: The 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch and the 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch have a total
of twenty switch positions, and they are numbered from right to left starting at one for the 2Gb
20-Port Fibre Channel Switch. They are numbered from left to right and top to bottom for the
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch.
customer, or to check out Fibre connections for a “Point to Point” attach to one or two 3592 Tape
Drives.
The following steps apply to checkout of a 3494 D22 Frame.

1. Verify the router is installed in the 3952 F05 outbound frame underneath the bottom 3592 C06
controller, and two more routers are installed in the top of the 3952 F05 Frame for the middle and top
3592 C06 controllers.
2. Verify the power cord is connected to the router and the PDU.
3. Verify the Ethernet router is connected to the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch in the 3494 D22
Frame, and to the 3592 C06 controller. See Figure 3-11 on page 3-45 for 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch. There is no Ethernet connection to an External Fibre Channel Switch (director).
Note: The WAN port shown on the SMC Router is physically located on the rear of the router. The
WAN port is used for ethernet connection to the TSSC System Console. Verify this connection
if feature code FC2720 (TSSC System Console connection) is to be activated. See Figure 2-5
on page 2-15.
4. Verify the SMC Router has an ethernet connection to the Library Manager (251 Lan Network Switch)
located in the Library Manager frame
5. (one_or_two_2Gb) (one_or_two_4Gb) Verify the 2Gb or the 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch is
installed in the 3494 D22 Frame. See Figure 2-8 on page 2-17 and Figure 2-13 on page 2-21 to
determine which type is installed.
6. If FC 5245 (Dual LAN) is NOT installed, skip this step. Otherwise, verify there is also an ethernet
connection from the 3592 C06 controller in the 3952 F05 Frame to the 250 Lan Network switch in the
Library Manager frame. See “LAN Configuration Matrix (Quick Reference For Dual LAN In 3494 or
3953 Environment)” on page 3-77 for verification or see Figure 4-73 on page 4-81 for locations.
8. (one_or_two_2Gb) (one_or_two_4Gb) The 3494 D22 Frame contains up to twelve 3592 Tape
Drives. See Table 3-10 and Figure 3-11 on page 3-45 to verify drives 0 to 11 are cabled correctly if
two 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches are installed. See Table 3-11 on page 3-43, Figure 3-13 on
page 3-47, and Figure 3-14 on page 3-48 to verify the 3592 Tape Drives are cabled correctly if two
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches are installed.
Note: Table 3-10 and Table 3-11 on page 3-43 only show 8 drives in the 3494 D22 Frame with FCP
switches. This 3494 D22 Frame will be populated with 12 drives.
9. (one_or_two_2Gb) (one_or_two_4Gb) See Table 3-10 to verify the Fibre Channel Adapters are
cabled correctly if two 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches are installed. See Table 3-11 on page
3-43 if 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches are installed.
Table 3-10. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table with 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches

Table 3-10. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table with 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches (continued)
Table 3-11. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table with dual 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches
1 priA 1 Reserved D22
2 Reserved 2 altB D22
19 priB 19 Reserved
20 Reserved 20 altA
Note: Ensure the fibre cables are routed correctly from the 3592 C06 controller Fibre Channel
Adapters in the outbound frame to the Fibre Switch(es) in the 3494 D22 Frame.
10. (EXT) To verify correct Fibre cable connections from a maximum of 16 drives to an External switch
(director), go to “Verify Cabling to an External Switch (Director)” on page 3-76
11. The following two steps apply if a 3494 D22 Frame or L22 frame is installed as an adjacent frame to
this 3494 D22 Frame. If not, skip to step 14 on page 3-49
12. (one_or_two_2Gb) (one_or_two_4Gb) Route the Fibre Channel cables, from an L22 or D22 frame
to the switch in the 3494 D22 Frame. Route the fibre cables up the right side. Using the plastic
clamps and hook and eye (velcro) straps as needed.
13. (one_or_two_2Gb) (one_or_two_4Gb) See Table 3-10 on page 3-42 and Figure 3-11 on page 3-45
for two 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches. See Table 3-11 and Figure 3-13 on page 3-47 for two

4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches or Figure 3-14 on page 3-48 for one 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch, to verify drives (8 or 12) to 15 are cabled correctly.
Table 3-12. Dual Port Cards with Dual 2 Gb Switches

3592 C06 controller Slot 2 Gb Switch Port
1 A (priA) = Top port on dual port adapter in Slot 1 20 Lower (Primary)
1 B (priB) = Bottom port on dual port adapter in Slot 1 19 Lower (Primary)
4 A (altA) = Top port on dual port adapter in Slot 4 20 Upper (Alternate)
4 B (altB) = Bottom port on dual port adapter in Slot 4 19 Upper (Alternate)
Table 3-13. Dual Port Cards with Single 2Gb Switch

3592 C06 controller Slot 2Gb Switch Port
Table 3-14. Dual Port Cards with Dual 4 Gb Switches

1 A (priA) = Top port on dual port adapter in Slot 1 1 Primary (Lower Switch)
1 B (priB) = Bottom port on dual port adapter in Slot 1 19 Primary (Lower Switch)
4 A (altA) = Top port on dual port adapter in Slot 4 20 Alternate (Upper Switch)
4 B (altB) = Bottom port on dual port adapter in Slot 4 2 Alternate (Upper Switch)
Table 3-15. Dual Port Cards with Single 4Gb Switch


3494 D22
FC Switch
Eth
3494 D22
FC Switch
Eth
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#7 #5
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#6 #4
3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#3 #1 # 15 # 13
3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#2 #0 # 14 # 12
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

# 11 #9
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

# 10 #8
PCC
PCC
C06
To 250
LAN
Network
Switch Eth
Eth 1 2 3 4 5 6
To 251
LAN
Network
PDU
c0600086
Outbound Frame
Figure 3-11. Two 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches, with 3592 Tape Drives in D22/D22 Frame. The 3592 C06
controller and Router are in the outbound 3952 F05 Frame. In this example, the 3494 D22 Frame with the Fibre
Switches is nearest to the Library Manager frame.
See Table 3-12 on page 3-44 for Controller / Switch connection.

3494 D22 3494 D22
FC Switch
Eth
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#7 #5
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#6 #4
3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#3 #1 # 15 # 13
3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#2 #0 # 14 # 12
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

# 11 #9
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

# 10 #8
PCC
PCC
To 250
LAN
Network C06
Switch
Eth
Eth 1 2 3 4 5 6
To 251
LAN
PDU
c0600097
Network WAN LAN Router

Switch
Outbound Frame
Figure 3-12. One 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch. 3592 C06 controller and Router are actually in outbound 3952
F05 Frame. In this example, the 3494 D22 Frame with the Fibre Switch is nearest to the Library Manager frame.

3494 D22 3494 D22
FC Switch
FC Switch
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#7 #5
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#6 #4
3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#3 #1 # 15 # 13
3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#2 #0 # 14 # 12
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

# 11 #9
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

# 10 #8
PCC
PCC
C06
To 250
LAN
Network
Switch Eth
Eth 1 2 3 4 5 6
To 251
LAN
Network
PDU
c0600085
Switch
WAN LAN Router
Outbound Frame
Figure 3-13. Two 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Ports in 3494 D22 Frame. The 3592 C06 controller and Router
are physically in the outbound 3952 F05 Frame. In this example, the 3494 D22 Frame with the Fibre Switches is
nearest to the Library Manager frame.

3494 D22 3494 D22
FC Switch
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#7 #5
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#6 #4
3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#3 #1 # 15 # 13
3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#2 #0 # 14 # 12
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

# 11 #9
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

# 10 #8
PCC
PCC
C06
To 250
LAN
Network
Switch Eth
Eth 1 2 3 4 5 6
To 251
LAN
Network
PDU
c0600098
Switch
WAN LAN Router
Outbound Frame
Figure 3-14. One 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Ports in a 3494 D22 Frame. The 3592 C06 controller and Router
are physically in the outbound 3952 F05 Frame. In this example, the 3494 D22 Frame with the Fibre Switch is nearest
to the Library Manager frame.

14. Ensure the PDU is powered on and you have power to the 3952 Model F05 (Outbound) frame. If
power is off, go to IBM 3494 Tape Library Dataserver Maintenance Information.
15. The Green LED on the 3592 C06 controller operator panel must blink before powering on.
16. Power on the 3592 C06 controller with the power push button. See 14 in Figure 2-7 on page 2-16.
Alternatively, power up the controller via ASMI menu. See “Power ON 3592 C06 controller by using
ASMI” on page 4-87.
17. (one_or_two_2Gb) (one_or_two_4Gb) (EXT) Power on the 2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch(es) and the SMC Router. If an External switch (director) is used, ensure it is powered on.
18. Power on the drives in the 3494 D22 Frame and the adjacent 3494 D22 Frame, if installed. Set the
| addresses as specified in Table 3-16, see the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140
| Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6
| and E07, “Installation Checkout” and “Set Customer Options” to set the AL_PA (Arbitrated Loop
Physical Address). Continue with step 21 on page 3-50, OR, if the 3592 Tape Drives are connected
through an External switch (director), or you are installing “point-to-point drive attach,” continue with
the next step.
Note: If you are installing drives in a 3494 D22 Frame and in an adjacent D22 or L22 frame, ensure
you start drive designation for drive 0, drive 1, and so forth, in the 3494 D22 Frame (or in the
L22 frame) nearest the Library Manager frame, regardless if this 3494 D22 Frame has the FC
switches mounted in it or not. Set the hard addresses for drive 0, drive 1, etc. as indicated in
the table indicating the recommended hard addresses and progress from there. To ensure
switch ports are compatible with incremental hard addressing in the drives, fibre cables from
the FC switches to the drive ports must be plugged into the appropriate switch ports. Stated
another way, Port 1 in the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch should be connected to drive 0,
Port 2 should be connected to drive 1, and so forth. Port 3 in the 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch should be connected to drive 0, Port 4 should be connected to drive 1, and so forth.
Table 3-16. D22 and D22 Frame Drive AL_PA Addresses - Example
D22 0 43 Adjacent Frame, if nearest to Library
Manager frame
Manager frame
Manager frame
Manager frame
D22 4 49 Base Frame
D22 5 4A Base Frame
D22 6 4B Base Frame
D22 7 4C Base Frame
D22 8 4D Base Frame
D22 9 4E Base Frame
D22 A 51 Base Frame
D22 B 52 Base Frame
D22 C 53 Base Frame
D22 D 54 Base Frame
D22 E 55 Base Frame
D22 F 56 Base Frame
when complete and proceed to step 23 on page 3-50.
(Direct Attachment)” on page 4-85. Return here when complete and proceed to step 23 on page 3-50.

21. (one_or_two_2Gb) (one_or_two_4Gb) Ensure you set the tape drives to the L topology only when
| attached to the 2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches. Refer to IBM System Storage TS1120,
| TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models
| J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07, “Set Customer Options”, and use Set Topology Option.
to work with the tape controller (3592 C06 controller or 3592 J70). Return here when complete.
number of drives that are or will be cabled to this controller. Your best approach is to set the
controller for 16 devices. Ensure you read the notes at the beginning of the procedure.
and select Control Unit Service Utilities > Configure Control Unit Hostname > Set the
Hostname. Press Enter.
– –OR – –
If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption, and this is the eighth controller you are going to set
up for encryption, you cannot connect to the first 250 Encryption Router. Therefore, this is the first
controller you are going to attach to the second 250 Encryption Router. Go to “Set second 250
Encryption Router configuration” on page 4-134. Return here to continue.
27. Go to “Call Home Procedure” in the IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library Controllers
Maintenance Information to set up Call Home and System Console (TSSC) connections. In that
MI, follow the instructions for the J70 controller to set up the 3592 C06 controller. Return here when
complete.
28. Go to “Show / Change TSSC connection” on page 4-89 to set the router IP addresses for connection
to the System Console (TSSC).
configure the TSSC System Console for this 3592 C06 controller (if it is connected). See
“Configuration” in the “Installation” section of the TSSC MI. Return here when complete.
– –OR – –
If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption, and this is the eighth controller, you cannot connect
to the first 251 Encryption Router. Therefore, this is the first controller you are going to attach to the
second 251 Encryption Router. Go to “Set second 251 Encryption Router configuration” on page
4-130. Return here to continue.
31. If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption, and this is the second through seventh controller to
be attached to the 251 Encryption and the 250 Encryption Router, go to “Controller Routes for using
pre-configured Encryption Routers” on page 4-121 to set static routes. Return here to continue.

If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption, and this is the ninth through fourteenth controller to
be attached to the second Encryption Key Manager250 Router, go to “Set Ninth through Fourteenth
Controller IP Routes to second 251 and 250 Encryption Routers 3494 Tape Library only” on page
4-138 to set static routes. Return here to continue.
32. Go to “Run SCSI / Fibre Channel Configuration” on page 4-100. This procedure configures the drives
and checks for correct installation.
a. Select Run SCSI/FCP Configurator.
33. After the drive configuration has successfully completed, bring the Control Unit online. From the
Control Unit Online.
34. See “Attach 3494 Library Manager cables to 3592 C06 controller - 3494 D22 Frame” on page 3-54
and verify LAN cables have been installed properly. Return here when complete.
35. Perform a Teach on the 3494 Tape Library.
36. If a Teach has already been performed when installing the 3592 Tape Drives, it will not be necessary
to do one now. Continue with Step 37 on page 3-53.
If a Teach is required, go to the IBM 3494 Tape Library Maintenance Information for instructions on
performing a teach. Before you leave this MI however, note the two examples of Teach screens that
may not be in the 3494 MI you are using. In the first screen shown (depicted in Figure 3-15 on page
3-52), note frame 2 and frame 3 and frame 5 and frame 6 are the adjacent 3592 drive frames. You
need to select the following:
a. Ensure frames 2 and 3 (example shown) both have the DU selected.
b. Select either RTIC or LAN depending on how the 3592 C06 controller is connected to the Library
Manager.
c. In the block for frame 3, in the LF: block, put in a 2, in the block for frame 2, in the LF: block, put
in a 3.
d. After completing 36c, you should see a 2 appear in the block for frame 3.
Repeat Steps 36a through 36d for frame 5 and frame 6 (example shown).
Note: The example shown in Figure 3-15 on page 3-52 depicts frames 2 and 3 as adjacent frames,
and 5 and 6 as adjacent frames. Your 3494 Tape Library may not be the same; however the
set up is done the same way for your 3494 Tape Library.

D22-8 D22-4 D22-8 D22-4
j70m0128
Figure 3-15. Teach — Box Configuration Screen
When you are finished with the input on the Teach — Box Configuration2 screen, select OK. The
Teach — Device Identifiers2 screen displays. See Figure 3-16 on page 3-53. This shows the
adjacent frames 2 and 3, and adjacent frames 5 and 6 have been added to the subsystem. Wherever
a drive address (three hexadecimal numbers) is blank, you need to put the correct drive identifier in.
If a drive does not exist, remove the check from the check box next to the drive number.
When this Teach - Device Identifiers screen is correct, select OK, and continue as instructed in the
3494 MI “Teach” function.

Figure 3-16. Teach — Device Identifiers Screen
encryption.
Return here to continue.
38. Perform this step if the 3592 C06 controller is connected to the TSSC System Console, and the
System Console is operational.
From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Subsystem Configuration > Call Home / Remote
Services Menu. Go to “Sending Test Call Home" in the IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library
Controllers Maintenance Information to send a Test Call Home from this 3592 C06 controller. Return
here when complete.
been concluded successfully, from the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Run Control Unit
Checkout
40. See “Running Online Diagnostics from 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-101 and select 'tapeutil' (from
the Subsystem Maintenance menu) to exercise the read and write circuits of each tape drive installed.
The drive must be varied offline for tests with 'tapeutil'.

abstracts/SG244632.html?Open

Attach 3494 Library Manager cables to 3592 C06 controller - 3494 D22
Frame
The cables from the Lxx frame should have been installed and routed to the 3952 F05 outbound frame by
using the IBM 3494 Tape Library Dataserver Maintenance Information manual. If the LAN cables are not at
the outbound frame, return to the 3494 Tape Library MI for the connections and routing from the Library
Manager to the outbound frame. Return here to continue when compete.
Note: For the following steps, you may have one or both LANs. The instructions for cable routing are the
same for both LANs. The 3592 C06 controller connectors are different, and the differences are
noted.
1. The Library Manager cables (LAN) are routed over the 3952 F05 frame support in the center of the
frame, to the 251 Lan Network Switch, and to the 250 Lan Network Switch in the Library Manager
frame.
Note: When out-of-band encryption is used for this controller, these cables will connect to the 251 and
250 Encryption Router in the Library Manager frame. Another Ethernet cable connects the 251
Encryption LAN Port #8 to the 251 Lan Network Switch. 250 Encryption Router LAN Port #8 is
connected by way of an Ethernet cable to the 250 Lan Network Switch. 250 Encryption Router
LAN Port #8 is connected with an Ethernet cable to the 250 Lan Network Switch.
2. Ensure the Library Manager cables follow the service loop to allow the 3592 C06 controller to be
moved into the service position. The cable is held in the service loop, underneath the controller.
Diagnostic Checkout Of ESCON Or FICON Adapters before Host Attach

– 3494 D22 Frame
Note: These ESCON wrap tools are in the ship group. The FICON wrap tools are also part of the ship
group if FICON is installed.
Return to the process that sent you here.

3952 F05 Frame with a 3592 C06 controller cabled to a C20 Tape
Library
| The 3592-C06 with C20 attached libraries does not support 3592-E07 drives.
Install a 3592 C06 controller connected to a C20 Tape Library

Use this information to install a 3592 C06 controller into the 3952 F05 Frame, which is connected to a C20
frame. The Fibre Channel Switches are in the 3952 D24 frame.
1. Remove any packing material from the frame. Save any hardware shipped with the frame.
2. Move the 3952 F05 control unit frame in place. If it is installed on a raised floor, ensure the hole cutout
is placed under the rear of the frame.
3. Loosen the locknuts on the leveling pads using the 43 MM wrench supplied with the 3952 F05 Frame,
and lower the leveling pads to the floor.
4. Use the 43 MM wrench to adjust the leveling pads until the frame is approximately level and parallel
with the floor, and the casters are off the floor (approximately one full turn of leveling pad after it
touches the floor). Lock the leveling pads in place by running the locknuts up until they are tight
against underside of frame member.
attached to the front of the 3592 C06 controller.
6. Install the front cover to the 3592 C06 controller.
Check out a 3592 C06 controller attached to a C20 Tape Library

You are here to check out a 3952 F05 frame containing one, two, or three 3592 C06 controllers connected
to a C20 Tape Library, containing as many as twenty 3592 Tape Drives.
v The C20 Tape Library may have arrived from the factory with as many as twenty 3592 Tape Drives.
v The 3952 F05 Frame is being installed and is replacing one or more controllers in a C10 frame.
v The C20 Tape Library has already been physically connected. The frame has the under-floor power
connected.
v There are multiple Fibre Channel Switches that may be installed for this frame. They are:
Important: Installation steps with these designators are unique to that switch. Unmarked steps apply,
regardless of the switch type installed. The Fibre Channel Switches should already have
been installed in the 3952 F05 Frame by factory install or relocation.
v The 2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch was added through field installation or it already existed
in the frame (one or two for each 3592 C06 controller in the 3952 F05 Frame).
Note:
– The 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch has four additional switch positions for a total of
twenty. They are numbered from right to left, starting at one.

– The 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch has four additional switch positions for a total of
twenty. They are numbered from left to right, top to bottom, starting at one.
customer, or to check out Fibre connections for a “Point-to-Point” attachment to a maximum of four
3592 Tape Drives.
v An Ethernet router is physically installed in the 3952 F05 frame.
The following steps apply to checkout of a 3592 C06 controller attached to a C20 Tape Library.
1. The following installation/verify steps have been written to check out one controller at a time. If the
other controller in the frame will have drives attached to it, go through the steps a second time.
Notes:
v Each 3592 C06 controller may be attached to one or two 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switches. With three 3592 C06 controllers, the maximum number of 2Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switches in the 3952 F05 Frame is six (Feature Codes FC3514 (2) and FC3515
(2)).
v Each 3592 C06 controller may be attached to one or two 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switches. With three 3592 C06 controllers, the maximum number of 4Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switches in the 3952 F05 Frame is six.
2. Verify a router is attached to the 3592 C06 controller in the frame. See the bottom of the 3952 F05
Frame in Figure 3-17 on page 3-59. The routers for the middle and top 3592 C06 controller in the
3952 F05 Frame will be mounted in the top of the frame.
3. Verify the power cord is connected to the Ethernet router and to the PDU in the bottom of the frame.
4. Verify the router is cabled correctly to the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch and to the 3592 C06
controller. There are no Ethernet connections to the 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches.
5. Verify a 2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch is physically installed in the 3952 F05 Frame. See
Figure 2-8 on page 2-17 and Figure 2-13 on page 2-21 to determine which type is installed, or if an
External switch (director) will be used.
6. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb) Verify the power cords are connected to the 2 Gb or
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch and to the PDU in the bottom of the frame.
7. If the 3592 C06 controller is not present in the 3952 F05 Frame and you are here to do a Field
Merge, go to “Field Merge 3592 C06 controller” on page 3-86. If this is not the case continue with the
next step. Return here when complete.
9. (one_2Gb) (one_4Gb) The C20 frame may contain as many as twenty 3592 Tape Drives. The drives
may be cabled in numerical sequence to the 2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch. See
Table 3-17 on page 3-57 and Figure 3-17 on page 3-59 for Fibre cabling to a single 2Gb 20-Port
Fibre Channel Switch. See Table 3-18 on page 3-57 for Fibre cabling to a single 4Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switch to verify drives 0 to 15 are cabled correctly.
10. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb) If the 2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch is
installed, see Figure 3-17 on page 3-59 and Figure 2-12 on page 2-21 to verify the Fibre Channel
Adapters are cabled to two 2 Gb switches correctly. See Figure 2-16 on page 2-24 to verify the Fibre
Channel Adapters are cabled to two 4 Gb Switches correctly.
Note: A maximum of sixteen drives can be attached if they are all 3592 Tape Drives.

Table 3-17. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table With One or Two 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches
1 Drive 0 1 Drive 0 C20
17 See Note 17 Reserved F05
18 See Note 18 Reserved F05

Table 3-18. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table With 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch To 3592 Tape Drives
Port # Lower Tape Drive # Port 0 Port # Upper Tape Drive # Port 1 Location
1 priA 1 Reserved
2 See Note 2 altB
19 priB 19 Reserved

Table 3-18. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table With 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch To 3592 Tape
Drives (continued)
Port # Lower Tape Drive # Port 0 Port # Upper Tape Drive # Port 1 Location
20 See Note 20 altA

priA = Top port on dual port adapter in Slot 1

priB = Bottom port on dual port adapter in Slot 1
altA = Top port on dual port adapter in Slot 4
altA = Bottom port on dual port adapter in Slot 4
11. (EXT) To verify correct Fibre cable connections from a maximum of 16 drives to an External switch
(director), go to “Verify Cabling to an External Switch (Director)” on page 3-76.
12. Route the fibre cables up the right side of the frame. Secure the cables by using the plastic clamps
and hook and loop fastener (velcro) straps, as needed. Plug into the2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switchs, as shown in Figure 2-11 on page 2-20.

Pluggable Drive
FC Switch Operator Panel
Eth
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#0 # 10
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#1 # 11
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#2 # 12
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#3 # 13
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#4 # 14
3592 DRV 3592 DRV

#5 # 15
3592 DRV
#6
3592 DRV
#7
C06 3592 DRV

#8
Eth 3592 DRV

Eth 1 2 3 4 5 6 #9
PDU
c0600057
WAN LAN Router
Power Strip Power Strip
3952 F05 C20
Figure 3-17. F05 Frame to C20 Frame Fibre Connections for the single 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
3592 C06 Slot 2Gb Switch Port

Dual Port Cards with Single Switch
13. Make sure power is provided to the 3952 Model F05 frame and to the C20 frame.
14. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb) (EXT) Power on the 2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switches and the SMC Router. If an External switch (director) is used, make sure it is
powered up.
15. Power up the drives in the C20 frame. Set the addresses as specified in Table 3-19 on page 3-60,
| refer to the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011)
| Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07, to set the AL_PA (Arbitrated
Loop Physical Address), if the tape drives are connected to 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches or to
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches.

Table 3-19. C20 Frame Drive AL_PA Addresses
C20 0 43 Base Frame
C20 1 45 Base Frame
C20 2 46 Base Frame
C20 3 47 Base Frame
C20 4 49 Base Frame
C20 5 4A Base Frame
C20 6 4B Base Frame
C20 7 4C Base Frame
C20 8 4D Base Frame
C20 9 4E Base Frame
C20 10 51 Base Frame
C20 11 52 Base Frame
C20 C 53 (NS) Base Frame
C20 D 54 (NS) Base Frame
C20 E 55 (NS) Base Frame
C20 F 56 (NS) Base Frame
16. The green LED on the 3592 C06 controller operator panel must blink before powering on.
17. Power on the 3592 C06 controller with the power push button, refer to 14 in Figure 2-7 on page
2-16. Alternatively, power up the controller via ASMI menu. See “Power ON 3592 C06 controller by
using ASMI” on page 4-87.
when complete, and proceed to step 21.
(Direct Attachment)” on page 4-85. Return here when complete, and proceed to step 21.
20. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb) If not previously done, ensure you set the tape drive
topology to the L protocol only when attached to the 2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch.
Refer to the instruction to Set Topology in “Set Customer Options” in the Installation chapter of the
3592 Drive MI.
21. Go to “Setting Number of Drives On Controller” on page 4-111, to tell the 3592 C06 controller the
maximum number of drives that may be cabled to this controller. The default setting is 16, ensure it is
22. If these drives are to be used for encryption, verify the drives have been enabled for encryption.
Refer to “Enabling Encryption On Encryption-Capable Drive” on page 4-54 for instructions to set up
the drives to work with the tape controller (3592 C06 controller or 3592 J70). Return here when
complete.
mounted Controller” on page 4-6. Select None for 3592 C06 controller attachment to C20 Tape
Library. Return here when complete.
Note: When configuring a 3592 C06 controller in a 3952 F05 frame attached to a C20 Tape Library
or in a Rack, use the value 20 for “CU LAN Address” .
24. If you wish to set a distinct hostname for the controller, start at the Subsystem Maintenance menu,

25. Go to the IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library Controllers Maintenance Information to set up
Call Home and TotalStorage System Console connections. In that manual, follow the instructions
for the J70 controller to set up the 3592 C06 controller. Return here when complete.
26. Go to “Show / Change TSSC connection” on page 4-89 to set the router IP addresses when a TSSC
System Console will be connected. See Figure 4-74 on page 4-83 for the ethernet configuration.
27. If configuring for out-of-band encryption, perform the procedure “Set Encryption Key Manager IP
Addresses in the Controller” on page 4-146. Return here when complete.
28. If configuring for out-of-band encryption, and this is the First controller in the 3952 F05 frame to be
attached to the 251 Encryption Router, go to “Set 251 Encryption Router Configuration (For
Library-Managed Controllers)” on page 4-112. Return here to continue.
29. If configuring for out-of-band encryption, and this is the Second or Third controller in the 3952 F05
frame you are going to attach to the 251 Encryption Router, go to “Controller Routes for using
pre-configured Encryption Routers” on page 4-121 to set static routes in the 3592 C06 controller for
the 251 Encryption Router. Return here to continue.
Configure IBM TotalStorage System Console for this 3592 C06 controller (if it is connected). See
“Configuration” section in Chapter 2 “Installation” of the MI to configure the System Console for the
3592 C06 controller. Return here when complete.
and checks for correct installation. Return here when complete.
b. Select Test SCSI/FCP Configuration
32. When drive configuration has checked out successfully, bring the Control Unit back online by
selecting the following steps, from the Subsystem Maintenance menu, Control Unit and Tape
Drive Online Offline Control > Vary Control Unit Online.
encryption.
34. Perform this step if the 3592 C06 controller is connected to the TSSC System Console, and the
System Console is operational. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, Subsystem
Configuration > Call Home / Remote Services Menu.
a. Go to “Sending Test Call Home” in the IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library Controllers
Maintenance Information to send a Test Call Home from this 3592 C06 controller.
Check the TSSC console Call Home queue to verify the Test Call Home appears and was
correctly handled by the TSSC. Return here when complete.
been concluded successfully, from the Subsystem Maintenance menu, Run Control Unit
Checkout.
36. Verify no failures exist. If so, resolve the errors until Control Unit checkout runs without errors.
37. Refer to “Running Online Diagnostics from 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-101 and select 'tapeutil'
(from the Subsystem Maintenance Menu) to exercise the read and write circuits of each tape drive
installed. The drive must be varied offline for tests with 'tapeutil'.

abstracts/SG244632.html?Open
38. Go to “Setting Correct Time On Controller” on page 4-107. Return here when complete.

39. Continue with “Diagnostic Checkout Of ESCON Or FICON Adapters before Host Attach – C20.”

– C20
Notes:
v The ESCON adapters used in the 3592 C06 controller each have two ESCON ports. When
running the ESCON wrap test, both ports on the adapter must have an ESCON wrap tool
attached. The same is true for the FICON adapters, if they are installed.
v The ESCON wrap tools are in the ship group. The FICON wrap tools are in the ship group also
if FICON adapters are installed.
page 2-17 for card plugging references for your configuration.
This checkout procedure is complete. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Rack with a 3592 C06 controller and 3592 Tape Drives
Check out a 3592 C06 controller in a Rack

You are here to check out a rack that contains a 3592 C06 controller and four or more 3592 Tape Drives.
v A 3592 C06 controller may have been field installed or was previously installed in the rack. See FC
4641 “Install C06 Control Unit in a Rack.”
v The 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch was either added through a field installation or was previously
installed in the rack.
v The 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch was either added through a field installation or was previously
installed in the rack.
v Multiple Fibre Channel Switches may be installed for this frame. They are;
Note: A 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch has no connection to the ethernet LANs.
– (EXT) external switch (director) provided by the customer
– (P_to_P) point-to-point attach
Important: Install steps with these designators (in bold format) are unique to that switch. Unmarked
steps apply regardless of switch type installed.
v This applies to installations where Routers are required.
The ethernet router, was added through a field installation with the 3592 C06 controller or was
previously installed with the 3592 C06 controller in the rack. See Installation Instructions (PN 18P9739
EC H81375) Install Ethernet Router for 3592 C06 controller, if a router is not installed.
Notes:
v The configurations referred to in the following tables are for example only. The actual
configuration may be as small as two drives, or it may be the maximum of sixteen drives per
controller. The configuration as well as the physical placement of the switch(es), drives, and
controller is at the discretion of the customer. The installation checkout is to verify the electronic
cabling and not the position of the devices.
v You may be asked to check out fibre connections to an external switch (director) provided by
the customer, or to check out fibre connections for a “Point-to-Point” attach to one, two, three,
or four 3592 Tape Drives.
The following steps apply to checkout of a 3592 C06 controller attached to a library in a Rack.
1. Verify the customer power input is connected to the PDU power inlet.
2. Verify an ethernet router is physically installed in the rack (if a Router is specified for this installation).
3. Verify the power cord is connected to the ethernet router and the PDU.
4. Verify the ethernet router is cabled correctly to the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch and to the 3592
C06 controller. Use Figure 3-17 on page 3-59 to understand ethernet cabling using a single switch.
For dual 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch ethernet cabling see Figure 2-12 on page 2-21.
Note: A 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch has no connection to the ethernet LANs.
5. Verify a 2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches are physically installed in the rack. See
Figure 2-8 on page 2-17 or Figure 2-13 on page 2-21 to determine which type is installed, or if an
external switch (director) will be used.

6. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb)(two_4Gb) Verify the power cords are connected to the 2 Gb or
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch and the PDU.
7. If the 3592 C06 controller is not in the rack and you are here to do a field merge, go to “Field Merge
3592 C06 controller” on page 3-86. Return here when complete.
If this is not the case, continue with the next step.
9. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb) See Figure 2-9 on page 2-18 or Figure 2-12 on page
2-21 to verify the fibre channel adapters are cabled correctly if either one or two 2Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switches are installed. See Figure 2-14 on page 2-22 or Figure 2-16 on page 2-24 if one or
two 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches are installed.
Note: A maximum of sixteen drives can be attached if they are all 3592 Tape Drives.
For fibre cabling from a single 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch or switches, see Table 3-20.
For fibre cabling from a 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch or switches, see Table 3-21 on
page 3-65.
Switch port # Connects to 3592 tape Channel Switch Connects to 3592 tape
Lower drive # Port 0 port # Upper drive # Port 1 Location
1 Drive 0 1 Drive 0 RACK
17 See Note 17 Reserved RACK
18 See Note 18 Reserved RACK
19 Slot 1B 19 Slot 4B RACK
20 Slot 1A 20 Slot 4A RACK


Table 3-21. Fibre Channel Cable Connection Table with 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch to 3592 Tape Drives
port # Lower tape drive # Port 0 port # Upper tape drive # Port 1 Location
1 priA 1 Reserved RACK
2 See Note 2 altB RACK
19 priB 19 Reserved
20 See Note 20 altA

10. (EXT) To verify correct fibre cable connections from a maximum of sixteen drives to an external
switch (director), go to “Verify Cabling to an External Switch (Director)” on page 3-76.
11. Verify the fibre channel cables from the drives in RACK 2 and RACK 3 (if they exist) have been
connected to the switch. Use the plastic clamps and hook and eye (velcro) straps as needed. Verify
the cables are plugged into the fibre switches, as labeled. See Figure 2-12 on page 2-21 and
Table 3-20 on page 3-64 for 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch connections. See Figure 2-16 on page
2-24 and Table 3-21 for 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch connections.
12. Ensure the breakers on the PDU are ON. and you have power to the rack(s).
13. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb) (EXT) Power ON the 2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switches and the SMC router. If an external switch (director) is used, ensure it is powered
ON.
14. Power ON the drives in the rack and the adjacent rack, if installed. Set the addresses as specified in
| Table 3-22. See the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition -
| June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07, “Installation
Checkout” to set the AL_PA (Arbitrated Loop Physical Address), if the drives are connected to 2 Gb or
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches.
Table 3-22. Drive AL_PA Addresses
Rack 0 43
Rack 1 45
Rack 2 46

Table 3-22. Drive AL_PA Addresses (continued)
Rack 3 47
Rack 4 49
Rack 5 4A
Rack 6 4B
Rack 7 4C
Rack 8 4D
Rack 9 4E
Rack 10 51
Rack 11 52
Spare C 53 (NS) Not used
Spare D 54 (NS) Not used
Spare E 55 (NS) Not used
Spare F 56 (NS) Not used
15. Green LED on the 3592 C06 controller operator panel must blink before powering ON.
16. Power ON the 3592 C06 controller with the power push button. See 14 in Figure 2-7 on page 2-16.
Alternatively, power ON the controller via the ASMI menu. See “Power ON 3592 C06 controller by
using ASMI” on page 4-87.
17. (EXT) If the 3592 tape drives are connected to an external switch (director), go to “Drive Setup for
when complete, and proceed to Step 20.
18. (P_to_P) If you are connecting 3592 tape drives point-to-point, go to “Point-to-Point Drive Attach
(Direct Attachment)” on page 4-85. Return here when complete, and skip to Step 20.
19. (one_2Gb) (two_2Gb) (one_4Gb) (two_4Gb) Ensure you set the tape drives to the L topology only
when attached to the 2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches. Use the Set Topology option in
the “Set Customer Options” section of the 3592 Tape Drive MI.
number of drives that may be cabled to this 3592 C06 controller. The default setting is 16, ensure it is
to work with the 3592 C06 controller.
mounted Controller” on page 4-6 for None selection, to set up the 3592 C06 controller. Return here
when complete.
Note: When you are configuring a 3592 C06 controller in a 3952 F05 frame attached to C20, or a
3592 C06 controller in a rack, use the value 20 for “CU LAN Address.”
If you are configuring the system with router(s) continue to the next step.
— OR —
Refer to Figure 3-18 on page 3-67. If your system configuration does not have a router (FC 5248), go
to “Configure Rack Mount Controller LAN for FC 5248 (no Router)” on page 4-34. Return here when
complete. Continue with step 30 on page 3-67.

FC 5248
Customers Network
Switch
xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx::x/64
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
EN0
3592-C06
Controller
c0600100
EN1
TSSC
TSSC Network Switch
Master Console
Figure 3-18. Non Router configuration without library (FC 5248)
Note:
IPv6 Support for 3592 C06 controller rack mount controllers only
3592 C06 controllers may be dual stacked IPv6 and IPv4
when complete.
Note: In the Call Home Connections procedure, set up is to Console. Any reference to WTI should
be ignored.
System Console will be connected.
26. If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption, perform the procedure “Set Encryption Key Manager
IP Addresses in the Controller” on page 4-146. Return here when complete.
27. If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption and this is the first Controller in this Rack
environment to attach to the 251 Encryption Router, go to“Set 251 Encryption Router Configuration
(For Library-Managed Controllers)” on page 4-112. Return here to continue.
28. If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption and this is the second or third Controller in this
Rack environment to attach to the 251 Encryption Router, go to“Controller Routes for using
“Configuration” section in the “Installation” chapter of the MI to configure the System Console to this
and checks for correct installation.
b. Select Test SCSI/FCP Configuration.

31. When drive configuration has checked out successfully, bring the controller back online. From the
Control Unit Online.
32. Go to “Set Encryption Key Manager IP Addresses in the Controller” on page 4-146 and “Run
Encryption Key Manager Path Test” on page 4-147 if you have configured for out-of-band encryption.
33. If your system configuration has FC 5248 (no Router, see Figure 3-18 on page 3-67), the IP filter for
Network Interface en0 has to be activated.
From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Subsystem Configuration > Show / Change
Controller Network Connections > Set / Test Network Interface for Control Unit without a
Router > Test Network Interface Connections for Control Unit > Setup IPv4 & IPv6 default IP
filter rules
34. Perform this step if the 3592 C06 controller is connected to the TSSC System Console that is
operational. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Subsystem Configuration > Call
Home / Remote Services Menu. Go to “Sending Test Call Home” in the IBM Call Home for
Automated Tape Library Controllers Maintenance Information to send a Test Call Home from this
Check the TSSC console Call Home queue to verify the Test Call Home appears and was correctly
handled by the TSSC. Return here when complete.
been concluded successfully, from the Subsystem Maintenance menu, and select Run Control Unit
Checkout. Verify that no failures exist. If so, resolve the errors until the Run Control Unit Checkout
runs without error.
36. See “Running Online Diagnostics from 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-101, and select 'tapeutil' (from
the Main Service Menu) to exercise the read and write circuits of each tape drive installed. The drive
must be varied offline for tests with 'tapeutil'.

d. Remove the scratch cartridge when complete
37. Go to “Setting Correct Time On Controller” on page 4-107.
Return here when done.
38. Continue with the next section.

– Rack
Note: These ESCON wrap tools are in the ship group. This also applies to the FICON wrap tools, if they
are installed.

4. This completes the diagnostic checkout of the ESCON or FICON adapters in a Rack configuration.
Return to the procedure that sent you here.

3592 C06 controller attached to a 3577 L5U Tape Library
Attach 3577 L5U Tape Library(s) to the 3592 C06 controller

Use this information to attach one to seven 3577 L5U Tape Library's to a 3592 C06 controllerr. The 3577
L5U Tape Library may be installed within the same rack as the 3592 C06 controller, but may also be
installed external to the rack.
Attention: Complete Table 3-24 on page 3-74 before proceeding. See the Customer for Customer
provided information.
v For 3577 L5U Tape Library installation, see IBM System Storage TS3400 Tape Library, Maintenance
Information for Authorized Service Personnel.
v For 3577 L5U Tape Library removal and replacement, see IBM System Storage TS3400 Tape Library,
Maintenance Information for Authorized Service Personnel.
1. Connect the Fibre Channel Switch cables.
The 3577 L5U Tape Library with 3592 Tape Drives, connected to a 3592 C06 controller;
a. can be attached point to point. To attach Point-to-Point refer to “Point-to-Point Drive Attach (Direct
Attachment)” on page 4-85.
— or —
b. can be attached to a 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch. To attach to a 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch refer to Figure 2-15 on page 2-23 for a single switch or Figure 2-16 on page 2-24for dual
switches.
— or —
c. can be attached to an external Switch. To attach to an external Switch refer to “Verify Cabling to an
External Switch (Director)” on page 3-76.
Note:
v Be sure to label the cables.
v If the 3577 L5U Tape Library has only one drive, leave an open port on the fibre switch for an
additional drive.
3577
Lib 1
FC 5248
Customers Network
Switch 3577
xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx::x/64 Lib 7
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
EN0
3592-C06
Controller
c0600099
EN1
TSSC
TSSC Network Switch
Master Console
Figure 3-19. Non Router configuration (FC 5248)
Note:

IPv6 Support for 3592 C06 controller rack mount controllers and TS3400 libraries connection
without a CISCO 1811
All libraries and C06 controllers may be dual stacked IPv6 and IPv4
2. Connect an Ethernet cable for each library to be attached (cable supplied by FC 9014 for the
3577 L5U Tape Library). Label and connect the ethernet cables as shown in Figure 3-19 on page
3-70 or Figure 3-20 and the 3592 C06 Label Usage Instructions manual.
a. Refer to Figure 2-6 on page 2-15 and Figure 3-19 on page 3-70 or Figure 3-20.
v Connect an Ethernet cable from the controller port P1-T5 10 to the 251 Router port 9.
v Connect an Ethernet cable from the controller port P1-T6 9 to the 250 Router port 9.
Cisco Router 1811

C06
T6
9 8 7 6 250 1
Alternate
5 4 3 2 0
Customer Encryption Key

C06 Manager Alternate Server
Lib 5
C06
T5 C06 C06
Lib 6 Lib 4 TSSC
9 8 7 6 251 1
Primary
5 4 3 2 0
C06 C06
Lib 2 Lib 0 Customer Console Encryption
Key Manager Primary Server
c0600093
C06 C06
Lib 3 Lib 1
Figure 3-20. Cisco Router 1811 (FC 5247)
There is one exception: In the case of External switches (McData, CNT, etc), the topology field
should be set to "NL-Port". Refer to “Verify Cabling to an External Switch (Director)” on page 3-76.
3. Refer to the IBM System Storage TS3400 Tape Library, Planning and Operator Guide, to
configure the 3577 L5U Tape Library.
4. Configure each 3577 L5U Tape Library from that library LCD Operation panel, with the following
information..
a. Configuration > Library Settings
v Online Offline: > ON.
v I/O Station: > ON can be set to either setting, customer choice.
v Active Slots: > All can be set to either setting, customer choice.
v Date / Time: > current date and time.

v Library Mode: > System (System Z) can be set to Auto (System Z) customer choice
depending on their host software, however only these two are valid.
v Partition: > Off can be set to either setting, customer choice.
b. Configuration > Drive Settings > Drive 1 > Fibre Channel Options
Note: Set both PRIMARY and Secondary as follows:

v Topology: > L-Port this is L-Port in all cases, except for an external switch it's set to NL-Port.
v Loop ID: > Refer to Table 3-23 on page 3-73.
v Link speed: > Auto.
v Drive Reset: > When asked to reset the drive say: Yes.
Drive 2 > Fibre Channel Options
Note: Set both PRIMARY and Secondary as follows:

v Fibre Channel:.
– Topology: > L-Port this is L-Port in all cases, except for an external switch it's set to
NL-Port.
– Loop ID: > Refer to Table 3-23 on page 3-73.
– Link speed: > Auto.
– Drive Reset: > When asked to reset the drive say: Yes.
v Clear Flash Dump: > Yes.
– Control Path: > On
c. Configuration > Auto Cleaning
v Auto Cleaning: > Off can be set to either setting, customer choice.
d. Configuration > Network Settings
v Link speed: > Auto.
v Use protocol: > IPv4 or IPv6 or Dual.
v DHCP IPv4: > On or Off.
v DHCP IPv6: > On or Off.
The following; IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway, are set as shown ONLY if there is a
router.
v For FC 5247 (Router);
1) IP Address: > IPv4 address > 192.168.251.200 this is the IP address for Library 0, for
Library 1 add 5 to the last number; 205,.for Library 2; 210 and so forth.
2) Gateway: > 192.168.251.25.
3) Subnet Mask: > 255.255.255.0.
4) NTP Server: > OFF.
5) SNMP Trap: > On > 172.31.1.1.
The following; SNMP trap 01 IP, is set as shown ONLY if there is a router (FC 5247).
Note: SNMP trap 01 IP > 172.31.1.1 to send SNMP traps to the TSSC and create a Call
Home for the 3577 L5U Tape Library. Set SNMP trap level > Emergency/Error.
v For FC 5248 No Router;
1) IP Address: > IPv4 address > xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (Customer defined) IP address for Library.
2) Gateway: > xxx.xxx.xxx.xx (Customer defined).
3) Subnet Mask: > xxx.xx.xxx.x (Customer defined).
4) NTP Server: > OFF.

5) SNMP Trap: > On > xxx.xx.x.x (Set to the 3592 C06 controller Customer's IP assigned by
the Customer.
If using IPv6 set the IP Address to the Customer's specification.
Note: Set SNMP trap 01 IP > xxx.xx.x.x (3592 C06 controller Customer's IP) to send
SNMP traps to the 3592 C06 controller and create a Call Home for the 3577 L5U
Tape Library. Set SNMP trap level > Emergency/Error.
Both the IPv4 and IPv6 address for the 3592 C06 controller can be entered for 3577
SNMPv1 trap destinations. Only SNMPv1 (version one) traps are supported
e. Configuration
v Op panel: > customer choice.
f. Configuration
v Set Default: > No the factory default is yes.
Note:
– Older levels of code may not have these selections available from the Operator panel.
Ask the Customer to assist by setting them via the Web page for each library being
installed.
– Set the Encryption settings to System Managed Encryption to use encryption with the
Note: All 3592 E06 and 3592 EU6 Tape Drives must always be enabled for System
Managed encryption to be recognized. This is optional on 3592 E05 Tape
Drives.
The remaining options are the Customers choice..
Table 3-23. 3577 L5U Tape Library ID's
3577 Library Drive Loop ID (decimal) 8-Bit AL_PA (hex)
0 1 70 6A
0 2 71 69
1 1 72 67
1 2 73 66
2 1 74 65
2 2 75 63
3 1 76 5C
3 2 77 5A
4 1 78 59
4 2 79 56
5 1 80 55
5 2 81 54
6 1 82 53
6 2 83 52
Return here when completed with the 3577 L5U Tape Library.

5. Configure the 3592 C06 controller with the information in Table 3-24 and in Table 3-27 on page
3-75.
Table 3-24. Information sheet for 3592 C06 controller with FC 5247 (Router)
CE Determined TSSC
Unique Serial # IP Customer IP Customer Gateway
Library 0 172.31.1.xxx
'xxx' must be unique and must be determined by the SR. Recommend setting Library 0, then subsequent Libraries
should be increased by 5.
Table 3-24. Information sheet for 3592 C06 controller with FC 5247 (Router)
only used for out of band encryption
Customer Encryption Customer Encryption
Customer Subnet Key Manager Server 1 Key Manager Server 2
Mask or Prefix Length settings settings
Library 0
Library 1
Library 2
Library 3
Library 4
Library 5
Library 6
Table 3-25. Information sheet for 3592 C06 controller with FC 5248 (no Router)
Unique Serial # IPv4 Address IPv6 Address
Library 0
Library 1
Library 2
Library 3
Library 4
Library 5
Library 6

Table 3-26. Information sheet for 3592 C06 controller with FC 5248 (no Router)
IPv4 IPv6
Customer Gateway
Customer Subnet Mask /
Prefix Length
First Customer DNS
Address
Second Customer DNS
Address
Manager 1 settings
Manager 2 settings
Table 3-27. Information sheet for Encryption Router setup (FC 5247 only)
Address 251 Router Address 250 Router
LAN IP Address Controller Address plus 5 Controller Address plus 5
WAN IP Address
Customer Gateway
Customer Subnet Mask
First Customer DNS Address
Second Customer DNS Address
mounted Controller” on page 4-6 to configure the 3592 C06 controller for the 3577 L5U Tape Library.

Verify Cabling to an External Switch (Director)
1. The following external fibre switches (directors) are certified for 3592 Tape Drive attachment to the
controller:
v McData Model EC-6140 and EC-6064
v CNT Model FC-9000
v McData Model Intrepid i10k (IBM 2027–256/232)
2. These external switches provide support for:
v Single and dual zoning
v Sixteen 3592 Tape Drives attached to the controller
v 3592 Tape Drives in a 3494 Tape Library or 3592 Tape Drives in a 3584 Tape Library frame, or any
3592 C06 controller installation in a standalone frame.
3. Customer-supplied fibre cables will be used to connect the fibre channel adapters, and to attach up to
sixteen 3592 Tape Drives in either single-port or dual-port configurations.
4. Check with the administrator to make sure the Fibre cable connections from the fibre channel adapters
in slot 1 and slot 4 of the 3592 C06 controller match up correctly with the zoning assigned to the
drives. For example, if two paths (zones) are created to each 3592 Tape Drive with cabling to Port 0
and Port 1 of each drive, refer to the following two figures for an illustration how the Fibre Channel
Adapters are pathed to each zone.
5. Ensure the cable ends are labeled correctly, especially at the 3592 C06 controller and 3592 Tape Drive
ends.
6. Return to the procedure that sent you here.
HBA1 HBA2 HBA1 HBA2
C06 C06
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Zone Zone
1 1
3592 3592 3592 3592 3592 3592

Drive Drive Drive Drive Drive Drive
c0600066
c0600067
Port0 Port1 Port0 Port1 Port0 Port1 Port0 Port1 Port0 Port1 Port0 Port1
Drive 0 Drive 1 Drive 15 Drive 0 Drive 1 Drive 15
Figure 3-21. Example – External Switch With Single Zone Figure 3-22. Example – External Switch With Two Zones
(2 Port HBA Cards) (2 Port HBA Cards)

LAN Configuration Matrix (Quick Reference For Dual LAN In 3494 or
3953 Environment)
The following matrix is provided to give you an overview of the order in which LAN items should be
installed or configured for each controller in dual LAN installations.
Notes:
v Dual LAN capability is installed and configured on one 3592 C06 controller tape controller at a
time.
You should complete the Dual LAN configuration on a 3592 C06 controller before starting the
installation and configuration for Dual LAN on a second or additional 3592 C06 controller.
v The steps listed below use the 3592 C06 controller (in Frame 2) shown on the left side of
Figure 3-23 on page 3-79 as an example. These steps are identical to any 3592 C06 controller
tape controller in another frame.
v Refer to Figure 3-23 on page 3-79, the Primary LAN Switch (IP address 192.168.250.244) 15
and the Alternate LAN Switch (IP address 192.168.251.244) 16 (both 3COM Concentrator
switches) must already be installed in the Library Manager frame (as part of FC 5245) to allow
Dual LAN capability on the 3592 C06 controller tape controller. For A60 Dual LAN configuration,
go to “LAN Configuration Matrix (Quick Reference for Dual LAN)” in the A60 MI Installation
chapter.
Table 3-28. Configure Controller For LAN Operations In Dual LAN Mode. Perform the steps in the order which is
listed in this table.
TSSC
System
Dual LAN SMC Fibre Console
Controller Install Router Switch Connect Steps to be Performed
3592 C06 Yes Yes No No (a.) (b.) (c.) (e.) (i.)
controller
3592 C06 Yes Yes No Yes (a.) (b.) (c.) (d.) (e.) (j.) (f.) (k.) (i.)
controller
3592 C06 Yes Yes Yes No (a.) (b.) (c.) (g.) (h.) (l.) (e.) (i.)
controller
3592 C06 Yes Yes Yes Yes (a.) (b.) (c.) (d.) (g.) (h.) (l.) (e.) (j.) (f.) (k.) (i.)
controller
1. Perform the steps in the order listed in Table 3-28. If 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches are installed,
there will be NO Ethernet connections to the 4 Gb Switch.
a. Connect ethernet cable 3 from 3592 C06 controller Ethernet Port #1 (en0) to a LAN port in front
of SMC Router. Refer to Figure 3-23 on page 3-79.
b. Connect another ethernet cable 5 from 3592 C06 controller Ethernet port #2 (en1) (located to the
right of Ethernet port #1) to a LAN port on the Primary LAN Switch in the Library Manager frame.
Refer to Figure 3-23 on page 3-79.
c. Connect ethernet cable 11 from a LAN port in the front of the SMC Router to a LAN port on the
Alternate LAN Switch in the Library Manager frame. Refer to Figure 3-23 on page 3-79.
d. For TSSC System Console connection 26, connect Ethernet cable (50 ft (15M).) from WAN port
located on the rear of the SMC Router to the TSSC System Console switch. Refer to Figure 3-23
on page 3-79.
e. Go to “Configure LAN for 3494 Tape Library” on page 4-8. Specify “yes” for “Dual LAN”
configuration.

f. Go to “Show / Change TSSC connection” on page 4-89.
Note: Prior to starting this procedure the LAN in this frame must be isolated from the LAN in the
other frames. Disconnect the ethernet cable 11 to the Alternate LAN Switch in the Library
Manager frame from this SMC Router LAN port temporarily.
Note: Step (e.) must already have been performed prior to doing this step.
When the SMC Router has been successfully configured, make sure the ethernet cable to
the Alternate LAN Switch in the Library Manager frame is reconnected to an SMC Router
LAN port.
g. Connect ethernet cable 23 from a LAN port in front of SMC Router to the ethernet port on the
2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch. Also connect ethernet cable 28 to the ethernet port on the
Alternate Fibre Switch 29 if the Dual 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch configuration has been
installed. Ensure the SMC Router 8 and the Fibre Switch are powered ON. Refer to Figure 3-23
on page 3-79.
h. Go to “Ping Hardware Test” on page 4-79. Return here when complete.
i. Go to IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library Controllers Maintenance Information to set up
Call Home and to complete the TSSC attachment.
j. Go to the IBM System Storage TS3000 System Console (TSSC) Maintenance Information to
Configure IBM TotalStorage System Console for this controller (if the TSSC System Console is
connected). See “Configuration” in chapter 2 of the TSSC MI. Return here when complete.
k. Ensure the drives and the controller are powered ON, and connected to the Fibre Channel Switch.
2. This is the end of the procedure.

Dual LAN TCP/IP Addressing
Assume C06 is
attached to Frame 2 en0 en0
(Position 20)
192.168.251.20 192.168.251.30
Assume A60
1 C06 3 A60 2 is in Frame 3
(Position 30)
192.168.251.23
192.168.250.20 192.168.250.30
Alternate en1 en1
29 28 4
Fibre 5 6
Switch
23 24
192.168.251.22 192.168.251.25 192.168.251.35 192.168.251.32
11
Primary
7 Router 8 Router 9 Fibre 10
Fibre 12
Switch
Switch
172.31.1.25 172.31.1.35
WAN WAN
27
26 SC SW 13
25
172.31.1.1
192.168.250.244 192.168.251.244
SC 14
15 Primary Alternate 16
LAN Switch LAN Switch
20
21
192.168.251.1 192.168.251.2
17 18
c0600002
LMA 19 LMB
192.168.250.1 22 192.168.250.2
Figure 3-23. Two Tape Controllers (3592 C06 controller and 3590 A60) with Dual LAN Cabling Layout, 3592 C06
controller and Router are located in outbound 3952 F05 Frame
The following list refers to Figure 3-23.

1 3592 C06 controller in Frame 2
2 3590 Model A60 in Frame 3
3 Cable, 3592 C06 controller (Frame 2) Integrated Ethernet Port # 1 (en0) to SMC Router in same
frame.
4 Cable, Model A60 (Frame 3) Integrated Ethernet Port # 1 (en0) to SMC Router in same frame.
5 Cable, 3592 C06 controller (Frame 2) Ethernet Port # 2 (en1 on Integrated Ethernet port 2) to
Primary LAN Switch
6 Cable, Model A60 (Frame 3) Ethernet Port # 2 (en1) (on NIC card) to Primary LAN Switch
7 Fibre Switch (2109 Model S16 or 2109 Model F16 or 2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch)
with 3592 C06 controller in Frame 2
8 SMC Router with 3592 C06 controller in Frame 2
9 SMC Router with Model A60 in Frame 3
10 Fibre Switch (2109 Model S16 or 2109 Model F16) with Model A60 in Frame 3
11 Cable, SMC Router in Frame 2 to Alternate LAN Switch
13 TSSC System Console Switch (LAN)
14 TSSC System Console
15 Primary LAN Switch

16 Alternate LAN Switch
18 Library Manager B (HA1 ONLY)
19 Cable, Primary LAN Switch to Library Manager A Ethernet Card #2
20 Cable, Alternate LAN Switch to Library Manager A Ethernet Card #1
21 Cable, Alternate LAN Switch to Library Manager B Ethernet Card #1
22 Cable, Primary LAN Switch to Library Manager B Ethernet Card #2
23 Cable, SMC Router in Frame 2 to Fibre Switch in same frame, if it is connected to the 2Gb
20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
24 Cable, SMC Router in Frame 3 to Fibre Switch in same frame
25 Cable, 50 ft (15M). ethernet cable from TSSC System Console to TSSC System Console.
26 Cable, 50 ft (15M). ethernet cable from SMC Router WAN port in frame 2 to TSSC System
Console.
Console.
28 Ethernet cable, from SMC Router LAN port to Alternate Fibre Switch, 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch
29 Alternate Fibre Switch (2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch) in Dual Switch configuration
with 3592 C06 controller
Note:
1. The last (fourth) octet of the TCP or IP address for the 3592 C06 controller, SMC Router and
Fibre Switch is dependent on frame position number, i.e. 20, 30, 40 ... 160, in the 3494 Tape
Library.
2. Ethernet port en0 on the 3592 C06 controller is provided by the Integrated Ethernet Port 1.
3. The SMC 7008ABR Router is configured for LAN or WAN IP address when the TSSC System
Console is connected.
4. The following TCP or IP addresses are reserved addresses and cannot be used:
v 192.168.251.254
v 172.31.1.254
5. Dotted lines in the diagram indicate connections to optional features (e.g. FC2720–TSSC
System Console, for 2nd FC3487–Dual Fibre Switches)

LAN Configuration Matrix (Quick Reference For Single LAN In 3494 /
3953 Environment)
The following matrix gives you an overview of the order in which LAN items should be installed or
configured for single LAN installations.
Table 3-29. Configure 3592 C06 controller For LAN Operations In Single LAN Mode. Perform the steps in the order
which is listed in this table.
Single TSSC
LAN SMC Fibre System
Controller Install Router Switch Console Steps to be Performed
3592 C06 Yes Yes No No (a.) (b.) (d.) (h.)
controller
3592 C06 Yes Yes No Yes (a.) (b.) (c.) (d.) (i.) (e.) (j.) (h.)
controller
3592 C06 Yes Yes Yes No (a.) (b.) (f.) (g.) (k.) (d.) (h.)
controller
3592 C06 Yes Yes Yes Yes (a.) (b.) (f.) (g.) (c.) (k.) (d.) (i.) (e.) (j.) (h.)
controller
1. Do the steps in the order specified in the table above. If 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch are
installed, there will be NO Ethernet connections to the 4 Gb Switch.
a. Connect Ethernet cable 2 from Ethernet Port #1 (en0) (leftmost integrated ethernet port when
viewed from the rear of the 3592 C06 controller ) to a LAN port in front of SMC Router. Refer to
b. Connect another Ethernet cable 3 from a LAN port in front of SMC Router to LAN Concentrator
(3COM) switch in the Library Manager frame. Refer to Figure 3-24 on page 3-82.
c. For TSSC System Console connection (with SMC Router), connect ethernet cable 15 (50 ft.)
from WAN port located on the rear of the SMC Router to the TSSC System Console switch.
d. Go to “Configure LAN for 3494 Tape Library” on page 4-8.
e. Go to “Show / Change TSSC connection” on page 4-89.
Notes:
v Prior to starting this procedure the LAN in this frame must be isolated from the LAN in
the other frames.Disconnect the Ethernet cable 3 to the LAN 3COM Concentrator
Switch in the Library Manager frame from this SMC Router LAN port temporarily.
v Step (d.) must already have been performed prior to doing this step.
When the SMC Router has been successfully configured, make sure the ethernet cable
to the LAN Concentrator Switch in the Library Manager frame is reconnected to an
SMC Router LAN port.
Note:
f. Connect an Ethernet cable 5 from a LAN port in front of the SMC Router to the Ethernet port on
the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch. Also connect an Ethernet cable 17 from an SMC Router
LAN port to the Ethernet port on the Alternate Fibre Switch 18 if the Dual 2Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switch configuration has been installed. Ensure the SMC Router 4 and Fibre Switch(es)
are powered ON.
g. Go to “Ping Hardware Test” on page 4-79.
h. Go to the IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library Controllers Maintenance Information to set
up Call Home and complete the TSSC System Console attachment. Return here when complete.

i. Go to the IBM System Storage TS3000 System Console (TSSC) Maintenance Information to
configure the TSSC System Console for this controller (if the TSSC System Console is connected).
See “Configuration” in chapter 2 of the MI. Return here when complete.
j. Make sure the drives and the 3592 C06 controller are powered up and connected to the Fibre
Channel Switch.
Single LAN TCP/IP Addressing with Optional Dual Library Manager
en0
192.168.251.20 Assume C06 is attached to Frame 2 (Position 20)
2 1 18
C06
192.168.251.23
Alternate
17
Fibre
5 Switch
6
192.168.251.25
4 192.168.251.22
3 Router Primary
Fibre
172.31.1.25 7 Switch
WAN 15
MC SW
9 172.31.1.1
16
192.168.251.244
MC 8
LAN Switch
12 11 10 13
192.168.251.1 192.168.251.2
c0600001
LMA LMB
14
192.168.250.1 192.168.250.2
Figure 3-24. Single 3592 C06 controller with Single LAN Cabling Layout
The following list refers to Figure 3-24.

2 Cable, 3592 C06 controller Integrated Ethernet Port (en0) to SMC Router
3 Cable , SMC Router to LAN Switch
4 SMC Router
5 Cable, SMC Router to Fibre Switch if connected to the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
6 Fibre Switch 2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
9 LAN Switch
10 Cable, LAN Switch to Library Manager B Ethernet Card #1

11 Cable, LAN Switch to Library Manager A Ethernet Card #1
14 Cable Crosswired, Library Manager A Ethernet Card #2 to Library Manager B Ethernet Card #2
15 Cable 50 ft (15M) ethernet cable from SMC Router WAN port to TSSC System Console Switch
16 Cable 50 ft (15M) Ethernet cable from TSSC System Console Switch to TSSC System Console
17 Ethernet cable, from SMC Router LAN port to Alternate Fibre Switch, 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch
18 Alternate Fibre Switch (2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch) in Dual Switch configuration
with 3592 C06 controller.
Note:
v The last (fourth) octet of the TCP or IP address for the 3592 C06 controller, SMC Router and
Fibre Switch is dependent on frame position number, i.e. 20, 30, 40 ... 160, in the 3494 Tape
Library.
v The SMC 7008ABR Router is configured for LAN or WAN IP address when the TSSC System
– 192.168.251.254
– 172.31.1.254
v Dotted lines in the diagram indicate connections to optional features (for example, FC2720
System Console for 2nd FC3487 or FC3488 -Dual Fibre Switches).

LAN Configuration Matrix (Quick Reference for 3577 L5U Tape Library
environment)
The following matrix gives you an overview of the order in which LAN items should be installed or
configured for single LAN installations.
Table 3-30. Configure 3592 C06 controller For LAN Operations In Single LAN Mode. Perform the steps in the order
which is listed in this table.
TSSC
Single System
LAN SMC Fibre Console
Controller Install Router Switch Connect Steps to be Performed
Yes Yes No No (a.) (b.) (d.) (h.)
3592 C06 Yes Yes No Yes (a.) (b.) (c.) (d.) (i.) (e.) (j.) (h.)
controller
3592 C06 Yes Yes Yes No (a.) (b.) (f.) (g.) (k.) (d.) (h.)
controller
3592 C06 Yes Yes Yes Yes (a.) (b.) (f.) (g.) (c.) (k.) (d.) (i.) (e.) (j.) (h.)
controller
1. Do the steps in the order specified in the table above. If 4 Gb Fibre Switches are installed, there will
be NO Ethernet connections to the 4 Gb Switch.
a. Connect Ethernet cable 2 from Ethernet Port #1 (en0) (leftmost integrated ethernet port when
viewed from the rear of the 3592 C06 controller ) to a LAN port in front of SMC Router. Refer to
b. Connect another Ethernet cable 3 from a LAN port in front of SMC Router to LAN Concentrator
(3COM) switch in the Library Manager frame. Refer to Figure 3-24 on page 3-82.
c. For TSSC System Console connection (with SMC Router), connect ethernet cable 15 (50 ft.)
from WAN port located on the rear of the SMC Router to the TSSC System Console switch.
d. Go to “Configure LAN for 3494 Tape Library” on page 4-8.
e. Go to “Show / Change TSSC connection” on page 4-89.
Notes:
v Prior to starting this procedure the LAN in this frame must be isolated from the LAN in
the other frames.Disconnect the Ethernet cable 3 to the LAN 3COM Concentrator
Switch in the Library Manager frame from this SMC Router LAN port temporarily.
v Step (d.) must already have been performed prior to doing this step.
When the SMC Router has been successfully configured, make sure the ethernet cable
to the LAN Concentrator Switch in the Library Manager frame is reconnected to an
SMC Router LAN port.
Note:
f. Connect an Ethernet cable 5 from a LAN port in front of the SMC Router to the Ethernet port on
the 2 Gb 20-port Fibre Channel Switch. Also connect an Ethernet cable 17 from an SMC Router
LAN port to the Ethernet port on the Alternate Fibre Switch 18 if the Dual 2 Gb 20-port Fibre
Channel Switch configuration has been installed. Ensure the SMC Router 4 and Fibre Switch(es)
are powered ON.
g. Go to “Ping Hardware Test” on page 4-79.
h. Go to the IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library Controllers Maintenance Information to set
up Call Home and complete the TSSC System Console attachment. Return here when complete.

i. Go to the IBM System Storage TS3000 System Console (TSSC) Maintenance Information to
configure the TSSC System Console for this controller (if the TSSC System Console is connected).
See “Configuration” in chapter 2 of the MI. Return here when complete.
j. Make sure the drives and the 3592 C06 controller are powered up and connected to the Fibre
Channel Switch.
Note:
v The last (fourth) octet of the TCP or IP address for the 3592 C06 controller, SMC Router and
Fibre Switch is dependent on frame position number, i.e. 20, 30, 40 ... 160, in the 3494 library.
v The SMC 7008ABR Router is configured for LAN or WAN IP address when the TSSC System
– 192.168.251.254
– 172.31.1.254
v Dotted lines in the diagram indicate connections to optional features (for example, FC2720
System Console for 2nd FC3487 or FC3488 -Dual Fibre Switches).

Field Merge 3592 C06 controller
You are here to field merge a 3592 C06 controller into a 3952 F05 Base or Expansion Frame, or a Rack.
The frame should already contain the rails on which the 3592 C06 controller will be mounted. If not, you
are here in error. Return to the procedure that sent you here.
Installing System In a Frame

1. See Figure 3-25. Attach the four support knobs 1 to the system unit.
Note: Although the front of your 3592 C06 controller may look different from the system shown here,
all other dimensions of the 3592 C06 controller enclosure and instructions apply.
2
c06ii003
Figure 3-25. Attach Support Knobs To C06
2. Fully extend both rails.

3. Using three people, grasp the handles 2 located on each side of the system unit, and position the
system unit on the extended rails.
CAUTION:
This unit weighs between 32 kg (70.5 pounds) and 55 kg (121.2 pounds). Three people are
required to safely move it. Using fewer than three people to move it can result in injury.
4. See Figure 3-26 on page 3-87. Rest the system on the four support knobs. Align the three holes in
the inner rails with the holes in each side of the system unit.

1
c06ii004
3 2
Figure 3-26. Attach Rails To System
5. Install and tighten the screws 2 (M4 x 8) to attach the rails 1.
6. Remove the support four knobs, 3. These knobs and screws should be saved for any future control
unit removal.
7. See Figure 3-27. Simultaneously release the blue safety latches 1 located near the front of each
rail, and push the system unit into the rack.
1
c06ii005
Figure 3-27. Release Safety Latches

8. Slide the system unit into and out of the rack two or three times to align the system unit to the rails.
The system unit should glide on the rails.
9. Push the system unit into the rack. Tighten the two retaining screws that secure the slide rails to the
back of the rack.
10. Slide the system unit halfway out of the rack.
11. Tighten the front four retaining screws that secure the slide rails to the frame of the rack.
Note: After the rails are installed, do not extend them past their safety latches. The safety latches
prevent the rails from overextending and separating, thereby preventing the system unit from
being pulled out too far and being dropped.
12. See Figure 3-28. To provide additional stability when transporting the rack, install and tighten two
thumbscrews 1 through the front cover 2.
1
2
c06ii006
Figure 3-28. Secure System To Frame
Installing Cable Management Arm

3
c06ii007
4
5
Figure 3-29. Install Cable Management Arm
Follow these steps to install the cable-management arm.

1. From the back of the frame, locate the cable-management arm flange 1 located on the fixed back
portion of the left rail 2.
2. Use pin 3 to pin the cable-management arm 4 to the rack frame 5.
Note: If access to the back of the rack is obscured by a large number of existing cables, it might be
easier to remove the small connecting hinge from the cable-management arm and attach it first.
Then, you can attach the remaining section of the cable-management arm to the connecting
hinge.
3. Use pin 3 to pin the other end of the cable-management arm to the flange 1 attached to the sliding
portion of the left rail 2. Ensure the cable-management arm is level so it moves freely.

Relocation
To relocate the entire frame containing the 3592 C06 controller, refer to the Relocation/Discontinuance
chapter in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Automated Tape Library (3494) Base 3494 Tape Library
Maintenance Information.
If the frame is not being relocated, and just the 3592 C06 controller is being moved, the removal should be
accomplished through a feature code 'Removal' Installation Instruction. The reinstall of this machine in
another frame should be accomplished through a feature code 'Install' Installation Instruction.
If the relocation has been performed without using Installation Instructions, perform the following checks.
1. After reconnecting all cables, but prior to powering on the relocated 3592 C06 controller, place the
3592 C06 controller into the service position. See “Place Controller in Service Position” on page 5-2.
2. Open the service access cover. See “Remove Top Cover” on page 5-2.
3. Reseat all memory DIMMs. This is to ensure they did not become unseated during the physical move.
Note: Ensure that other components, such as fans, the operator panel, adapter cards, HDDs,and,
SFPs, are firmly seated and connected (to cables, where appropriate) before applying power to
the system.
4. Check for any lost or loose screws within the system chassis, and replace and tighten them.
5. Close the service access cover, as described in “Reinstall Top Cover” on page 5-3.
6. Return the 3592 C06 controller to the operating position, as described in “Returning Controller To
Operating Position” on page 5-4.
7. Power on the 33592 C06 controller, as described in “Power On 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-87.

Chapter 4. Procedures
This section contains procedures you will need to service a 3592 C06 controller. Use these procedures
when directed to do so. During the installation process and during maintenance actions you will be
directed as to which procedure to run and when to run it. Do not run procedures arbitrarily.
Adding tape drives to 3592 C06 controller - Concurrently

| The 3592-C06 with 3494 attached libraries does not support 3592-E07 drives. This information enables
you to add tape drives to the 3592 C06 controller with no disruption to the customer.
Prerequisites
v Go to “Checking Number of Attached Devices” on page 4-3 and verify it is set to 16, or to a number
high enough to accommodate the drives to be added.
v If the 3592 C06 controller is attached to a frame within a 3494 Tape Library, correct drive addresses
must be set. Drive topology must be set to L if the drives are connected to a 2Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre
| Channel Switch. See “Installation Checkout” and “Set Customer Options” in the IBM System Storage
| TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592
| Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07.
v If you are adding encryption-enabled drives, all previously-configured drives at this 3592 C06 controller
also must be encryption-enabled. The concurrent addition of encryption-enabled drives is not allowed
unless all existing drives connected to this 3592 C06 controller are encryption-enabled.
| Note: You must always enable 3592 E06, EU6 and 3592-E07 Tape Drives for System Managed
| Encryption to be recognized by the Controller.
v If the drives are installed in a 3494 Tape Library, ensure a Teach has been performed prior to
performing this concurrent add procedure.
v Ensure the drives are connected properly, and are powered ON.
v If the drives being added are in a 3584 Tape Library, verify the drives are assigned to the correct logical
library. Refer to “Using the drive assignment web page” in the 3584 Tape Library MI.
v If the drives being added are in a 3584 Tape Library and require control paths to be set, go to the 3584
Tape Library control panel to set the control paths. The recommended total number of control paths for
drives attached to a 3592 C06 controller is four.
v If not already connected, go to “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102 to connect the Service
Terminal. Return here when complete.
Instructions
1. From the Main Service Menu, select Subsystem Maintenance > Control Unit Service Utilities >
FCP Configurator for concurrent drive install
2. When prompted to proceed with concurrent drive configuration, answer yes. Allow the configuration of
the newly-installed drives to complete.
3. Press F3 twice, and select Control Unit and Tape Drive Online / Offline Control > Vary Tape Drive
Online to bring the newly-installed drives online
4. Select each of the new drives, which are still offline, and press F7 for each drive.
5. Press Enter after having made all selections of the drives to be brought online.
6. Wait for an OK indication in the Command Status screen to indicate the drives are online.
7. Tell the system administrator the newly-installed drives may be varied online to the host.

Adding New Microcode Images To 3592 C06 controller
This information provides directions to install new microcode when required for update or due to a
machine malfunction.
Start EBTERM or Netterm. See IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library Controllers Maintenance
Information for the procedures. If it is not working correctly, go to “Connecting the Service Terminal” on
page 4-102.
Attention: If you are installing new AIX or controller microcode, and the microcode Installation
Instructions are available for the new microcode, use the Installation Instructions. If the Installation
Instructions are not available, go to procedure “Installing AIX and 3592 C06 controller microcode on the
3592 C06 controller” on page 4-58. If any errors are encountered, retry the copy procedure. If the problem
persists, try with another CD. If a hardware problem is suspected, run hardware problem determination
procedures.
Use these procedures to add new microcode to become one of the two microcode levels stored within the
Note: If two prior levels have already been installed, the lowest level has to be deleted before a new level
can be added. To delete an existing level from the Tape Subsystem, from the Microcode
Maintenance screen, select Delete Code Image. Follow the directions for the microcode load
deletion.
1. Ensure all drives are powered, cabled, and online. Enter Service, and select Microcode Maintenance
> Copy Code Image From Source Media > Copy Subsystem Code from Source Media –- or –
–>Copy Tape Drive Code from Source Media.
2. Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive (top drive), and follow the instructions on the screen.
3. Remove the last CD, and press Enter.
This is the end of the procedure.
Using the TSSC to add Microcode to 3592 C06 controller

New subsystem microcode levels or new drive code levels may also be copied to the 3592 C06 controller
from the TSSC System Console if this 3592 C06 controller subsystem is connected to a System Console.
Refer to “Remote Code Broadcast” in the Procedures chapter of the IBM System Storage TS3000 System
Console (TSSC) Maintenance Information.
Analyze the AIX Log

The 3592 C06 Controller logs errors to the AIX error log, then determines if a SIM should be sent to the
host. In cases, such as an intermittent or unknown Enterprise Controller hardware problem, where the SIM
record does not provide enough information to fix the problem, and diagnostics are unable to isolate the
failure, the actual AIX error log entry can be used to isolate and repair the problem.
To View an AIX Error Log Entry:

1. Connect and Login the Service Terminal to the 3592 C06 controller, refer to “Connecting the Service
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance screen, select Subsystem Error Log > Generate an Error
Report.
3. Highlight the line SUMMARY or DETAILED error report, and press F4 to list the options.
4. Select detailed, and press Enter.

5. If you have the sequence number of a specific AIX error log entry that you want to analyze:
v Highlight the line SEQUENCE numbers (default is ALL), and enter the sequence number in the
brackets.
v If you have the AIX Error ID of a specific AIX error log entry that you wish to analyze, highlight the
line Error IDs (default is all), and enter the AIX error ID in the brackets.
v If you know the resource name for a specific AIX error log entry that you wish to analyze, highlight
the line Resource NAMES (default is ALL), and enter the resource name in the brackets.
6. Press Enter to generate the error report.
7. If multiple error log entries display, look for repetitive entries, or entries with descriptions consistent
with the symptoms of the failure you are analyzing. Use the U and D keys to scroll up and down. If
you are unable to find an entry that makes sense, call your next level of support.
8. Follow the Recommended Actions and or replace the FRUs identified by the Failure Causes and
Probable Causes. If you are uncertain of how to proceed, call your next level of support.
9. Press the Q key to return to the Generate an Error Report panel.
10. Press F3 twice to return to the Subsystem Maintenance screen.
End of procedure.
Checking Number of Attached Devices

Enables the service representative to check the setting of the number of attached devices to determine if
concurrent addition of tape drives is possible.
Prerequisites
If the Service Terminal is not already connected, go to “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102.
Instructions
1. Ensure the currently set Number of Attached Devices in the 3592 C06 controller is large enough to
include the new drives. The default is 16. The Number of Attached Devices can be checked by
selecting the following. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Subsystem Configuration >
Show / Change Control Unit Definitions
If the number in the entry field for Number of Attached Devices is still 16 or high enough to
accommodate the new drives, press F3 to return to the Main Service menu, and continue with the
procedure that sent you here.
2. If the number is too low, this concurrent procedure will have to be ended. A new number will have to
be entered when all customer tasks are completed and the 3592 C06 controller is turned over to
Service.
In this case, go to “Setting Number of Drives On Controller” on page 4-111 to complete configuration of
the new drives.
Making Entries On 3494 or 3953 LM Panel For Path To Out-Of-Band

EKM
If this controller is attached to a library manager (3953 or 3494), and there is an encryption key manager
(EKM) residing on a server, these addresses should have been set previously. Use this procedure to verify
that they are the same.
1. From the 3494 or 3953 LM, select Commands.
2. From the pull-down menu, select System Management.
3. From the next pull-down menu, select Manage Encryption.
4. Click on Control Unit Encryption Information. You see Figure 4-1 on page 4-4.
Chapter 4. Procedures 4-3

Control Unit Encryption Information
Frame 3 Pri NS IP Addr: 9.11.244.114 Sec NS IP Addr:
Primary Key Manager Data
IP Address:
9.11.214.184
Domain Name:
Port: 08050
Secondary Key Manager Data
IP Address:
Domain Name:
Port: 00000
Status:
No operation in progress.
Modify this CU only Modify all CUs Refresh Exit Help
c0600079
Figure 4-1. Control Unit Encryption Information Menu – 3494 or 3953 LM
5. In the Frame field of the Control Unit Encryption Information menu, select the Frame to which the
C06 controller is attached (upper left corner of menu).
6. In the Pri NS IP Addr field, enter the IP address of the Primary Name Server.
7. In the Sec NS IP Addr field, enter the IP address of the Secondary Name Server, if one exists.
8. With the IP Address radio button selected, enter the IP address of the Primary Key Manager into the
input field.
9. In the Port field, enter the Port number of the Primary Key Manager.
10. With the IP Address radio button selected, enter the IP address of the Secondary Key Manager.
11. In the Port field, enter the Port number of the Secondary Key Manager.
12. If you will enter a domain name, change the Primary Key Manager Date radio button to Domain
Name.
13. Enter the Domain Name of the Primary Key Manager into the input field.
14. If you will enter a secondary key manger, change the Secondary Key Manager Date radio button to
Domain Name.
15. Enter the Domain Name of the Secondary Key Manager.
16. Select the Modify this CU only button. This will store the information in the Set EKM 25x Router
Configuration menu of the selected controller, or select Modify all CUs to transfer the encryption
information to all the control units in this 3494 library or in this 3953 L05 Library Manager. You see

Set EKM 25x Router Configuration
Type or select values in entry fields.

Press Enter AFTER making all desired changes.
[Entry Fields]
Enter the LAN IP Address to be used on the [192.168.25x.5]
EKM router:
Enter the WAN IP (on Customer net) for the []
EKM router:
Enter the Customer Gateway: []
Enter the Customer Subnet Mask for the WAN IP: []
Enter the 1st Customer DNS Address: []
Enter the 2nd Customer DNS Address: []
F1=Help F2=Refresh F3=Cancel F4=List

F5=Reset F6=Command F7=Edit F8=Image
F9=Shell F10=Exit Enter=Do
Figure 4-2. Set EKM 25x Router Configuration Menu – For Out-Of-Band EKM

Configure Attachment to 3494, 3584, 3577 Library; or 'None' for C20
Tape Library and Rack mounted Controller
| Note: The 3592 E07 drive is only supported in the 3584 library, and stand-alone configurations.
This information configures the 3592 C06 controller when attached to a D24 or D22 frame in a 3494 Tape
Library, a standalone 3952 F05 Frame, a 3577 L5U Tape Library, a C20 Tape Library, or a Rack mounted
Controller.
1. To configure the 3577 L5U Tape Library from it's front panel, go to “Attach 3577 L5U Tape Library(s) to
the 3592 C06 controller” on page 3-70, fill out the required information, then proceed with the 3577
L5U Tape Library set up procedure.
2. Connect the Service Terminal to the 3592 C06 controller. See “Connecting the Service Terminal” on
page 4-102.
3. From the Subsystem Maintenance screen, select Subsystem Configuration > Show/Change
Library Attachment Configuration > Change Library Attachment Configuration.
Show / Change Library Attachment Configuration
Move cursor to desired item and press Enter.
Show Library Attachment Configuration

Change Library Attachment Configuration
Reconfigure 3577 Library Attachment
————————————————————————————————————————————————–———–————
| Select Type of Tape Library Attachment |
| Move cursor to desired item and press Enter. |
| |
| #Select the Type of Tape Library this Controller |
| will be attached to, from the list below: |
| # |
| 3494 |
| 3584 |
| 3577 |
| None |
| |
| |
| F1=Help F2=Refresh F3=Cancel |
| F8=Image F10=Exit Enter=Do |
F1 | /=Find n=Find Next |
F9 ————————————————————————————————————————————————–———–————
Figure 4-3. Select Library Attachment
From the inset pop-up menu for type of Tape Library attachment, select one of the following;
v For 3494, press Enter, continue with “Configure LAN for 3494 Tape Library” on page 4-8. Figure 4-4 on
page 4-8 is shown.
v For 3584, press Enter, continue with “Configure LAN for 3592 C06 controller in a 3953 F05 Tape
Frame” on page 4-12. Figure 4-9 on page 4-12 is shown.
v For 3577, press Enter, continue with “Configure LAN for 3577 L5U Tape Library with a microcode
update” on page 4-16. Figure 4-12 on page 4-16 is shown.
v For None, press Enter, continue with “Configure LAN for C20 Tape Library, or Rack Mounted
Controller” on page 4-29.

Configure LAN for 3494 Tape Library
Type or select a value for the entry field.

[Entry Fields]
Attachment Method (Press F4 to choose) +
lqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqk
x Attachment Method (Press F4 to choose) x
x x
x Move cursor to desired item and press Enter. x
x x
x lan x
x rs422 x
x X
x x
x F1=Help F2=Refresh F3=Cancel x
x F8=Image F10=Exit Enter=Do x
x /=Find n=Find Next x
mqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqj
Figure 4-4. Change Library Attachment Configuration Screen
1. Press F4 to obtain the pop up menu when the “Change Library Attachment Configuration” screen
appears. Figure 4-4 is displayed with the pop up menu.
Note: Based on the attachment method in the 3494 Tape Library and drive type, there may be as
many as three more options to configure and will be shown in the next screen. The code has
enough information to finish configuration.
2. Select lan. See Figure 4-5.

[Entry Fields]
* Attachment Method Selected lan
CU LAN Address (F4 to Select) [20] +
Dual Library Manager Feature (F4 to Select) [no] +
Dual Path Attachment (F4 to Select) [ ] +

Figure 4-5. Change Library Attachment Configuration Screen, when 'lan' is selected
3. If “CU LAN Address” is an option on the screen, select CU LAN Address and press F4 to obtain the
list. Figure 4-6 on page 4-9 is displayed.


[Entry Fields]
* lqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqq
x CU LAN Address
x
x Move cursor to desired item and press Enter.
x
x auto
x 20
x 30
x 40
x 50
x 60
x 70
x 80
x 90
x
x F1=Help F2=Refresh F3=Cancel
x F8=Image F10=Exit Enter=Do
x /=Find n=Find Next
mqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqq
Figure 4-6. Change Library Attachment Configuration Screen (for CU LAN Address)
4. Select the appropriate value for the frame position within the 3494 Tape Library string, for the 3494
D24 Frame, or if there is direct attachment to a 3494 D22 Frame, for the 3592 C06 controller. The
frame position begins at the Library Manager frame which is 1 or 10, (frame 2=20, and so forth).
Press Enter. Figure 4-7 on page 4-10 is displayed. The 3494 D24 Frame in this example is the third
frame.
Note: The 3592 C06 controller in the outbound frame will be logically taking the place of a tape
controller within the 3494 Tape Library frame..
5. If there are any additional options listed on the screen, select it, and answer with the appropriate yes
or no.
Note: If you are installing an HA subsystem (LAN only), select Dual Library Manager Feature.
Press F4. Select yes. Press Enter.
Note: If you are installing the Dual LAN feature, be sure to select yes for Dual Path Attachment.
6. Press Enter. Figure 4-7 on page 4-10 is displayed.


[Entry Fields]
* Attachment Method Selected lan
CU LAN Address (F4 to Select) [30] +
Dual Path Attachment (F4 to Select) [yes] +
Dual Library Manager Feature (F4 to Select) [no] +
x ARE YOU SURE? x
x x
x Continuing may delete information you may want x
x to keep. This is your last chance to stop x
x before continuing. x
x Press Enter to continue. x
x Press Cancel to return to the application. x
x x
7. Press Enter. Before the “Command Status” screen is displayed, you may be prompted to respond to
messages regarding taking the Control Unit offline and online. Answer with yes in both cases.
COMMAND STATUS
Command: OK stdout: yes stderr: no
Before command completion, additional instructions may appear below.
[TOP]
LAN adapter 0 available
CU Type is bc
0518-307 odmdelete: 4 objects deleted.
ODM updated for default lan configuration
0518-307 odmdelete: 1 objects deleted.
LAN addresses added
/etc/ibmatl.conf file regenerated to reflect ODM
en0
3590cu30
inet0 changed
en0 changed
en1
[MORE...10]
F1=Help F2=Refresh F3=Cancel F6=Command

F8=Image F9=Shell F10=Exit /=Find
n=Find Next
Figure 4-8. Change Library Attachment Configuration Screen (Command Status)
8. When Command: OK, the configuration has completed.

9. This procedure will continue automatically to Run Fibre Switch Setup, or press F3 until Fibre Switch
Setup DOES run.
Note: You should have the null Modem Serial cable, PN 24R0831, available for connection between
the 3592 C06 controller S2 port and the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch, if this switch is
installed.

10. You will be asked to “Select FCP Fibre Switch Type”. Select the switch type installed in your frame or
select “External” for External Switch (director) connection. Please note that you must select “External”
for Point–to–Point (direct attach) drive(s) install.
Note: You will NOT be asked to connect a null modem Serial cable when 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switches are installed. The 4Gb switches will be automatically detected and configured.
11. Continue to follow all prompts for configuration of the Fibre switch. You may refer to “Running Fibre
Switch setup” on page 4-93 for written details of the 2Gb and 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
configurations. Press F3 twice.
12. If this is a microcode activation after a new AIX load you will be prompted to:
a. Enter date and time.
b. Enter the (FICON) WWNN number. The WWNN number is listed on the label on the top of the
3592 C06 controller enclosure. Be sure to enter this number. 3592 C06 controller software
requires this WWNN number in the online process for Host Bus adapters.
c. You will be notified that mirroring to hdisk1 is starting, which may take up to 30 minutes to
complete.
13. The 3592 C06 controller should remain offline for "SCSI/FCP Configuration", which follows the FC
Switch Configuration (or which follows mirroring to hdisk1 if AIX was loaded also).
14. Press F3 repeatedly to return to the Subsystem Maintenance menu.
a. Select Control Unit Service Utilities > Configure Control Unit Hostname > Set the Hostname
b. Enter the unique host name previously recorded at the beginning of microcode load. Press Enter.

Configure LAN for 3592 C06 controller in a 3953 F05 Tape Frame
Prior to starting this procedure for a 3592 C06 controller in an 3953 F05 Expansion Frame frame, it is
important the Ethernet cables from unconfigured 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches attached to
unconfigured 3592 C06 controllers be disconnected from the 251 Router and from the 250 Router. Before
you remove these cables, ensure the cables are properly labeled for correct re-connection.
v Reconnect the Ethernet cables (if previously disconnected in the Expansion frame) to the 251 Router
and to the 250 Router from the 251 and 250 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches associated with the
unconfigured 3592 C06 controller to be configured now. Ethernet cabling for configured 3592 C06
controllers and configured 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches, is to remain connected to the 251
Router and the 250 Router.

[Entry Fields]
Type of Library Attaching to: 3584
* Select the 3953 Frame # where this controller [1] +

is installed:
(EXAMPLE If this controller is in the first 3953

frame then select 1. If this controller is in
the 4th 3953, select 4.)
* Select the position of this controller within [] +

the 3953 frame:
* Dual Library Manager Feature (F4 to Select) [] +

Figure 4-9. Screen to Select Location of 3592 C06 and Dual Library
Note: If a warning message appears at any time asking you if you are selecting the 3584 library, answer
the prompt with y (yes).
1. Select the first option (Select the 3953 Frame #...) in Figure 4-9, and press F4 to receive the list of
frames. Ensure you know in which frame number the 3592 C06 controller is located. For example, the
3592 C06 controller in the 3953 F05 Base Frame is located in Frame #1. Figure 4-10 on page 4-13 is
displayed.


[Entry Fields]

x Select the 3953 Frame # where this controller x
x is installed: x
x x
x 1 x
* x 2 x
x 3 x
x 4 x
* x 5 x
x 6 x
x x
Figure 4-10. Select Where 3953 F05 Frame Located – Screen
2. Select the appropriate value for the 3953 F05 Tape Frame number of the 3592 C06 controller. The
frame numbering begins at the 3953 F05 Base Frame which is Frame #1. The first 3953 F05
Expansion Frame is Frame #2, the second 3953 F05 Expansion Frame is Frame #3, and so forth.
Press Enter. The Figure 4-9 on page 4-12 reappears.
3. Select the second option (Select the position of this 3592 C06 Controller...) in Figure 4-9 on page
4-12 and press F4. The Figure 4-11 is displayed.

[Entry Fields]

is installed:
(EXAMPLE If this controller is in the first 3953

x Select the position of this controller within x
x the 3953 frame: x
* x Move cursor to desired item and press Enter. x
x x
x 3 (Top position within 3953 Frame) x
* x 2 (Middle position within 3953 Frame) x
x 1 (Bottom position within 3953 Frame) x
x x
Figure 4-11. Select Controller Position In F05 Frame – Screen
4. At the Figure 4-11, select the appropriate position of the 3592 C06 controller in the previously
selected 3953 F05 Tape Frame. For example, the 3592 C06 controller in the 3953 F05 Base Frame
(Frame #1) is located in the bottom position of the 3953 F05 Tape Frame. For 3592 C06

controllers in 3953 F05 Expansion Frames, select the position that is appropriate to each of the three
3592 C06 controller's location; that is, at the bottom, middle, or top. Press Enter. The Figure 4-9 on
page 4-12 appears.
5. Select the third option, (Dual Library Manager Feature...), and press F4. Select yes if the Dual
Library Manager Feature is installed in the 3953 F05 Base Frame. Otherwise, select no. Press Enter.
The Figure 4-9 on page 4-12 displays the values in all three entry fields. Press Enter again to start
the LAN configuration.
6. Before the COMMAND STATUS screen is displayed, you may be prompted to respond to a message
regarding taking the Control Unit offline. Answer with yes.
7. When configuration is complete, you will be notified that “Switch Type” must be selected. Press
Enter to continue.
8. If you are configuring a Field Merged 3592 C06 controller in the 3953 F05 Expansion Frame,
reconnect the Ethernet cables to the 251 Router and the 250 Router from this 3592 C06 controller
prior to pressing Enter. These two Ethernet cables were previously disconnected from the 3592 C06
controller Ethernet Port 1 and Ethernet Port 2 to avoid any possible IP address clashes. If you are
not configuring a Field Merged 3592 C06 controller in the 3953 F05 Expansion Frame, skip this
step.
9. If you are configuring a Field Merged 3592 C06 controller in the 3953 F05 Base Frame, reconnect
the Ethernet cables to the 251 Lan Network Switch and to the250 Lan Network Switch from this 3592
C06 controller prior to pressing Enter. These two Ethernet cables were previously disconnected at
the 3592 C06 controller's Ethernet Port 1 and Ethernet Port 2 to avoid any possible IP address
clashes. If you are not configuring a Field Merged 3592 C06 controller in the 3953 F05 Base
Frame, skip this step.
10. This procedure automatically continues to Run Fibre Switch Setup.
Note: Have the Null Modem Serial cable available for connection between the 3592 C06 controller
S2 port and the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch(es), if this switch is installed.
11. You will be asked to “Select FCP Fibre Switch Type.” Select the switch type that is installed in your
3953 F05 Tape Frame and is attached to the 3592 C06 controller, or select “External” for External
Switch (director) connection.
Note: You will NOT be asked to connect a null modem serial cable when 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switches are installed. The 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches will automatically be detected
and configured.
12. When the COMMAND STATUS screen is displayed with Command: OK, the selected Fibre Channel
Switch has been configured to the 3592 C06 controller. Press F3 twice.
13. Follow all prompts for configuration of the Fibre Channel Switch(es). See “Running Fibre Switch
setup” on page 4-93 for written details of the 2Gb and 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
configurations.
14. If this is a microcode activation after a new AIX load you will be prompted to:
a. Enter date and time.
b. Enter the (FICON) WWNN number. The WWNN number is listed on the label on the top of the
3592 C06 controller enclosure. Be sure to enter this number. 3592 C06 controller software
requires this WWNN number in the online process for Host Bus adapters.
c. You will be notified that mirroring to hdisk1 is starting, which may take up to 30 minutes to
complete.
15. After Fibre Channel Switch Setup is complete, you will be asked if the Control Unit should be set to
the online. Answer with no to leave the 3592 C06 controller offline. Offline state will be required in a
following step for “SCSI/FCP Configuration” of the attached 3592 Tape Drives (or it follows mirroring
to hdisk1 if AIX was loaded also).


Configure LAN for 3577 L5U Tape Library with a microcode update
Change 3577 Tape Library Router Configuration

[Entry Fields]
Type of Library attaching to: 3577
CU LAN Address [20]

F9=Shell F10=Exit Enter=DO
Figure 4-12. Change 3577 Tape Library Router Configuration
1. If the CU LAN Address is currently set to 20, continue with step 3. If not set to 20, press F4 to
obtain the list shown in Figure 4-13.

[Entry Fields]
x CU LAN Address
x
x
x auto
x 20
x 30
x 40
x 50
x 60
x 70
x 80
x 90
x
Figure 4-13. Change Library Attachment Configuration
2. Select 20 from the list, and press Enter to show the previous screen.
3. Press Enter. The popup screen in Figure 4-14 on page 4-17 is shown.

[Entry Fields]
Type of Library attaching to: 3577
* CU LAN Address [20] +
*—---—------—-----—--—----—--—----—--—----—--—----—--—----—--*
| ARE YOU SURE? |
| |
| Continuing may delete information you may want |
| to keep. This is your last chance to stop |
| before continuing. |
| Press Enter to continue. |
| Press Cancel to return to the application. |
| |
| F1=Help F2=Refresh F3=Cancel |
| F8=Image F10=Exit Enter=Do |
*--—------—----—--—-—-------—--—----—--—-----—----—--—----—--*
Figure 4-14. Change Library Attachment Configuration
4. When asked Are you sure, press Enter. The following screen may be shown.
WARNING - The tape library attachment type selected, does not match
the current tape library attachment type that is set.
Do you wish to change this tape library attachment type from 3494
to 3577? (y or n and <ENTER>)
'
5. When asked if you want to change this tape library attachment, type y and press Enter.
This function sets up the initial addresses for the control unit.
6. If the 3592 C06 controller is already offline, press Enter and proceed to Figure 4-15 on page 4-18. If
not offline continue with step 7.
7. When asked to take the 3592 C06 controller offline, check with the Customer. If OK, type y. If not
OK, type n.
Tape library type selected matches current tape library type.
CU type is oc

Primary en0
Alternate en1
ODM updated for none configuration
Looking for TCP or IP name server definitions.
No nameserver found.
en0
ibmtape20
inet0 changed
en0 changed
en1
ibmtape20
inet0 changed
en1 changed
Switch type must now be selected.
Hit ENTER to continue.

Note: The offline line process will take some time.....patience......
8. When the screen progresses to 'Hit ENTER to continue' as shown, press Enter.
Select FCP Fibre Switch Type

[Entry Fields]
Select FCP Fibre Switch Type: 4 Gb 20 Port +
Press F4 for a list
F1=Help F2=Refresh F3=Cancel F8=Image

Figure 4-15. Select FCP Fibre Switch Type
9. Select 4 Gb 20 Port or External.
Note: Select 4 Gb 20 Port if using the 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch.
Note: Select External if using point to point connection.

All of the drives, libraries, and fibre switches should be powered on and cabled at this point. Refer to
10. Press Enter. A Command Status screen is shown.
11. Press F3 twice. Detecting 4 Gb 20 Port switch configuration.
Detecting 4 Gb 20 Port switch configuration.
PRIMARY 4 Gb 20 Port switch detected.
ALTERNATE 4 Gb 20 Port switch detected.
The 4 Gb 20 Port switches will be setup during FCP device configuration.
fibre switches.
PRIMARY 4 Gb 20 Port switch
ALTERNATE 4 Gb 20 Port switch detected.
###################################################
# Changes to the Library Attachment Configuration #
# will take effect the next time the control #
# unit is varied online or rebooted. #
# #
# NOTE: If this menu item appeared during a #
# microcode activation, then after pressing #
# ENTER below, press F3 to exit the menu and #
# resume the code activation. #
###################################################
Do you want to vary the controller to it’s previous online state [y or n]
Press <ENTER> to return to the menus.
12. Press Enter.

13. If the question, 'Do you want to vary the controller to it's previous online state [y or n]' appears, type
n. This goes back to the 'Change Library Attachment Configuration' screen. Press F3.

Note: The Time and Date setting (step 15), the World Wide Node Name setting (step 16), the hard
disk drive mirroring (step 17, and the TS3400 Library Sequence, either Router or non-Router
configuration, will only be shown when AIX has been installed for this configuration, not for a
microcode update only.
14. Press Enter.
15. The menu to set Time and Date appears. Set the time and date if necessary. Press Enter
16. Press F3 twice. Figure 4-16 is shown.
Show / Change FICON WWNN

[Entry Fields]
Enter FICON World Wide Node Name: [] X
Figure 4-16. Show / Change FICON WWNN
17. Enter the World Wide Node Name (WWNN) from the sticker on the control unit, or use FICON
WWNN recorded at the beginning of the code load. Press Enter.
Note: If the control unit has adapters that require a WWNN and the field is left blank, the adapter
card may have invalid VPD, and may not go online.
18. Press F3 twice.
19. You are notified the hdisks will be mirrored. This process will take up to 30
minutes............patience.......
Preparing to restore mirror on hdisk1.
Removing any old instances of hdisk1.
Starting Restore of hdisk1.

This may take up to 30 minutes.
Next, the menu to Show / Change TS3400 Library Sequence (order) is shown.
Show / Change TS3400 Library Sequence (Order)

Show / Change No Router TS3400 Library Sequence (Order)
Show / Change Router TS3400 Library Sequence (Order)

Figure 4-17. Show / Change TS3400 Library Sequence (Order)
20. If your system configuration does not have a router (FC 5248), select Show / Change No Router
TS3400 Library Sequence (Order), press Enter. Continue with Figure 4-18 on page 4-20.
– – – OR – – –
If your system configuration has a router (FC 5247), select Show / Change Router TS3400 Library
Sequence (Order), press Enter; Figure 4-19 on page 4-21 is shown.


[TOP] [Entry Fields]

Press F4 and select the serial number for each library in the order that you require.
If you have less than 7 libraries, then leave the field(s) blank for those libraries not
installed. If you are not running dual TCP or IP stack, leave the unused field blank.
NOTE: The libraries must be entered in order (i.e. Library 0 then Library 1. NOT
Library 0 and then Library 2. Each library must also have a unique serial number
and IP addresses or have the word NONE in place of an IP address.
Library 0 Serial Number: [13F0076] +

* Library 0 IPv4 Address: [xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx]
* Library 0 IPv6 Address: [xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx]
Library 3 Serial Number: [NONE] +
* Library 3 IPv4 Address: [NONE]

Figure 4-18. Show / Change No Router TS3400 Library Sequence (Order)
21. Review and complete the fields as needed, press Enter.
Note: You will need the Customer's information prior to completing this set up.
This diagram shows the location of the Library Serial Number on the 3577 L5U Tape Library
center panel..

IBM
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
┌────────────────────────┐
| | ┌─┐ ┌─┐
| | |*| |*|
| | └─┘ └─┘
| | ┌─┐ ┌─┐
| | |*| |*|
| | └─┘ └─┘
└────────────────────────┘
┌──────────┐
| 13–F0076 |
└──────────┘
Now configuring devices. We are associating tape drives to libraries.

22. Press F10 on successful sequence file generation. Continue with step 28 on page 4-23.

Show / Change Router TS3400 Library Sequence (Order)
Press F4 and select the serial number for each library in the order that you require.
If you have less than 7 libraries, then leave the field(s) blank for those libraries not
installed.
NOTE: The libraries must be entered in order (i.e. Library 0 then Library 1. NOT
Library 0 and then Library 2. Each library must also have a unique serial number.


Figure 4-19. Show / Change TS3400 Library Sequence (Order)
23. Follow the instructions to enter the library serial numbers. Press Enter when complete.
24. Press F10 on successful sequence file generation.

Set 3577 Router Configuration

[Top}
[Entry Fields]
* Enter the Control Units IP for the
* Master Console Network: [172.31.1.25]
* Enter the Customers Library(s) Subnet Mask: [ Netmask]
* Enter the Customers Library(s) Gateway: [ ]
* Enter the number of Libraries Installed: 2 +
* Library 0 Serial Number: 13F0050

* Enter the Customer IP for Library 0: [ ]
* Enter the Master Console IP for Library 0: [ ]
* Library 1 Serial Number: 13F0025

* Enter the Customer IP for Library 1: [ ]
* Enter the Master Console IP for Library 1: [ ]
[MORE]
F1=Help F2=Refresh F3=Cancel

F5=Reset F6=Command F7=Edit
F9=Shell F10=Exit Enter=DO
Figure 4-20. Screen continues to scroll down (use arrow keys).....
25. Fill in the required information in the Entry Fields for the existing libraries. Refer to Table 3-24 on
page 3-74.
Ensure whichever libraries NOT installed have their Entry Fields blank.
Note: The Control Units IP address must match the Control Units Call Home IP address. The default
is 172.31.1.25. If the System Console has not been setup, do so now. Refer to IBM System
Storage TS3000 (TSSC) Maintenance Information System Console for Service for the
procedure.
If you are unable to connect to the Router, the Cisco 1811 Router may need to be reset to
factory defaults. Refer to “Setting Cisco Router to factory defaults” on page 8-12
26. Press Enter.

Command Status
Tape Controller Master Console IP Address will be set to: [172.31.1.25]

Customer Library Subnet Mask IP Address will be set to: [xxx.xxx.xxx.x]
Customer Library Gateway will be set to: [x.xx.xxx.x]
Library 0 Serial # 13F0050 Customer IP will be set to: [x.xx.xxx.xxx]
Library 0 Serial # 13F0050 Master Console IP will be set to: [xxx.xx.x.xxx]
Library 1 Serial # 13F0025 Customer IP will be set to: [x.xx.xxx.xxx]
Library 1 Serial # 13F0025 Master Console IP will be set to: [xxx.xx.x.xxx]
Executing Router Configuration changes...
27. Press Enter when prompted.

When Command: OK is shown, configuration has completed.
Note: Use arrow keys to scroll down and look for any errors.

28. You are alerted to FCP drive configuration by the message "Configuring devices........patience.........
Press Enter to continue.
Note: If you have NOT reloaded AIX and 3592 Tape Controller microcode, the configuration will not
automatically progress to FCP drive configuration. Therefore do the following:
a. “Run SCSI / Fibre Channel Configuration” on page 4-100. This procedure will configure the
3592 Tape Drives and check for correct installation. Be sure to run this procedure if you
have added any 3577 L5U Tape Library's.
1) Select Run SCSI/FCP Configurator.
Note: All 3592 E06 and 3592 EU6 Tape Drives must always be enabled for System
Managed encryption to be recognized. This is optional on 3592 E05 Tape
Drives.
29. After the devices have been configured, the Login screen will appear. Login with Service, password
ibm2serv.
30. If your system configuration has FC 5248 (no Router), go to “Configure LAN for 3577 L5U Tape
Library with FC 5248 (no Router)” on page 4-25.
– – – OR – – –
If your system configuration has FC 5247 (Router);
a. From the Subsystem Maintenance screen, select Subsystem Configuration > Set / Test
Router Configuration > Flush Routing Tables.
b. Press F4, select yes, then press Enter.
31. Go to “Show / Change TSSC connection” on page 4-89, and begin with step 6 on page 4-89 to set
the router IP address for the TSSC system console connection. Return here when complete.
32. Go to IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Call Home For Automated Tape Library Controllers manual and
perform the Call Home Connection procedure. Return here when complete.
Note: In the Call Home Connection procedure, set up is to Console. Any reference to WTI should
be ignored. WTI no longer supported.
Note: The default LAN address is 192.168.251.25, the default WAN address is 172.31.1.25.
Note: Steps 34a through 34f on page 4-24 need to be done only if the Customer is using out-of-band
encryption. If not, go to step 35 on page 4-24.
a. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Subsystem Configuration > Set / Test
Encryption Key Manager Router Configuration.
b. Select the Address 251 Router first, then the Address 250 Router on the second pass.
c. When prompted, select yes, and press Enter.
d. Enter information from the Information Work up Sheet in the Microcode II, into the following fields
for the 251 or 250 Encryption Router.

Set Encryption 25x Router Configuration

[Entry Fields]
Enter the LAN IP Address to be used on the [192.168.25x.25]
Encryption router:
Encryption router:

Figure 4-21. Set Encryption Key Manager 25x Router Configuration – For Non-LM Environments
e. Press Enter. Wait for the Command Status menu to display "OK.".....patience.....
f. Press F3 repeatedly to return to the Subsystem Configuration Menu. Return to step 34a on
page 4-23 after the first pass, after the second pass continue with the next step.
35. Bring the controller online. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Control Unit and Tape
Drive Online Offline Control > Vary Control Unit Online.
Encryption Key Manager Path Test” on page 4-147. Return here when complete.
37. Perform this step if the 3592 C06 controller is connected to a TSSC system console that is
Home / Remote Services Menu > Sending Test Call Home.
38. Select Run Control Unit checkout and press Enter.....patience......
39. Verify no failures exist. If so, resolve the errors until Control Unit checkout runs without error.
40. Ask the Customer to send an SNMP trap from each of the Libraries to create a Call Home. On the
TSSC console, verify the Call Home record appears in the TSSC call home queue.
This completes 3592 C06 controller and 3577 L5U Tape Library with FC5247 (Router) system
configuration.

Configure LAN for 3577 L5U Tape Library with FC 5248 (no Router)
1. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Subsystem Configuration > Show / Change
Controller Network Connections > Set / Test Network Interface connection for Control Unit
without a Router > Set Network Interface connections for Control Unit, press Enter. Continue
with Figure 4-22.
Set Network Interface connection for Control Unit

Minimum Configuration & Startup

Further Configuration
Use DHCP for TCPIP Configuration & Startup
IPV6 Configuration
Quality of Service Configuration & Startup
Configure IP Security (IPv4)
Configure Mobile IPv6

Figure 4-22. Set Network Interface connection for Control Unit
2. To set up IPv4 configuration, select Minimum Configuration & Startup, press Enter. Figure 4-23 is
shown.
– – OR – –
To set up IPv6 configuration, select IPV6 Configuration > IPV6 Network Interfaces > Change /
Show Characteristics of an IPV6 Network Interface, press Enter. Continue with Figure 4-25 on
page 4-26.

IPV6 Configuration
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Available Network Interfaces │
│ │
│ Move cursor to desired item and press Enter. │
│ │
│ en0 09-08 Standard Ethernet Network Interface │
│ et0 09-08 IEEE 802.3 Ethernet Network Interface│
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
3. Select en0 09-08 Standard Ethernet Network Interface, press Enter. Figure 4-24 on page 4-26 is
shown.

Minimum Configuration and Startup


* HOSTNAME [CU3577]
* Internet ADDRESS (dotted decimal) [xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx]
Network MASK (dotted decimal) [xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx]
* Network INTERFACE en0
* NAMESERVER
Internet ADDRESS (dotted decimal) [xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx]
DOMAIN Name [storage.tucson.ibm.co>
* Default Gateway
Address (dotted decimal or symbolic name) [xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx]
Cost [0] #
Do Active Dead Gateway detection no +
Your Cable Type N/A +
START Now yes +
[BOTTOM]

Figure 4-24. Minimum Configuration and Startup
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
4. Press F3 twice. Continue with step 8 on page 4-27.
List All Network Interfaces
Add an IPV6 Network Interface

Change / Show Characteristics of an IPV6 Network Interface
Remove a Network Interface
Configure Tunnel Interface
Configure Aliases
┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ │
│ │
│ et0 09-08 IEEE 802.3 Ethernet Network Interface │
│ │
└───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 4-25. List All Network Interfaces
5. Select en0 09-08 Standard Ethernet Network Interface, press Enter. Figure 4-26 on page 4-27 is
shown.

Change / Show an IPV6 Standard Ethernet Interface
Press Enter AFTER making all desired changes. [Entry Fields]

Network Interface Name en0
IPV6 ADDRESS (colon separated) [xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx]
Prefixlength [xxx]
Current STATE up

Figure 4-26. Change / Show an IPV6 Standard Ethernet Interface
6. Press F3 repeatedly to return to the IPV6 Configuration screen, select IPV6 Static Routes > Add
an IPV6 Static Route, press Enter. Figure 4-27 is shown.
Add an IPV6 Static Route

Destination TYPE net
* IPV6 DESTINATION Address [::]
(colon separated or symbolic name)
* IPV6 GATEWAY Address [xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx]
COST [0]
Prefixlength [xxx]
Network Interface [en0]
(interface to associate route with)
Enable Active Dead Gateway Detection? no

Figure 4-27. Add an IPV6 Static Route
7. Enter the IPv6 Gateway address for Network Interface en0. Set Prefixlength to 64 or to the Customer
specification. Press Enter.
Note: For all IPv6 network destinations use [ : : ].

Network settings for the Controller without a Router are now set up.
8. Set Call Home connection. Go to IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Call Home For Automated Tape Library
Controllers manual and perform the Call Home Connection procedure starting with Figure 3-4.
be ignored. WTI is no longer supported.
10. Activate the SNMP trap. Press F3 repeatedly to return to the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select
Subsystem Configuration > Call Home Remote Service menu > Activate Call Home for 3577
SNMP Traps, Press Enter.
11. Set TSSC Network connection (Direct Connection). Press F3 repeatedly to return to the Subsystem
Maintenance screen, select Subsystem Configuration > Show / Change TSSC Connection >
Show / Change Direct TSSC Connection, press Enter. Figure 4-28 on page 4-28 is shown.

Show / Change Direct Connection IP

* Enter this controllers IP address on TSSC network. [172.31.1.25]

Figure 4-28. Show / Change Direct Connection IP
Note: This sets the Control Units Call Home IP address. The default is 172.31.1.25. If the Master
Console has not been setup, do so now. Refer to IBM System Storage TS3000 (TSSC)
Maintenance Information System Console for Service for the procedure. When 'Run System
Checkout' is run, the LAN and WAN IP Addresses match.
If you are connecting more than one 3592 C06 controller to the TSSC, be sure to use a
different Call Home IP address for the second and third Controller. For example, the second
Controller's Call Home IP address should be 172.31.1.27, and the third Controller's Call Home
IP address should be 172.31.1.28.
When Command: OK is shown, the configuration has completed.
13. Perform this step if the 3592 C06 controller is connected to a TSSC system console that is
operational.
a. Press F3 repeatedly to return to the Subsystem Maintenance screen, select Subsystem
Configuration > Call Home / Remote Services Menu.
b. Go to “Sending Test Call Home” in the IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library Controllers
when complete.
14. Press F3 repeatedly to return to the Subsystem Maintenance screen. Go to “Set Encryption Key
Manager IP Addresses in the Controller” on page 4-146 and “Run Encryption Key Manager Path Test”
on page 4-147. Return here when complete.
15. Press F3 repeatedly to return to the Subsystem Maintenance screen, select Run Control Unit
checkout and press Enter.....patience......
16. Verify that no failures exist. If so resolve the errors until Control Unit checkout runs without error.
17. Ask the Customer to send an SNMP trap from each of the Libraries to create a Call Home. On the
TSSC console, verify the Call Home record appears in the TSSC call home queue.
This completes 3592 C06 controller and 3577 L5U Tape Library with FC5248 (no Router), system
configuration. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Configure LAN for C20 Tape Library, or Rack Mounted Controller
| The 3592-C06 with C20 attached libraries does not support 3592-E07 drives.

[Entry Fields]
Type of Library Attaching to: None or C20
* Attachment Method Selected none

* CU LAN Address (use default of 20) [20] +

Figure 4-29. Change Library Attachment Configuration Screen, when 'None' is selected
1. Select CU LAN Address and press F4 to obtain the list. Figure 4-30 is displayed.

[Entry Fields]
x CU LAN Address
x
x
x auto
x 20
x 30
x 40
x 50
x 60
x 70
x 80
x 90
x
Figure 4-30. Change Library Attachment Configuration Screen (for CU LAN Address)
2. When configuring a 3592 C06 controller in a standalone frame attached to a C20 Tape Library, or in a
RACK, use the value 20 for "CU LAN Address".
3. Each 3592 C06 controller, regardless of the number of 3592 C06 controllers or 3592 J70s installed in
a standalone frame or RACK, has to be configured to the same CU LAN Address.
4. Press Enter. Figure 4-31 on page 4-30 is shown.


[Entry Fields]
Type of Library Attaching to: None or C20
* Attachment Method Selected none

* CU LAN Address (use default of 20) [20] +
x ARE YOU SURE? x
x x
x Continuing may delete information you may want x
x to keep. This is your last chance to stop x
x before continuing. x
x Press Enter to continue. x
x Press Cancel to return to the application. x
x x
5. Press Enter. Before the “Command Status” screen is displayed, you may be prompted to respond to
messages regarding taking the Control Unit offline. Answer yes and press Enter.
6. You may be prompted to answer the following message: "Do you wish to change this tape library
attachment type from 3494 to None? (y or n and <Enter>)". Answer with y and press Enter.
COMMAND STATUS
[TOP]
Primary en0
Alternate en1
ODM updated for None configuration
LAN addresses added
en0
3590cu20
inet0 changed
en0 changed
en1
[MORE...10]

n=Find Next
Figure 4-32. Change Library Attachment Configuration Screen (Command Status)
7. When Command: OK is shown, configuration has completed.

8. This procedure will continue automatically to Run Fibre Switch Setup, or press F3 until Fibre Switch
Setup DOES run.
Note: Have the null Modem Serial cable, PN 24R0831, available for connection between the 3592
C06 controller S2 port and the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch, if this switch is installed.

9. You are asked to “Select FCP Fibre Switch Type”. Select the switch type installed in your frame or
select “External” for External Switch (director) connection. Please note that you must select “External”
for a Point–to–Point (direct attach) drive(s) install.
Note: You will NOT be asked to connect a null modem Serial cable when 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switches are installed. The 4 Gb switches will be automatically detected and configured.
a. When the screen progresses to 'Hit ENTER to continue' as shown, press Enter.
Select FCP Fibre Switch Type

[Entry Fields]
Select FCP Fibre Switch Type: 4 Gb 20 Port +
Press F4 for a list

Figure 4-33. Select FCP Fibre Switch Type
b. Select 4 Gb 20 Port, 2 Gb 20 Port, or External.

v Select 4 Gb 20 Port if using the 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch.
v Select 2 Gb 20 Port if using the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch.
v Select External if using point to point connection.
All of the drives, libraries, and fibre switches should be powered on and cabled at this point.
10. Continue to follow all prompts for configuration of the Fibre switch. You may refer to “Running Fibre
Switch setup” on page 4-93 for written details of the 2 Gb and 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
configurations. Press F3 twice.
Note: The Time and Date setting (step 12), the World Wide Node Name setting (step 13), the hard
disk drive mirroring (step 16 on page 4-32,, either Router or non-Router configuration, will only
be shown when new AIX has been installed for this configuration, not for a microcode update
only.
11. Press Enter.
12. The menu to set Time and Date appears. Set the time and date if necessary. Press Enter
13. Press F3 twice. Figure 4-34 is shown.
Show / Change FICON WWNN

[Entry Fields]
Enter FICON World Wide Node Name: [] X
Figure 4-34. Show / Change FICON WWNN
14. Enter the World Wide Node Name (WWNN) from the sticker on the control unit, or use FICON
WWNN recorded at the beginning of the code load. Press Enter.

Note: If the control unit has adapters that require a WWNN and the field is left blank, the adapter
card may have invalid VPD, and may not go online.
15. Press F3 twice.
16. You are notified the hdisks will be mirrored. This process will take up to 30
minutes............patience.......
Preparing to restore mirror on hdisk1.
Removing any old instances of hdisk1.
Starting Restore of hdisk1.

This may take up to 30 minutes.
17. If you were sent to this procedure from the Installation chapter for a rack mount Controller or for a
Controller attached to a C20 Tape Library (there was No new AIX load or microcode activation).
return now to that step in the Installation chapter that sent you here.
18. If this is a microcode activation after a new AIX load, you will be alerted to FCP drive configuration by
the message, "Configuring devices" ....... patience ........
| Note: Encryption enabled drives display as "Enabled". All 3592 E06, EU6 and 3592 E07 Tape Drives
| must always be enabled for System Managed encryption to be recognized. This is optional on
| 3592 E05 Tape Drives.
19. After the devices have been configured, the Login screen appears. Login with Service, password
ibm2serv.
20. If your system configuration has FC 5248 (no Router, see Figure 4-35), go to “Configure Rack Mount
Controller LAN for FC 5248 (no Router)” on page 4-34.
– – – OR – – –
If your system configuration has a router for TSSC connection and/or FC 5593 (Encryption Key
Manager Router), continue with step 21.
21. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu.
FC 5248
Customers Network
Switch
xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx::x/64
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
EN0
3592-C06
Controller
c0600100
EN1
TSSC
TSSC Network Switch
Master Console
Figure 4-35. Non Router configuration without library (FC 5248)
Note:

IPv6 Support for 3592 C06 controller rack mount controllers only
3592 C06 controllers may be dual stacked IPv6 and IPv4
when complete.
Note: In the Call Home Connections procedure, set up is to Console. Any reference to WTI should
be ignored.
System Console will be connected.
24. If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption, perform the procedure “Set Encryption Key Manager
IP Addresses in the Controller” on page 4-146. Return here when complete.
25. If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption and this is the first Controller in this Rack or in a
3952 F05 Frame, to attach to the 251 Encryption Router, go to“Set 251 Encryption Router
Configuration (For Library-Managed Controllers)” on page 4-112. Return here to continue.
26. If you are configuring for out-of-band encryption and this is the second or third Controller in this
Rack environment to attach to the 251 Encryption Router, go to“Controller Routes for using
“Configuration” section in the “Installation” chapter of the MI to configure the System Console to this
Encryption Key Manager Path Test” on page 4-147 if you have configured for out-of-band encryption.
30. Checkout and configuration of this 3592 C06 controller is now complete. To verify installation has
concluded successfully, from the Subsystem Maintenance menu select Run Control Unit
runs without error.

32. Continue with “Diagnostic Checkout Of ESCON Or FICON Adapters before Host Attach – Rack” on
page 3-68

Configure Rack Mount Controller LAN for FC 5248 (no Router)
Controller Network Connections > Set / Test Network Interface connection for Control Unit
without a Router > Set Network Interface connections for Control Unit > Minimum
Configuration & Startup, press Enter. Figure 4-36 is shown.

IPV6 Configuration
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ │
│ │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
2. To set up IPv4 configuration, select en0 09-08 Standard Ethernet Network Interface, press Enter.
Figure 4-37 is shown.
If you don't have IPv4 addressing, skip to step 3.
To Delete existing configuration data, please use Further Configuration menus

* HOSTNAME [CU3577]
* Internet ADDRESS (dotted decimal) [xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx]
Network MASK (dotted decimal) [xxx.xxx.xxx.0]
* Network INTERFACE en0
NAMESERVER
Internet ADDRESS (dotted decimal) [xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx]
DOMAIN Name [domain name>
Default Gateway
Address (dotted decimal or symbolic name) [xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx]
Cost [0]
Do Active Dead Gateway Detection? no
Your Cable Type N/A
START Now yes
[BOTTOM]

Figure 4-37. Minimum Configuration & Startup
3. To set up IPv6 configuration, press F3 twice. Figure 4-38 on page 4-35 is shown again.


IPV6 Configuration

4. Select IPV6 Configuration > IPV6 Network Interfaces > Change / Show Characteristics of an
IPV6 Network Interface, press Enter. Figure 4-39 is shown.
List All Network Interfaces
Add an IPV6 Network Interface

Change / Show Characteristics of an IPV6 Network Interface
Remove a Network Interface
Configure Tunnel Interface
Configure Aliases
┌───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ │
│ │
│ │
└───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 4-39. List All Network Interfaces
5. Select en0 09-08 Standard Ethernet Network Interface, press Enter. Figure 4-40 is shown. Enter
the IPv6 address for en0 and set Prefixlength to 64. Press Enter.
Change / Show an IPV6 Standard Ethernet Interface


Network Interface Name en0
IPV6 ADDRESS (colon separated) [xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx]
Prefixlength [xxx]
Current STATE up

Figure 4-40. Change / Show an IPV6 Standard Ethernet Interface
6. Press F3 repeatedly to return to the IPV6 Configuration menu. Figure 4-41 on page 4-36 is shown.

IPV6 Configuration

IPV6 Static Routes
IPV6 Network Interfaces
IPV6 Daemon/Process Configuration

Figure 4-41. IPV6 Configuration
7. Select IPV6 Static Routes > Add an IPV6 Static Route, press Enter. Figure 4-42 is shown.
Add an IPV6 Static Route

Destination TYPE net
* IPV6 DESTINATION Address [::]
* IPV6 GATEWAY Address xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx
COST [0]
Prefixlength [xxx]
Network Interface [en0]
(interface to associate route with)
Enable Active Dead Gateway Detection? no

Figure 4-42. Add an IPV6 Static Route
Enter the IPv6 Gateway address for Network Interface en0. Set Prefixlength to 64. Press Enter.
Note: For all IPv6 network destinations use [ : : ].

Network settings for the Controller without a Router are now set up.
8. Set Call Home connection. Go to IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Call Home For Automated Tape Library
Controllers manual and perform the Call Home Connection procedure starting with Figure 3-4.
be ignored. WTI is no longer supported.
11. Set TSSC Network connection (Direct Connection). From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select
Subsystem Configuration > Show / Change TSSC Connection > Show / Change Direct TSSC
Connection, press Enter. Figure 4-43 on page 4-37 is shown.

Show / Change Direct Connection IP

* Enter this controllers IP address on TSSC network. [172.31.1.25]

Figure 4-43. Show / Change Direct Connection IP
Note: This sets the Control Units Call Home IP address. The default is 172.31.1.25. If the Master
Console has not been setup, do so now. Refer to IBM System Storage TS3000 (TSSC)
Maintenance Information System Console for Service for the procedure. When 'Run System
Checkout' is run, the LAN and WAN IP Addresses match.
Note: If you are connecting more than one 3592 C06 controller to the TSSC, be sure to use a
different Call Home IP address for the second and third Controller. For example, the second
Controller's Call Home IP address should be 172.31.1.27, and the third Controller's Call Home
IP address should be 172.31.1.28.
When Command: OK is shown, the configuration has completed.
13. If you were sent to this procedure from the Installation chapter for a rack mount Controller (there was
No new AIX load or microcode activation). return now to that step in the Installation chapter that sent
you here.
14. If this is a microcode activation after a new AIX load, go to “Set Encryption Key Manager IP
Addresses in the Controller” on page 4-146 and “Run Encryption Key Manager Path Test” on page
4-147 if you have configured for out-of-band encryption. Return here when complete.
15. FC 5248 (no Router, see Figure 4-35 on page 4-32), requires the IP filter for Network Interface en0 to
be activated.
From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Subsystem Configuration > Show / Change
Controller Network Connections > Set / Test Network Interface for Control Unit without a
Router > Test Network Interface Connections for Control Unit > Setup IPv4 & IPv6 default IP
filter rules
been concluded successfully, from the Subsystem Maintenance menu, and select Run Control Unit
runs without error.


19. Continue with “Diagnostic Checkout Of ESCON Or FICON Adapters before Host Attach – Rack” on
page 3-68

Firmware Download
Note: This procedure provides instructions for downloading a flash update of the firmware in order to
restore or update the 3592 C06 controller firmware.
The latest firmware and instructions for downloading the firmware to a Windows workstation or to an AIX
workstation are found at http://techsupport.services.ibm.com/server/mdownload2/download.html.
Perform the following steps to create the latest firmware image on CD.
1. Use your browser to access the above website.
2. At the website, take note of the case sensitive password you may have to use later in the file
unzipping process when prompted for it.
3. Click on System Microcode.
4. Search for 9131–52A.
5. When you have located the listing for 9131–52A, click on Description, and print out the document, or
note the instructions on how to download the firmware image and how to create the CD on your
workstation.
Follow the instructions to download a DOS image to a Windows workstation or to download an AIX
image to an AIX workstation.
6. The “Description” document will indicate the latest firmware level available for update, for example
firmware level 3F040127 (under 1.0 Systems Affected).
7. Prior to downloading the firmware image to your workstation, you must prepare a directory in your
workstation. Follow directions in the “Descriptions” document under “5.0 Downloading and Unpacking
the Firmware Update package” for the AIX format File or for the DOS Format File.
8. Back up to the previous menu, and click on the AIX format package or on the DOS format package to
be downloaded to your workstation.
9. You will be asked to sign a license agreement for pSeries machine code. Click at the bottom of the
screen to sign the agreement.
10. The next pop-up menu will allow you to save the file to your workstation. Click on Save to download
the file to the directory which you have previously created on your workstation.
11. Follow all prompts to select the correct directory, and select Save.
12. Unpack the file as explained in “5.1.1. Downloading the AIX Format File” (“Description” document) for
the AIX image or in “5.1.2 Downloading the DOS Format File” for the DOS image.
13. The new image in this example is 3F04127.img. This image must be transferred to CD.
v For AIX workstations, follow the instructions in section “5.1.1.2, The CD Transfer Method”.
v For Windows workstation, follow the instruction in section “5.1.2.2 CD for Firmware Updates”.
14. You are now ready to perform a recovery flash of the 3592 C06 controller.
15. Go to “Firmware Update via AIX” on page 4-56.

Drive Checkout in the 3584 Tape Library (External Switch)
1. Verify the drives and Fibre Channel adapters are connected to the External switch with
customer-supplied fibre cables.
2. Ensure all the drives (which may be located in different 3584 frames and are attached to the 3592 C06
controller), and the Fibre Channel adapters have good connection to/from the switch. The drives Port
LEDs will blink green to indicate a good connection. The Fibre Channel adapters will blink amber.
3. Ensure the drive ports and the Fibre Channel adapters are zoned correctly at the External switch
server, with the system administrator.

Drive Setup for External Switch (3494 or 3592 C06 controller attach to
C20, or Rack)
| The 3592-C06 with 3494 or C20 attached libraries does not support 3592-E07 drives.
Note: Steps 1 and 2 must be performed for Port 0 and Port 1, if both ports are used on the drives.
| 1. Set the 3592 tape drive speed to Auto–Negotiate. Refer to IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and
| TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06,
| EU6 and E07 under “Set Customer Options” in the Installation Chapter.
| 2. Set the 3592 tape drives to N→L Negotiate only. Refer to IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and
| TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06,
| EU6 and E07 under “Set Customer Options”, Set Topology, in the Installation Chapter.
3. Set Sense ID for each drive according to the drive's position in the frame, e.g. 00 for drive 0, 01 for
| drive 1,02 for drive 2, etc. Refer to IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives
| (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07 under
Set Sense ID, in the Installation Chapter. Refer to the table Table 4-1.
Table 4-1. D24 and D22 Frame Sense ID
Frame Drive # Sense ID Comments
D24 0 00 Base Frame
D24 1 01 Base Frame
D24 2 02 Base Frame
D24 3 03 Base Frame
D24 4 04 Base Frame
D24 5 05 Base Frame
D24 6 06 Base Frame
D24 7 07 Base Frame
D22 8 08 Adjacent Frame
D22 9 09 Adjacent Frame
D22 A 0A Adjacent Frame
D22 B 0B Adjacent Frame
D22 C 0C Adjacent Frame
D22 D 0D Adjacent Frame
D22 E 0E Adjacent Frame
D22 F 0F Adjacent Frame
4. Verify the drives and Fibre Channel adapters are connected to the External switch with
customer-supplied fibre cables.
5. Ensure all drives and the Fibre Channel adapters have a good connection to and from the switch.
The drive's Port LED(s) will blink green to indicate a good connection. Te Fibre Channel adapters will
blink amber.
6. Ensure the drive ports and the Fibre Channel adapters are zoned correctly at the External switch
server, with the system administrator.

EBTERM Setup
In a 3494 Tape Library, the Library Manager can be used as a terminal for the 3592 C06 controller instead
of the Service Terminal if one chooses to do so. The advantage of using the Library Manager, it is already
operational and does not require set up.
Configure EBTERM for Terminal Emulator use (OS/2 Platform)

EBTERM or NetTerm or Terminal Emulator must be configured prior to using for the first time on the 3592
C06 controller. The following steps will show how to accomplish this only if using EBTERM or NetTerm. If
using a different emulator, refer to the manufacturer's instructions to set up that emulator as an IBM 3151
Emulator.
1. Attention: Ensure the EBTERM program is installed on your Service Terminal before continuing.
2. Start EBTERM by double clicking on the EBTERM icon.
3. Select Setup from the toolbar across the top of the window.
4. Select Dialing Profiles from the pop-up list.
5. Select Add Profile from the pop-up list.
6. Select the first unused profile number from the pop-up list. This will open a window with the title
“EBTERM[a] Dialing Directory: Profile X," where X is the profile number just selected.
7. Set the fields of the following window, as shown.
Field Name Set to Value
_________________________ ______________________________________
Host location Description 3592-C06 & 3494-B16 Subsystem Service
Modem Initialization Clear this field-should be blank>
Number to Dial Clear this field-should be blank>
Long Distance Prefix Clear this field-should be blank>
Response to Connect Clear this field-should be blank>
Serial Port Speed 19.2k point and click on arrows to
scroll through choices>
Bits Setting 8/N/1
Serial Port Buffer Auto
Display Buffer Checkmark OFF in box point and
click on box to change>
Flow Control XON/XOFF Checkmark ON in box
Flow Control CTS/RTS Checkmark OFF in box
| Host Protocol IBM 3151 or VT100
Host Codepage ASCII 437 U.S. English
Host Type ASCII
Logon Script None
8. After setting fields, point and click on Enter at bottom of the window.
9. Select Setup from the tool bar across the top of the window.
10. Select Save as... from the pop-up list.
11. Press Enter to save changes just made.
12. Select Setup from the toolbar across the top of the window.
13. Select Dialing Profiles from the pop-up list.
14. Select the first unused profile number from the pop-up list. This will open a window with the title
“EBTERM[A] Dialing Directory: Profile X,” where X is the profile number just selected.
15. Set the fields of the following window, as shown.
Field Name Set to Value
_________________________ ______________________________________
Host location Description 3592-C06 Tape Controller Modem Setup
Modem Initialization AT&FQ1E0\Q1*E1%U1$B9600&D0*W0&Y0
all are the number zero(0)>

alpha characters are upper/lower case
sensitive
Number to Dial leave blank>
Long Distance Prefix leave blank>
Response to Connect Clear this field-should be blank>
Serial Port Speed 19.2k point and click on arrows to
scroll through choices>
Bits Setting 8/N/1
Serial Port Buffer Auto
Display Buffer Checkmark OFF in box point and
click on box to change>
Flow Control XON/XOFF Checkmark ON in box
Flow Control CTS/RTS Checkmark OFF in box
| Host Protocol IBM 3151 or VT100
Host Codepage ASCII 437 U.S. English
Host Type ASCII
Logon Script None
16. Point and click on Enter at bottom of the window after setting fields.
17. Select Setup from the tool bar across the top of the window.
18. Select Save as... from the pop-up list.
19. Press Enter to save changes just made.
20. Select Setup from the toolbar across the top of the window
This is the end of the procedure. Return to the procedure that sent you here.
Using EBTERM in a 3953 or 3494 Tape Library

Provides methods to using EBTERM for the two different frames.
If EBTERM is not loaded on your subsystem, go to “Configure EBTERM for Terminal Emulator use (OS/2
Platform)” on page 4-42.
v If accessing via laptop or remotely, go to “NetTerm Connection as a Service Terminal” on page 4-46.
v If accessing through the TotalStorage System Console (TSSC), refer to the TotalStorage System
Console MI.
v If using the LM screen in the 3953 F05 Tape Frame as a Service Terminal, go to “Using EBTERM
in the 3953 F05 Base Frame” on page 4-45.
v If using the 3494 LM screen as a Service Terminal, continue with the following steps.
Attention: Accessing the EBTERM Service screens will temporarily disable the Call Home function (2
hours).
Note: If you are unable to use EBTERM or NetTerm, the emulator you are using must be set to VT100
emulation mode. Refer to the appropriate terminal emulator software documentation to set VT100
emulation mode.
1. Ensure that the LMA cable has the null modem connected and it is attached to the correct service
port (Serial Port #1 14 in Figure 2-6 on page 2-15).
2. If you are at the LM screen and you are not in the SERVICE screen, select the following:
a. MODE
b. Service Menu
c. Utilities
d. Service Window
3. You are now at the SERVICE Window.

4. A C:\ prompt will be displayed. At the prompt, type EBTERM. The EBTERM screen becomes active
and the connection can continue. If desired, you may attach a 3151 or a compatible terminal (instead
of the Library Manager) to the bulkhead console connector. See “Configure EBTERM for Terminal
Emulator use (OS/2 Platform)” on page 4-42.
5. To determine if the correct items are active for the EBTERM session, select Modify from the tool bar.
The drop-down menu will have a U by the active items. Ensure that the following items are selected:
v Alt Key CUA Mode
v Direct Connect
v PCTERM Draw Detect (Normally active)
6. At the tool bar, select Connect.
7. Select 19200 Baud 3592-C06 & 3957-V06.
8. At the tool bar across the top of the screen, watch for the[min]to change to [0]. Press Enter.
9. You will be presented with the Service menu screen.
10. At Please login:, type Service. Press Enter.
Note: Document the code level (and fix level if posted) displayed in the upper left corner as some
repairs are code level dependent.
Base Level: 1.17.2.4

AIX Level: 5.2.0.10
Serial: 78-0000011
IBM 3592–C06 CONTROL UNIT
Service Terminal
Available logins on [3592cu20]:
Enhanced
Support
Service
Authentication Id:
Please login:
Figure 4-44. Service Menu (NetTerm PC)
11. At the password request for Service, type ibm2serv, and press Enter.
12. At the Authenticate User Login screen, type your name in the Enter User ID box (if you have an
Authentication ID use it, reference "Remote Login for Code Levels at or Above 1.16.2.8" in the
Product Overview chapter of the IBM System Storage TS1120 Tape Controller Maintenance
Information - IBM 3592 Model C06), leave the login type as Local. Press Enter.

Authenticate User Login

[Entry Fields]
Enter User ID. This id should match your []
DFS login ID EXACTLY in order for remote
authentication to run correctly.
Enter login type (Remote or Local) Local

Figure 4-45. 3592 C06 Controller
13. The next screen explains that the access code is posted on the LED display of the 3592 C06
controller. Go to the 3592 C06 controller Op Panel and note the access code listed on the LED (the
number is only posted for 5 to 10 minutes). Return to the Service screen, and type the access code.
Press Enter.
14. A message will post with a password. Note the password and follow the on screen instructions to
login.
15. The Subsystem Maintenance screen displays.
Subsystem Maintenance
Run Control Unit Checkout

Control Unit and Tape Drive Online Offline Control
Control Unit Shutdown and Restart Menu
Service Information Message (SIM) Maintenance
Subsystem Error Log
Subsystem Diagnostics
Subsystem Trace and Dump
Microcode Maintenance
Subsystem Configuration
Removal/Replacement Menus
Control Unit Service Utilities
Tape Drive Utilities (tapeutil)
PFE/Support Tools Menus
Using SMIT (information only)

Figure 4-46. Subsystem Maintenance Screen
16. If you came from “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102, return there.
This is the end of this procedure.
Using EBTERM in the 3953 F05 Base Frame

Note: If two 3953 L05 Library Managers are installed in the 3953 F05 Base Frame, EBTERM may be
initiated from Library Manager A or Library Manager B, that is from the active or standby Library
Manager.

1. Use the 100 ft (30M) serial cable with the Null Modem and (10 ft (3M)) serial cable to connect from the
9–pin serial port in the Library Manager's rightmost adapter card (Serial Port A) to Serial Port #1
(14 in Figure 2-6 on page 2-15) of the 3592 C06 controller in a 3953 F05 Tape Frame. The 100 ft
(30M) serial cable, the Null modem, and the 10 ft (3M) serial cable are part of the LM ship group.
2. If you are at the Library Manager screen and not in the Service Window, select the following:
a. MODE
b. Service Menu
c. Utilities
d. Service Window
3. You are now at the SERVICE Window.
4. A C:\ prompt will display. At the prompt, type ebterm. The EBTERM screen becomes active. Follow the
prompts.
5. When the blank screen appears, select Modify from the tool bar.
6. In the drop-down list, verify that Direct Connect Mode does have a check Mark (U) next to it. Point
and click on Direct Connect Mode if it needs to be changed.
7. Select Connect from the tool bar, across the top of the window.
8. From the drop-down list, select 19200 Baud 3592-C06 & 3957-V06, and press Enter once or twice.
The Login Menu of the connected 3592 C06 controller appears.
9. Go to Step 9 on page 4-44 in procedure “Using EBTERM in a 3953 or 3494 Tape Library” on page
4-43.
Note: When you have completed the EBTERM session, select Disconnect from the tool bar at the
top of the window, then select Disconnect from the drop down menu. Next select File > Exit
from the pull down menu. Be sure to disconnect the 100 ft (30M) serial cable from the LM serial
port in the rightmost adapter card, and from the 3592 C06 controller Serial Port #1.
NetTerm Connection as a Service Terminal

There are three possible ways to connect to the 3592 C06 controller via NetTerm. Decide which mode you
desire, and continue:
v Connecting Directly Via S1 port 14:
1 2 3 4
j70m0124
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
Figure 4-47. Controller Rear View
1. If NetTerm is not yet configured, go to “NetTerm Direct Connect to S1 Port” on page 4-51.

2. From the NetTerm main screen, select File.
3. Select Phone Directory.
4. Select 3590–Axx & 3494–Bxx Subsystem Service.
5. Select Connect.
6. If accessing the system locally, go to Step 9 on page 4-44 for the appropriate security procedures.
Return to Step 12 on page 4-51 to disconnect.
v Connecting Through WTI Switch:
1. If NetTerm is not yet configured, go to "NetTerm Connection Through the WTI Switch" in the IBM
System Storage TS1120 Tape Controller Maintenance Information - IBM 3592 Model C06.
2. From NetTerm main screen, select File.
4. Select 3592–Axx & 3494–Bxx Subsystem Service at 38400 Baud.
5. Select Connect.
6. Go to Step 1, and continue.
v Connecting Through Remote Modem:
1. If NetTerm is not yet configured, go to “NetTerm Connection to Remote Modem” on page 4-52.
2. From NetTerm main screen, select File.
4. Select The Phone Directory Entry Established for this System.
5. Select Connect.
6. Go to Step 1 and continue.
1. Figure 4-48 displays.
CONNECT 33600
Enter Password:
Figure 4-48. NetTerm Remote Modem Screen – Password Requested
2. Enter the password, and press Enter. Screen Figure 4-49 displays
CONNECT 33600
Enter Password:
APS>
Figure 4-49. NetTerm Remote Modem Screen – Password Included
3. Enter /s at the APS> prompt, and press Enter. Figure 4-50 on page 4-48 displays.

SYSTEM STATUS VERSION 1.1
PORT | NAME | STATUS | BAUD | COM | HS | MODE | TIMEOUT | BUF | CTS

-----+----------+--------+--------+-----+------+--------+---------+-------+----
01+ | MODEM | *Free | 38.4K | 8N1 | RTS | Modem | 90 Min | 0 | H
02+ | To>SW2< | Free | 38.4K | 8N1 | RTS | Any | Off | 0 | H
03+ | | *Free | 19.2K | 8N1 | XON | Any | Off | 0 | L
04+ | | *Free | 19.2K | 8N1 | XON | Any | Off | 0 | L
05+ | | Free | 38.4K | 8N1 | RTS | Any | Off | 0 | L
| | | | | | | | |
09+ | AMER1 | *Free | 38.4K | 8N1 | RTS | Any | Off | 0 | H
15+ | T70941 | *Free | 38.4K | 8N1 | RTS | Any | Off | 0 | H
16+ | T70936 | Free | 38.4K | 8N1 | RTS | Any | Off | 0 | H
APS>
Figure 4-50. NetTerm Remote Modem Screen
4. Examine Figure 4-50 to determine if a second switch is available. If one is available, continue below.
If none is available, go to 6.
5. For this example, /c 2 was entered to select the switch. Press Enter. Type /. Press and hold the
CTRL key, and momentarily press the E key. Release the CTRL key, and press Enter. Figure 4-51
displays.
APS> /c2
Connected 02:To>SW2<.
APS>
Figure 4-51. NetTerm Remote Modem Screen – Requested
6. Enter /s. Figure 4-52 on page 4-49 displays.

SYSTEM STATUS VERSION 1.1
PORT | NAME | STATUS | BAUD | COM | HS | MODE | TIMEOUT | BUF | CTS

-----+----------+--------+--------+-----+------+--------+---------+-------+----
01+ | SW2<>SW1 | *Free | 38.4K | 8N1 | RTS | Any | Off | 0 | H
02+ | | *Free | 38.4K | 8N1 | RTS | Any | Off | 0 | L
03 | | Free | 38.4K | 8N1 | RTS | Any | Off | 0 | L
07 | | Free | 19.2K | 8N1 | XON | Any | Off | 0 | L
| | | | | | | | |
09 | RAMER1 | C-15 | 19.2K | 8N1 | XON | Any | Off | 0 | H
10 | RAMER2 | Free | 19.2K | 8N1 | XON | Any | Off | 0 | H
13 | ramrB18 | C-16 | 19.2K | 8N1 | XON | Any | Off | 0 | H
14 | ewmnB18 | Free | 19.2K | 8N1 | XON | Any | Off | 0 | H
15+ | TS0_LMA | *C-09 | 19.2K | 8N1 | XON | Any | Off | 0 | H
16+ | TS1_LMA | *C-13 | 19.2K | 8N1 | XON | Any | Off | 0 | H
APS> /c 09
Figure 4-52. NetTerm Remote Modem Screen – Granted
7. Access to the various subsystem service screens is now available. For this example, /c 09 was
entered to select RAMER1. Press Enter twice.
Note: Document the microcode level (and fix level, if posted) displayed in the upper left corner, as
some repairs are code level dependant. Each logon screen that is presented requires a
different logon (authentication) method. Be sure to follow the correct procedure based on the
screen that is presented.
If Figure 4-53 is not presented, go to “Using EBTERM in a 3953 or 3494 Tape Library” on
page 4-43.
At Figure 4-53 type Service. Press Enter.
Note: Document the code level and fix level if posted (displayed in the upper left corner) as
some repairs are code level dependant.
Base Level: 1.16.0.1006
IBM 3592–C06 CONTROL UNIT
Service Terminal
Available logins on [x]:
Enhanced
Support
Service
Authentication Id
Please login:
8. At the password request for Service, type in the case sensitive password (ibm2serv). You now have
access to the Maintenance Screens. Go to Step 12 on page 4-51 to disconnect, when finished.
9. At Figure 4-54 on page 4-50 (the Authenticate User Login screen), type your Authentication ID in
the Enter User ID box, reference "Remote Login for Code Levels at or Above 1.16.2.8" in the IBM
System Storage
TS1120 Tape Controller Maintenance Information - IBM 3592 Model C06. Scroll to the Enter login
type line, and use the tab key (F4) to select the login type as Local or Remote (reference
Figure 4-54 and Figure 4-55). Press Enter.


Enter User ID. This id should match your []
Enter login type (Remote or Local) Local +

Follow the instructions on the screen. Then go to step 11 on page 4-51

–– OR —

[Entry Fields]
Enter User ID. This id should match your [YourDFSID]
Enter login type (Remote or Local) Remote

Figure 4-55. Authenticate User Login Screen
10. An encrypted keycode appears that can be as long as up to 46 characters. Copy the code to your
clipboard, and select from the options below based on your connection type:
If you need to break your remote connection to access the decryption site:
v At the “Would you like to login in now? (y or n and Enter)” type n, and press Enter.
v Open a new NetTerm session, and start a connection with one of the IBM Authentication sites.
v Paste the Keycode into the space requesting the code.
v A case-sensitive password appears. This can be manually noted or copied onto your clipboard.
v Terminate the session, and reconnect to the machine being serviced.
v At the Please login: prompt, enter your Authentication ID.
v At the password request, enter (or paste) the case-sensitive password obtained through the
Authentication process.
v Continue at Step 11 on page 4-51.
If you are able to maintain your connection with the unit and access the decryption site:
v Open a new NetTerm session, and start a new connection with one of the IBM Authentication sites.

v Paste the Keycode into the space requesting the code.
v A case-sensitive password is presented. This can be manually noted or copied onto your clipboard.
v Terminate the session, and return to the window of the machine being serviced.
v At the “Would you like to login in now? (y or n and Enter)” type y and press Enter.
v Enter the newly activated Password where prompted, and continue below.
11. The IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Controller 3592 Maintenance Information Model C06
screen will be posted. Proceed with the desired procedure. Continue with step 12 to disconnect when
done.
12. Disconnect the NetTerm Connection:
v Direct connect to the S1 Port:
a. From the Service Screen, select F10=Exit.
b. Select File.
c. Select Disconnect.
v Modem or WTI Connection
a. From the Service Screen, select F10=Exit.
b. Issue the WTI Disconnect Sequence - The two switches are set with different disconnect
sequences. To disconnect from WTI-2 port-to-port connection, use the key sequence “ENTER
@@@ ENTER”. To disconnect from WT-1 port-to-port connection, use the key sequence
“ENTER +++ ENTER”.
c. When returned to the first switch (WTI-1), enter/x to put switch to sleep. APS> /x Asleep will
be on the display when the process is complete. To hang up the modems from the NetTerm
session, select File, then Disconnect.
13. Go to “End-of-call” on page 4-55 if the repair activity is completed.
Configure NetTerm Terminal Emulator

NetTerm Direct Connect to S1 Port
1. Start the NetTerm program.
2. From the NetTerm Start-up Window tool bar, select File.
3. From the File pop-up list, select Phone Directory.
4. From the Phone Directory window, select Modem Test.
5. From the Phone Directory window, modify the following fields to the values listed:
Field Entry
Name 3590–Axx & 3494–Bxx Subsystem Service
| Emulation IBM-3151 or VT100
| Keys IBM-3151 or VT100
6. From the Phone Directory window, verify that the Connection field has Modem selected.
7. From the Phone Directory window, click Modem Settings. You see a communication Setup Window.
8. Click the Modems box. You see a Select Modem window.
9. Click the No Modem box. You see the Phone Directory window.
10. Click Modem Settings to bring up the Communications Setup window.
11. From the Communications Setup window, modify the following fields to the values listed:
Field Entry
Port: COM1
Baud Rate: 19200
Data Bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Modem Initialize command - clear this field (leave blank).

Control Settings (click on box to change)
DTR/DSR box unchecked
RTS/CTS box unchecked
XON/OFF box checked
Tone Dialing box unchecked
Direct Line box unchecked
Ignore Carrier box unchecked
Use TAPI box unchecked

12. After making the changes to the Communication Setup window, click OK. You are returned to the
Phone Directory window.
13. Click Desktop.
14. At the Desktop window, change the following settings:
a. Place a check mark (U) in the Autowrap box.
b. Remove the check mark in the Exit NetTerm on disconnect box.
15. From the Desktop window, click, OK. You are returned back to the Phone Directory window.
16. Click on Color.
17. At the Screen Colors window, place a check mark (U) in the Allow Graphics rendition code of 0 to
reset colors to default box.
18. From the Screen Colors window, click OK. You are returned to the Phone Directory window.
19. Click Add.
Note: The Phone Directory entry 3592 & 3494–Bxx Subsystem Service may not display in the
phone directory list until the NetTerm program is exited and restarted.
20. To Start NetTerm, go to “NetTerm Connection as a Service Terminal” on page 4-46.
NetTerm Connection to Remote Modem

1. From the Phone Directory, window click OK.
2. Start the NetTerm program.
3. From the NetTerm Start-up Window tool bar, select File.
4. From the File pop-up list, select Phone Directory
5. Select the Modem Test entry.
6. From the Phone Directory window, modify the following fields to the values listed:
Field Entry
Name Select a name that you are comfortable with. example would be Customer name.
Phone Number of Modem to be dialed into (usually customer supplied)
| Emulation IBM-3151 or VT100
| Keys IBM-3151 or VT100
7. At the Phone Directory window, verify that the Connection field has Modem selected.
8. From the Phone Directory window, click Modem Settings. This brings up a Communication Setup
window.
9. Click the Modems box. This brings up a Select Modem Window.
10. Click on the Default box. You can be returned to the Phone Directory window or the Communications
Setup window. For return to:
v Phone directory window, go to 11.
v Communications Setup window, go to 12.
11. From the Phone Directory window, click on Modem Settings to bring up the Communications Setup
Window.
12. Modify the following fields to the values listed:

Field Entry
Port: xxxx (Select the port for your Computer modem)
Baud Rate: 38400
Data Bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Modem Initialize command - clear this field and enter AT&F
Control Settings (click on box to change)

DTR/DSR box unchecked
RTS/CTS box checked
XON/OFF box unchecked
Tone Dialing box checked
Direct Line box unchecked
Ignore Carrier box unchecked
Use TAPI box unchecked

13. After making the changes to the Communication Setup window, click OK. You are returned to the
Phone Directory Window.
14. Click Desktop.
15. Change the following settings:
a. Place a check mark (U) in the Autowrap box.
b. Remove the check mark in the Exit NetTerm on disconnect box.
16. From the Desktop window, click OK. You are returned to the Phone Directory window.
17. Click Color
18. From the Screen Colors window, place a check mark (U) in the Allow Graphics rendition code of 0
to reset colors to default box.
19. From the Screen Colors window, click OK. You are returned to the Phone Directory window.
20. Click Add.
Note: The Phone Directory entry (the name for this activity that you selected in Step 6 on page
4-52) may not be displayed in the phone directory list until the NetTerm program is exited and
restarted.
21. From the Phone Directory window, click OK.
22. To Start NetTerm, go to “NetTerm Connection as a Service Terminal” on page 4-46.

Enabling Encryption On Encryption-Capable Drive
Use this procedure to enable System Managed encryption on encryption-capable drives to run from the
This procedure applies to 3592 E05 Tape Drives at drive code level D3I1_939, or greater. If the tape
drives are installed in a 3584 Tape Library, the customer will enable encryption by using the 3584 Web
Specialist.
| Refer to the DRV Encryption Menu in the Service Panel section of the IBM System Storage TS1120,
| TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A,
| E05, E06, EU6 and E07 for instructions on how to enable encryption for an encryption-capable 3592 E05,
| E06, EU6 and 3592 E07 tape drives.
1. Set METHOD CONFIG: to SYSTEM.
2. Set *KEY PATH CONFIG: to DEFAULT (by METHOD).
3. Set *BOP ENCRYPTION: to DISABLED.
4. Set *DENSITY: to SHOWS ENCR.
5. Save the settings, and reset the drive.
Note: Any configuration changes that you make to the drives require the FCP Configurator to be run
before you put the controller online.
| All 3592 E06, EU6 and 3592 E07 Tape Drives must always be enabled for System Managed
| encryption to be recognized by the controller.

End-of-call
1. If this is a 3592 C06 controller Problem, close SIMs at the controller. See “Close SIMs in 3592 C06
controller SIM Log” on page 4-163.
2. Ensure the 3592 C06 controller is online. See “Vary On or Off 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-162.
3. If this is a 3592 Tape Drive attached to a 3592 C06 controller, close SIMs at the Control Unit, See
“Close SIMs in 3592 C06 controller SIM Log” on page 4-163.
4. After the problem has been resolved, select the following steps sequentially to re–enable the failed
path. From the Main Service menu, select Subsystem Maintenance > Control Unit Service Utilities
> SCSI/FCP Utilities Menu > Reset Fibre Paths From FCP Switch Following Switch/Path Repair
Actions.
The final step (SSR option) will attempt to re-enable any failed paths. If all is successful, the menu will
list “No failures.”
5. If you completed any maintenance on 3592 Tape Drives in the 3584 Tape Library connected to a 3592
C06 controller, or any maintenance on 3592 C06 controllers in a 3953 frame, verify the correct location
(and drive designation) of all drives connected to the 3592 C06 controller. From the Main Service
menu, select Subsystem Maintenance > Control Unit Service Utilities > SCSI/FCP Utilities Menu
> Display all 3584 tape Drive Locations.
6. To verify successful switch replacement or any other FRU replacement, select Subsystem
Maintenance > Run Control Unit Checkout.

Firmware Update via AIX
This information provides steps to update the Service Processor via AIX.
This procedure is non-concurrent, and requires the 3592 C06 controller to be varied offline from
customer operations.
You are here to update FSP (Flexible Service Processor) system firmware. You have a new firmware
image to be loaded from CD-ROM or it was sent via ftp to the 3592 C06 controller.
1. If necessary, connect the Service Terminal (see “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102).
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance screen, select Subsystem Diagnostics > Function Selection
Menu > Task Selection > Microcode Tasks > Update and Manage System Flash. The Update and
Manage Flash Menu displays the following information:
v The current permanent system firmware image in SF240–2xx.
v The current temporary system firmware image is SF240–2xx.
v The system is currently booted from the temporary firmware image.
3. From the Update and Manage Flash Menu, select Validate and Update System Firmware. The new
screen shows the flash update image file is copied from the source selected below to file
/var/update_flash_image. The system is rebooted to perform the flash update into the temporary image
of the FSP. Then it displays: Select the source of the flash update image file:
v REMOVABLE MEDIA
v FILE_SYSTEM
4. Select REMOVABLE MEDIA if the firmware image is on the CD-ROM already loaded into the top DVD
drive. The next screen prompts you to: Select the device containing flash update files.
5. Select the appropriate DVD drive:
a. /dev/cd0 (for top drive)
b. /dev/cd1 (for bottom drive)
Note: In this example, you loaded the CD-ROM into the top drive; therefore, the selection would
be: /dev/cd0.
6. When the copy of the contents of the CD-ROM is completed, press Enter to continue with the reflash
of system firmware. The reflash of the temporary image of the FSP may take as long as 30 minutes.
When complete, the system will boot up from the temporary image during the power ON.
7. When power ON is completed, notify the customer the 3592 C06 controller may be varied online to the
host.

Install Information Center on Service Terminal (PC, Laptop)
Directions to install the information center from CD-ROM to the Service Terminal.
1. Close all open programs.
2. Insert the CD labeled IBM Systems Storage Hardware Information Center into the CD-drive. The install
shield will start automatically.
3. When prompted, select Local or shared drive for the installation.
4. Answer prompts, and accept the defaults.
5. Installation will take approximately 10 minutes, depending on the processor speed of the laptop. It may
take considerably longer if you do not close all programs running on your service terminal (laptop, PC).
The level of the information center shipped with this machine has been tested with the existing 3592
C06 controller level of hardware and software. Do NOT attempt to update this code unless you receive
an EC to do so. If you suspect there is newer information on the internet, call your next level of
support to verify.
6. If time permits, open the information center and enter any character in the Search field. The program
will then build a search database the first time this happens. This may take ten to twenty minutes to
complete, depending on the speed of your service terminal. Once built, searches should complete in a
few seconds.
Note: If at any time you find problems with the installed information center, refer to the version on the
internet (http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/eserver/v1r3s/index.jsp) to view any updates
and initial troubleshooting steps. Do NOT install any updates from the internet without
contacting your next level of support. Updates will normally be supplied under EC control.

Installing AIX and 3592 C06 controller microcode on the 3592 C06
controller
This information provides direction to install AIX and 3592 C06 controller microcode on the 3592 C06
controller, should the software system need rebuilding.
Attention: If you are installing new AIX or 3592 C06 controller microcode, and Installation Instructions
are available for the new code, use the Installation Instructions.
When installing AIX microcode in the 3592 C06 controller, prompts will ask you to enter information during
the installation process. You will collect this data at the beginning of this procedure, prior to installing the
AIX and 3592 C06 controller microcode.
1. Start EBTERM or Netterm. See IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library Controllers Maintenance
Information for the procedures.
Select Subsystem Configuration > Show/Change Control Unit Definitions > Control Unit Logical
Name.
2. At the “Change a Control Unit” screen, record the options in the entry field. [_________________]
3. Press F3 repeatedly to return to the Subsystem Configuration screen.
Select Show/Change Vital Product Data > Show/Change Control Unit Vital Product Data (VPD)
> Display Subsystem Vital Product Data.
4. At the Command Status screen, record the serial number in the entry field. If the serial number is not
shown on the command status screen, it can be found on the front bezel of the 3592 C06 controller.
[_______________________________]
5. Press F3 repeatedly to return to the Subsystem Configuration menu.
6. Select Show / Change FICON WWNN. If the WWNN is not shown on the screen, it can be found on
the sticker on top of the 3592 C06 controller.
Record the WWNN for later reentry. [___________________________________________________]
7. Press F3 repeatedly to return to Subsystem Maintenance menu.
8. Select Microcode Maintenance > Display Active Code Level and Status..............patience...........
Record the controller microcode level for later reentry. [_____________________________________]
9. Besides the items recorded in Step 2, Step 4, Step 6, and Step 8, you also must record the following
information. You need to have this data available, you are prompted for it during microcode activation.
v Library type and frame type. [_______________________________________________________]
v 3494 frame number to which your 3592 C06 controller is attached, or in which 3953 (base or
expansion frame or rack) your 3592 C06 controller resides, if applicable.
[_____________________________________]
v Type of Fibre Switch (2 Gb or 4 Gb) your 3592 C06 controller is connected to
[________________________]
v Is it a Single Switch or Dual Switch configuration [_______________________________________]
11. Select Control Unit Service Utilities > Configure Control Unit Hostname > Show the Hostname
Record the Hostname. A unique 3592 C06 controller hostname may have been set when the
Controller was first installed.
[___________________________________________________________________]
12. If your controller is configured for out-of-band encryption, record all entries from the Show/Change
Encryption Configuration menu. To display these six values;
a. Press F3 repeatedly to return to Subsystem Maintenance menu.
b. Select Subsystem Configuration, and press Enter.

c. Select Show/Change Encryption Configuration, and press Enter. Record the values shown.
[_________________________] [_________________________] [_________________________]
[_________________________] [_________________________] [_________________________]

Besides these values, obtain the WAN IP, Subnet Mask, and Gateway IP for the 251 Encryption and
the 250 Encryption Routers, from the system administrator . [__________________________]
[__________________________] [__________________________]
13. Press F3 repeatedly to return to Subsystem Maintenance menu.
Attention: Unless the screens or instructions explicitly provide other options, and the process fails
at ANY point in the install (including microcode activation or fixpack install), restart from step 16 of
the instructions. If the failure repeats, contact your next level of support.
14. If the controller is powered ON, skip to step 16.
15. Attach the Service Terminal. See “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102.
16. Go to “Power Off 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-87, and follow the procedure.
17. Press Enter to show the user and password request at the Welcome screen.
18. Login as user "admin" and use the password "admin".
19. Press Enter twice to keep the default settings for the number of columns and the number of lines.
20. The following screen is shown.
System name: Server-9111-520-SN1012345
Version: SF240_151
User: admin
Copyright ) 2002-2005 IBM Corporation. All rights reserved.
1. Power/Restart Control
2. System Service Aids
3. System Information
4. System Configuration
5. Network Services
6. Performance Setup
7. On Demand Utilities
8. Concurrent Maintenance
9. Login Profile
99. Log out
21. Select Power/Restart Control > Power On Off System > Power On. The system will now begin to
power ON.
22. You are prompted to “PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE”. Press Enter.
Attention: After the LEDs on the DVD drives finish blinking (Be sure the LEDs finish blinking),
insert the AIX microcode DVD into the top drive and the Microcode DVD into the bottom drive.
23. At the following screen, watch for the word “Keyboard” (bottom line of the screen) to appear, then
press 5 immediately and repeatedly. (This must be done within 5 seconds), to use the default boot
list. If you fail, go back to step 16 to restart the process.

IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM
1 = SMS Menu 5 = Default Boot List

8 = Open Firmware Prompt 6 = Stored Boot List
Memory Keyboard Network SCSI Speaker
24. The menu in Figure 4-56 may appear for older firmware versions. Type 1, and press Enter to select
English. Skip to step 25
Select Language
1. Change Language ISO8859-1 English (United States)
2. ISO8859-1 French
3. ISO8859-1 German
4. ISO8859-1 Italian
5. ISO8859-1 Spanish
Navigation keys:
N = Next page of list
X = eXit System Management Services
Figure 4-56. Select Language Menu - Older Firmware
– OR –
The menu in Figure 4-57 appears for newer firmware versions. Select 2, and press Enter.
Language Selection Menu

1. Change Language ISO8859-1 English
2. Continue to Password Entry
Figure 4-57. Language Selection Menu - Newer Firmware
25. You will then be asked to enter the "admin" password.

26. Type the admin password "admin."
AIX will start to load.

Memory Keyboard Network SCSI Speaker
IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM
IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM STARTING SOFTWARE IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM
IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM PLEASE WAIT... IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM
IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM
-
Elapsed time since release of system processors: 0 mins 57 secs
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Welcome to AIX.
boot image timestamp: 20:59 05/01
The current time and date: 21:24:44 05/01/2007
number of processors: 2 size of memory: 1904MB
boot device: /pci@800000020000003/pci@2,4/pci1069,b166@1/scsi@0/sd@5:2
kernel size: 11937205; 32 bit kernel
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: The controller may reboot to activate the new code, and you may be disconnected at this
point. Reconnect.
The prompt “******* Please define the System Console. *******” appears on the next menu.
27. Type 1, and press Enter. The 1 does not display on the screen.....patience.....
28. The next menu will present the first option as follows: “Type 1 and press Enter to have English during
install >>>Choice (1):1.” Select option 1 to use English.
29. The next menu will present the first option as follows: “1 Start Install Now with Default Settings” Do
Not select option 1, rather;
At the prompt “>>> Choice [1]:”, type 311, and press Enter.

Welcome to Base Operating System
Installation and Maintenance
Type the number of your choice and press Enter. Choice is indicated by >>>.
>>> 1 Start Install Now with Default Settings
2 Change/Show Installation Settings and Install
3 Start Maintenance Mode for System Recovery

88 Help ?
99 Previous Menu
Figure 4-58. Welcome to Base Operating System Screen
Note: You may question why when given the option 1, 2, or 3 on the screen, you are instructed to
enter 311. The reason is, the 1, 2, and 3 settings are for fixed code structures on the AIX CD.
The 3592 C06 controller microcode is addressed by the 311 entry, therefore you must use 311.
Any other entry will start normal AIX code load. You will have to start over, which will require
you to go back to step 16 on page 4-59 and restart.
Type 1 and press Enter for data files on CD or DVD,
or type 2 and press Enter to continue the installation.
30. At the prompt, type 1, and press Enter for data files that are on CD or DVD.
The following message is shown: “Please remove the product or system backup CD or DVD, insert
the customized data CD or DVD, and press Enter.”
31. Do not move any media. Just press Enter, and the following is shown:
cp: /cust_cddata/RPMS is a directory (not copied).
cp: /cust_cddata/installp is a directory (not copied).
cp: /cust_cddata/ppc is a directory (not copied).
cp: /cust_cddata/ppc is a directory (not copied).
cp: /cust_cddata/root is a directory (not copied).
cp: /cust_cddata/usr is a directory (not copied).
Please insert the product media or system backup CD or DVD.
32. Again Do not move any media. Just press Enter.

AIX will begin to be installed.
Installing Base Operating System
Please wait...
Approximate Elapsed time

% tasks complete (in minutes)
0 0
AIX will install for approximately the next 35 minutes.....patience.....

You will receive status messages on the screen beginning with:---- IBM 3592 CONTROL UNIT AIX
CUSTOMIZATION BEGINS ---- .....patience......

Note: This process also will copy the Control Unit microcode to disk from the DVD.
33. When prompted, type r and press Enter.
34. The AIX install will finish and AIX will automatically reboot. The AIX and 3592 C06 controller
Microcode media can be removed from the DVD drives at this point. When the machine has finished
booting, the login menu displays, which shows Available menus as “service” and “Service
Menu.”.....patience......
Note: The controller reboots to activate the new code, and you may be disconnected at this point.
Reconnect.
35. Login as "service" (no password is required). Press Enter.
******************************************************************************
* *
* Licensed Internal Code - Property of IBM *
* *
* 3592-C06 Licensed Internal Code *
* *
* (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1994, 2006 All Rights Reserved. *
* *
******************************************************************************
3592 CONTROL UNIT INITIAL MICROCODE INSTALLATION
No microcode has been installed on this control unit. Microcode must be

installed in order for the control unit to be functional.
The following Microcode Image is available to be installed:
oc.x.xx.x.x
Do you want to install this code image [y/n]?
Figure 4-59. Microcode Installation Start Menu
36. Type y to install this image of 3592 C06 controller microcode. Press Enter.
The microcode begins to load.
IBM TAPE CONTROL UNIT Code Level 1.21.3.3 Installation...
Contains Licensed Internal Code

Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
(C) COPYRIGHT 1994, 2006. IBM Corp.
All Rights Reserved
US Government Users Restricted Rights -
Use, duplication, or disclosure restricted
by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Wed 04/18/07 15:55:04
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
[---------------------------------------->..........]
Press Enter to begin...
37. Press Enter.

Add/Change Subsystem Vital Product Data

[Entry Fields]
* Manufacturer [IBM ]
* Plant [78]
* Machine Serial Number [00C5007]
* E/C Level 01.03.00.00
* 3490 SIM Software Support - ERDS Identifiers default

38. Fill in the serial number recorded in the beginning steps. Press Enter.
39. When asked 'Are you sure?'. Press Enter.
COMMAND STATUS
Manufacturer...................IBM
Machine Type and Model.........3592-C06
Serial Number..................78-00C5007
E/C Level......................01.03.00.00
ERDS Identifiers...............default
[BOTTOM]

n=Find Next
40. Press F3.

41. Press Enter to begin.
42. The Change a Control Unit screen appears. No changes are required. Press Enter.
Now Update Library Interface as appropriate....
43. Press Enter to begin.

From the inset pop-up menu, select one of the following;
v For 3494, press Enter, continue with “Configure LAN for 3494 Tape Library” on page 4-8
v For 3584, press Enter, continue with “Configure LAN for 3592 C06 controller in a 3953 F05 Tape
Frame” on page 4-12.
v For 3577, press Enter, continue with “Configure LAN for 3577 L5U Tape Library with a microcode
update” on page 4-16.
v For None, press Enter, continue with “Configure LAN for C20 Tape Library, or Rack Mounted
Controller” on page 4-29.

Dual LAN Configuration in 3494 Tape Library environment
This is an example of a dual LAN configuration. For test and recertification, go to the “Ping Hardware Test”
on page 4-79. For further description of network communications paths, see Figure 4-60.
Assume C06 is
(Position 20)
192.168.251.20 192.168.251.30
Assume A60
(Position 30)
192.168.251.23
192.168.250.20 192.168.250.30
Alternate en1 en1
29 28 4
Fibre 5 6
Switch
23 24
192.168.251.22 192.168.251.25 192.168.251.35 192.168.251.32
11
Primary
Fibre 12
Switch
Switch
172.31.1.25 172.31.1.35
WAN WAN
27
26 SC SW 13
25
172.31.1.1
192.168.250.244 192.168.251.244
SC 14
20
21
192.168.251.1 192.168.251.2
17 LMA 19 LMB 18 c0600002
192.168.250.1 22 192.168.250.2
Figure 4-60. Two Controllers (3592 C06 controller and 3590 A60) with Dual LAN Cabling Layout

Single LAN Configuration in 3494 Tape Library environment
This is an example of a single LAN configuration. For test and recertification, go to the “Ping Hardware
Test” on page 4-79. For further description of network communications paths, see Figure 4-61.
en0
2 1 18
C06
192.168.251.23
Alternate
17
Fibre
5 Switch
6
192.168.251.25
4 192.168.251.22
3 Router Primary
Fibre
172.31.1.25 7 Switch
WAN 15
MC SW
9 172.31.1.1
16
192.168.251.244
MC 8
LAN Switch
12 11 10 13
192.168.251.1 192.168.251.2
c0600001
LMA LMB
14
192.168.250.1 192.168.250.2
Figure 4-61. Single LAN TCP or IP Addressing With Optional Dual Library Manager

Subsystem Maintenance Menu
This is the first screen shown after selecting Service Menu from the IBM 3592 C06 controller screen.

Subsystem Error Log

Figure 4-62. Subsystem Maintenance Menu
Menu Tree
Shown here is a Menu Tree showing a road map to the many screens that are provided for service of the
3592 C06 controller subsystem.
1. Run Control Unit Checkout. This is a detailed health check of the 3592 C06 controller subsystem,
to be selected after any repair.
2. Control Unit and Tape Drive Online Offline Control
v Display Control Unit, ESCON or FICON, and Tape Device Status
v Vary Control Unit Offline
v Vary Control Unit Online
v Vary Tape Drive Offline
v Vary Tape Drive Online
v Force Control Unit Offline
v Show Channel Path Tables
v Show Pathing Trace Table
3. Control Unit Shutdown and Restart Menu
v Force Concurrent Control Unit Trace and Dump
v Select Trace/Dump files and Copy to Media (CD)
v Restart Only the Control Unit Code
v Restart AIX and Control Unit Code
v Shutdown AIX and Control Unit Code (use prior to power off)
4. Service Information Message (SIM) Maintenance
v Show List/Detail of an OPEN Control Unit SIM
v Change an OPEN Control Unit SIM to CLOSED

v Show List/Detail of an OPEN Tape Drive SIM
v Change an OPEN Tape Drive SIM to CLOSED
v Show List/Detail of any OPEN or CLOSED SIM
v Change ALL OPEN Control Unit and Tape Drive SIMS to CLOSED
v Show/Change SIM & MIM Presentation Controls
v Show Microcode Detected Error (MDE) Description
v Display MIM Log
5. Subsystem Error Log
v Generate an Error Report
v Show Microcode Detected Error (MDE) Description
v Perform Error Log parsing (errparse)
v Format and View Tape / Tape Adapter errors (errfmt)
v Make Entry in AIX Error Log
v Clean the Error Log:
6. Subsystem Diagnostics
Note: The subsystem Diagnostics are not controlled by the 3592 C06 controller microcode load,
these diagnostics are part of the AIX base code. The screens and menus shown under this
tree may not always be the same as you will see on your subsystem. To ensure that you know
what the actual subsystem diagnostics are you can go to the latest level Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems manual for the RS/6000
v The following screens show the diagnostic screens:
DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS VERSION 4.3.2 801001
LICENSED MATERIAL and LICENSED INTERNAL CODE - PROPERTY OF IBM

(C) COPYRIGHTS BY IBM AND BY OTHERS 1982, 1998.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
These programs contain diagnostics, service aids, and tasks for

the system. These procedures should be used whenever problems
with the system occur which have not been corrected by any
software application procedures available.
In general, the procedures will run automatically. However,

sometimes you will be required to select options, inform the
system when to continue, and do simple tasks.
Several keys are used to control the procedures:

- The Enter key continues the procedure or performs an action.
- The Backspace key allows keying errors to be corrected.
- The cursor keys are used to select an option.
Press the F3 key to exit or press Enter to continue.
Figure 4-63. Diagnostic Operating Instructions Screen

FUNCTION SELECTION 801002
Move cursor to selection, then press Enter.
Diagnostic Routines
This selection will test the machine hardware. Wrap plugs and
other advanced functions will not be used.
Advanced Diagnostics Routines
This selection will test the machine hardware. Wrap plugs and
other advanced functions will be used.
Task Selection(Diagnostics, Advanced Diagnostics, Service Aids, etc.)
This selection will list the tasks supported by these procedures.
Once a task is selected, a resource menu may be presented showing
all resources supported by the task.
Resource Selection
This selection will list the resources in the system that are supported
by these procedures. Once a resource is selected, a task menu will
be presented showing all tasks that can be run on the resource(s).
F1=Help F10=Exit F3=Previous Menu
Figure 4-64. Diagnostic Function Selection Screen
v Diagnostic Routines screen The following options appear:

– System Verification
– Problem Determination
v Advanced Diagnostics Routines The following options appear:
– System Verification
– Problem Determination
7. Task Selection (Diagnostics, Advanced Diagnostics, Service Aids, etc.) The following options
appear:
v Run Diagnostics
v Display or Change Diagnostic Run Time Options
v Display Service Hints
v Display Previous Diagnostic Results
v Display Hardware Error Report
v Display Software Product Data
v Display Configuration and Resource List
v Display Hardware Vital Product Data
v Display Resource Attributes
v Change Hardware Vital Product Data
v Format Media
v Certify Media
v Display Test Patterns
v Local Area Network Analyzer
v Add Resource to Resource List
v Delete Resource from Resource List
v SCSI/FCP BUS Analyzer
v Download Microcode
v Display or Change Bootlist
v Periodic Diagnostics
v Backup and Restore Media
v Disk Maintenance
v Create Customized Configuration Diskette
v Update Disk Based Diagnostic
v Configure ISA Adapter
v Generic Microcode Download
v Run Error Log Analysis
v SCSI Device Identification and Removal Service Aid
v Display Microcode Level
v SCSI Tape Drive Service Aids
v 7135 RAIDiant Array Service Aids
v Spare Sector Availability
v Update System Flash
v IBM Tape Drive Service Aids
– This selection provides a set of tools to perform utility functions on Tape and Medium Changer
Devices supported by the Atape Device Drive
8. Resource Selection The following screen appears listing all of the Resource's in your subsystem.
RESOURCE SELECTION LIST 801006
From list below, select any number of resources by moving

the cursor to the resource and pressing ’Enter’.
To cancel the selection, press ’Enter’ again.
To list the supported tasks for the resource highlighted, press ’List’.
Once all selections have been made, press ’Commit’.

To exit without selecting a resource, press the ’Exit’ key.
[TOP]
All Resources
This selection will select all the resources currently displayed.
sysplanar0 00-00 System Planar
bus0 00-00 PCI Bus
bus1 04-A0 ISA Bus
siota0 01-A0 Tablet Adapter
ppa0 01-B0 Standard I/O Parallel Port Adapter
lp0 01-B0-00-00 Parallel Port P
[MORE...31]
F1=Help F4=List F7=Commit F10=Exit

F3=Previous Menu
Figure 4-65. Resource Selection List Screen
Note: In the Screen above, note there are multiple additional items to be seen in this example, scroll
the screen down to view all resources.
9. Subsystem Trace and Dump
# WARNING: Subsystem tracing should only be performed with
# the direction of Engineering support.
v Start Subsystem Trace

v Show Current Trace Parameters
v Stop Subsystem Trace
v Start Subsystem Dump
v Clear (Disable) all Error Match Code (EMC) Settings
v Show/Change Error Match Code (EMC) Settings
v Select Trace/Dump Files and Copy to Media (CD)
v Select Trace/Dump Files to Erase From Hard Disk
10. Microcode Maintenance
v Display Active Code level and Status
v List Code Images Available for Activation
– List Subsystem Code Images Available for Activation
– List Subsystem Code Images 'What's new' Change History File
– List Tape Drive Code Images
v Copy Code Image From Source Media
– Copy Subsystem Code From Source Media
– List CU Subsystem Code 'What's new' Change History File from CD
– Copy Tape Drive Code from Source Media
– Delete All Files received from the TSSC
v Activate Code Image
– Activate Subsystem Code Image
– Display Subsystem Code Image 'What's new' Change History File
– Activate Tape Drive Code
v Display Detailed Results for Last Code Activation
v Delete Code Image
– Delete Subsystem Code
– Delete Tape Drive Code
v Display Control Unit Code 'What's new' Change History File
– Display Active Code 'What's new' Change History File
– Display Available Images 'What's new' Change History File
– Display CD 'What's new' Change History File
v Install AIX Fixpack
11. Subsystem Configuration
v Show / Change Date, Time, and Time Zone
v Show / Change Vital Product Data (VPD)
– Show / Change Control Unit Vital Product Data (VPD)
– Show Tape Device Vital Product Data (VPD)
v Show Control Unit Hardware Data (VPD)
v Show / Change Library Attachment Configuration
– Show Library Attachment Configuration
– Change Library Attachment Configuration
- 3494
- 3584
- 3577
- None
– Reconfigure 3577 Library Attachment
v Show / Change TSSC Connection
– Show / Change Direct TSSC Connection
– Set / Test Router Configuration
- Show / Set Router Configuration
- Test Router Configuration

- Flush Routing Table
v Show / Change ESCON/FICON Channel Path Definitions
v Show / Change Controller Network Connections
– Set / Test Network Interface for Control Unit without a Router
- Test Network Interface Connections for Control Unit
v Run IPv4 Test to Encryption Manager
v Run IPv6 Test to Encryption Manager
v Setup IPv4 & IPv6 default IP filter rules
- Set Network Interface Connections for Control Unit
v Minimum Configuration & Startup
v Further Configuration
v Use DHCP for TCPIP Configuration & Startup
v IPv6 Configuration
v Quality of Service Configuration & Startup
v Configure IP Security (IPv4)
. Start / Stop IP Security
. Basic IP Security Configuration
. Advanced IP Security Configuration
v Configure IP Security (IPv6)
. Start / Stop IP Security
. Basic IP Security Configuration
. Advanced IP Security Configuration
v Configure Mobile IPv6
– Set / Test Encryption Router Configuration
- Test Encryption Router Configuration Settings
- Set 251 Encryption Router Configuration
- Set 250 Encryption Router Configuration
v Show / Change Control Unit Definitions
v Show / Change 3490 E Emulation Fencing Settings
v Show / Change Automatic REBOOT after System Crash
v Show / Change FICON WWNN
v Show / Change IPv4 or IPv6 Encryption Configuration
– Primary Encryption Key Manager Address / Domain [...]
– Primary Encryption Key Manager Port Number [...]
– Alternate Encryption Key Manager Address / Domain [...]
– Alternate Encryption Key Manager Port Number [...]
– Primary Domain Name Server [...]
– Alternate Domain Name Server [...]
v Show / Change 3577 L5U Tape Library Configuration
– Show 3577 Tape Library Configuration Menus (No Router)
– Show / Change 3577 Tape Library Router Configuration
v Call Home / Remote Services Menu
– Switch Call Home / Remote Services to/from IBM TotalStorage System Console
– Change / Show Call Home / Remote Services
– Change / Show Modem Configuration

– Remove Files from Modem Send Queue
– Change / Show Call Home Filters
– Pager Users Menu
– Send Test Notification Menu
– Remote Data Monitoring
– View Call Home Logs
– Activate Call Home for 3577 SNMP Traps
12. Removal/Replacement Menus
v Identify a PCI Hot Plug Slot
v Remove/Replace Defective Tape Adapter Card (Concurrent)
v Remove/Replace Defective Host Adapter Card (Concurrent)
v Remove/Replace hdisk (refer to “Disk Drives Hot Swap” on page 5-15)
v Remove/Replace Defective Dual Fibre Switch
13. Control Unit Service Utilities
v Run PFE/Support Center Provided Functions from CD–ROM
v Issue Ping Command
v Display/Modify Tape Daemon Mode Parameters
v SCSI/FCP Utilities Menu
– Display SCSI/FCP Configuration
– Test SCSI/FCP Configuration
– Run SCSI/FCP Configurator
– FCP Configurator for concurrent drive install
– Telnet to fibre switch
– Display SCSI/FCP Path Enabled/Disabled Status
– Disable SCSI/FCP Path
– Enable SCSI/FCP Path
– Display Currently Installed Fibre Switch(s)
– Run Fibre Switch Setup
– Check Status of Fibre Paths from FCP Switch
– Reset Fibre Paths from FCP Switch Following Switch/Path Repair Actions
– Display a Specific 3584 Tape Drive Location
– Display all 3584 Tape Drive Locations
– Run Fibre Switch Utility (sesutil)
– Display Tape Device Type, Emulation Mode, and Encryption Mode
v Configure Control Unit Hostname
– Set the Hostname
– Show the Hostname
v Run Test to Encryption Key Manager
– Run IPv4 Test to Encryption Key Manager
– Run IPv6 Test to Encryption Key Manager
– Setup IPv4 and IPv6 default IP filter rules
14. Tape Drive Utilities (Tapeutil)
15. PFE/Support Tools Menu
16. Using SMIT (information only)

The Command Status Screen becomes active from time to time depending on the actions the SSR is
performing with other menu items. This screen informs the SSR of the status of the action being done.
The Command Status Screen may not always contain the same information, it is a good practice to read
the information carefully.
If you are asked to use a specific menu to complete a procedure, look in the menu tree shown
above to determine the correct menu path to choose.
Activate Microcode in 3592 C06 controller

Note: If code activation fails, retry. If failure persists, contact Support.
Attention: Note all directions in Step 1. If you are updating the microcode in a 3592 C06 controller that
is part of a 3494 Tape Library, ensure the VPD has been set up to make the connection between the 3592
C06 controller and the library. You will be making this connection using the LAN. The feature code shipped
with your system will tell you how to connect your 3494 attachment.
1. Ensure all drives are cabled, powered ON, and online. Using either the Service Terminal or the LM,
enter Service, and select Microcode Maintenance.
Note:
v The Activation process could take as long as 15 minutes. As long as progress is being
shown on the service terminal, everything is working. You will be prompted in several
screens to press Enter to continue, therefore you need to pay attention to your service
screen during this process.
v There will be periods of seeming inactivity on the system, especially when system firmware
is loaded into the Service Processor. “99FD” or “99FF” may be displayed on the op panel.
Do NOT disturb the process by pressing any keys. Pressing any keys during this process
will corrupt the firmware. The firmware code load process may take up to 60 minutes. Also,
when the “Successful Installation” message is displayed, you must refrain from pressing
any keys for another 3 to 4 minutes before any further system activity is indicated.
v After the Tape Controller microcode configuration completes, an automatic reboot of the
controller will occur to upgrade system flash or other software. During the process, this
controller may automatically reboot as many as two times. If the controller reboots the first
time, and the CU service screen becomes active. Wait a minimum of 5 minutes before
attempting to login. A second reboot may occur during this time.
v It is important that you note those screens that require you to press Enter to continue the
activation process.
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance Screen, select Microcode Maintenance > List Code Images
Available for Activation.

Display Active Code Level and Status

List Code Images Available for Activation
Copy Code Image From Source Media
Activate Code Image
Display Detailed Results for Last Code Activation
Delete Code Image
Display Control Unit Code ’Whats new’ Change History File
Install AIX Fixpack

Figure 4-66. Microcode Maintenance Screen
3. Select List Subsystem Code Images. Ensure the level of microcode you want to activate is
displayed.
List Subsystem Code Images Available for Activation

List Subsystem Code Images ’Whats new’ Change History File
List Tape Drive Code Images

Figure 4-67. List Code Images Available for Activation Screen
COMMAND STATUS
Fileset Name Level I/U Q Content

====================================================================
oc.subsystem 1.10.3.251 I N usr
# IBM Tape J70 Control Unit
oc.subsystem 1.11.0.83 I N usr

# IBM Tape J70 Control Unit

n=Find Next
Figure 4-68. Command Status Screen
4. If the level you want to activate is not displayed, do not continue with this process. Depress F3 twice
to return to the Microcode Maintenance screen.

Display Active Code Level and Status

Copy Code Image From Source Media
Activate Code Image
Display Detailed Results for Last Code Activation
Delete Code Image
Display Control Unit Code ’Whats new’ Change History File
Install AIX Fixpack

Figure 4-69. Microcode Maintenance Screen
5. Select Activate Code Image.
Activate Code Image
Activate Subsystem Code Image

Display Subsystem Code Image ’Whats new’ Change History File
Activate Tape Drive Code

Figure 4-70. Active Code Image Screen 1
6. Select Activate Subsystem Code. A pop-up window appears in the lower half of the screen.
Activate Code Image
Activate Subsystem Code Image

Display Subsystem Code Image ’Whats new’ Change History File
x List of Subsystem Code Levels x
x x
x x
x x
x oc.1.11.0.83 x
x oc.1.11.1.164 x
x x
F1x /=Find n=Find Next x
F9mqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqj
Figure 4-71. Activate Code Image Screen for code level selection
7. Select the code level to be activated and press Enter twice.

Note: During a code activate on a FICON machine you may be prompted for the WWNN (World
Wide Node Number). If either Feature code 3441 or 3442 or 3443 is installed a WWNN label
will be affixed to the 3592 C06 controller top, directly above the DVD drives. If there is no
WWNN label, leave the entry blank and press ENTER.
8. Perform the steps in “Microcode Configuration for 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-78, and return here
when process is complete.
9. To return to the activate Code Image screen, press Enter. Press F3 repeatedly to return to the
Subsystem Maintenance screen. The code activation process is now complete.
10. If the activate code completed successfully and you were directed here from other instructions, return
there now. Otherwise, go to “End-of-call” on page 4-55.

Microcode Configuration for 3592 C06 controller
This information provides directions to configure the microcode in the 3592 C06 controller.
During microcode configuration, and after a new Microcode load coupled with a new AIX microcode install,
you will need to configure a number of elements. Examples are the LAN configuration, fibre channel
attachment to the drives, date and time information, and controller VPD. You will be prompted to enter
data, as needed. You must have all of this data available, as indicated in step 16 on page 4-59 of
procedure “Installing AIX and 3592 C06 controller microcode on the 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-58.
If you are activating the microcode without installing a new AIX microcode, configuration will be automatic.
You may only be prompted for the FICON WWNN (World Wide Node Number). The WWNN label is affixed
to the top of the 3592 C06 controller enclosure. Enter the number from the WWNN label.

Ping Hardware Test
This procedure allows you to verify the hardware connections by testing the Ethernet connections between
the 3592 C06 controller and the routers, LAN Network Switches, and other controllers.
page 4-102.
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Control Unit Service Utilities > Issue Ping
Command.
The following diagrams show the flow of the addressing and cabling scheme for the LAN setup for the
3592 C06 controller. If an error occurs, use the following diagram that applies to your configuration.
v Figure 4-72 defines the TCP or IP unit addresses and the suggested connection criteria for a single
3592 C06 controller within a Control SINGLE LAN system.
v For a DUAL LAN system with dual tape controllers, refer to Figure 4-73 on page 4-81.
v For LAN configuration in a Standalone Frame with optional TSSC System Console connection, see
en0
2 1 18
C06
192.168.251.23
Alternate
17
Fibre
5 Switch
6
192.168.251.25
4 192.168.251.22
3 Router Primary
Fibre
172.31.1.25 7 Switch
WAN 15
MC SW
9 172.31.1.1
16
192.168.251.244
MC 8
LAN Switch
12 11 10 13
192.168.251.1 192.168.251.2
c0600001
LMA LMB
14
192.168.250.1 192.168.250.2
Figure 4-72. Single 3592 C06 controller With Single LAN Cabling Layout. 3592 C06 controller and Router Are Located
In Outbound Frame
3. The following list refers to Figure 4-72. There are no Ethernet connections to the 4Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switches.

2 Cable, 3592 C06 controller Integrated Ethernet Port 1 (en0) to SMC Router
3 Cable, SMC Router to LAN Switch
4 SMC Router
5 Cable, SMC Router to Fibre Switch, if connected to the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
6 Fibre Switch (2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch)
9 LAN Switch
10 Cable, LAN Switch to Library Manager B Ethernet Card #1
11 Cable, LAN Switch to Library Manager A Ethernet Card #1
14 Cable Crosswired, Library Manager A Ethernet Card #2 to Library Manager B Ethernet Card
#2
15 Cable (50 ft (15M). ethernet cable) from SMC Router WAN port to TotalStorage System
Console Switch
16 Cable (50 ft (15M). Ethernet cable) from TSSC System Console Switch to TSSC System
Console
17 Ethernet cable, from SMC Router LAN port to Alternate Fibre Switch, 2Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switch
18 Alternate Fibre Switch (2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch) in Dual Switch
configuration with 3592 C06 controller
Note:
a. The last (fourth) octet of the TCP or IP address for the 3592 C06 controller, SMC Router
and Fibre Switch is dependent on frame position number, i.e. 20, 30, 40 ... 160, in the 3494
library.
b. Ethernet port en0 on the 3592 C06 controller is provided by the Integrated Ethernet Port 1.
c. The SMC 7008ABR Router is configured for LAN or WAN IP address when the TSSC
System Console is connected.
d. The following TCP or IP addresses are reserved addresses and cannot be used:
v 192.168.251.254
v 172.31.1.254
e. Dotted lines in the diagram indicate connections to optional features (for example, FC2713 –
TSSC System Console or 2nd FC 3487 – Dual Fibre Switches).
4. The following list refers to Figure 4-73 on page 4-81. There are no Ethernet connections to the 4Gb
20-Port Fibre Channel Switches.

Assume C06 is
(Position 20)
192.168.251.20 192.168.251.30
Assume A60
(Position 30)
192.168.251.23
192.168.250.20 192.168.250.30
Alternate en1 en1
29 28 4
Fibre 5 6
Switch
23 24
192.168.251.22 192.168.251.25 192.168.251.35 192.168.251.32
11
Primary
Fibre 12
Switch
Switch
172.31.1.25 172.31.1.35
WAN WAN
27
26 SC SW 13
25
172.31.1.1
192.168.250.244 192.168.251.244
SC 14
20
21
192.168.251.1 192.168.251.2
17 18
c0600002
LMA 19 LMB
192.168.250.1 22 192.168.250.2
Figure 4-73. 3592 C06 controller and 3590 A60 Tape Controllers With Dual LAN Cabling Layout. 3592 C06 controller
and Router are Located in Outbound 3952 F05 Frame
1 3592 C06 controller in Frame 2

2 3590 Model A60 in Frame 3
3 Cable, 3592 C06 controller (Frame 2) Integrated Ethernet Port # 1 (en0) to SMC Router in
same frame.
4 Cable, Model A60 (Frame 3) Integrated Ethernet Port # 1 (en0) to SMC Router in same frame.
5 Cable, 3592 C06 controller (Frame 2) Ethernet Port # 2 (en1 on Integrated Ethernet port 2) to
Primary LAN Switch
6 Cable, Model A60 (Frame 3) Ethernet Port # 2 (en1) (on NIC card) to Primary LAN Switch
7 Fibre Switch (2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch) with 3592 C06 controller in Frame 2
8 SMC Router with 3592 C06 controller in Frame 2
9 SMC Router with Model A60 in Frame 3
10 Fibre Switch (2109 Model F16) with Model A60 in Frame 3

15 Primary LAN Switch
16 Alternate LAN Switch
19 Cable, Primary LAN Switch to Library Manager A Ethernet Card #2
20 Cable, Alternate LAN Switch to Library Manager A Ethernet Card #1
21 Cable, Alternate LAN Switch to Library Manager B Ethernet Card #1
22 Cable, Primary LAN Switch to Library Manager B Ethernet Card #2
23 Cable, SMC Router in Frame 2 to Fibre Switch in same frame, if it is connected to the 2Gb
20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
24 Cable, SMC Router in Frame 3 to Fibre Switch in same frame
25 Cable, 50 ft (15M). ethernet cable from TSSC System Console Switch to TSSC System
Console.
Console Switch.
Console Switch.
28 Ethernet cable, from SMC Router LAN port to Alternate Fibre Switch, 2Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switch
29 Alternate Fibre Switch (2 Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch) in Dual Switch
configuration with 3592 C06 controller
Note:
v The last (fourth) octet of the TCP or IP address for the 3592 C06 controller and respective
router with Fibre Switch is dependent on the frame position number, i.e. 20, 30, 40,...160.
The Model A60 in frame #3 = address 30, 3592 C06 controller in frame #2 = address 20.
v Ethernet port en1 on the 3592 C06 controller is provided by the Integrated Ethernet Port 2
which is located to the right of Integrated Ethernet Port 1 (when viewed from the rear of the
3592 C06 controller Ethernet port en1 on the A60 controller is provided by the Ethernet
Adapter Card. Refer to feature code 2717, of the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Controller
3590 Maintenance Information Model A60 manual for card slot information.
v Dotted lines in the diagram indicate connections to optional features (e.g. FC2713 - TSSC
System Console for 2nd FC3487 - Dual Fibre Switches).
5. The following list refers to Figure 4-74 on page 4-83.

LAN TCP/IP Addressing in 3952 Frame or Rack with Optional TSSC Connection
en0
192.168.251.20
2 C06 in Standalone Frame assumes position 20

C06 1
6
5
192.168.251.22 192.168.251.23
Primary Alternate 10
192.168.251.25 Fibre
Fibre
4 Switch Switch
Router
172.31.1.25 7
WAN
SC SW
172.31.1.1
c0600008
SC
Figure 4-74. LAN Configuration on Standalone Frame with TSSC System Console

2 Cable, 3592 C06 controller Integrated Ethernet Port # 1 (en0) to SMC Router.
4 SMC Router
5 Ethernet cable, SMC Router to FIBRE Switch, if connected to the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch in 3952 F05 frame attached to C20 library, or in a RACK
6 Fibre Switch (2Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch)
9 Ethernet cable, SMC Router to Alternate 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch.
10 Alternate Fibre Switch (2Gb or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch without Ethernet
connection) in Dual Switch configuration
Note:
a. The last (fourth) octet of the TCP or IP address for the 3592 C06 controller and respective
router with Fibre Switch in a Standalone Frame will always assume frame position number
20.
b. The SMC 7008ABR Router is configured for LAN or WAN IP address when the TSSC
System Console is connected to the Standalone Frame.
c. Dotted lines in the diagram indicate connections to the optional features (e.g. FC2713 -
TSSC System Console).
6. Select Issue Ping Command. Press Enter.
7. select the corresponding frame address for your configuration. Example. 192.168.251.20 Frame 2.
Press Enter.
Note: Failures can be caused by:

v Frame address selection where there is no Ethernet connection. Refer to Figure 4-72 on
page 4-79 or Figure 4-73 on page 4-81 for addressing.
v An open or missing Ethernet cable.
v A failing Ethernet Router Assembly.
v A failing Ethernet Switch Assembly (LAN Switch). Check lights at switch. To replace LAN
Switch, reference the Ethernet LAN Switch section of the IBM System Storage Automated
Tape Library 3494 Maintenance Information.
v The integrated Ethernet ports in the 3592 C06 controller (if you cannot communicate through
any connection). For the Integrated Ethernet ports refer to “Configure LAN for 3494 Tape
Library” on page 4-8.
8. This is the end of the procedure. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Point-to-Point Drive Attach (Direct Attachment)
Notes:
v A maximum of four 3592 Tape Drive may be used for Point-to-Point attachment. The drives
must be designated as drive 00 and drive 01, and drive 02 and drive 03 in the frame for a
maximum number of attached drives.
v Steps 1 and 2 must be performed for Port 0 and for Port 1 on each drive if both ports will be
connected from the Fibre Channel adapters in slot 1 and slot 4 of the 3592 C06 controller.
Refer to figures at the end of these instructions for an example of how to cable the drives,
depending on the number of drives involved.
| To set the options in this section, refer to “Set Customer Options” in the Installation chapter of the IBM
| System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance
| Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07 for menu options and additional information.
1. Set the 3592 Tape Drive speed to Auto-Negotiate.
2. Set the 3592 Tape Drives to L Port topology only.
3. Set the Sense ID for each drive, according to the drive's position in the frame. For example, 00 for
drive 0, 01 for drive 1, 02 for drive 2, and so forth.
See Table 4-1 on page 4-41 for D24 and D22 frame Sense IDs.
Note: Special fibre cables will be specified in the ship group if the connection is to be point-to-point.
4. The drives and fibre channel adapters should have already been connected point-to-point (directly
from each fibre channel adapter to a drive port, via IBM-supplied fibre cable), or via an external switch
with customer-supplied cables.
5. Ensure you have a good connection from the fibre channel adapters to the drives. The drive's port
LEDs should blink green to indicate a good connection. The fibre channel adapters should blink
amber.
6. If you are connecting through an external switch, consult with the administrator that the drive ports
and the fibre channel adapters are zoned correctly at the external switch server.
HBA1 HBA2 HBA1 HBA2
C06 C06
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
3592 3592 3592

Drive Drive Drive
c0600030
c0600031
Port0 Port1 Port0 Port1 Port0 Port1

Drive 0 Drive 0 Drive 1
Figure 4-75. Example of Direct Connect / Point-to-Point Figure 4-76. Example of Direct Connect / Point-to-Point
Connections - One Drive Connections - Two Drives

HBA1 HBA2 HBA1 HBA2
C06
C06
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
3592 3592 3592 3592

Drive Drive Drive Drive
c0600033
Port0 Port1 Port0 Port1 Port0 Port1 Port0 Port1
Drive 0 Drive 1 Drive 2 Drive 3
3592 3592 3592
Drive Drive Drive
Figure 4-78. Example of Direct Connect / Point-to-Point
c0600032
Port0 Port1 Port0 Port1 Port0 Port1
Connections - Four Drives
Drive 0 Drive 1 Drive 2
Figure 4-77. Example of Direct Connect / Point-to-Point

Connections - Three Drives
Point-to-Point Drive Attach on 3584 Tape Library (Direct Attachment)

A maximum of four 3592 Tape Drives may be used for point-to-point attach. The drives may be located in
different 3584 frames, but they will be assigned to one logical library. See the figures in “Point-to-Point
Drive Attach (Direct Attachment)” on page 4-85 for an example of how to cable the drives according to the
number of drives that are involved.
1. The drives and fibre channel adapters should already have been connected point-to-point (directly
from each fibre channel adapter to a drive port, via a customer-supplied fibre cable), or via an external
switch, with customer-supplied cables.
| 2. Ensure that the 3592 Tape Drives are set to L-Port topology only. Refer to “Set Customer Options” in
| the Installation chapter of the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape Drives (16th
| Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07 for additional
| information.
3. Ensure that you have a good connection from the fibre channel adapters to the drives. The drive's port
LEDs should blink green to indicate a good connection. The fibre channel adapters should blink
amber.
4. If you are connecting through an external switch, consult with the administrator that the drive ports
and the fibre channel adapters are zoned correctly at the external switch server.

Power Off 3592 C06 controller
This information provides directions to power OFF the 3592 C06 controller.
Attention: Use the shutdown procedure for your system. This is the correct command before you stop
the system unit. Failure to do so may result in the loss of data.
1. Inform the customer you need the 3592 C06 controller varied off at the host before you proceed to
power OFF the control unit.
2. Before powering OFF the 3592 C06 controller, perform the shutdown procedures below.
3. Select Control Unit Shutdown and Restart > Shutdown AIX and Control Unit Code (use prior to
power off).
4. Type y, and press Enter to proceed with Shutdown or type n to exit before stopping the microcode in
the controller and AIX operating system.
5. The 3592 C06 controller is powered down to standby mode when the green LED on the operator panel
blinks.
6. If you are doing the shutdown on a 3952 F05 or 3953 F05 Tape Frame, power OFF the frame after
completing the previous step, otherwise remove power from the 3592 C06 controller power supplies by
unplugging the two line cords from the power supplies.
Power Off 3592 C06 controller (Alternate Method)

This procedure provides an alternate method to power OFF the 3592 C06 controller.
1. Ensure the customer is informed, and asked to vary off all operations from the 3592 C06 controller in
preparation for shutdown.
2. Press and hold for approximately 5 seconds the power ON/OFF button located on the operator panel
(see 14 in Figure 2-7 on page 2-16) . You will see the number in the upper right corner of the
operator panel display decrement by 1 from 4 to 1 to no number. Release the power ON/OFF button.
3. If the power OFF process stops prior to reaching standby mode, repeat the process in Step 2. The
3592 C06 controller is powered down to standby mode when the green LED on the operator panel
blinks.
4. Power can now be removed from the 3952 or 3953 F05 Tape Frame or Rack, or directly from the 3592
C06 controller power supplies.
Power On 3592 C06 controller

This information provides directions to power ON the 3592 C06 controller.
1. Ensure the two line cords are reconnected to the 3592 C06 controller power supplies.
2. When the 3592 C06 controller is in standby mode (green LED on operator panel blinking), press the
power ON button, which is located on the 3592 C06 controller operator panel. See Item 14 in
Power ON 3592 C06 controller by using ASMI

This information provides an alternate method to power ON the 3592 C06 controller.
When the 3592 C06 controller is in standby mode (green LED on Operator Panel blinking), do the
following:
1. Connect the Service Terminal to the 3592 C06 controller. Refer to “Connecting the Service Terminal”
on page 4-102.

2. Access the ASMI (Advanced System Management Interface) via your Service Terminal for Service
Processor menus by pressing Enter. Login with your user ID and password (admin, admin) at the
welcome screen. Then press Enter twice to reach the FSP (Flexible Service Processor) main menu.
3. On the FSP Main Menu screen, select Power / Restart Control > Power On / Off System.
a. Verify that system boot speed is set to fast.
b. Turn ON the system unit power by selecting option 8.
c. Press Enter again when prompted to continue.
Preparing 3592 C06 controller for Service

The controller must be offline to the customer before starting any type of service. Perform the following
steps to prepare the 3592 C06 Controller for service:
1. Notify the customer that you need to take offline the resources attached to this 3592 C06 Controller.
Before you proceed, ask the customer to halt all operations to this Enterprise Controller.
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance screen, select Control Unit and Tape Drive Online Offline
Control > Vary Control Unit Offline (if necessary).
3. Upon completion of any repair action, ensure you perform the “End-of-call” on page 4-55, and close
any open SIMs before returning subsystem to the customer.
Restart AIX and 3592 C06 controller Microcode

This information provides directions to restart AIX and control unit code (similar to AIX command
“shutdown –Fr”)
1. Connect the Service Terminal. See “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102.
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Control Unit Shutdown and Restart Menu >
Restart AIX and Control Unit Code.
3. A pop–up menu (WARNING––) appears on the screen. Enter y to restart AIX and the control unit
microcode.
Note: This action will shut down AIX and the 3592 C06 controller, followed by an automatic reboot of
the 3592 C06 controller and AIX. This process will take approximately 9 minutes.
Retrieving Engineering and Dump Data

This procedure provides directions to retrieve dump data for analysis. This function is available starting
with microcode level 1.20.1.18.
The 3592 C06 controller automatically saves trace, dump, and error information whenever errors occur or
unexpected conditions arise. You can use the dump data while performing problem resolution, The
automatic creation of dump data relieves you of having to recreate the exception conditions. The controller
also automatically gathers device dumps, and stores them for retrieval through the controller service
interface.

Show / Change TSSC connection
Notes:
v This procedure is used for 3592 C06 controllers in a:
– 3953 F05 Frame installation
– 3952 F05 frame installation
– Dual LAN (FC5245) installation (see Figure 4-73 on page 4-81)
– Single LAN installation when the controller is connected to the System Console
v The 3592 C06 controller must have already been configured in “Configure LAN for 3494 Tape
Library” on page 4-8,
or in “Configure LAN for 3592 C06 controller in a 3953 F05 Tape Frame” on page 4-12,
or in “Configure LAN for 3577 L5U Tape Library with a microcode update” on page 4-16,
or in “Configure LAN for C20 Tape Library, or Rack Mounted Controller” on page 4-29,
prior to using this procedure.
1. Continue to step 2for all 3592 C06 controllers, except for the middle and top 3592 C06 controllers in
a 3953 F05 Expansion Frame. Go to step 5 for the middle and top 3592 C06 controllers in a 3953
F05 Expansion Frame.
2. Use Table 4-2 to reset the router to the factory defaults.
Table 4-2. Reset SMC (TSSC) Router to Factory Defaults – LAN or WAN Configuration
Router Model (Part
Number) Procedure
SMC7008ABR (18P8523) Insert a probe like a pen, a pencil, or a paper clip into the Router reset button. The
reset button is located to the right of the LEDs on the front panel. Wait for the second
light in the left column to blink faster. All lights are lighted while you hold in the button,
then they cycle off. Release the button.
SMCBR18 (23R5549) Press and hold the Reset button for six seconds, until the Run light begins to flash.
The light goes out when you release the button.
CISCO1811 (23R5659) No Reset available, must be set/reset via configuration.
Note: For part number 23R5549, the run light is on the left side. For part number 23R9719, the run light is on the
right side.
3. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the TSSC Router port #8, that connects to the Library Manager
LAN Switch.
4. For 3953 F05 Expansion Frames, disconnect the Ethernet cable from port #8 of both Routers, which
connect the expansion frame to the base frame.
5. Connect the Service Terminal to the 3592 C06 controller control unit. Refer to “Connecting the
Service Terminal” on page 4-102.
——————————————————————————
6. From the Subsystem Maintenance Menu, select Subsystem Configuration > Show / Change
TSSC Connection. Press Enter. Figure 4-79 on page 4-90 is shown.

Show / Change TSSC Connection
Show / Change Direct TSSC Connection

Set / Test Router Configuration

Figure 4-79. Show / Change TSSC Connection
7. Select Set / Test Router Configuration, press Enter. Figure 4-80 is shown.
Set / Test Router Configuration
Show / Set Router Configuration

Test Router Configuration
Flush Routing Table

Figure 4-80. Set/Test Router Configuration
8. Select Show / Set Router Configuration > Set Router Configuration, press Enter.
One of two menus will appear depending on your controller subsystem configuration.
If the 3592 C06 controller is installed in the 3953 F05 Base Frame, in an outbound 3952 F05 Frame
attached to the 3494, or in a 3952 F05 Frame attached to a C20 library, or to a RACK, or to a 3577
L5U library. Figure 4-81 on page 4-91 appears. Continue with the next Step.
– – OR – – (3953 F05 Expansion Frame only)
If the 3592 C06 controller is installed in a 3953 F05 Expansion Frame, Figure 4-82 on page 4-91
appears. The menu in Figure 4-82 on page 4-91 provides the default value for the 251 Router LAN
address as well as the default values for the WAN addresses of the bottom 3592 C06 controller
(WAN1), the middle 3592 C06 controller (WAN2) and the top 3592 C06 controller (WAN3). Refer to
“IP Chart for 3592 C06 controller Attachment in 3953 F05 Tape Frames” on page 3-26 to verify that
the WAN addresses are correct for your Expansion Frame. Only WAN addresses may require
changes in rare cases, as explained in the Note on the screen. The default values shown in
Figure 4-82 on page 4-91 are for 3953 Frame #2 (first Expansion Frame). All WAN address fields
have to be filled in, even if one or two of the three 3592 C06 controllers in the frame have not been
installed. Press Enter.

Set Router Configuration

[Entry Fields]
NOTE: The entry fields below either show the current
stored values or the suggested default values if the
router has not been configured previously. These values
may be changed if more than one Library
complex is connected to the TSSC.
Refer to the Maintenance Instructions (MI)
for the TSSC for complete directions and
unique WAN IP addressing.
* Enter Router LAN Address [192.168.251.15]

* Enter Router WAN Address [172.31.1.15]

Figure 4-81. Set Router Configuration Screen
Set Router Configuration

[Entry Fields]
NOTE: The entry fields below either show the
current stored values OR the suggested default
values if the router(s) has not been configured
previously. These values may be changed if
more than one Library complex is connected
to the System Console.
Refer to the Maintenance Instructions (MI)

for the System Console for complete directions
and unique WAN IP addressing.
* Router LAN Address [192.168.251.25]

* Enter Router WAN1 Address [172.31.1.25]

Figure 4-82. Screen to Set 251 Router in Expansion Frame
9. From the Set Router Configuration menu (see Figure 4-81), select the default entry Enter Router
LAN Address .... The last octet of the IP addresses is based on the controller number. The default
value provides the predetermined LAN address for the Router. In rare cases, only the WAN address
may require changes, as explained in the Note on the screen. Press Enter.

10. Wait for the Command status on menu “Command Status” to display OK. This indicates that the
successful configuration of the 251 Router. Continue with Step 11.
Notes:
v If an error occurs, you must return to Step 1 on page 4-89 on 1 on page 4-89. Ensure that
the LAN address and the three WAN addresses are set correctly. Make the necessary
changes to the addresses, if necessary.
v If a failure occurs, you will need to perform these additional 'flush router' steps:
a. From the “Set/Test Router Configuration” menu, select Flush Routing Table.
b. Press F4 on the “Flush Routing Table” menu, to obtain the popup menu. Select yes
from the popup menu, and press Enter. Press Enter again to start the flush process.
c. The COMMAND STATUS screen appears with a Command status of OK and a
message that “Routing Table has been successfully flushed.” Press F3 twice to return
to the Show / Change TSSC Connection menu.
d. Repeat Step 6 on page 4-89 through Step 10.
v If the routing tables are flushed and this controller supports Encryption routers, they will
need to be setup again after the TSSC router is successfully configured.
11. After the TSSC Router is configured, ensure that you reconnect the Ethernet cables which were
disconnected earlier in this procedure.

Running Fibre Switch setup
Note: Ensure you have the null modem cable (required for the configuration of the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switch only), available before you start this procedure. This null modem serial cable is part
of the 3592 C06 controller ship group.
This procedure will configure the 2 Gb 20-port or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch, or it accesses the
2109 Fibre Channel Switch Model F16 or S16 to perform functions other than configuration.
1. Connect the Service Terminal to the 3592 C06 controller control unit. Refer to “Connecting the Service
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance Menu, select Control Unit Service Utilities > SCSI/FCP Utilities
Menu > Run Fibre Switch Setup.
3. You are asked to “Select FCP Fibre Switch Type.” Press F4 to show the list of possible Fibre Channel
switches. Select the switch type installed in your frame. Follow the instructions on the display, as you
are prompted through the switch configuration.
Note:
v If you selected “2 Gb 20-port” and pressed Enter, you need to complete setup for the 2Gb
20-Port Fibre Channel Switch.
v If you selected “4 Gb 20-port,” the switch setup will be automatic. The process will not
complete, however, until you exit by pressing F3 twice. The remaining steps in this procedure
pertain only to the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch.
v Select “External” for either the External switch or the “Point-to-Point” configuration. If you
selected “External,” and “External” is set as your switch type, you have to press F3 or F10 to
end the procedure.
4. For example, if you selected “2 Gb 20–port” (2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch) as your switch type,
you are asked to connect the null modem cable between the serial port DB–9, and the serial port on
the left side of the primary (bottom switch in a dual switch configuration) embedded switch and Serial
Port 2 (Item 13 in Figure 2-6 on page 2-15) of the 3592 C06 controller.
5. You are asked to type “d” to continue after installation of the null modem serial cable. The software will
proceed to configure the IP address of the primary switch.
6. You are asked if you have a Dual Switch configuration. Type yes or no, depending on the switch
configuration.
If you typed “no,” you are asked to disconnect the null modem serial cable from the (primary and only)
switch and Serial Port 2 of the 3592 C06 controller. Follow the prompts to complete switch
configuration.
If you typed “yes” to indicate a Dual Switch installation, you are asked to remove the null modem serial
cable end from the serial port of the primary switch, and to connect it to the serial port of the alternate
switch (located on top of the primary switch).
7. You are asked to type “d” to continue after installation of the null modem serial cable to the alternate
switch. The software will now proceed to configure the IP address of the alternate switch.
8. You are asked to remove the null modem serial cable by disconnecting it from the serial port of the
alternate switch and from Serial Port 2 of the 3592 C06 controller.
9. Follow the prompts to completion of “alternate” switch configuration.
Note: If the setup procedure fails, or does not run to completion, an on-screen message should direct the
SSR to run a procedure for the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch listed in Appendix A "IP Setup for
2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch" of the controller MI.

Running FICON Diagnostics
Have the customer vary the drives and control unit offline to the host before proceeding.
This procedure shows you how to execute the FICON diagnostics from the Service Terminal menus. You
were sent here because a FICON adapter would not come online or a suspected FICON failure.
page 4-102.
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Control Unit and Drive Online Offline Control >
Display Control Unit, ESCON or FICON, and Tape Device Status.
3. Verify from the displayed status that the ESCON or FICON adapter and all available tape drives are
offline.
v If the ESCON or FICON adapter or tape drives need to taken offline, select the appropriate Vary
Control Unit Offline or Vary Tape Drive Offline selection from the previous Control Unit and
Drive Online Offline Control menu.
4. Press F3 repeatedly to return to the Subsystem Maintenance menu and select Subsystem
Diagnostics. Press Enter.
5. PressEnter to continue.
Diagnostic Routines will run the basic diagnostics. Advanced Diagnostic Routines will run the advanced
diagnostics which include the ESCON or FICON wrap tests.
6. Select either the Diagnostic Routines or Advanced Diagnostic Routines.
v Move cursor to resource you want to test and press Enter. For diagnostics that require wrap plugs,
you will be prompted when to install and remove the wrap plugs.
v The following screens will show three different scenarios:
– Run diagnostics on a good adapter (no error detected) See screens Figure 4-83 and Figure 4-84
on page 4-95.
– Run diagnostics on a defective adapter (SFP may be defective) (POST not able to run) See
screens Figure 4-85 on page 4-95 through Figure 4-87 on page 4-96.
– Run diagnostics on a defective adapter (SFP may be defective) (POST able to run) See screens
Figure 4-89 on page 4-97 through Figure 4-90 on page 4-98.
v
TESTING Ficon Channel Adapter (14102301) (ficon0) IN LOCATION 1c–08

80A0FE
Running POST code on adapter. (this may take up to 2 minutes)
F3=Cancel F10=Exit
Figure 4-83. FICON Diagnostic Without Errors - Screen One

TESTING Ficon Channel Adapter (14102301) (ficon0) IN LOCATION 1c–08 80A0FE
Executing Memory Stuck Bit test unit, bytes tested: 16777216
lqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqk
x x
x x
x x
x Diagnostic Test did not find any error. x
x To continue, press Enter. x
x x
x x
x x
x x
x x
x x
x F3=Cancel F10=Exit Enter x
mqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqj
F3=Cancel
Figure 4-84. FICON Diagnostic Without Errors - Screen Two
TESTING Ficon Channel Adapter (14102301) (ficon1) IN LOCATION 1c–08 80A002
Configure device ficon1 failed (10), aborting
x x
x x
x x
x x
x Flash or POST code may have failed... x
x x
x x
x Possible MDE in Error Report under MDE 55AB x
x x
x x
x x
x x
x x
F3=Cancel
Figure 4-85. FICON Error Screen One. Diagnostic did not execute, but failed

x x
x x
x x
x A PROBLEM WAS DETECTED x
x x
x Service Request Number: 80a-101: x
x Unexpected results from test: x
x x
x x
x x
x x
x x
(verify MI or RS/6000 lists for SRN 80a-101)
F3=Cancel
Figure 4-86. FICON Error Screen Two. Diagnostic did not execute, but failed
(Start of error report)

LABEL: ESCA_CHECK1_HDW
IDENTIFIER: 3ABEE39B
Date/Time: Thu Oct 19 14:37:19

Sequence Number: 1050317
Machine Id: 000474114C00
Node Id: Bass1
Class: H
Type: PERM
Resource Name: ficon1
Resource Class: adapter
Resource Type: polarcat
Location: 1c–08
Description
CHECK1 condition encountered.
Probable Causes
NONE
Failure Causes
NONE
Recommended Actions
NONE
RUN DIAGNOSTICS ON THE FAILING ADAPTER
Detail Data
Microcode Detected Error (MDE) ID
55AB 0000
Error specific text
CHECK1 55AB, HDW, (PCReady) POST Failure, chpid 3, failure on 00000000
Error specific data
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
Figure 4-87. AIX Error Log With the Above Failure. Aborted test; no data

Note: The first 4 Hex digits in the error log, specifies the error logged in the AIX log. Refer to step
8.
7.
x x
x x
x x
x x
x Flash or POST code may have failed... x
x x
x x
x Possible MDE in Error Report under MDE 55AB x
x x
x x
x x
x x
x x
F3=Cancel
Figure 4-88. FICON Error Screen One. Diagnostic executed and failed
x x
x x
x x
x A PROBLEM WAS DETECTED x
x x
XUnexpected results from test: x
x x
x x
x x
x x
x x
F3=Cancel
Figure 4-89. FICON Error Screen Two. Diagnostic executed and failed

Date/Time: Mon Oct 23 18:46:22

Node Id: fastball
Class: H
Type: PERM
Location: 1c–08
Description
Probable Causes
NONE
Failure Causes
NONE
Recommended Actions
NONE
Detail Data
55AB 0000
Error specific text
CHECK1 55AB, HDW, (PCReady) POST Failure, chpid 1, failure on 4E02D000
Error specific data
4E02 D000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
Figure 4-90. AIX Error Log With the Above Failure. Completed test with data
Note: The first 4 Hex digits in the error log, specify the error logged in the AIX log. Refer to step
“Running FICON Diagnostics” on page 4-94.
8. If you have a request for the actual error code that was generated with the following message, “Flash
or Power On Self-Test(POST) Failed,” “Failure Code in Error Report under MDE 55AB,”, go
to“Troubleshooting” on page 4-99, select the proper component and follow the information to resolve
your error.
9. To locate the failing adapter slot (slot 2), refer to Figure 4-91 on page 4-99 and Table 4-3 on page
4-99.

Date/Time: Mon Oct 23 18:46:22

Node Id: fastball
Class: H
Type: PERM
Location: 1c–08
Description
Probable Causes
NONE
Failure Causes
NONE
Recommended Actions
NONE
Detail Data
55AB 0000
Error specific text
CHECK1 55AB, HDW, (PCReady) POST Failure, chpid 1, failure on 4E02D000
Error specific data
4E02 D000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
Figure 4-91. Slot Location Identification
Table 4-3. 3592 C06 controller PCI Adapter Slots

PCI Slots in C06
1 2 3 4 5 6
Un–P1–C1 Un–P1–C2 Un–P1–C3 Un–P1–C4 Un–P1–C5 Un–P1–C6
EADSX–2 EADSX–1
Troubleshooting
The topics in this section provide information on troubleshooting the 3958-DE2 (TS7680) and its
components.

Run SCSI / Fibre Channel Configuration
This information enables you to display the SCSI/FCP Configuration, Test SCSI/FCP Configuration, and
Run the SCSI/FCP Configurator.
This procedure is used to add additional 3577 L5U Tape Library's to an existing configuration with FC
5248.
This procedure enables you to Display and Test the SCSI/FCP Configuration, and Run the SCSI/FCP
Configurator.
Attention: If you are here to Run SCSI/FCP Configurator with 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switches,
you may (possibly) encounter a hang problem during configuration. In that case, power cycle the 4Gb
20-Port Fibre Channel Switches (remove and re-plug the power cords). Then rerun this procedure and
return to the procedure that sent you here. If the configuration is still not successful, it is recommended
that you reactivate the 3592 C06 controller microcode by selecting Subsystem Maintenance >
Microcode Maintenance > Activate Code Image > Activate Subsystem Code Image. Select the
newest level of 3592 C06 controller microcode and restart the complete Installation Checkout procedure.
1. Connect the Service Terminal. See “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102. From the
Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Control Unit Service Utilities > SCSI/FCP Utilities Menu.
2. Choose the configuration option you were sent here for; select Display SCSI/FCP Configuration or
Test SCSI/FCP Configuration or Run SCSI/FCP Configurator.
3. Review the screens and verify that your particular configuration is available and functional.

Running Online Diagnostics from 3592 C06 controller
Have the customer vary the drives and control unit offline to the host only if you are going to put the 3592
C06 controller into Service Mode or you have to run Standalone Diagnostics.
This information describes how you execute diagnostics from the Service Terminal menus. Some of the
controller maintenance instructions may direct you to run diagnostics. In these instances follow the
directions given in the maps. For general diagnostic information, refer to the RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems, SA38-0509 manual, Using the Standalone and Online Diagnostics
chapter.
Note: For CD-ROM standalone diagnostics, see “Run Standalone Diagnostics By Booting In Service
Mode From Custom Boot List” on page 4-105.
page 4-102.
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Control Unit and Drive Online Offline Control >
Display Control Unit, ESCON or FICON, and Tape Device Status.
3. Verify from the displayed status that the ESCON or FICON adapter and all available tape drives are
online.
4. If the ESCON or FICON adapter or tape drives need to be taken offline select the appropriate Vary
Control Unit Offline or Vary Tape Drive Offline menu selection from the Control Unit and Drive
Online Offline Control menu.
5. Press F3 repeatedly to return to the Subsystem Maintenance menu, and select Subsystem
Diagnostics.
6. Press Enter. Diagnostic Routines will run the basic diagnostics. Advanced Diagnostic Routines will run
the advanced diagnostics.
7. Select either:
v Diagnostic Routines - Basic diagnostics will run.
– – OR – –
v Advanced Diagnostic Routines - ESCON or FICON wrap tests will run.
If you selected Advanced Diagnostic Routines, you can select either:
v System Verification. Move the cursor to the resource you want to test, and press Enter.
v – – OR – –
v Problem Determination. Move the cursor to the resource you want to test, and press Enter. For
diagnostics that require wrap plugs, you will be prompted when to install and remove the wrap
plugs.

Service Terminal
| The 3592-C06 controller attached to 3494, 3577 or C20 does not support 3592-E07 drives.
Many frames can house a controller. See “Connecting the Service Terminal” for the instructions to connect
a service terminal to the following frames.
v 3592 C06 controller in 3953 F05 Tape Frame
v 3592 C06 controller in 3953 F05 Expansion Frame
v 3592 C06 controller in 3952 F05 Frame that will attach to the 3494 D24 Frame
v 3592 C06 controller in a Rack
Connecting the Service Terminal

Note: Ensure that the EBTERM or NetTerm Emulator software is loaded on your Service Terminal before
continuing. If you need to load the EBTERM emulator, and your Service Terminal is running OS/2,
go to “Configure EBTERM for Terminal Emulator use (OS/2 Platform)” on page 4-42. If your Service
Terminal is running Windows, go to“Configure NetTerm Terminal Emulator” on page 4-51 to set up
the emulator. Return here when you have completed that procedure.
From the back of the Rack, located on the right support next to the power controller, is a service panel
with two connector positions. The service panel for a 3494 Tape Library is located above the Library
Manager in the Lxx Model. These connectors are labeled (from the left) LIB and SER for library
connection and service connection. The cable from the SER connector is coiled and laying in the bottom
of the box.
Note: If you are using EBTERM on a Library Manager, go to “Using EBTERM in a 3953 or 3494 Tape
Library” on page 4-43, then return here.
The following sections will get you to the main service menu on the Service Terminal from either the
Windows operating system (“Windows Operating System”) or an OS/2 operating system (“OS/2 Operating
System” on page 4-103).
Windows Operating System

1. If the modem is attached, disconnect it before continuing.
2. Connect the service cable to the 9-pin connector on the back of the service terminal, if you are
connecting to the 3592 C06 controller via a port on the service panel.
3. If you are connecting the Service Terminal directly to the 3592 C06 controller S1 port (see 14 in
Figure 2-6 on page 2-15). Use the serial cable with Null Modem, which is part of the 3592 C06
controller ship group.
4. Power on the service terminal.
5. If NetTerm is not yet configured, go to “Configure NetTerm Terminal Emulator” on page 4-51.
6. Select the NetTerm icon to start NetTerm.
7. From the toolbar at the top of the NetTerm window, click on File > Phone Directory.
8. From the Phone Directory pop-up window, click 3590–Axx & 3494–Bxx Subsystem Service to
highlight, then click the Connect box at the bottom of the pop-up window.
9. If accessing the system locally, go to step 9 on page 4-44 for the appropriate security procedures.
10. Go to step 12 on page 4-51 to disconnect.
Note:
v When NetTerm is in the connected state, the small circle in the lower left corner of the
screen is Green. When NetTerm is disconnected, this circle will turn Red.

v The Main Service Menu is the first screen that appears. Select the option that is the reason
for connecting the Service Terminal.

Subsystem Error Log

Figure 4-92. Subsystem Maintenance Screen
11. To see the Menu Tree, go to “Menu Tree” on page 4-67.
OS/2 Operating System

1. If the modem is attached, disconnect it before continuing.
2. Connect the service cable to the 9–pin connector. on the back of the Service Terminal you are using,
if you are connecting to the 3592 C06 controller via a port on the service panel.
3. If you are connecting your Service Terminal directly to the 3592 C06 controller S1 port (see 14 in
Figure 2-6 on page 2-15) use the serial cable with Null Modem, which is part of the 3592 C06
controller ship group.
4. Power ON your terminal.
5. Select the EBTERM icon.
6. Select Modify from the tool bar.
7. In the window, select Direct Connect Mode.
Note: A check mark (U) to the left of Direct Connect mode indicates proper selection.
8. Select Connect from the tool bar.
9. In the window, select 19200_Baud 3592-C06 3957-V06.
10. If accessing the system locally, go to “Using EBTERM in a 3953 or 3494 Tape Library” on page 4-43
for the appropriate security procedures. Return to Step 12 on page 4-51 to disconnect.
Setting Service Mode

This procedure sets service mode.
There are two methods for setting service mode in the 3592 C06 controller.
v Service Mode Boot - Use this method if you are going to run the stored, RISC diagnostics.
v Service Mode from the Custom Boot List - This method requires the standalone, diagnostic CD-ROM.
See “Run Standalone Diagnostics By Booting In Service Mode From Custom Boot List” on page 4-105.

Service Mode Boot
Thisprocedure will boot the 3592 C06 controller in service mode.
1. Verify with the system administrator and users that all programs need to be stopped.
2. Power off the system unit.
3. If you are already connected to the 3592 C06 controller in EBTERM or NetTerm and AIX is operating,
you can shut down the system unit as follows. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select
Control Unit Shutdown and Restart Menu > Shutdown AIX and Control Unit Code (use prior to
power off) > y
Otherwise, skip to step 5.
4. Start EBTERM or Netterm immediately, see IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library Controllers
Maintenance Information for the procedures, and power OFF the system unit by pressing and holding
the Power On Off switch on the operator control panel for four seconds.
5. When the 3592 C06 controller is in standby mode (green LED on Operator Panel blinking), do the
following:
a. Access the ASMI (Advanced System Management Interface). Login with your user ID and
password (admin, admin).
b. On the FSP main menu at the welcome screen, select Power/Restart Control > Power On Off
System > Slow. Also verify that Boot to System Server Firmware is set to Running.
Note: You also can set Slow boot by using the control panel. Use panel function 02 to set the
system boot speed to S (slow).
6. From the Power On/Off System menu, select option 8 to power ON the system unit.
7. Wait for the display of “boot” options and associated key selections.
Note: Continually monitor your terminal to ensure the connection has not been lost. If you have lost
connection (denoted by a red dot in 'NetTerm' in left bottom corner of screen), restart
EBTERM or NetTerm, and press Enter after connection is reestablished (red dot changes to
green). Reconnect IMMEDIATELY to be ready for next step.
8. Watch for the display of “boot” options, followed by the display of several words including the word
keyboard. When the word keyboard appears on the screen, immediately and repeatedly type 6 on
the Service Terminal keyboard to instruct the system that diagnostics are to be loaded from the
system hard drive.
9. Enter any requested password.
10. The FUNCTION SELECTION screen appears, where you are asked to select one of the options. You
will need to select the terminal type. Type 1, and press Enter.
11. Follow any additional prompts. For example, you must identify what type of terminal you are using
when you want to run diagnostics. When running diagnostics from a Service Terminal on a 3592 C06
controller with EBTERM or NetTerm, enter “ibm3151” when prompted for the type of terminal
emulation. and press Enter. If terminal type “ibm3151” does not apply, enter generic terminal “vt100”
| or “lft,” or follow the on-screen instructions to enter a correct response. Note: If installing 1.21.7.x or
| higher set the terminal emulator to VT100.
12. After the diagnostic controller loads, DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS appears on the
console display.
13. Follow the displayed instructions to test the desired resources, or press F3 to back up to the
FUNCTION SELECTION screen.
14. When testing is complete, press F3 to return to the DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
screen.
15. Press F3 to exit. Follow displayed instructions for powering OFF the 3592 C06 controller.
16. When asked if you want to halt the system, type H and press Enter. The system will power OFF.

17. When the ASMI menu appears on the Service Terminal, use ASMI to set the system boot speed to
fast. Power ON the system unit.
Run Standalone Diagnostics By Booting In Service Mode From

Custom Boot List
This information provides instructions to boot in service mode to run standalone diagnostics.
Use Standalone Diagnostics Version 5.3.0.10 or higher.

1. Inform the system administrator and the users that all programs need to be stopped.
2. Insert the diagnostic CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive, if you intend to run standalone diagnostics and
the system unit is still powered ON.
3. Power OFF the system unit power.
4. If you are already connected to the 3592 C06 controller in EBTERM or NetTerm and AIX is operating,
you can shut down the system unit as follows. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select
Control Unit Shutdown and Restart Menu > Shutdown AIX and Control Unit Code (use prior to
power off) > y
Otherwise, skip to step 6.
5. Start EBTERM or Netterm immediately, see IBM Call Home for Automated Tape Library Controllers
Maintenance Information for the procedures, and power OFF the system unit by pressing and holding
the Power On Off switch on the operator control panel for four seconds.
6. When the 3592 C06 controller is in standby mode (green LED on Operator Panel blinking), do the
following:
a. Access the ASMI (Advanced System Management Interface). Login with your user ID and
password (admin, admin).
b. On the FSP main menu at the welcome screen, select Power/Restart Control > Power On Off
System > Slow. Also verify that Boot to System Server Firmware is set to Running.
Note: You also can set Slow boot by using the control panel. Use panel function 02 to set the
system boot speed to S (slow).
7. Power ON the system unit power (Select option 8 on the Power On Off System menu, and press
Enter again when prompted to do so), and immediately insert the diagnostic CD-ROM into the
CD-ROM drive.
8. Wait for the display of “boot” options and associated key selections.
Note: Continually monitor your terminal to ensure that the connection has not been lost. If you have
lost your connection (denoted by a red dot in 'NetTerm' in left bottom corner of screen), restart
EBTERM or NetTerm, and press Enter after connection is reestablished (red dot changes to
green). Reconnect IMMEDIATELY to be ready for next step.
9. Watch for the display of “boot” options, followed by the display of several words including the word
keyboard. When the word keyboard appears on the screen, immediately and repeatedly type 5 on
the Service Terminal keyboard to instruct the system that diagnostics are to be loaded from the
CD-ROM.
10. Enter any requested password.
11. The FUNCTION SELECTION screen appears, where you are asked to select one of the options. You
| will need to select the terminal type. Type 1, and press Enter. Note: If installing 1.21.7.x or higher set
| the terminal emulator to VT100.
12. Follow any additional prompts. For example, you must identify what type of terminal you are using
when you want to run diagnostics. When running (standalone) diagnostics from a Service Terminal on

a 3592 C06 controller with EBTERM or NetTerm, enter “ibm3151” when prompted for the type of
terminal emulation, and press Enter. If terminal type “ibm3151” does not apply, then enter generic
terminal “vt100” or “lft,” or follow the on-screen instructions to enter correct response.
13. After the diagnostic controller loads, DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS appears on the
console display.
14. Follow the displayed instructions to test the desired resources, or press F3 to back up to FUNCTION
SELECTION screen.
15. When testing is complete, press F3 to return to the DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
screen.
16. Press F3 to exit. Follow displayed instructions for retrieval of the CD-ROM and for powering OFF the
controller.
17. You will be asked if you want to halt the system. Type H, and press Enter. The system will power
OFF.
18. When the ASMI menu appears on the Service Terminal, use ASMI to set the system boot speed to
fast. Power ON the system unit power.

Setting Correct Time On Controller
Use this procedure only when directed to do so. A 3592 C06 controller will synchronize its time with the
Library Managerwhen installed in a library environment.
Use this procedure to set up the clock on a controller by using the Service Terminal menus.
1. Connect the Service Terminal (see “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102).
Date, Time, and Time Zone > Change Time Zone Using System Defined Values, press Enter.
Figure 4-93 is shown.
Show / Change Date, Time, and Time Zone
Change / Show Date & Time

Change Time Zone Using System Defined Values
Change Time Zone Using User Inputted Values
x Use DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME? x
x x
x x
x # Does this time zone go on x
x # DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME? x
x # x
x 1 yes x
x 2 no x
x x
F1=Hex /=Find n=Find Next x
F9=Shmqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqj
Figure 4-93. Use DAYLIGHT SAVINGS Time? Pop-Up Menu
3. Respond to "Does this time zone go on DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME?" by selecting yes or no. Press
Enter.
4. Figure 4-94 on page 4-108 is shown. Select the option that matches the machine location, and press
Enter.

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
x CUT (Coordinated Universal Time) Time Zone x
x x
x x
x [TOP] x
x (CUT0) Coordinated Universal Time (CUT) x
x (GMT0) United Kingdom (CUT) x
x (AZOREST1) Azores; Cape Verde (CUT -1) x
x (FALKST2) Falkland Islands (CUT -2) x
x (GRNLNDST3) Greenland; East Brazil (CUT -3) x
x (AST4) Central Brazil (CUT -4) x
x (EST5) Eastern U.S.; Colombia (CUT -5) x
x (CST6) Central U.S.; Honduras (CUT -6) x
x (MST7) Mountain U.S. (CUT -7) x
x (PST8) Pacific U.S.; Yukon (CUT -8) x
x (AST9) Alaska (CUT -9) x
x [MORE...18] x
x x
F1x /=Find n=Find Next x
F9x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Figure 4-94. CUT (Coordinated Universal Time) Time Zone Pop-Up Menu
5. Figure 4-95 is shown if you selected yes to DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME in Step 3 on page 4-107. If
you selected no to DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME, skip to Step 7 on page 4-109. Check that the time
zone is correct. The remaining fields should be left unchanged for defaults in the U.S.A. Changes
may be necessary for machines outside of the U.S.A. if DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME is set differently
from the US protocol. Press Enter to continue.
Change Time Zone

[Entry Fields]
Time zone MST7MDT
Day Light Savings Time Offset from CUT([+|-]HH:MM: []
SS)
Start Daylight Savings Day([Mmm.ww.dd|Jn]) []
Start Daylight Savings Time(HH:MM:SS) []
Stop Daylight Savings Day([Mmm.ww.dd|Jn]) []
Stop Daylight Savings Time(HH:MM:SS) []

Figure 4-95. Change Time Zone Screen (DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME) Screen
6. Figure 4-96 on page 4-109 is shown with status of OK indicating the Time Zone entries were
processed correctly. Press F3 repeatedly to return to the Show / Change Date, Time, and Time
Zone screen. Skip to Step 9 on page 4-110 for any changes in Date and Time.

COMMAND STATUS
Any changes made to the time zone will take effect at the next system boot.

n=Find Next
Figure 4-96. Command Status Screen
7. Figure 4-97 is shown if you selected no to DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME in Step 3 on page 4-107. The
selected Time Zone should be displayed correctly. Press Enter to continue.
Change Time Zone

[Entry Fields]
Time zone MST7

Figure 4-97. Change Time Zone (No DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME) Screen
8. Figure 4-98 on page 4-110 with status of OK is shown indicating the Time Zone entry completed
properly. Press F3 repeatedly to return to the screen Show/ Change Date, Time, and Time Zone.
Continue at the next step for any changes in date and time.

COMMAND STATUS
Any changes made to the time zone will take effect at the next system boot.

F8=Image
Figure 4-98. Change/Show Day and Time
9. Select Show/Change Date and Time. Press Enter.

10. Figure 4-99 is shown which allows entering values for the year, month, day, hour, minutes, and
second. Type or select values in the entry fields, and press ENTER.
Note: You must press ENTER after you have entered the values in the entry fields, or your values
will not be saved, and the time, date, and so forth will not be updated.
Change / Show Day and Time

[Entry Fields]
YEAR (00-99) [03] #
MONTH (01-12) [08] #
DAY (1-31) [11] #
HOUR (00-23) [17] #
MINUTES (00-59) [00] #
SECONDS (00-59) [35] #

Figure 4-99. Change/Show Day and Time Screen
11. The Final Command Status Screen (like Figure 4-98) is shown with a status of OK indicating all date
and time entries have been processed correctly.
12. To cause the changes to take effect, restart AIX and the control unit code. Go to “Restart AIX and
3592 C06 controller Microcode” on page 4-88 to complete this procedure.

Setting Number of Drives On Controller
It is necessary to configure the controller so it knows how many tape drives are attached, or should be
attached. The controller must have this information before testing the configuration or configuring the
SCSI/FCP interfaces. The following steps will set the controller definitions so you can specify the correct
number of attached drives.
Notes:
v The controller ships with the Number of Attached Devices set to a default of 16. This means no
change in the setting of the number of drives is required if you are going to attach the maximum
number of sixteen 3592 Tape Drives, or expect to attach the maximum number of drives in the
future.
It is recommended the Number of Attached Devices remains set to 16.
You may enter a lower number, if fewer than 16 drives are attached. For example, enter 8 if no
adjacent frame drives are connected and the customer doesn't expect to add an adjacent 3494
D22 Frame with 3592 Tape Drives in the future. The number you enter should represent the
total number of drives the customer expects to connect to this controller in the future (through
the concurrent drive add procedure), rather than the actual number of drives currently
connected.
v Please notify the administrator to set the IOCP in the operating system to the same number of
drives that you enter. This allows for the non-disruptive addition of drives to this controller in
the future.
page 4-102.
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Subsystem Configuration > Show/Change
Control Unit Definitions.
3. A pop-up window displays, showing you the control units which are associated with this subsystem.
Place the cursor on the controller you are working with and press Enter.
4. Select Number of Attached Devices. With the customer's agreement, enter in the Entry Fields, the
total number of drives that are currently-attached and those which may be attached in the future to this
controller. Press Enter. The command status screens which appear, remind you that the changes have
not been made active until the next time the controller goes online.
Setting DNS IP address fields on absence of Customer DNS

When there are no DNS servers in the Customer network, it is recommended the Customer Gateway IP
address be entered in the two DNS fields of the Encryption Key Manager configuration menus. If the
connection is directly from the Encryption router(s) to the Encryption Key Manager server (without a
gateway), enter the Encryption Key Manager server IP address in the two DNS fields. In that case the
Encryption Key Manager server IP address also takes the place of the Customer Gateway IP address.

Encryption Router Configuration (For Library-Managed Controllers)
Set 251 Encryption Router Configuration (For Library-Managed

Controllers)
Use this procedure only for out-of-band encryption with the controller. Do NOT use this procedure if this
Encryption router has been configured previously by another controller in the 3494 Tape Library or in the
3953 Tape System.
If you are attaching to the 251 Encryption Router after it has been configured, go to “Controller Routes for
using pre-configured Encryption Routers” on page 4-121.
Notes:
v The controller must already have completed the TSSC Router LAN and WAN Configuration
prior to using this procedure.
v If you are in a dual LAN environment, you must have completed the procedure “Set 250
Encryption Router Configuration (For Library-Managed Controllers)” on page 4-118 on this
controller before using this procedure.
This procedure directs you to set the 251 Encryption Router LAN, WAN, WAN subnet mask, customer's
Gateway, or Encryption Key Manager, and two DNS IP addresses by using Service Terminal menus.
You will need the following information to perform this procedure.

v The LAN IP address 192.168.251.5 is the default 251 address. It already will be set in the configuration
menu. Use LAN IP address 192.168.251.6 for a second 251 Encryption Router, as needed in a 3494
Tape Library when eight or more controllers are set for out-of-band encryption.
v Obtain the WAN IP address (address where router connects to customer network) and the WAN subnet
mask from the system administrator.
v Obtain the customer's Gateway address for the 251 Encryption Router from the system administrator.
v Obtain the two DNS IP addresses from the system administrator. Verify that they were entered at the
Library Manager panel (3494 or 3953 L05 Library Manager) and verify that these two DNS IP
Addresses are also entered in the Show / Change IPv4 or IPv6 Encryption Configuration Menu of
the 3592 C06 controller.
1. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the 251 Encryption Router LAN port #8. When setting the 251
Encryption Router from a controller in a 3953 F05 Expansion Frame, ensure that the cable from the
Expansion Frame is plugged into the 251 Encryption Router.
Note: There will not be an ethernet cable connection from Port # 8 of the 251 Encryption Router in the
3952 F05 Frame attached to C20 Tape Library, or in a Rack environment.
Also, temporarily disconnect any Ethernet cables from other controllers or from other 3953 F05
Expansion Frames at 251 Encryption Router LAN ports. This will temporarily isolate the Encryption
Router to the controller, while you perform this configuration.
2. Use “Set 251 Encryption Router Configuration (For Library-Managed Controllers)” and Table 4-4 to
reset the SMC Router to the factory defaults.
Table 4-4. Procedure to Reset SMC Router to Factory Defaults – 251 Encryption Router Configuration
Router Model (Part
Number) Procedure
then cycle off. Release the button.

Table 4-4. Procedure to Reset SMC Router to Factory Defaults – 251 Encryption Router Configuration (continued)
Router Model (Part
Number) Procedure
SMCBR18 (23R9719) Press and hold the Reset button for five seconds, until the Run light begins to flash.
right side.
3. Ensure an Ethernet cable is connected between the Router's WAN port, located in the rear of the
Router, and the customer's TCP IP network.
4. Connect the Service Terminal. See “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102.
Controller Network Connections > Set / Test Encryption Router Configuration > Set 251
Encryption Router Configuration. Figure 4-100 is shown.
Set / Test Encryption Router Configuration

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ Are the Customer’s IPs for the 251 Encryption Router available? │
│ │
│ │
│ # NOTICE: The following selectors require Customer IP │
│ # addresses for using the Customers Encryption Key │
│ # Manager Server. Addresses are provided by the Customer. │
│ # This configuration is for Rack Mount Routers │
│ # ONLY. Library configuration should NOT be made here. │
│ # For Library configuration, refer to the Library │
│ # panels. │
│ # │
│ #Do you have the provided Customer IPs for the routers? │
│ Yes │
│ No │
│ │
│ F1=Help F2=Refresh F3=Cancel │
│ F8=Image F10=Exit Enter=Do │
F1│ /=Find n=Find Next │
F9└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 4-100. Set/Test Encryption Key Manager Router Configuration Pop-Up Menu
6. Select Yes from the pop-up menu, providing you acquired all your IP addresses for the primary path to
an Encryption Key Manager over the 251 Lan Network, and press Enter.
7. Enter information into the following fields in Figure 4-101 on page 4-114. You should have acquired this
information at the beginning of “Set 251 Encryption Router Configuration (For Library-Managed
Controllers)” on page 4-112.
Enter the LAN IP to be used on the Encryption Router
Verify that the correct default address (example: 192.168.251.5) is in this field
Enter the WAN IP (on Customer net) for the Encryption Router
Enter the WAN IP address which you obtained from the system administrator
Enter the Customer Gateway
Enter the customer Gateway IP address for the 251 Encryption Router (which you obtained
from the system administrator)
Enter the Customer Subnet Mask for the WAN IP
Enter the WAN subnet mask which you obtained from the system administrator

Enter the 1st Customer DNS Address
Enter the primary DNS IP address which you obtained, as depicted in Figure 4-104 on page
4-117
When there is no Domain Name Server in the Customer network, refer to “Setting DNS IP
address fields on absence of Customer DNS” on page 4-111.
Enter the 2nd Customer DNS Address
Enter the secondary DNS IP address which you obtained, as depicted in Figure 4-104 on page
4-117. If your customer has only one DNS IP address, reenter the Primary DNS IP address
into the 2nd Customer DNS Address field.
Set 251 Encryption Router Configuration

[Entry Fields]
Enter the LAN IP to be used on the [192.168.251.5]
Encryption router:
Encryption router:

Figure 4-101. Set 251 Encryption Router Configuration Menu
8. Press Enter. Wait for the Command Status menu to display "OK." This menu details the progress of
the router configuration, and "OK" indicates that the 251 Encryption Router configuration was
successful.
Note: If an error occurs, return to Step 5 on page 4-113. Ensure the fields are set correctly, and rerun
this procedure.
If an error was made, flush the routing table. If the routing table was flushed, test the 3953 F05
Expansion Frame and 250 Encryption Router settings on this controller. To flush the Routing
Table from the main service menu, select: Subsystem Configuration > Show / Change TSSC
Connection > Set / Test Router Configuration > Flush Routing Table.
Press F4, and select yes. Press Enter twice.

9. After the 251 Encryption Router is configured successfully, use Figure 4-107 on page 4-121 or
Figure 4-109 on page 4-125 to ensure that the Ethernet cable to the 251 Lan Network switch in the
Library Manager frame is reconnected to LAN Port #8 of the 251 Encryption Router. Also, reconnect
other Ethernet cables which were temporarily disconnected from the LAN ports of the router.

Encryption Key Encryption Key
Manager key path Manager key path
WAN WAN
9.11.224.144 9.11.224.150
251 250
Encryption Encryption
Router Router
192.168.251.5 192.168.250.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2nd 3rd 7th 2nd 3rd 7th

CU CU CU 192.168.251.244 CU CU CU 192.168.250.244
251 LMA 250 LMA
LAN Network LAN Network
Switch LMB Switch LMB
3494 LM Frame
Controller
To TSSC
WAN
172.31.1.25
TSSC Router
192.168.251.25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
en0
192.168.251.20
c0600081
C06/J70
en1
192.168.250.20
Figure 4-102. Connecting to 251 Encryption Router and 250 Encryption Router
This is the end of this procedure. Return to the procedure that sent you here.
Make Entries on 3494 or 3953 Library Manager Panel For Path To Out-Of-Band
Encryption Key Manager
If this controller is attached to a library manager (3953 or 3494), and there is an Encryption Key Manager
residing on a server, these addresses should have been set previously. Use this procedure to verify they
are the same.
1. From the 3494 or 3953 Library Manager, select Commands.
2. From the pull-down menu, select System Management.
3. From the next pull-down menu, select Manage Encryption.
4. Click on Control Unit Encryption Information. Figure 4-103 on page 4-116is shown.

Control Unit Encryption Information
Frame 3 Pri NS IP Addr: 9.11.244.114 Sec NS IP Addr:
Primary Key Manager Data
IP Address:
9.11.214.184
Domain Name:
Port: 08050
Secondary Key Manager Data
IP Address:
Domain Name:
Port: 00000
Status:
No operation in progress.
Modify this CU only Modify all CUs Refresh Exit Help
c0600079
Figure 4-103. Control Unit Encryption Information Menu – 3494 or 3953 Library Manager
5. In the Frame field of the Control Unit Encryption Information menu, select the Frame to which the
3592 C06 controller is attached (upper left corner of menu).
6. In the Pri NS IP Addr field, enter the IP address of the Primary Name Server.
When there is no Domain Name Server (DNS) in the Customer network, refer to “Setting DNS IP
7. In the Sec NS IP Addr field, enter the IP address of the Secondary Name Server, if one exists.
8. With the IP Address radio button selected, enter the IP address of the Primary Key Manager into the
input field.
9. In the Port field, enter the Port number of the Primary Key Manager.
10. With the IP Address radio button selected, enter the IP address of the Secondary Key Manager.
11. In the Port field, enter the Port number of the Secondary Key Manager.
12. If you will enter a domain name, change the Primary Key Manager Date radio button to Domain
Name.
13. Enter the Domain Name of the Primary Key Manager into the input field.
14. If you will enter a secondary key manger, change the Secondary Key Manager Date radio button to
Domain Name.
15. Enter the Domain Name of the Secondary Key Manager.
16. Select the Modify this CU only button. This will store the information in the Show / Change IPv4 or
IPv6 Encryption Configuration of the selected controller, or select Modify all CUs to transfer the
encryption information to all control units attached to this 3494 library or in this 3953 L05 Library
Manager.
See Figure 4-104 on page 4-117 is shown. IP addresses are an example only.

Show / Change IPv4 or IPv6 Encryption Configuration

Primary Encryption Key Manager Address/Domain [9.11.214.184]
Primary Key Manager Port Number [8050]
Alternate Encryption Key Manager Address/Domain [9.11.244.50]
Alternate Key Manager Port Number [8050]
Primary Domain Name Server [9.11.224.114]
Alternate Domain Name Server [9.11.225.150]

Figure 4-104. Show / Change Encryption Configuration – For Out-Of-Band Encryption Key Manager
Note: IP addresses for Encryption Configuration in 3494 Tape Library and 3584 Tape Library
environments are IPv4 format only.

Set 250 Encryption Router Configuration (For Library-Managed
Controllers)
Use this procedure only for out-of-band encryption with the controller. Do NOT use this procedure if this
Encryption Router has been configured previously by another controller in the 3494 Tape Library or the
3953 complex.
This procedure directs you to set the 250 Encryption Router LAN, WAN, WAN subnet mask, customer's

v The LAN IP address 192.168.250.5 is the default Encryption Key Manager 250 address. It already will
be set in the configuration menu. Use LAN IP address 192.168.250.6 for a second 250 Encryption
Router, as needed in a 3494 Tape Library environment when eight or more controllers are set for
out-of-band encryption.
v Obtain the two DNS IP addresses from the system administrator. Verify the DNS IP addresses were
entered at the LM panel (3494 or 3953 LM) shown in “Make Entries on 3494 or 3953 Library Manager
Panel For Path To Out-Of-Band Encryption Key Manager” on page 4-115.
1. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the 250 Lan Network switch, at the 250 Encryption Router port #8.
When setting the 250 Encryption Router from a controller in a 3953 F05 Expansion Frame, ensure the
cable from the Expansion Frame is plugged into the 250 Encryption Router.
When configuring the 251 Encryption Router and the 250 Encryption Router from a controller in a 3953
F05 Expansion Frame, set up the TSSC Router first.
Also, temporarily disconnect any Ethernet cables from other controllers or from other 3953 F05
Expansion Frames at 250 Encryption Router LAN ports. This will temporarily isolate the Encryption Key
Manager Router to the C06 controller, while you perform this configuration.
2. Use Table 4-5 to reset the SMC Router to the factory defaults
Table 4-5. Procedure to Reset SMC Router to Factory Defaults – 250 Encryption Router Configuration
Router Model (Part
Number) Procedure
right side.
Router, and the customer's TCP or IP network.
4. Connect the Service Terminal (see “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102). From the
Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Subsystem Configuration > Show / Change Controller
Network Connections > Set / Test Encryption Router Configuration > Set 250 Encryption Router

Configuration. Press Enter. The pop-up menu in Figure 4-105 is shown.

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ │
│ │
│ # This configuration is for Rack Mount Routers │
│ # panels. │
│ # │
│ Yes │
│ No │
│ │
F9└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Figure 4-105. Set / Test Encryption Router Configuration
5. Select Yes from the pop-up menu, if you acquired all your IP addresses for the secondary path to an
Encryption Key Manager over the 250 Lan Network. Press Enter.
6. Enter information into the following fields, as depicted in Figure 4-106 on page 4-120. You should have
acquired this information at the beginning of this procedure.
Enter the LAN IP address to be used on the Encryption Router
Verify the correct default address (example: 192.168.250.5) is in this field.
Enter the WAN IP address which you obtained from the system administrator.
Enter the customer Gateway IP address for the 250 Encryption Router, which you obtained
from the system administrator.
Enter the WAN subnet mask which you obtained from the system administrator.
Enter the primary DNS IP address which you obtained from the system administrator.
When there is no Domain Name Server (DNS) in the Customer network, refer to “Setting DNS
IP address fields on absence of Customer DNS” on page 4-111.
Enter the secondary DNS IP address which you obtained from the system administrator. If the
customer has only one DNS IP address, reenter the Primary DNS IP address into the 2nd
Customer DNS Address field.


[Entry Fields]
Encryption router:
Encryption router:
Enter the Subnet Mask for the WAN IP: []

Figure 4-106. Set 250 Encryption Router Configuration
the router configuration, and "OK" indicates the 250 Encryption Router configuration was successful.
Note: If an error occurs, return to step 1 on page 4-118. Ensure the fields are set correctly, and rerun
this procedure.
If an error was made, flush the routing table.
a. To flush the Routing Table from the main service menu, select: Subsystem Configuration > Show
/ Change TSSC Connection > Set / Test Router Configuration > Flush Routing Table.
b. Press F4, and select yes. Press Enter twice.
c. If the routing table was flushed, test the TSSC and 250 Encryption Router settings on this
controller.
Figure 4-109 on page 4-125 to ensure the Ethernet cable to the 250 Lan Network Switch in the Library
Manager frame is reconnected to LAN Port #8 of the 250 Encryption Router. Also, reconnect other
Ethernet cables which were temporarily disconnected from the LAN ports of the router.

Controller Routes for using pre-configured Encryption Routers
Notes:
v The TSSC router for this controller must be set up first. If it is not setup, go to “Show / Change
TSSC connection” on page 4-89, then return here.
v The 251 Encryption and the 250 Encryption Routers have been configured previously by
another controller in this library (3494 or 3953 L05 Library Manager). In a standalone frame or
in a rack, only the 251 Encryption Router has been configured.
Use this procedure for every controller in 3953 F05 Expansion Frames #1 through #5.
Each 251 Lan Network Ethernet cable from a 3953 F05 Expansion Frame, now connected to the 251 or
250 Encryption Router, covers as many as three controllers. This means as many as sixteen controllers
can be connected to one 8-port SMC router, by using six Ethernet cables. See Figure 4-107.
Encryption Key Encryption Key

Manager key path Manager key path
WAN WAN
9.11.224.144 9.11.224.150
251 250
Encryption Encryption
Router Router
192.168.251.5 192.168.250.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1st Exp. 2nd Exp. 1st Exp. 2nd Exp.

Frame Frame 192.168.251.244 Frame Frame
192.168.250.244
5th Exp. 251 LMA 5th Exp. 250 LMA
Frame LAN Network Frame LAN Network
Switch LMB Switch LMB
To TSSC
WAN
172.31.1.15
TSSC Router
192.168.251.15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
en0
192.168.251.10
c0600088
C06/J70
en1
192.168.250.10
Figure 4-107. 3953 Base and Expansion Frame Encryption Router Connections
This controller has been connected to the 251 and the 250 Encryption Router for out-of-band encryption.
Use Figure 4-107 or Figure 4-109 on page 4-125 to help you understand the Ethernet cabling from the
controller to the Encryption Key Manager routers.

If more than seven controllers (such as 3592 C06 controller or 3592 J70 Controller) exist in a 3494 Tape
Library environment, then a second set of 251 Encryption and the 250 Encryption Routers must be
installed. See Figure 4-109 on page 4-125.
Both the 251 Encryption and 250 Encryption Routers use the same port numbering.
Table 4-6. 251 and 250 Encryption Router Port Numbering
Port # Position
1 First Controller (en0 251 / en1 250)
2 Second Controller or First Expansion Frame
3 Third Controller or Second Expansion Frame
4 Fourth Controller or Third Expansion Frame
5 Fifth Controller or Fourth Expansion Frame
6 Sixth Controller or Fifth Expansion Frame
7 Seventh Controller
8 25x LAN Switch (LM Concentrator)
Notes:
v If the Controller or Expansion Frame is connected directly into the 25x Switch, move it to the corresponding 25x
Encryption router port.
v Allow 4 ft (1.2M) of ethernet cable for routing through the 3953 cable tracks.
v Only in the 3953 F05 Base Frame and standalone controllers is the CU 251 Lan Network connected differently.
Connect the 251 controller (en0) to TSSC router port 1. Connect the TSSC router port 8 to the 251 Encryption
Router port 1.
In a Standalone Frame, the 251 Encryption Router is connected to the controller by an Ethernet cable
from one of the TSSC Router LAN ports. Standalone frames do not contain a 251 Lan Network Switch or
a 250 Lan Network Switch.

Set Controller Routes To Use Pre-configured 251 Encryption Router
v The LAN IP address is the default 251 address 192.168.251.5. It may already be set in the
configuration menu. Use address: 192.168.251.6 for a second 251 Encryption Router, as needed in a
3494 Tape Library environment when eight or more controllers are set for out-of-band encryption.
v Obtain the WAN IP address (address under which router connects to customer network) and the WAN
subnet mask from the system administrator.
Note: You must be certain which IP address was set for the 251 Encryption Router. The subsequent
test and the entries to the Routing Table will fail if you set the customer Gateway to the wrong IP
address.
v Obtain the two DNS IP addresses from the last two entries in the Show / Change Encryption
Configuration menu. These two DNS IP addresses had previously been automatically entered into this
menu or activated by a user. They are entered at the LM panel (3494 or 3953 L05 Library Manager),
shown in Figure 4-103 on page 4-116, or they are entered by the service representative when the
controller is in a standalone frame.
Table 4-7. Required IP Addresses
Field Value Notes
LAN IP Address 192.168.251.5 This is the default IP Address
WAN IP (on Customer net) Obtain the WAN IP address (address
of the encryption router on the
customer network side) from the
system administrator. All the control
units use the same WAN IP address
assigned to the encryption router. If
more than one control unit is attached
to the router, then use the same WAN
IP address that was used on the first
control unit.
Customer Gateway Obtain the customer's Gateway
address for the 251 Encryption router
Customer Subnet Mask for the WAN Obtain the WAN subnet mask
IP address (address where router
connects to customer network) from
the system administrator.
1st Customer DNS Address Can be an IP address or a name.
2nd Customer DNS Address Enter the primary DNS IP address, if
the second DNS IP address is not
available. Can be an IP address or a
name.
IP address of the Encryption Server Required for testing the key path and
(primary or alternate) Encryption Key Manager.
Port number for the Encryption Key This is the port number for the
Manager Encryption Key Manager Server you
wish to test.

Table 4-7. Required IP Addresses (continued)
Field Value Notes
Ping timeout value (in seconds) Enter the maximum number of
seconds you will allow for the test to
complete. Thirty seconds is usually
ample time to allow a response to
post. The response ’OK’ indicates that
the Encryption Key Manager Key
Path and Encryption Key Manager
Server are operational. Any other
response indicates a failure.
This procedure directs you to test the 251 Encryption Router LAN, WAN, WAN subnet mask, customer's
1. Connect the Service Terminal. (see “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102).
Controller Network Connections > Set / Test Encryption Router Configuration > Test Encryption
Router Configuration Settings. Press Enter. Figure 4-108 is shown.
Test Encryption Router Configuration Settings

[Entry Fields]
Enter the LAN IP Address to be used on the [192.168.251.5]
Encryption router:
Encryption router:

Figure 4-108. Test Encryption Router Configuration Settings
3. Enter information into the following fields. You should have acquired this information at the beginning of
“Set Controller Routes To Use Pre-configured 251 Encryption Router” on page 4-123. See Table 4-7 on
page 4-123.
Verify the correct default address (example: 192.168.251.5) is in this field. (Use LAN IP
address 192.168.251.6 for a second 251 Encryption Router.)
Enter the customer Gateway IP address for 251 Encryption Router you obtained from the
system administrator.
Enter the WAN subnet mask you obtained from the system administrator.
Enter the primary DNS IP address, which you obtained from the system administrator.

Enter the secondary DNS IP address, which you obtained from the system administrator. If
your customer has only one DNS IP address, reenter the Primary DNS IP address into the 2nd
Customer DNS Address field.
the router test, and "OK" indicates the 251 Encryption Router test was successful and the 251
Encryption LAN Network static routes have been established.
Scroll down to the bottom of the screen and verify the test completed successfully
Note: If an error occurs, follow these steps to flush the routing table.
a. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Subsystem Configuration > Show /
Change TSSC Connection > Set/Test Router Configuration > Flush Routing Table.
c. Return to step 1 on page 4-124. Ensure the fields are set correctly, and rerun this
procedure.
5. After the 251 Encryption Router is tested successfully, use Figure 4-109 to ensure Encryption Key
Manager 251 Lan Network connections:
Note: If you flushed the routing tables here, retest both the TSSC Router and the 250 Encryption
Router.
Encryption Encryption Encryption Encryption

Key Manager Key Manager Key Manager Key Manager
key path key path key path key path
WAN WAN WAN WAN
9.11.224.144 9.11.224.150 9.11.226.130 9.11.226.135

251 250 Second 251 Second 250
Encryption Encryption Encryption Router Encryption Router
Router Router
192.168.251.5 192.168.250.5 192.168.251.6 192.168.250.6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2nd 3rd 7th 2nd 3rd 9th 10th 14th 9th 10th 14th
CU CU CU CU CU 7th CU CU CU CU CU CU
CU
192.168.251.244 192.168.250.244
251 LMA 250 LMA
Switch LMB Switch LMB 3494 LM
Frame
Controller
To TSSC To TSSC
WAN WAN
172.31.1.25 172.31.1.85
TSSC Router TSSC Router
192.168.251.25 192.168.251.85
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
en0 en0
192.168.251.20 192.168.251.80
C06/J70 C06/J70
c0600089
en1 en1
192.168.250.20 192.168.250.80
Figure 4-109. Testing 251 Encryption Router

This is the end of the procedure. Continue to “Set Controller Routes to use pre-configured 250
Encryption Router” on page 4-127.

Set Controller Routes to use pre-configured 250 Encryption Router
Notes:
v If you are in a standalone frame or a rack environment with only one Encryption Router, skip
this section, and return to the procedure that sent you here.
v You must have completed the “Set 250 Encryption Router Configuration (For Library-Managed
Controllers)” on page 4-118 on another controller before using this procedure.

v The LAN IP address is the default 250 address: 192.168.250.5. It already will be set in the
configuration menu. Use address 192.168.250.6 for a second 250 Encryption Router, as needed in a
3494 Tape Library environment when eight or more controllers are set for out-of-band encryption.
v Obtain the two DNS IP addresses from the system administrator.
Table 4-8. Required IP Addresses
Field Value Notes
LAN IP Address 192.168.250.5 This is the default IP Address
WAN IP (on Customer net) Obtain the WAN IP address (address
of the encryption router on the
customer network side) from the
system administrator. All the control
units use the same WAN IP address
assigned to the encryption router. If
more than one control unit is attached
to the router, then use the same WAN
IP address that was used on the first
control unit.
Customer Gateway Obtain the customer's Gateway
address for the 250 Encryption router
Customer Subnet Mask for the WAN Obtain the WAN subnet mask
IP address (address where router
connects to customer network) from
the system administrator.
1st Customer DNS Address Can be an IP address or a name.
2nd Customer DNS Address Enter the primary DNS IP address, if
the second DNS IP address is not
available. Can be an IP address or a
name.
IP address of the Encryption Server Required for testing the key path and
(primary or alternate) Encryption Key Manager.
Port number for the Encryption Key This is the port number for the
Manager Encryption Key Manager Server you
wish to test.

Table 4-8. Required IP Addresses (continued)
Field Value Notes
Ping timeout value (in seconds) Enter the maximum number of
seconds you will allow for the test to
complete. Thirty seconds is usually
ample time to allow a response to
post. The response ’OK’ indicates that
the Encryption Key Manager Key
Path and Encryption Key Manager
Server are operational. Any other
response indicates a failure.
This procedure directs you to test the 250 Encryption Router LAN, WAN, WAN subnet mask, customer's
1. Connect the Service Terminal. (see “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102.
Controller Network Connections > Set / Test Encryption Router Configuration > Test Encryption
Router Configuration. Press Enter. Figure 4-110 is shown.

[Entry Fields]
Encryption router:
Encryption router:

3. Enter information into the following fields. You should have acquired this information from the system
administrator at the beginning of this procedure. See Table 4-8 on page 4-127.
Verify the correct default address (192.168.250.5) is in this field. (Use 192.168.250.6 for a
second 250 Encryption Router.)
Obtain the WAN IP address (address where router connects to customer network) and the
WAN subnet mask from the system administrator. All the control units use the same WAN IP
address assigned to the encryption router. If more than one control unit is attached to the
router, then use the same WAN IP address that was used on the first control unit.
Enter the customer Gateway IP address for 250 Encryption Router.
Enter the WAN subnet mask.
Enter the primary DNS IP address.

Enter the secondary DNS IP address. If your customer has only one DNS IP address, reenter
the Primary DNS IP address into the 2nd Customer DNS Address field.
the router test. "OK" indicates the 250 Encryption Router test was successful and the 250 Encryption
static routes have been established.
Change TSSC Connection > Set / Test Router Configuration > Flush Routing Table.
c. Return to Step 3 on page 4-128. Ensure the fields are set correctly, and rerun this
procedure.
Figure 4-107 on page 4-121 to verify the Encryption Key Manager 250 Lan Network connections.
Note: If you flushed the Routing Table here, retest the TSSC Router and 251 Encryption Router.

Second Encryption Routers configuration
Set second 251 Encryption Router configuration

This is for the 3494 Tape Library and the standalone environments only. Use this procedure only if
connecting eight or more controllers for Encryption Key Manager routes.
Notes:
v Before using this procedure, you must set up the TSSC routes and second 250 Encryption
routes for this controller.
v The first 250 and 251 Encryption Routers must be set up before setting up the second 250 and
251 Encryption Routers.
v Complete setting Second 250 Encryption Router Config before continuing with this procedure.
v If the second 251 Encryption Router has been setup, go to“Set Ninth through Fourteenth
Controller IP Routes to second 251 and 250 Encryption Routers 3494 Tape Library only” on
page 4-138.
v Use this procedure only for out-of-band encryption with eight or more controllers.
This procedure directs you to set the 251 Encryption Router LAN, WAN, WAN subnet mask, Encryption
Key Manager or Gateway, and two DNS IP addresses by using Service Terminal menus.

v The LAN IP address is the default 251 address: 192.168.251.6.
v Obtain the two DNS IP addresses from the last two entries in the Show / Change IPv4 or IPv6
Encryption Configuration menu (see Figure 4-111 on page 4-131). These two DNS IP addresses had
previously been automatically entered into this menu or activated by a user. They are entered at the
Library Manager panel as shown in Figure 4-103 on page 4-116, or they are entered by the service
representative when the controller is in a standalone frame.
v From the Subsystem Configuration menu, select Show / Change IPv4 or IPv6 Encryption
Configuration for IPv4 addresses. Figure 4-111 on page 4-131 is shown. Obtain the two DNS IP
addresses from this menu or from the System Administrator.
Notes:
v The controller must already have completed the Router LAN or WAN Configuration for
configuration of the TSSC router prior to using this procedure.
v If you are in a dual LAN environment, you must have completed the “Set second 250
Encryption Router configuration” on page 4-134 on this controller before using this procedure.


Alternate Encryption Key Manager Address/Domain [2002:90B:E002:675:9:11:224:49]
Alternate Domain Name Server [2002:90B:E002::1]

Figure 4-111. Show / Change IPv4 or IPv6 Encryption Configuration
1. Use Table 4-9 to Reset SMC Router to Factory Defaults – Second 251 Encryption Router.
Table 4-9. Procedure to Reset SMC Router to Factory Defaults – Second 251 Encryption Router
Router Model (Part
Number) Procedure
SMC7008ABR (18P8523) Insert a probe like a pen , a pencil, or a paper clip into the Router reset button. The
2. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the 251 Encryption Router LAN port #8, which is connected to the
251 Lan Network Switch in the 3494 Tape Library frame.
Also, temporarily disconnect any Ethernet cables from other controller frames at 251 Encryption Router
LAN ports. This will temporarily isolate the Encryption Router to this controller, while you perform this
configuration.
4. Connect the Service Terminal, (see “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102.
Encryption Router Configuration. Figure 4-112 on page 4-132 is shown.


┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ │
│ │
│ # This configuration is for Rack mount Routers │
│ # panels. │
│ # │
│ Yes │
│ No │
│ │
F9└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
6. Select Yes from the pop-up menu, if you acquired all your IP addresses for the primary path to an
7. Enter information into the following fields in Figure 4-113 on page 4-133. You should have acquired this
information at the beginning of “Set second 251 Encryption Router configuration” on page 4-130.
Verify the correct default address (192.168.251.6) is in this field
Enter the WAN IP address which you obtained from the system administrator
from the system administrator
Enter the WAN subnet mask, which you obtained from the system administrator
Enter the primary DNS IP address which you obtained, as depicted in Figure 4-111 on page
4-131
Enter the secondary DNS IP address which you obtained, as depicted in Figure 4-111 on page
4-131. If the customer has only one DNS IP address, reenter the Primary DNS IP address into
the 2nd Customer DNS Address field.


[Entry Fields]
Encryption router:
Encryption router:

Press Enter.
procedure.
Router.
9. After the second 251 Encryption Router is configured successfully, use Figure 4-114 on page 4-134 to
ensure the ethernet cable to the 251 Lan Network switch in the Library Manager frame is reconnected
to LAN Port #8 of the 251 Encryption Router. Also reconnect other Ethernet cables which were
temporarily disconnected from the LAN ports of the router.
Use Figure 4-114 on page 4-134 as a representation of a successful configuration.

WAN WAN WAN WAN
9.11.224.144 9.11.224.150 9.11.226.130 9.11.226.135

Router Router
192.168.251.5 192.168.250.5 192.168.251.6 192.168.250.6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CU
192.168.251.244 192.168.250.244
251 LMA 250 LMA
Frame
Controller
To TSSC To TSSC
WAN WAN
172.31.1.25 172.31.1.85
192.168.251.25 192.168.251.85
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
en0 en0
192.168.251.20 192.168.251.80
C06/J70 C06/J70
c0600089
en1 en1
192.168.250.20 192.168.250.80
Figure 4-114. Connecting To Second 251 Encryption Router
Set second 250 Encryption Router configuration

Notes:
v Do not use this procedure in a standalone frame or a rack environment.
v Use this procedure only for out-of-band encryption with the controller if connecting eight or more
Controllers for Encryption Routers. Do not use this procedure if this Encryption router has been
configured previously by another controller in the 3494 Tape Library, or in a standalone frame,
and if this is the ninth through fourteenth controller to be connected to this 250 Encryption
Router, go to “Set Ninth through Fourteenth Controller IP Routes to second 251 and 250
Encryption Routers 3494 Tape Library only” on page 4-138.
This procedure sets the 250 Encryption Router LAN, WAN, WAN subnet mask, Encryption Key Manager
or Gateway, and two DNS IP addresses by using Service Terminal menus.

v The LAN IP address is the default 250 address: 192.168.250.6.
v Obtain the two DNS IP addresses from the last two entries in the Show/Change Encryption
Configuration menu (see Figure 4-115 on page 4-135). These two DNS IP addresses had previously
been automatically
entered into this menu or activated by a user. They are entered at the LM panel (3494 or 3953 L05
Library Manager) shown in Figure 4-103 on page 4-116, or they are entered by the service
representative when the controller is in a standalone frame.
1. From the Subsystem Configuration menu, select Show / Change IPv4 or IPv6 Encryption
Configuration. Figure 4-115 is shown.


2. Disconnect the Ethernet cable to the TSSC Router from the controller Ethernet port en0. (see Item
10 in Figure 2-6 on page 2-15).
3. Connect the Ethernet cable to the 250 Encryption Router LAN port directly from the controller
Ethernet port en1. (see Item 9 in Figure 2-6 on page 2-15).
250 Lan Network Switch in the 3494 Tape Library3494 Tape Library L frame. See Figure 4-117 on
page 4-137. This will temporarily isolate the 250 Encryption Router to the controller while you perform
this configuration.
5. Temporarily disconnect any Ethernet cables from other controllers at 250 Encryption Router LAN
ports. This will temporarily isolate the Encryption Router to the controller while you perform this
configuration.
6. Reset the SMC Router:
v Model SMC7008ABR - Press and hold the Reset button on the front panel for at least twelve (12)
seconds, until all the LEDs on the front panel cycle on and cycle off.
– – OR – –
v Model SMCBR18 - Insert a probe (like a pencil, a pin, or a paper clip) into the Reset button, which
is located to the right of the LEDs on the front panel, for approximately five to six (5 to 6) seconds.
Wait for the second light in the left column to begin to blink faster. Release the Reset button.
8. Connect the Service Terminal if not already connected (see “Connecting the Service Terminal” on
page 4-102).
Encryption Router Configuration. Figure 4-116 on page 4-136 is shown.


┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ │
│ │
│ # This configuration is for Rack mount Routers │
│ # panels. │
│ # │
│ Yes │
│ No │
│ │
F9└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
10. Select Yes from the pop-up menu, if you acquired all your IP addresses for the secondary path to an
11. Enter information into the following fields. You should have acquired this information at the beginning
of “Set second 250 Encryption Router configuration” on page 4-134, otherwise obtain this information
from the system administrator now.
from the system administrator
Enter the WAN subnet mask which you obtained from the system administrator
Enter the primary Domain Name Server IP address which you obtained, as depicted in
Figure 4-115 on page 4-135, or obtained from the system administrator
When there is no Domain Name Server (DNS) in the Customer network, refer to “Setting
DNS IP address fields on absence of Customer DNS” on page 4-111.
Enter the secondary Domain Name Server IP address which you obtained, as depicted in
Figure 4-115 on page 4-135. If your customer has only one DNS IP address, reenter the
Primary DNS IP address into the 2nd Customer DNS Address field.
Note: If an error occurs, follow these steps to flush the routing table:
Press Enter.
procedure.

If you flushed the routing table here, retest the TSSC router after it is reconnected to en0.
13. After the second 250 Encryption Router is configured successfully, use Figure 4-117 to ensure the;
a. Ethernet cable to the 250 Lan Network switch in the 3494 Tape Library L frame is reconnected to
LAN Port #8 of the 250 Encryption Router.
b. Other Ethernet cables which were temporarily disconnected from the LAN ports of the router are
reconnected.
c. Ethernet cable from the controller Router port en1 remains connected to the LAN port of the 250
Router. (see Item 9 in Figure 2-6 on page 2-15.
d. Ethernet cable from the TSSC Router LAN Port #1, which was disconnected from the controller
port en0, is reconnected to the controller port en0. (see Item 10 in Figure 2-6 on page 2-15).

WAN WAN WAN WAN
9.11.224.144 9.11.224.150 9.11.226.130 9.11.226.135

Router Router
192.168.251.5 192.168.250.5 192.168.251.6 192.168.250.6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CU
192.168.251.244 192.168.250.244
251 LMA 250 LMA
Frame
Controller
To TSSC To TSSC
WAN WAN
172.31.1.25 172.31.1.85
192.168.251.25 192.168.251.85
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
en0 en0
192.168.251.20 192.168.251.80
C06/J70 C06/J70
c0600089
en1 en1
192.168.250.20 192.168.250.80
Figure 4-117. Connecting to Second 250 Encryption Router

Ninth through Fourteenth IP Routes to second Encryption Routers,
3494 Tape Library only
Use this procedure to set the Encryption Key Manager (static) routes in the Routing Table.
Set Ninth through Fourteenth Controller IP Routes to second 251 and

250 Encryption Routers 3494 Tape Library only
The 250 and 251 Encryption Routers have been configured previously by another controller in this 3494
Tape Library, or in the standalone frame.

WAN WAN WAN WAN
9.11.224.144 9.11.224.150 9.11.226.130 9.11.226.135

Router Router
192.168.251.5 192.168.250.5 192.168.251.6 192.168.250.6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CU
192.168.251.244 192.168.250.244
251 LMA 250 LMA
Frame
Controller
To TSSC To TSSC
WAN WAN
172.31.1.25 172.31.1.85
192.168.251.25 192.168.251.85
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
en0 en0
192.168.251.20 192.168.251.80
C06/J70 C06/J70
c0600089
en1 en1
192.168.250.20 192.168.250.80
Figure 4-118. Connecting to Second 250 and 251 Encryption Routers
This controller has been connected to the second 251 Encryption Router and the second 250 Encryption
Router for out-of-band encryption. Use Figure 4-118 to help understand the Ethernet cabling from the
controller to the Encryption routers. The ninth through the fourteenth Controllers 250 and 251 Lan Network
cables are plugged into the second 250 and 251 Encryption Routers.
Both the 250 and 251 Encryption Routers use the same port numbering.

Table 4-10. 250 and 251 Encryption Router Port Numbering
Port # Position
1 First Controller (en0 251 / en1 250)
2 Second Controller or First Expansion Frame
3 Third Controller or Second Expansion Frame
4 Fourth Controller or Third Expansion Frame
5 Fifth Controller or Fourth Expansion Frame
6 Sixth Controller or Fifth Expansion Frame
7 Seventh Controller
8 25x LAN Switch (LM Concentrator)
Notes:
v If the Controller or Expansion Frame is connected directly into the 25x Switch then move it to the corresponding
25x Encryption router port.
v Allow 4 ft (1.2M) of ethernet cable for routing through the 3953 cable tracks.
v Only in the 3953 F05 Base Frame and standalone controllers are the CU 251 LAN connected differently. Connect
the 251 controller (en0) to TSSC router port 1. Connect the TSSC router port 8 to the 251 Encryption Router port
1.
In a Standalone Frame, the second 251 Encryption Router is connected to the controller by Ethernet cable
from one of the TSSC Router LAN ports. Standalone Frames do not contain a 251 Lan Network Switch or
a 250 Lan Network Switch.
Set Controller Routes for the second 251 Encryption Router (Ninth
through Fourteenth Controllers)
Note: You must have completed the “Set second 251 Encryption Router configuration” on page 4-130 on
another controller before using this procedure.
You need the following information to perform this procedure.

v The LAN IP address is the default 251 address: 192.168.251.6. It may already be set in the
configuration menu.
v Obtain the customer's Gateway address for the second 251 Encryption Router from the system
administrator.
Note: Be certain which IP address was set for the second 251 Encryption Router. The subsequent test
and the entries to the Routing Table will fail if the wrong customer gateway IP address is set in
this procedure.
v Obtain the two DNS IP addresses from the last two entries in the Show/Change Encryption
Configuration menu (see Figure 4-119 on page 4-140). These two DNS IP addresses had previously
been automatically entered into this menu or activated by a user. They are entered at the Library
Manager panel, as shown in Figure 4-103 on page 4-116, or entered by the service representative when
the controller is in a standalone frame.
This procedure tests the 251 Encryption Router LAN, WAN, WAN subnet mask, customer's Gateway, or
Encryption Key Manager, and two DNS IP addresses by using Service Terminal menus.

Configuration. Figure 4-119 is shown. Obtain the two DNS IP addresses from this menu or from the
System Administrator.


2. Disconnect the Ethernet cable to the TSSC Router from the controller Ethernet port en0. (see Item
10 in Figure 2-6 on page 2-15).
3. Connect the Ethernet cable to the 251 Encryption Router directly from the controller Ethernet port
en0.
251 Lan Network Switch in the 3494 Tape Library L frame. (See Figure 4-118 on page 4-138).
configuration.
6. Connect the Service Terminal if not already connected (see .“Connecting the Service Terminal” on
page 4-102
Controller Network Connections > Set / Test Encryption Router Configuration > Test
Encryption Router Configuration Settings. Press Enter. Figure 4-120 is shown.

[Entry Fields]
Encryption router:
Encryption router:

8. Enter information into the following fields. You acquired this information at the beginning of “Set
Controller Routes for the second 251 Encryption Router (Ninth through Fourteenth Controllers)” on
page 4-139.

Enter the WAN IP address you obtained from the system administrator
Enter the customer gateway IP address for Encryption 251 Router you obtained from the
system administrator.
Enter the WAN subnet mask you obtained from the system administrator
Enter the primary DNS IP address you obtained from Figure 4-119 on page 4-140
Enter the secondary DNS IP address you obtained from Figure 4-119 on page 4-140. If the
Customer DNS Address field
9. Press Enter. Wait for the Command Status menu to display "OK." This menu shows the progress of
the router test, and "OK" indicates the 251 Encryption Router test was successful, and the 251
encryption router static routes have been established.
Note: If an error occurs, return to step 1 on page 4-140. Ensure the fields are set correctly, and
rerun this procedure.
10. After the 251 Encryption Router is tested successfully, use Figure 4-121 on page 4-142 to ensure the:
reconnected.
c. Ethernet cable from the controller to the 251 Encryption Router is disconnected from the controller
port en0 and is reconnected to a LAN port on the TSSC Router.
port en0, is reconnected to the controller port en0. (see Item 10 in Figure 2-6 on page 2-15).).

WAN WAN WAN WAN
9.11.224.144 9.11.224.150 9.11.226.130 9.11.226.135

Router Router
192.168.251.5 192.168.250.5 192.168.251.6 192.168.250.6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CU
192.168.251.244 192.168.250.244
251 LMA 250 LMA
Frame
Controller
To TSSC To TSSC
WAN WAN
172.31.1.25 172.31.1.85
192.168.251.25 192.168.251.85
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
en0 en0
192.168.251.20 192.168.251.80
C06/J70 C06/J70
c0600089
en1 en1
192.168.250.20 192.168.250.80
Figure 4-121. Testing Second 251 Encryption Router

Set Controller Routes for the second 250 Encryption Router (Ninth
through Fourteenth Controllers)
Notes:
v If you are in a standalone frame or a rack environment, skip this section, and return to the
v You must have completed “Set second 250 Encryption Router configuration” on page 4-134 on
another controller before using this procedure.

v The LAN IP address is the default 250 address: 192.168.250.6. It already will be set in the
configuration menu.
v Obtain the customer's Gateway address for the second 250 Encryption Router from the system
administrator.
Note: Be certain which IP address was set for the second 250 Encryption Router. The subsequent test
and the entries to the Routing Table will fail if the wrong customer gateway IP address is set in
this procedure.
v Obtain the two DNS IP addresses from the last two entries in the Show/Change Encryption IPv4 or
IPv6 Configuration menu (see Figure 4-122). These two DNS IP addresses had previously been
automatically entered into this menu or activated by a user. They are entered at the Library Manager
panel as shown in Figure 4-103 on page 4-116, or they are entered by the service representative when
the controller is in a standalone frame.
This procedure directs you to test the second 250 Encryption Router LAN, WAN, WAN subnet mask,
customer's Gateway, or Encryption Key ManagerIP address, and two DNS IP addresses by using Service
Terminal menus.

Configuration. Figure 4-122 is shown.
a. Obtain the Primary and Alternate DNS IP Addresses.


2. Temporarily disconnect the TSSC Ethernet cable from the controller Ethernet port en0. (see Item 10
in Figure 2-6 on page 2-15).

3. Connect the Ethernet cable to the 250 Encryption Router LAN port directly from the controller
Ethernet port en1 (see Item 9 in Figure 2-6 on page 2-15).
250 Lan Network Switch in the 3494 Tape Library L frame. (See Figure 4-124 on page 4-145).
configuration.
6. Connect the Service Terminal (see “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102, if not already
connected.
Controller Network Connections > Set / Test Encryption Router Configuration > Test
Encryption Router Configuration Settings. Press Enter. Figure 4-123 is shown.

[Entry Fields]
Encryption router:
Encryption router:

8. Enter information into the following fields, as shown in Figure 4-123. You acquired this information at
the beginning of “Set Controller Routes for the second 250 Encryption Router (Ninth through
Fourteenth Controllers)” on page 4-143.
Enter the WAN IP address you obtained from the system administrator
Enter the customer gateway IP address for the second 250 Encryption Router you obtained
Enter the WAN subnet mask you obtained from the system administrator
Enter the primary DNS IP address you obtained from Figure 4-122 on page 4-143
Enter the secondary DNS IP address you obtained from Figure 4-122 on page 4-143. If the
Customer DNS Address field
9. Press Enter. Wait for the Command Status menu to display "OK." This menu shows the progress of
the router test, and "OK" indicates the 250 Encryption Router test was successful, and the 250
Encryption static routes have been established.

Change TSSC Connection > Set/Test Router Configuration > Flush Routing Table.
c. If an error occurs, return to Step 2 on page 4-143. Ensure the fields are set correctly, and
rerun this procedure.
10. After the second 250 Encryption Router is tested successfully, use Figure 4-124 to ensure the:
Router.
reconnected.
c. Ethernet cable from the Controller port en1 remains connected to the LAN port of the 250
Encryption Router. (see Item 9 in Figure 2-6 on page 2-15.
port en0, is reconnected to the controller port en0. (see Item 10 in Figure 2-6 on page 2-15).

WAN WAN WAN WAN
9.11.224.144 9.11.224.150 9.11.226.130 9.11.226.135

Router Router
192.168.251.5 192.168.250.5 192.168.251.6 192.168.250.6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CU
192.168.251.244 192.168.250.244
251 LMA 250 LMA
Frame
Controller
To TSSC To TSSC
WAN WAN
172.31.1.25 172.31.1.85
192.168.251.25 192.168.251.85
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
en0 en0
192.168.251.20 192.168.251.80
C06/J70 C06/J70
c0600089
en1 en1
192.168.250.20 192.168.250.80
Figure 4-124. Connecting to Second 250 Encryption Router

Set Encryption Key Manager IP Addresses in the Controller
Use this procedure to setup the Encryption Key Manager IP settings in the controller, if this controller is
not attached to a Library Manager, and there is an Encryption Key Manager residing on a server for
out-of-band encryption.
Note: The Encryption Key Manager IP settings for control units in library manager environments should
be set at the Library Manager (see “Make Entries on 3494 or 3953 Library Manager Panel For Path
To Out-Of-Band Encryption Key Manager” on page 4-115). All controller settings will be overwritten
by settings in the LM in these environments.
1. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Subsystem Configuration > Show / Change IPv4
or IPv6 Encryption Configuration and press Enter. Figure 4-125 is shown.

Primary Encryption Key Manager Address/Domain [xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx] or xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx
Alternate Encryption Key Manager Address/Domain [xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx]
Primary Domain Name Server (IPv4 only) [xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx]
Alternate Domain Name Server (IPv4 only) [xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx]

2. Enter information into the following fields for operations with an Encryption Key Manager Server.
Enter the Primary Encryption Key Manager IP address to be used for a Encryption Key Manager
Server (IPv4 or IPv6)
Verify that the correct address (example; 9.11.224.49) is in this field.
Enter the Primary Encryption Key Manager Port number to be used on the Encryption Key
Manager Server
Enter the Primary Encryption Key Manager Port number which you obtained from the system
administrator.
Enter the Alternate Encryption Key Manager IP address to be used for the Encryption Key
Manager Server (IPv4 or IPv6)
Verify that the correct address is in this field, if available.
Enter the Alternate Encryption Key Manager Port number to be used on the Encryption Key
Manager Server
Enter the Alternate Encryption Key Manager Port number which you obtained from the system
administrator, if available.
Enter the Primary Domain Name Server (IPv4 only) Leave blank for IPv6
Enter the Primary Domain Name Server (example; 9.11.224.114) in this field.
Enter the Alternate Domain Name Server (IPv4 only) Leave blank for IPv6
Enter the Primary Domain Name Server in this field, if the Alternate DNS (example;
9.16.225.140) is not available.
3. Press Enter.
Wait for the Command Status menu to display "OK."

Run Encryption Key Manager Path Test
The customer may have deselected the ping response from the Encryption Key Manager server. Therefore
do not expect a favorable result when testing the path from the controller to an Encryption Key Manager
server using only a Ping command. Use this Encryption Key Manager Path Test diagnostic to verify that
the TCP or IP key path to each of the two Encryption Key Manager is operational.
1. Connect the Service Terminal, (see “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102).
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance screen, select Control Unit Service Utilities > Run Test to
Encryption Key Manager, press Enter. Figure 4-126 is shown.
Note: If FC 5248 is installed and either Encryption Key Manager address is changed, you must
re-setup the IPv4 and IPv6 default filter rules. See step 8 on page 4-148.
Run Test to Encryption Key Manager
Run IPv4 Test to Encryption Key Manager

Setup IPv4 and IPv6 default IP filter rules

Figure 4-126. Run Test to Encryption Key Manager
3. For the IPv4 test continue with step 4. For the IPv6 test go to step 5.
4. Select Run IPv4 Test to Encryption Key Manager, press Enter. Figure 4-127 is shown. Refer to
step 6 on page 4-148 for information about the Entry Fields.

[Entry Fields]
IP address for the Encryption Key Manager: [ ]
Port number for the Encryption Key Manager: [ ]
Ping timeout value (in seconds): [ ]
First DNS lookup address (DNS1): [x.xx.xxx.xxx]
Second DNS lookup address (DNS2): [x.xx.xxx.xxx]

Figure 4-127. Run IPv4 Test to Encryption Key Manager
Continue with step 7 on page 4-148.

5. Select Run IPv6 Test to Encryption Key Manager, press Enter. Figure 4-128 on page 4-148 is
shown. Refer to step 6 on page 4-148 for information about the Entry Fields.

Run IPv6 Encryption Key Manager Path Test

IPv6 address for the Encryption Key Manager: [2002:90B:E002:675:9:11:224:49]

IP Gateway to the Encryption Key Manager [2002:90B:E002:219::1]
Port number for the Encryption Key Manager: [8050]
Ping timeout value (in seconds): [10]

Figure 4-128. Run IPv6 Encryption Key ManagerPath Test
6. Enter information into the following fields for the Encryption Router. This information is available from
the System Administrator.
IP address for the Encryption Key Manager
Enter the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the Encryption Key Manager server (primary or
alternate) to allow testing of the key path and Encryption Key Manager.
IP Gateway to the Encryption Key Manager (IPv6)
Enter the gateway to the Encryption Key Manager server to create a route for the Encryption
Key Manager.
Port number for the Encryption Key Manager
Enter the port number for the Encryption Key Manager server you wish to test.
Ping timeout value (in seconds)
Enter the maximum number of seconds you will allow for the test to complete. Thirty seconds
is usually ample time to allow a response to post. The response 'OK' indicates that the
Encryption Key Manager key path and Encryption Key Manager server are operational. Any
other response indicates a failure.
Note: For IPv4 only, DNS1 and DNS2 fields must be filled. Follow the directions on entering IP
addresses for DNS1 and DNS2 from previous Encryption Router settings, including “Setting
7. Press Enter.
8. Press F3 repeatedly to return to the Subsystem Maintenance screen. If you have FC 5248 (No
Router) installed on your Controller, continue with this step, otherwise go to step 10. Select Control
Unit Service Utilities > Run Test to Encryption Key Manager > Setup IPv4 and IPv6 default IP
filter rules, press Enter.
Setup IPv4 and IPv6 default filter rules:
a. IP traffic is allowed to each 3577 L5U Tape Library
b. IP traffic is allowed to an Out-of-Band Encryption Key Manager Server
c. All other IPv4 or IPv6 traffic is blocked from the Customer network.
Note:
9. Select Run IPv4 Test to Encryption Key Manager again, press Enter.
– – – OR – – –
Select Run IPv6 Test to Encryption Key Manager again, press Enter.
10. If the test fails, use ping commands to the Encryption router LAN address and WAN address to help
isolate the failure within the key path to the router, or to within the router.
If the ping commands to the router are successful, continue issuing ping commands to the customer's
network to further isolate the problem.
Work with the system administrator to isolate the problem.


Show/Change SIM and MIM Reporting Level
The controller offloads SIM sense records to the host, which the host software can use to determine
whether to display a message on the host console. The CU sets a bit based on the severity of the SIM
and according to a clip level, which can be set from the Service Terminal. If the clip level is specified, the
controller default is to turn the message to 'Operator bit on' for all SIMs with a severity of 2 (Serious) or
higher.
Use this procedure to show or change the SIM and MIM Severity Reporting Level.
1. Connect the Service Terminal to the controller (see “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102).
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance Menu screen, select Service Information Message (SIM)
Maintenance > Show/Change SIM & MIM Presentation Control. The current value displays (if no
value has been specified, then the current value will read NOT_INITIALIZED).
3. To change the current value, press F4 to display a list of options. Select the desired value, and press
Enter (twice). The command status panel is shown. When the status displays 'OK', the command has
completed.
4. Press F3 twice to return to the Subsystem Maintenance Menu screen.

System Firmware Updates
This procedure updates the system firmware. You may need to perform these steps if installing an option,
or your support representative has instructed you to update your firmware.
Note: On the 3592 C06 controller all system firmware updates will be handled automatically by 3592 C06
controller microcode updates. You may also use AIX Service Aids to update firmware. This is done
by procedure “Firmware Update via AIX” on page 4-56.
Downloading the firmware update image and update instructions from the Web is the preferred method.
Always check the pSeries and RS/6000 Support Web site for the latest firmware images and update
instructions. The Web address is: http://techsupport.services.ibm.com/server/mdownload2/download.html
If you cannot download from the Web, do the following;

v See “Firmware Update via AIX” on page 4-56.
v If the system is running, but access to the Web is not available, see “Updating System Firmware from
AIX Command Line by using Locally-Available Image” on page 4-153.
v If the service processor programming has been corrupted, the service processor will automatically enter
recovery mode when power is applied to the system.
General Information on System Firmware Updates

All the system firmware types that can be reprogrammed are updated at the same time. They are:
v System power control network programming
v Service processor programming
v IPL programming
v Run-time abstraction services
It is strongly recommended that you create a set of firmware update CDs from the Web site as soon as
possible after a system is installed. The CD images can be downloaded to any PC, pSeries, or RS/6000
system with Internet access. This method and contacting your service representative are the only two
ways to acquire a set of firmware update CD's; they cannot be created by using the service processor
menus or by the operating system.
Retain and store the latest firmware CD each time the firmware gets updated in the event the firmware
becomes corrupted and must be reloaded.
Download the detailed instructions, as well as the latest flash images, from the following Web address:
http://techsupport.services.ibm.com/server/mdownload2. Before doing a system firmware update, check the
Web site for the latest code and images. Do not attempt a firmware update if you are unsure of the image
you have, or of the procedure required for the update.
The images are available on the Web site in either DOS format or AIX (backup) format:
v If downloading to a PC, download the DOS image and follow the instructions. The CD created will be in
AIX (backup) format.
v If downloading to a pSeries or RS/6000 system, follow the instructions to create an image on CD.
Determining Level of System Firmware

Connect the Service Terminal to the controller (see “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102).

From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Subsystem Diagnostics > Task Selection >
Microcode Tasks > Display Microcode Level > sys0. Press Enter. Press F7 to commit.
The current permanent and temporary Systems Firmware image displays.
Also shown is from which current image (temporary or permanent) the system unit is booted.
Press Enter to continue, then press F3 repeatedly to return to the Subsystem Maintenance menu.
Commit Temporary Firmware Image To Permanent Firmware Image

When new firmware is loaded to the Service Processor, it is loaded as the temporary image. This
procedure provides the steps to commit the new temporary firmware image to permanent firmware image
storage.
Connect the Service Terminal to the controller (see “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102).
2. Select Subsystem Diagnostics > Task Selection > Microcode Tasks > Update and Manage
System Flash. The following display will be presented. Note that the temporary firmware image (new)
level will be higher than the current permanent firmware image (old) level.
“The current permanent system firmware image is SF240–151”

“The current temporary system firmware image is SF240–204”
“The system is currently booted from temporary firmware image”
3. Select Commit the Temporary Image.
4. Wait for approximately 8 minutes, as the temporary firmware image (new) is transferred to the
permanent firmware image.
5. The final message will be:
Commit of the Temporary Image successful

Note: The panel will still indicate that the system is booted from the Temporary image until Boot
selection is changed to the Permanent image via the Operator Panel or through ASMI, prior to
the next system boot.

Updating System Firmware from AIX Command Line by using
Locally-Available Image
To update the system firmware using a locally available image, perform the following steps:
1. Log in as root user.
2. If the/tmp/fwupdate directory does not exist, create it by issuing the following command:
mkdir /tmp/fwupdate
3. The firmware update file must be downloaded or copied into the /tmp/fwupdate directory on the
system. This can be done by using the ftp command to get the image from an ftp server or
NFS-mounting the directory on the host system.
The firmware updated file can also be transferred to the target system by backing up the image onto
CD from another server and restoring it into the /tmp/fwupdate directory.
After the firmware update file has been downloaded or copied into the /tmp/fwupdate directory, verify
its existence by entering the following command:
ls /tmp/fwupdate/3F*.img
The update file will have the format 3Fyymmdd.img. The 3F indicates that this is an update image for
your system: yy is the year, mm is the month, and dd is the day of the update file.
4. If the system is running AIX: After the firmware update file has been written to the /tmp/fwupdate
directory, enter the following commands:
cd /usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin
./update_flash -f /tmp/fwupdate/3Fyymmdd.img
Attention: Do not overlook the periods (.) in the commands shown above. AIX commands are
case-sensitive. Type them exactly as shown.
The firmware update is complete.
You will be asked for confirmation to proceed with the firmware update and the required reboot. If you
confirm, the system will apply the new firmware, reboot, and return to the AIX prompt. This may take up to
thirty minutes depending on the configuration of the system.
Attention: On some systems, the message Wait for rebooting before stopping may display on the
system console. Do not turn off the system until the system has fully rebooted to the AIX login prompt. If a
shutdown is necessary at that time, log in as root user and issue the shutdown command.
While the update is in progress, you will see Rebooting... on the display for several minutes.
The firmware update is complete.
Copying 3592 Tape Drive microcode from CD

The following procedure allows you to copy 3592 Tape Drive microcode for the tape drives from a CD to
the hard disk in the 3592 C06 controller.
Note: There will be one or more CDs (code level dependent) provided when drive microcode is ordered or
shipped. Each image must be copied to the controller hard drive to ensure that all levels of required
drive code are available for the configuration of drives installed in the subsystem.
To copy microcode from CD:

2. From the Subsystem Maintenance screen, select Microcode Maintenance > Copy Code Image
From Source Media > Copy Tape Drive Code from Source Media.

3. At Figure 4-129 screen, press F4.
Copy Subsystem Code from Source Media

[Entry Fields]
* A maximum of six Tape Drive code images may be +
stored on the Control Unit fixed disk. Six
images are already stored. Press F4 to select
stored image you wish to delete. After making
selection press enter. The selected image will
be deleted before the copy from source media starts.

Figure 4-129. Copy Subsystem Code from Source Media — Starting Point
4. At Figure 4-130, select the drive, and follow the on-screen instructions.
Copy Subsystem Code from Source Media
A maximum of six Tape Drive code images may be

* +
[TOP]
# ATTENTION: Some tape drives may be listed
# under multiple code levels.
#3592 D0I9 and D0IA code images

#Drives using this level image:
# D0IA_56A.fmrz
#3592 D0IB code images:

[MORE...15]

F8=Image F10=Exit Enter=Do
/=Find n=Find Next
Figure 4-130. Copy Subsystem Code from Source Media — Select Drive
5. At the Figure 4-131 on page 4-155 screen, follow the on-screen instructions.

Copy 3592 Subsystem Code from Source Media

[Entry Fields]
* A maximum of six Tape Drive code images may be D0IA_56A.fmrz +
images are already stored. Press F4 to select
stored image you wish to delete. After making
selection press enter. The selected image will
be deleted before the copy from source media start
s.

Figure 4-131. Copy 3592 Subsystem Code from Source Media — Enter Code Level
6. From the Figure 4-132 screen, mount the media source in either of the 3592 C06 controller CD or
DVD-ROM drives, and follow the on-screen instructions.
Please select the media source to copy the drive code from
< c > -- CDROM
< d > -- Diskette
< x > -- Exit Copy Code Routines
Enter < c >, < d >, or < x > and press ENTER :
Figure 4-132. Copy Tape Drive Code from Source Media — Begin Copying
7. After the microcode is loaded in the 3592 C06 controller, use “3592 Tape Drive Microcode Activation”
on page 4-156 to activate the microcode loaded in the individual tape drives.

3592 Tape Drive Microcode Activation
The following procedure requires the tape image be stored on the 3592 C06 controller hard disk. If the
image is not stored in the 3592 C06 controller, add the code image to the hard drive; that is, copy it from
source media.
The minimum 3592 Tape Drive microcode level for code images is:
v D3I0 is the minimum level for 3592 J1As.
v D3I1 is the minimum level for 3592 E05 Tape Drives.
1. To bring up EBTERM, go to “Using EBTERM in a 3953 or 3494 Tape Library” on page 4-43.
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance Screen, select Microcode Maintenance > Activate Code Image
> Activate Tape Drive Code.
Attention: The only line item displayed will be the SMIT line item. Ignore the other items.
Activate Code Image
Activate 3590 Subsystem Code Image

Display 3590 Subsystem Code Image ’Whats new’ Change History File
Drive Code Activate
IMPORTANT...The Control Unit must be ONLINE

before proceeding. Verify that the customer is NOT
using the Tape Drive(s) you are planning on
loading new code on as this procedure will take
the Drive OFFLINE.
Press ENTER to continue with Tape Drive

code activate or F3 to return

/=Find n=Find Next
Figure 4-133. Activate Code Image Choice Screen
3. From the Figure 4-134 on page 4-157, scroll down to the drive microcode level for your drive model.
In this example, we are loading 3592 E05 Tape Drive microcode (D3I1_6E1.fmrz) to two drives
(rmt0altA; rmt1altA). Select D3I1_6E1.fmrz. Press Enter.

Activate Code Image
Select Tape Drive Code Level to Activate
[TOP]
# ATTENTION: Some tape drives may be listed
# under multiple code levels.
#Level D3I0 Drive code images

#No drives supported by this level image:
D3I0_825.fmrz
#Level D3I1 Drive code images

#rmt0altA rmt1altA
D3I1_6E1.fmrz

/=Find n=Find Next
Figure 4-134. Activate Code Image Screen
4. Select * Press F4 to Select Tape Drive(s) to receive code from the Figure 4-135. Press F4.

[Entry Fields]
* Tape Drive Code Level Selected D3I1_6E1.fmrz
* Press F4 to Select Tape Drive(s) +
to Receive Code.

Figure 4-135. Activate Tape Drive Code Screen
5. Figure 4-136 on page 4-158 is shown. Only drives that can receive the code selected are
displayed. For this example, rmt0altA and or rmt1altA, that is rmt0 and or rmt1 are being activated.


[Entry Fields]
* Press F4 to Select Tape Drive(s) +
to Receive Code.
Press F4 to Select Tape Drive(s)

to Receive Code.
Move cursor to desired item and press F7.
ONE OR MORE items can be selected.
Press Enter AFTER making all selections.
rmt0altA
rmt1altA
#

F7=Select F8=Image F10=Exit
Enter=Do /=Find n=Find Next
Figure 4-136. Activate Tape Drive Code Screen
Attention: There must be at least two tape drives online at all times on an operational 3592 C06
controller.
The next screen shows which drives are available to receive microcode from the 3592 C06 controller.
6. Press F7 to select the drives which you want to receive microcode. Press Enter.

[Entry Fields]
* Press F4 to Select Tape Drive(s) rmt0altA rmt1altA +
to Receive Code.

Figure 4-137. Activate Tape Drive Code
7. Press Enter to activate the microcode load.

8. If Activate ran error free, press F3 to return to the main service menu.
Note: All Drives on the 3592 C06 controller should be checked to ensure the latest level of microcode
is installed on each drive.
Turn OFF the System Attention LED

The system attention (amber) LED on the control (operator) panel of the 3592 C06 controller is turned on
when an entry is made in the AIX error log. After action to fix the logged problem and no further
intervention is required, use this procedure to turn OFF the system attention LED.

2. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Subsystem Diagnostics > Enter > Task Selection
> Identify and Attention Indicators > Set System Attention Indicator to Normal.
3. Press Enter, and press F7 to commit. This action turns off the LED.
4. Press F3 repeatedly to exit to the main service menu.
Updating System Firmware From AIX Service Aids

Note: This service aid is supported only in online diagnostics.
Detailed instructions and the latest image are available on CORE or from the web. Download the image to
CD-ROM, then see “Firmware Update via AIX” on page 4-56.
Note: This update can take from 20 to 60 minutes. The system always reboots itself during this type of
firmware update.
Updating System Firmware From AIX Command Line

Refer to detailed instructions that are provided on the Web site with the latest image, or refer to “System
Firmware Updates” on page 4-151.
Note: The update process can take as long as 60 minutes. The system reboots itself during the update
process.

Accessing Information Center through Internet
Provides directions to access the information center from a web browser.
You can access the information center through the internet or from your Service Terminal. The choice
depends on which resources are available at the time.
Attention:
v Do NOT use the information center to download AIX microcode for the controller.
v The level of information center shipped with this machine has been tested with the existing 3592 C06
controller level of hardware and software. Do NOT update this microcode unless you receive an EC to
do so. If you suspect there is newer information on the internet, call your next level of support to verify.
Note:
v DO use the remove/replace procedures in the 3592 C06 controller Maintenance Information
when they are listed.
v DO use 9131-52A or model 520 when asked what server type for problem determination.
1. Open your web browser, and enter the following URL; http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/eserver/
v1r3s/index.jsp
2. Select IBM Systems Hardware Information Center.
3. Select the + to the left of Service provider information.
4. Select Start of call procedure.
Note: There is no HMC associated with a 3592 C06 controller. The controller has a control panel.
5. You have an SRN or a Reference code. This is the most common entry point for an eight-digit SRN or
reference code. If you have a code other than eight digits, continue through the procedure. If it is an
eight-digit code, click on the link Reference codes to continue problem determination.
This ends the procedure.

Accessing Information Center Through Service Terminal
Directions to access the information center from a laptop PC.
Once the information center is installed, you can access it through either the internet or from your Service
Terminal. Your choice depends on which resources are available at the time.
Attention:
v Do NOT use the information center to download AIX microcode for the controller.
v The level of information center shipped with this machine has been tested with the existing 3592 C06
controller level of hardware and software. Do NOT update this microcode unless you receive an EC to
do so. If you suspect there is newer information on the internet, call your next level of support to verify.
Note:
v DO use the remove/replace procedures in the 3592 C06 controller Maintenance Information
when they are listed.
v DO use 9131-52A or model 520 when asked what server type for problem determination.
1. If the information center is not already installed on your Service Terminal, go to “Install Information
Center on Service Terminal (PC, Laptop)” on page 4-57, and return when complete.
2. From the desktop of the Service Terminal, select Start > IBM Systems Hardware Information Center
> Left click.
3. The program opens in your web browser. The operation from here on is the same as web browsing.
4. Select IBM Systems Hardware Information Center.
5. Select the + to the left of Service provider information.
6. Select Start of call procedure.
Note: There is no HMC associated with a 3592 C06 controller. The controller has a control panel.
7. You have an SRN or Reference code. This is the most common entry point for an eight-digit SRN or a
reference code. If you have a code other than eight digits, continue through the procedure. If it is an
eight-digit code, click on the link Reference codes to continue problem determination.
This ends the procedure.

Vary On or Off 3592 C06 controller
Use this procedure with the Service Terminal to vary on or off the 3592 C06 controller.
2. From the main service menu, select Control Unit and Tape Drive Online Offline Control > Vary
Control Unit Offline or Vary Control Unit Online.
Varying On or Off 3592 Tape Drives from 3592 C06 controller

Use this procedure with the Service Terminal to vary 3592 Tape Drives Online or Offline.
2. From the main service menu, select Control Unit and Tape Drive Online Offline Control > Display
Control Unit > ESCON/FICON > Tape Device Status > Vary Tape Drive Online or Vary Tape Drive
Offline.
3. Select the desired drive from the pop-up list of available drives, and press Enter. Check the command
status for proper completion of the command.

View SIMs In Tape CU SIM Log in 3592 C06 controller
The 3592 C06 controller records the data for all SIMs or Tape Drive SIMs sent to the host. The data is
used in problem analysis and resolution and as a base for subsequent SIMs when a problem has not been
resolved. It is important to close out SIMs at the conclusion of a maintenance call to avoid having
erroneous SIM messages represented to the host.
View SIMs in 3592 C06 controller SIM Log

page 4-102.
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance screen, select Service Information Message (SIM)
Maintenance.
3. Select the appropriate action and press ENTER.
a. If you suspect that the source of the problem is the 3592 C06 controller, select Show List/Detail of
an OPEN Control Unit SIM.
b. If you suspect that the source of the problem is a device, select Show List/Detail of an OPEN
Tape Drive SIM.
c. If you do not know the source of the problem, select Show List/Detail of any OPEN SIMs.
4. If you know the ID of the SIM you want to view, enter it in the entry field and press ENTER to view
detailed data for that SIM. Otherwise, press F4 to display a summary list of all the SIM's that meet the
criteria specified in step 3.
5. To view the detailed data or an individual SIM entry from the summary list, select the entry and press
ENTER twice.
6. Press F4 to return to the previous panel.
7. Press F3 repeatedly to return to each prior panel.
Close SIMs in 3592 C06 controller SIM Log

page 4-102.
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance screen, select Service Information Message (SIM)
Maintenance.
3. Select the appropriate action and press ENTER.
a. If you want to close a 3592 C06 controller SIM, select Change an OPEN Control Unit SIM to
CLOSED.
b. If you want to close a Device SIM, select Change an OPEN Tape Drive SIM to CLOSED.
c. If you want to close ALL OPEN SIMs, select Change ALL OPEN SIMs to CLOSED.
4. If you are closing an individual SIM, enter in the entry field the SIM ID of the SIM you want to close,
and press ENTER. If you do not know the SIM ID, press F4 to display a list of entries. Select the entry
that you want to close, and press ENTER twice.
5. Press F3 repeatedly to return to each prior panel.

Chapter 5. Removal and Replacement
This chapter has directions for replacing Field Replaceable Units (FRUs).
Note: Before performing any of the removal or replacement procedures in this chapter, read the following
danger and caution notices.
In the 3592 C06 controller you are about to install or service:

v The AC power interface connector, which is considered the main power disconnect device.
v A product with redundant power supply capabilities, meaning that it has the ability to have two power
supplies running simultaneously in the same 3592 C06 controller. When instructed to disconnect the
power source, ensure that all power cables have been unplugged.
DANGER
An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous voltage on metal parts of
the 3592 C06 controller or the devices that attach to the 3592 C06 controller. It is the
responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and grounded to
prevent an electrical shock.
Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power cables for the 3592 C06
controller unit and all attached devices are unplugged.
When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the 3592 C06 controller, ensure that
the power cables for those devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If
possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing 3592 C06 controller before you add a
device.
Use one hand, when possible, to connect or disconnect signal cables to prevent a possible
shock from touching two surfaces with different electrical potentials.
During an electrical storm, do not connect cables for display stations, printers, telephones, or
station protectors for communications lines. D05
CAUTION:
This product is equipped with a three-wire power cable and plug for the user's safety. Use this
power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock.
C01
CAUTION:
This unit has more than one power supply cord. To reduce the risk of electrical shock, disconnect
two power supply cords before servicing.
C21
Handling Static-Sensitive Devices

Attention: Electronic boards, CD drives, and disk drives are sensitive to static electricity discharge.
These devices are wrapped in antistatic bags to prevent this damage.
Take the following precautions:

v If you have an antistatic wrist strap available, use it while handling the device.

v Do not remove the device from the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the device in the 3592
C06 controller.
v With the device still in its antistatic bag, touch it to a metal frame of the 3592 C06 controller.
v Grasp cards and boards by the edges. Hold drives by the frame. Avoid touching the solder joints or
pins.
v If you need to lay the device down while it is out of the antistatic bag, lay it on the antistatic bag. Before
picking it up again, touch the antistatic bag and the metal frame of the 3592 C06 controller at the same
time.
v Handle the devices carefully to prevent permanent damage.
Place Controller in Service Position

This information provides directions to place the 3592 C06 controller into the service position.
Before doing any service actions within the 3592 C06 controller can be completed, you must place the
system into the service position. To place the system into the service position, do the following:
1. Open the frame door of the 3953 F05 base or expansion frame, the 3952 F05 Frame, or the Rack.
2. Remove the screws that hold the controller locking bracket in place.
3. Pull the system drawer out from the rack until the rails are fully extended. Safety latches on the slide
rails lock into place to prevent the controller from being extended too far. The Figure 5-1 shows a
system drawer in the service position.
c0600062
Figure 5-1. 3592 C06 controller Extended From Frame
Remove Top Cover

This information provides directions to remove the top cover to service the controller.
1. Go to “Place Controller in Service Position” if it is not already done, then return here.
2. See Figure 5-2 on page 5-3. Unscrew the two thumbscrews (not shown) from the top cover 1.

1
c0600051
Figure 5-2. Removing Controller Top Cover. Viewed From Front
3. Slide the top cover to the rear and off the retaining pins.
4. Pull back and lift up the rear of the cover about 30 degrees to remove it.
This is the end of this procedure.
Reinstall Top Cover

1. See Figure 5-3 on page 5-4. Position the service access cover over the controller 1. Slide the
service access cover until the slots begin to engage the cut outs.
2. Push down on the end of the service access cover with the thumbscrews, and slide the service access
cover until the locating pins engage the service access cover.
3. Tighten the two thumbscrews located on the front of the cover.
Service Access Cover – Replace

Use this information to reinstall the service access cover.
1. See Figure 5-3 on page 5-4. Position the service access cover over the controller 1.
2. Slide the service access cover until the slots begin to engage the cut outs.
3. Push down on the end of the service access cover with the thumbscrews, and slide the service access
cover until the locating pins engage the service access cover.
Chapter 5. Removal and Replacement 5-3

1
c0600051
Figure 5-3. Service Access Cover. Viewed From Controller Rear
4. Tighten the two thumbscrews located on the front of the cover.

5. Power on the controller. Go to “Power On 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-87. Return here when
complete.
6. Vary the controller online. Go to “Vary On or Off 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-162. Return here
when complete.
7. Return the controller to the operating position. Go to “Returning Controller To Operating Position.”
8. Close the frame door.
Returning Controller To Operating Position

This information provides directions to return the controller from the service position to the operating
position.
1. Press in on both spring-loaded release tabs, located on each rail. See the illustration in Figure 5-1 on
page 5-2 for the location of the release tabs.
2. Push the controller drawer straight back into the rack until both controller drawer release latches have
locked into position.
3. If you removed two thumbscrews from the bezel front, replace them now.

Battery
Directions to replace the battery.
CAUTION:
A lithium battery can cause fire, explosion, or severe burn. Do not recharge, disassemble, heat
above 100°C (212°F), solder directly to the cell, incinerate, or expose cell contents to water. Keep
away from children. Replace only with the part number specified for your 3592 C06 controller. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.
The battery connector is polarized; do not attempt to reverse polarity.
Dispose of the battery according to local regulations.
Battery removal
Detailed steps to remove the battery.
1. Refer to 5-5 to perform the following steps.
Figure 5-4. Service Processor Assembly with battery
1 Service Processor Card 3 Plastic mount

2 Battery
2. Power off the 3592 C06 controller as described in “Power Off 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-87.
3. On a 3592 C06 controller, open the frame door and put the 3592 C06 controller into the service
position as described in “Place Controller in Service Position” on page 5-2.
4. Remove the service access cover as described in “Service Access Cover – Replace” on page 5-3.
5. Before handling any card, board, or memory DIMM, be sure to use your electrostatic discharge strap to
minimize static-electric discharge. Refer to “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices” on page 5-1.
6. Remove the service processor card assembly as described in “Removing Service Processor” on page
5-43.
7. Locate the battery 2 on the service processor card assembly 1 using the supplied figure.
8. Use your fingernail to pry the battery out of its plastic mount 3. After the bottom of the battery has
cleared the top edge of the plastic mount, pull it up and away from the plastic mount.
Proceed to replacement procedure, if required.
Battery replacement
Detailed steps to replace the battery.
1. Refer to 5-6 to perform the following steps.

Figure 5-5. Service Processor Assembly with battery
1 Service Processor Card 3 Plastic mount

2 Battery
2. Replace the battery.

3. When installing the new battery, ensure that the battery polarity is correct. For this 3592 C06
controller, the positive (+) side of the battery should be facing up in its plastic mount.
4. Gently insert the new battery into its plastic mount.
5. Replace the service processor assembly in the 3592 C06 controller as described in “Replacing
Service Processor” on page 5-44.
6. Replace the service access cover, as described in “Service Access Cover – Replace” on page 5-3.
7. If you are servicing a 3592 C06 controllerr, push the 3592 C06 controller drawer back into the
operating position as described in “Returning Controller To Operating Position” on page 5-4.
8. Power on the 3592 C06 controller. See “Power On 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-87. The 3592 C06
controller may stop and restart in order to reboot.
| 9. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Run Control Unit Checkout. The first line of
| output will verify time and date in the default state, indicating the need to set the correct time and
| date.
| 10. When faulty date and time are detected, perform the steps in the procedure “Setting Correct Time On
| Controller” on page 4-107. This is the end of the procedure.

Control Panel
Control panel removal

To remove the control panel, do the following:
2. Disconnect the power sources from the 3592 C06 controller.
Note: The 3592 C06 controller is equipped with a second power supply. Before continuing with this
procedure, ensure that both power sources to the 3592 C06 controller have been completely
disconnected.
3. Place the 3592 C06 controller into the service position as described in “Place Controller in Service
Position” on page 5-2.
4. Remove the front cover of the 3592 C06 controller by pressing in on the blue locking tabs on both
sides of the front cover, and moving the top of the cover forward and up.
5. Locate the control panel, refer to Figure 5-6 1.
6. Remove the control panel by pressing the locking tabs located on both sides of the panel, grasping the
edges of the panel, and pulling it out of its bay.
7. Disconnect the control panel cable from the back of the control (operator) panel.
c0600064
1 2
Figure 5-6. Control panel
1 Control panel 2 Control panel cable

Control (Operator) Panel Replacement
To replace the control panel, do the following:
1. Connect the control panel cable to the connector on the rear of the control panel.
2. Carefully slide the control panel back into the control panel bay until you feel the locking tabs lock in
place.
3. Reconnect all 3592 C06 controller power cables.
4. Close the Control access cover as described in “Reinstall Top Cover” on page 5-3.
5. Remove the sticker that has the serial number recorded on it from the old Control (operator) Panel
and transfer it to the new panel.
6. Reinstall the front cover of the 3592 C06 controller by fitting the bottom of the cover over the two
vertical metal tabs and rotating forward to snap the cover back into place.
7. Power on the 3592 C06 controller as described in “Power On 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-87.
Vital Product Data (VPD) module replacement

Replace the VPD module.
If you replaced the VPD module with a new FRU, perform the following procedure to ensure that the VPD
is correct.
1. Power down the C06 controller to standby. See “Power Off 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-87.
2. When in standby mode (green LED on control panel blinks), remove power by disconnecting both
power cords from the control unit.
4. Open the service access cover as described in “Remove Top Cover” on page 5-2.
5. Locate the VPD module 1 (location P1–C20 on sysplanar board) in figure.

1
c0600065
Figure 5-7. VPD module on sysplanar board
6. Remove the old VPD module and insert its replacement. Be sure the new module is seated properly.
7. Be sure not to cause any damage to the VPD module when you put the fan tray back into position.
8. Close the Service Access Cover. Refer to “Reinstall Top Cover” on page 5-3.
9. Plug in the two line cords which were disconnected in a previous step.
10. Connect the Service Terminal to the 3592 C06 controller refer to “Connecting the Service Terminal”
on page 4-102. Press Enter to receive the welcome screen.
11. Login with userid and password (admin, admin).
12. Press Enter twice more to arrive at the FSP main menu. On the second line on top of the screen you
will see the current level of the FSP firmware displayed behind “Version:“ e.g. SF240–204.
13. From the FSP main menu, enter (4) System Configuration > (12) Program Vital Product Data >
(1) System Brand.
14. If “Current Value” already displays a value of “P0”, press Enter. Otherwise, type “P0” and press
Enter. Follow the prompts to continue and you will return to the Program Vital Product Data menu.
15. From the Program Vital Product Date menu, enter (2) System Keywords > (1) Machine type–model
Data > (1) System Brand.

16. Type 3592–C06 and press Enter. You will be asked if you are sure. Follow the prompt to continue.
You will be returned to the System Keywords menu.
17. At the System Keywords menu, enter (2) System serial number. Type the controller serial number.
You will find the serial number on the label on top of the 3592 C06 controller enclosure. Type “78 _ _
_ _ _” and press Enter. You will be returned to the System Keywords menu.
18. At the System Keywords menu, enter (3) System Unique ID. Enter a new value (12 digits) from the
label on top of the 3592 C06 controller enclosure. You will be asked if you're sure. Follow the prompt
to continue. You will be returned to the System Keywords menu.
19. At the System Keywords menu, type 98 > 98 > 98 to return to the FSP main menu.
20. At the FSP main menu, enter (2) System Service Aids > (1) Error / Event Logs immediately to
ensure that no errors have been logged. If the log is clean, press Enter to return to the “System
Service Aids” menu; otherwise, you must first clean out the error log and then return to the “System
Service Aids” menu.
21. At the System Service Aids menu, enter(10) Reset Service Processor.
22. After reset of the FSP is complete, you will be asked to login to the FSP main menu again.
23. Login with userid and password (admin, admin).
24. At the FSP main menu, enter(1) Power / Restart Control > (1) Power On Off System and press
Enter.
25. At the Power On Off System menu, enter(8) Power On and press Enter. Then press Enter again to
continue. The system will start to boot up.
26. It will take approximately 8 minutes for the system to power up.
27. When power on is complete, return the 3592 C06 controller to the operating position. Refer to
“Returning Controller To Operating Position” on page 5-4.
28. Go to the “End-of-call” on page 4-55 procedure.

Disk Drive Backplane
Disk drive backplane removal and replacement
Use Figure 5-8 to perform this procedure.
c0600063
Figure 5-8. Disk Drive Backplane and Filler
1 Disk Drive Backplane Filler 2 Disk Drive Backplane
Note: Before handling any card, board, or memory DIMM, be sure to use your electrostatic discharge
strap to minimize static-electric discharge. See “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices” on page 5-1.
Disk Drive Backplane Removal

Note: Before handling any card, board, or memory DIMM, be sure to use your electrostatic discharge
strap to minimize static-electric discharge. See “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices” on page 5-1.
1. Power off the 3592 C06 controller, as described in “Power Off 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-87.
2. Disconnect the power sources from the controller.

disconnected.
3. Place the controller into the service position, as described in “Place Controller in Service Position” on
page 5-2.
4. Remove the fan tray assembly. as described in “Fan Tray Assembly Removal” on page 5-21.
Attention: Before handling any card, board, or DIMM, be sure to use your electrostatic discharge
strap to minimize static-electric discharge. Refer to “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices” on page 5-1.
5. Perform these actions for the PCI adapter:
a. Record the slot number and location of each PCI adapter removed.
b. Remove and label the PCI adapter cables.
c. Remove the PCI adapters as described in “PCI Adapter Card – Hot Swap” on page 5-35.
d. Remove the PCI adapter dividers.
6. Disconnect the disk drive by placing the handle on the disk drive into the open position (perpendicular
to the drive) and pulling the hot-swap disk drive forward, but not out of the bay. Pull any disk drive
fillers forward in the bay.
7. Squeeze the blue latch tabs on the top edge of the disk drive backplane 2 Figure 5-8 on page 5-11,,
and pull it upwards to free it from the connector. Tip the disk drive backplane away from the chassis
hooks on the wall of the chassis, and lift the backplane out of the 3592 C06 controller.
Disk Drive Backplane Replacement

Attention: Before handling any card, board, or memory DIMM, be sure to use your electrostatic
discharge strap to minimize static-electric discharge. See “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices” on page 5-1.
1. If necessary, remove the disk drive backplane from the antistatic package.
2. If necessary, remove the disk drive backplane filler 1 Figure 5-8 on page 5-11, from the slot.
3. Carefully grasp the disk drive backplane by the top edge.
4. Insert the disk drive backplane into the 3592 C06 controller chassis at an angle to the chassis hooks
and align the hooks with the blue guides on the disk drive backplane.
5. Tip the disk drive backplane forward onto the chassis hooks, then firmly press the disk drive
backplane into the connector until you feel the latch tabs lock into place.
6. Press the disk drives back into place and close the handle. Press any disk drive fillers back into
place.
7. Do the following:
a. Replace the PCI adapter dividers.
b. Replace the PCI adapters as described in “PCI Adapter Card – Hot Swap” on page 5-35.
c. Reconnect all adapter cables, located at the rear of the 3592 C06 controller.
8. Reconnect the power sources to the 3592 C06 controller.
9. Replace the service access cover as described in “Service Access Cover – Replace” on page 5-3.
10. Return the 3592 C06 controller to the operating position as described in “Returning Controller To
11. Power on the 3592 C06 controller as described in “Power On 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-87.

Disk Drive Bezels and Fillers
Each disk drive slot in the controller must contain either a disk drive or the appropriate filler panel. The
3592 C06 controller should have only two disk drives installed.
Removing a disk drive bezel from a disk drive or filler

Detailed steps to remove the bezels.
1. Refer to Figure 5-9 to perform the following steps.
j70m0058
1
Figure 5-9. Disk Drive Bezel and Disk Drive
1 Disk Drive Bezel 2 Disk Drive
2. Remove the filler panel from the disk drive slot or follow the procedures for removing a disk drive
described in “Disk Drives Hot Swap” on page 5-15.
3. Remove the disk drive bezel 1 from the front of the filler or disk drive.
4. Attach the disk drive bezel to the front edge of the filler panel or replacement disk drive 2.
5. Place the filler panel in the empty disk drive slot or follow the procedures for adding a disk drive as
described in “Disk Drives Hot Swap” on page 5-15.
Installing a disk drive bezel to a disk drive

Detailed steps to replace the bezel.
1. Refer to Figure 5-10 to perform the following steps.
j70m0057
1 2 3 4
Figure 5-10. Filler Panel, Upside Down with Bezel Attached

1 Filler Panel 3 Disk Drive Bezel Plug
2 Disk Drive Bezel with plug 4 Disk Drive Bezel
2. Remove the disk drive filler panel from the slot you wish to use by pressing the filler release tab
located at the top front edge of the filler panel and pulling the filler out of the 3592 C06 controller.
3. Remove the disk drive bezel plug 3 from the front of the filler panel.
4. Remove the disk drive bezel 4 from the front edge of the filler panel.
5. Attach the disk drive bezel to the front of the disk drive.
6. Follow the procedures for adding a disk drive as described in “Disk Drives Hot Swap” on page 5-15.

Disk Drives Hot Swap
Attention: If the part numbers do not match, the hot swap procedure could fail. If a like part number is
not available, call to your next level of support for assistance before you begin this procedure.
This procedure directs you to replace an internal disk drive (hdisk0 or hdisk1) concurrently with customer
operations in hot-swap mode by using the Service Terminal menus. You should know which of the two
mirrored internal disk drives is defective and have the replacement drive installed in its carrier.
Note: This is an example of a replacement of disk drive hdisk1. Replacement of disk drive hdisk0 follows
the same steps.
1. Connect the Service Terminal (see “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102), and go to.
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Subsystem Configuration > Show Control Unit
Hardware Data (VPD). Scroll down through the screen to find the hdisk0 and hdisk1 definitions.
3. Determine the physical location of the hdisk being replaced (for this example, hdisk1).
v If the display is;
hdisk0 U787F.001.DNZ0KVP–P1–T10–L5–L0 16 Bit LVD SCSI Disk Drive (73400 MB)
and further down
hdisk1 is physically located in the first disk drive slot to the right of the fan cage (as viewed from
the service position ) and hdisk0 is in the second disk drive slot to the right of the fan cage.
– – OR – –
v If the display is;
and further down
hdisk0 is physically located in the first disk drive slot to the right of the fan cage (as viewed from
the front of the service position) and hdisk1 is in the second disk drive slot to the right of the fan
cage.
Note: Refer to Figure 5-16 on page 5-18 and step 12 on page 5-17 for the physical locations of
the disk drives.
4. For this example, hdisk1 is physically located in the first disk drive slot to the right of the fan cage
(as viewed from the service position in the front of the frame) and hdisk0 is in the second disk drive
slot to the right of the fan cage.
5. Press F3 twice to return to the main service menu.
6. From the main service menu, select Removal/Replacement Menus > Remove/Replace hdisk, as
shown in Figure 5-11 on page 5-16.

Identify a PCI Hot Plug Slot

Remove/Replace Defective Tape Adapter Card (Concurrent)
Remove/Replace Defective Host Adapter Card (Concurrent)
Remove/Replace hdisk

Figure 5-11. Removal/Replacement Menus Screen
7. From the next screen, move the cursor to the “Select hdisk to Remove/Replace (F4 for lists)” prompt,
and press F4 to select the hdisk (hdisk0 or hdisk1) to be replaced, as shown in Figure 5-12.
Select Device

[Entry Fields]
* Select hdisk to Remove/Replace (F4 for list) +

Figure 5-12. Select hdisk Screen
8. A pop-up screen, Figure 5-13 is shown. On the pop-up screen, move the cursor to hdisk1 (internal
disk drive to be replaced, in this example) and press Enter. Press Enter again
Select Device

[Entry Fields]
* Select hdisk to Remove/Replace (F4 for list) +
x Select hdisk to Remove/Replace (F4 for list) x
x x
x x
x x
x hdisk0 x
x hdisk1 x
x x
F1=Hex F8=Image F10=Exit Enter=Do x
F5=Rex /=Find n=Find Next x
F9=Shmqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqj
Figure 5-13. Selecting Defective hdisk Pop-up Screen
9. Figure 5-14 on page 5-17 is shown, verify that the defective disk drive hdisk1 is the disk drive you
want removed. Type y, and press Enter.

COMMAND STATUS
Command: running stdout: yes stderr: no
WARNING -- Verify that >>> hdisk1 <<< is the disk you want to remove.
Enter [y] to contine or [n] to quit
Figure 5-14. Verification Screen to Continue Procedure
10. Figure 5-15 is shown, which shows the progress in un-mirroring and removing hdisk1 from AIX
volume groups and ODM. Wait for the bottom portion of the screen display to appear, indicating that
internal disk, hdisk1, is ready to be removed.
COMMAND STATUS
Command: running stdout: yes stderr: no
[MORE...10]
INFO: unmirror of hdisks complete
Removing hdisk1 from rootvg volume group.
Changing bootlist to use only good disk
Removing the bad disk definition.
hdisk1 deleted
Starting sync of rootvg.
synclvodm: Physical volume data updated.
synclvodm: Logical volume hd5 updated.
synclvodm: Logical volume hd8 updated. may take 5 to 15 minutes.
synclvodm: Logical volume hd9var updated.
Starting syLogical volume hd10opt updated.
Completed Remove of hdisk1

====================================================================
The hdisk1 is now ready to be removed. Follow the remove/replace
instructions in the Maintenance Information Manual (MI). Return here
after the replacement disk is installed.
Enter [c] after the replacement disk is installed and you are ready
to continue.
Figure 5-15. Status Screen for Replacement of hdisk1
11. Go to the procedure “Place Controller in Service Position” on page 5-2, then return here.
12. Verify which drive you want to remove. The handle of the disk drive must be perpendicular to the
drive (open position) before the drive can be pulled from its guide rails. Remove that drive.

3
j70m0062
2
1
Figure 5-16. Disk Drives and Fillers
L8 L5 L4 L3
1 hdisk0/1 2 hdisk0/1 3 filler 4 filler
13. Install the disk-drive bezel on the replacement drive, as described in “Removing a disk drive bezel
from a disk drive or filler” on page 5-13.
14. Ensure the handle on the front of the disk drive is open (perpendicular to the drive).
15. Align the drive assembly so that it engages the guide rails in the bay.
16. Push the drive assembly into the bay until the drive handle engages the lock mechanism.
17. Push the disk drive handle in until it locks. The LED on the disk drive will turn on.
18. Return to the Service Terminal, enter c, and press Enter. The next “Command Status” screen will
display progress in re-mirroring the new hdisk1 and integrating the drive into the AIX volume group.
See Figure 5-17 on page 5-19.

COMMAND STATUS
[MORE...37]
to continue.
====================================================================
Starting Restore of hdisk1
Starting remove of any residual defined disk.
Starting verify that have both hdisk0 & hdisk1
Running cfgmgr to find all hdisks.
Verify hdisk0 and hdisk1 are in available state
Adding hdisk1 back into rootvg
Changing quorum in volume group
Starting the mirror of rootvg (mirror hdisk0 and hdisk1)
INFO: The mirror process may take up to 30 minutes.
INFO: Mirror of rootvg (hdisks) complete
Creating a base operating system image
Updating bootlist to include both disks.
Completed Restore of hdisk1
====================================================================
Starting verify of hdisk0 and hdisk1 mirroring.
Verifying hdisk0 and hdisk1 are in available state.
Verifying hdisk0 and hdisk1 are both listed as rootvg physical disks.
Verifying all logical volumes in rootvg are synchronized
Checking that rootvg has a QUORUM of 1 and VG descriptor of 3
SUCCESS: hdisk0 and hdisk1 appear to be correctly mirrored.
[BOTTOM]

Figure 5-17. Verification Screen to continue procedure
19. Wait for final status to display. Successful replacement of hdisk1 will be indicated when the final
output line reads:“SUCCESS: hdisk0 and hdisk1 appear to be correctly mirrored”
20. Return the controller to the operating position. See “Returning Controller To Operating Position” on
page 5-4.
21. Go to “End-of-call” on page 4-55.

3592 Tape Drive replacement
Use this information to remove or replace a 3592 Tape Drive that is connected to the controller.
page 4-102.
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, Vary the drive offline from the 3592 C06 controller even if
the drive is totally unresponsive. Select Control Unit and Tape Drive Online Offline Control > Vary
Tape Drive Offline.
Ensure that you select the failing drive. You know the drive's designation (rmt0xxxx or rmt1xxxx, and
so forth) from the error record in the AIX error log.
Note: Do NOT select any other SMIT options on the 3592 C06 controller until you are ready to vary
the new drive online to the 3592 C06 controller.
3. If the 3592 Tape Drive that you are removing is in a 3584 Tape Library, refer to the Drive
removal/replacement procedure in the 3584 Tape Library MI. Then go to step 5 When replacing the
faulty 3592 Tape Drive with the FRU, ensure you replace the model with a like model.
– – OR – –
For other installations, refer to the FID 85 procedure in the 3592 Tape Drive MI for the library type you
are working on. When replacing the faulty 3592 Tape Drive with the FRU drive, ensure that you
replace the model with a like model.
Note: An 3592 E05 Tape Drive which was in static J1A emulation mode will appear in the error record
as a J1A. You must physically (visually) verify that you are installing a drive that is like the
failing drive you are replacing.
4. Use the 3592 Tape Drive service panel to make it a FRU replacement (same serial, WWNN, and so
forth). Also, ensure that the AL_PA, and the Topology and Speed are set correctly. (If necessary, set
them in the 3494 Tape Library environment and the standalone frame environment.) Refer to “Set
Customer Options” in the Installation chapter of the 3592 Tape Drive MI, if necessary.
5. Vary the new drive online. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select:Control Unit and Tape
Drive Online Offline Control > Vary Tape Drive Online.
6. Go to “End-of-call” on page 4-55 for final checkout verification.

Fan Tray Assembly
The two cooling fans rest in a fan tray. The fans can remain in the tray when you remove or replace the
tray.
Fan Tray Assembly Removal

1. Refer toFigure 5-18.
3
j70m0056
Figure 5-18. Fan Tray Assembly – Removal
1 Fans A2 and A3 3 Fans A4 and A5

2 Fan Tray Assembly
2. Power OFF the controller. See “Power Off 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-87.
3. Place the controller into the service position. See “Place Controller in Service Position” on page 5-2.
4. Disconnect the power sources from the controller. The controller is equipped with a second power
supply. Before continuing with this procedure, ensure that both power sources to the controller have
been completely disconnected.
5. Locate the fan tray.
6. Pull up on the two, blue, latch buttons which are located at either end of the fan tray until you feel
them unlock.
7. While holding the blue, plastic tab on the back of the disk drive backplane, lift the end of the fan tray
next to the tab up until it clears the tab.
8. Using the two, blue knobs at either end of the fan assembly, lift the fan tray straight up and out from
the controller.

Fan Tray Assembly Replacement
1. Refer to Figure 5-19.
3
j70m0056
Figure 5-19. Fan Tray Assembly – Replacement

2 Fan Tray Assembly
2. Ensure that the blue, latch buttons are in the unlocked position.
3. Lower the fan tray assembly into the controller with the LED light pipe cover plate toward the LED light
pipes. Press it down into place.
Note: Be careful not to damage the VPD module when the fan tray assembly is lowered into position.
4. Press the blue, latch buttons down until you feel them lock.
5. Replace the service access cover. See “Service Access Cover – Replace” on page 5-3.
6. Return the controller to the operating position. See “Returning Controller To Operating Position” on
page 5-4.

Fans Hot-Swap
Directions to replace the fans concurrent with customer operation.
The 3592 C06 controller supports hot-swap and redundant cooling. The electronics are cooled with four
cooling fans.
Note: Each fan unit has two LEDs on the top cover. The green LED indicates the fan is operating
properly. The amber LED indicates a fan failure.
Fan Removal
Use this information to remove one of the fans.
Hot swap is available when replacing either fan A2 or fan A3. Hot swap of the fan cage 3for fan A4 and
A5 must be accomplished within five minutes, otherwise the machine will overheat and power off. Ensure
that replacement parts are available prior to starting removal and replacement procedures.
Refer to Figure 5-20 to perform this procedure.
3
c0600047
Figure 5-20. Fans, Fan Tray Assembly, and Fan Cage

2 Fan Tray Assembly
1. Place the 3592 C06 controller into the service position, as described in “Place Controller in Service
2. Open the service access cover, as described in “Remove Top Cover” on page 5-2.
3. Locate the 3592 C06 controller fans. See Figure 5-20 on page 5-23. Fans A4 and A5 3 are located
next to the hard disk drives in the Fan Box Assembly.
4. Pull on the orange locking knob of the failing fan until you feel it unlock.
5. Press and hold the plastic tab attached to the fan tray away from the 3592 C06 controller fan.
6. Pull on the locking knob of the failing fan again until you feel the fan pull loose from its connector.
7. Lift out the failing fan unit.
8. If the fan failure is in the Fan Box Assembly 3, that is, Fan A4 or A5 failure, lift up the blue latch
handle on the outside of the Fan Box and pull out the complete fan cage unit for replacement. To
ready the Fan Box for removal, move the blue handle up to a horizontal position, and perpendicular
(90 degrees) to the Fan Box to enable you to pull the fan cage out of the subsystem enclosure.
9. Proceed to replacement procedure, if required.
Hot-Swap Fan Replacement

Detailed steps to replace the fans concurrent with customer operation.
Hot swap is available when replacing either fan A2 or fanA# 3. Hot swap for fan A4 and A5 must be
accomplished within five minutes, otherwise machine will overheat and power off. Ensure that
replacement parts are available prior to starting removal and replacement procedures.
Attention: It is important to verify that the part number of the replacement unit matches the unit being
removed. If the part numbers do not match, contact your next level of support before continuing.
1. Refer to the figure to perform the following steps.

1
c0600047
Figure 5-21. Fans, Fan Tray Assembly and Fan cage

2 Fan Tray Assembly
2. Pull up on the orange locking knob on the replacement fan to ensure that it is unlocked.
3. Align the fan with the slot in the fan tray assembly with the power plug over the connector.
4. Place the fan into the fan tray.
5. Press down on the fan to ensure that the power plug is connected.
Note: The fan starts to run when the power plug connects.
6. Press the locking knob down until you feel it lock.
7. Close the service access cover as described in “Reinstall Top Cover” on page 5-3.
8. If the Fan Box Assembly is to be replaced, be sure to have the power connectors aligned correctly in
the back of the fan cage (to allow for quick connection when the fan cage is pushed into the
subsystem enclosure).
9. Hold the blue handle perpendicular (90 degrees) to the fan cage as the fan cage is pushed into
position in the subsystem enclosure.
10. Press down on the blue handle to lock the fan cage into place.
11. Return the 3592 C06 controller to the operating position as described in “Returning Controller To

12. If a fan assembly is being replaced for a redundant failure, after the service repair action is
completed, the crontab file must be edited to delete any power or cooling warning messages. When
a power or cooling error is encountered, AIX adds an entry to the crontab file to “wall” a warning
message every 12 hours, to alert or remind the customer of the problem. Replacing the faulty part
does not clear this crontab entry, so unless the crontab file is edited to remove this entry, the
customer continues to be reminded of the failure despite its having been repaired. After the fan or
Fan Box Assembly is replaced, contact the Support Center for assistance in clearing the
crontab entry.

Fibre Channel switches
Procedures to replace or remove the various fibre switches connected to the 3592 C06 controller.
2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Concurrent Removal and

Replacement
Note: Ensure you have a null modem cable and a new 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch on hand before
you start this procedure.
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Removal/Replacement Menus >
Remove/Replace Defective Dual Fibre Switch.
3. The next screen shows you a warning. Please read it! To proceed with this procedure, press F4 to
select “yes”. Then press Enter twice.
4. You will be prompted in a display to select the Fibre Type Adapter (Fibre Channel Adapter) that is
attached to the failing switch to be removed or replaced.
Note: The Fibre Tape Adapter in slot 1 is connected to the 251 Fibre Switch in a 3953 F05 Tape
Frame, and Fibre Tape Adapter in slot 4 is connected to the 250 Fibre Switch in a 3953 F05
Tape Frame.
Press F4 to select the adapter. Press Enter twice.
5. Remove the retaining screw that secures the switch shelf to the frame, and pull out the shelf to the
service position.
6. The display will show progress in removing all AIX definitions associated with the selected fibre tape
adapter.
Directions for removal and replacement of the failing switch are also shown. Ensure all fibre cables
are properly labeled for recabling.
7. Remove the three screws on each side of the switch which attach the switch to the shelf in the 3494
Tape Library frame. Remove the switch from the mounting shelf, and replace it with the new switch.
In the 3953 Tape System frame, two brackets are fastened to the sides of the switch for attachment
of the switch to the frame.
8. Remove the SFPs from the defective switch, and transfer them to the same positions on the
replacement switch. See “Replacing SFPs” on page 5-46.
9. Follow directions in the display to remove and replace the switch.
10. Press Enter after the switch has been replaced and correctly cabled, including the ethernet cable.
11. Push the dual switches back to their normal position. Secure the switch shelf to the frame with the
retaining screw.
12. You are asked to connect the special null modem serial cable between Serial Port 2 (13 in
Figure 2-6 on page 2-15) of the 3592 C06 controller and the serial port on the left side of the
replaced (new) 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch.
13. Type d, and press Enter to set the IP address on the new switch.
14. A message will indicate when the IP address setup of the replaced 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
is complete. Remove the null modem serial cable from the switch and Serial Port 2 of the 3592 C06
controller. Press Enter.
15. After the replaced switch is pinged and reset, you are notified that Switch IP setup is complete. Press
Enter.
16. You are notified that fibre switch swap and configuration is complete. Press Enter to restore the tape
devices.
17. You are notified that AIX definitions associated with the fibre tape adapter card and all AIX tape
devices assigned to the adapter are being restored.

When the drive paths are reenabled (restored), the final message should be: “Adapter Hot-Swap
Completed Successfully.” Green LED activity on the replaced switch should be visible now.
18. Press Enter to return to menus, then press F3 repeatedly to return farther.
19. After the problem has been resolved, select the following steps sequentially to re-enable the failed
path. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Control Unit Service Utilities > SCSI/FCP
Utilities Menu > Reset Fibre Paths From FCP Switch Following Switch/Path Repair Actions.
The final step (SSR option) will attempt to re-enable the failed paths. If all is successful, the menu will
20. To verify successful switch replacement, from the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Run
Control Unit Checkout
Removing the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch

Attention: Before disconnecting fibre cables, ensure they are labeled on both ends with their source port
and destination port. Retain all parts from the removal procedure to reinstall the new switch.
1. Verify the failing paths from the switch being replaced are offline. Refer to “Varying On or Off 3592
Tape Drives from 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-162.
Note: This only applies to the non-Dual (Single) Fibre Switch configuration. In a Dual Switch
installation, the drives remain varied ON to the (alternate) functioning switch.
2. Remove the retaining screw that secures the switch shelf to the frame and pull it out to the service
position.
3. Disconnect the fibre cables from the switch.
4. Disconnect the ethernet cable from the switch.
5. Disconnect and remove power cables from the switch
6. Remove the switch from the mounting shelf. There are three screws on each side of the switch
attaching it to the shelf.
7. Remove the switch from the mounting shelf.
8. Remove the SFPs from the defective switch and transfer them to the same positions on the
replacement switch. Refer to “Replacing SFPs” on page 5-46.
Replacing the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch

1. Insert the replacement switch with the SFPs installed into the same position from where the defective
switch was removed.
2. Using the six screws which you previously removed, attach the new switch to the mounting shelf.
3. Connect the power cables to the switch.
4. Connect the ethernet cable to the switch.
5. Connect the fibre cables from the drives and the controller to the switch.
6. Push the mounting shelf back to its retracted position and secure it to the frame with the screw you
previously removed.
7. If this is a non-Dual (Single) Fibre Switch installation, go to “Running Fibre Switch setup” on page
4-93 to configure this single Fibre switch, Then go to “Run SCSI / Fibre Channel Configuration” on
page 4-100.
8. From the Subsystem Maintenance Menu, select Control Unit Service Utilities > SCSI/FCP
Utilities Menu > Run SCSI/FCP Configurator.
9. Press F3 to return to the SCSI/FCP Utilities Menu, then select Enable SCSI/FCP Path (for all
paths).
10. Vary the paths online from the 3592 Tape Drives and the 3592 C06 controller. Refer to “Varying On or
Off 3592 Tape Drives from 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-162.

4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Concurrent Removal and
Replacement
Note: Ensure that you have available a new 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch before you start this
procedure.
Remove/Replace Defective Dual Fibre Switch.
3. The next screen shows you a warning. Please read it! To proceed with this procedure, press F4 to
select “yes”. Then press Enter twice.
4. You are prompted on the display to select the fibre type adapter (fibre channel adapter) that is
attached to the failing switch to be removed or replaced.
Note: The fibre tape adapter in slot 1 is connected to the Primary fibre switch, and fibre tape adapter
in slot 4 is connected to the Alternate fibre switch. The Alternate fibre switch is physically
located above the Primary fibre switch.
Press F4 to select the adapter. Press Entertwice.
5. Remove the retaining screw that secures the switch shelf to the frame, and pull it out to the service
position.
6. The display will show progress in removing all AIX definitions associated with the selected fibre tape
adapter.
Directions for removal and replacement of the failing switch are also displayed. Ensure that all fibre
cables are properly labeled for recabling.
7. Three screws on each side of the switch attach it to the shelf in the 3494 Tape Library frame. In the
3953 Tape System frame, two brackets are fastened to the sides of the switch for attachment of the
switch to the frame. Remove the switch from the mounting shelf, and replace it with the new switch.
9. Follow directions in the display to remove and replace the switch.
10. Press Enter after the switch has been replaced and correctly cabled.
11. Push the dual switches back to their normal position. Secure the switch shelf to the frame with the
retaining screw.
12. A message displays that indicates that the new 4Gb fibre switch is recognized.
13. After the replaced switch is reset, you will be notified that switch setup is completed. Press Enter to
continue.
14. You will be notified that fibre switch swap and configuration is complete. Press Enter to restore the
tape devices.
15. You will be notified that AIX definitions associated with the fibre tape adapter card and all AIX tape
devices assigned to the adapter are being restored.
The drive paths are re-enabled (restored). The final message should be “Adapter Hot-Swap
Completed Successfully”. Green LED activity on the replaced switch should be visible now.
16. Press Enter to return to the menus, and press F3 repeatedly to return further.
17. After the problem has been resolved, sequentially select the following steps to re-enable the failed
path. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Control Unit Service Utilities > SCSI/FCP
Utilities Menu > Reset Fibre Paths From FCP Switch Following Switch/Path Repair Actions.
The final step (SSR option) will attempt to re-enable the failed paths. If all is successful, the menu will
18. To verify successful switch replacement, from the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Run
Control Unit Checkout
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Removal
Attention: Before disconnecting fibre cables, ensure that they are labeled on both ends with their source
port and destination port. Retain all parts from the removal procedure to reinstall the new switch.
1. Verify the failing paths from the switch being replaced are offline. See “Varying On or Off 3592 Tape
Drives from 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-162.
Note: This only applies to the non-Dual (single) fibre switch configuration. In a dual switch
installation, the drives remain varied ON to the (alternate) functioning switch.
2. Remove the retaining screw that secures the switch shelf to the frame and pull it out to the service
position.
3. Disconnect the fibre cables from the switch.
4. Disconnect and remove power cables from the switch.
5. Remove the switch from the mounting shelf. There are three screws on each side of the switch which
attach it to the shelf.
6. Remove the switch from the mounting shelf.
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Replacement

1. Insert the replacement switch with the SFPs installed into the same position from which you removed
the defective switch.
2. Using the six screws that you previously removed, attach the new switch to the mounting shelf.
3. Connect the power cables to the switch.
4. Connect the fibre cables from the drives and the controller to the switch.
5. Push the mounting shelf back to its retracted position, and secure it to the frame, using the screw you
previously removed.
6. If this is a non-dual (single) fibre switch installation, go to “Running Fibre Switch setup” on page 4-93
to configure this single fibre switch, then go to “Run SCSI / Fibre Channel Configuration” on page
4-100.
7. From the Subsystem Maintenance Menu, select Control Unit Service Utilities > SCSI/FCP Utilities
Menu > Run SCSI/FCP Configuration.
8. Press F3 to return to the SCSI/FCP Utilities Menu, then select Enable SCSI/FCP Path (for all paths).
9. Vary the paths online from the 3592 Tape Drives and the 3592 C06 controller. See“Varying On or Off
3592 Tape Drives from 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-162.

Memory DIMM Locations
Use this information to locate, remove, or replace the memory DIMMs.
The four or eight memory DIMMs used in the 3592 C06 controller are located on the system backplane.
An LED for each memory DIMM slot is located on the edge of the backplane. A lighted LED indicates a
problem with a specific memory DIMM. Review the following notes before you remove or install memory
DIMMs,
Notes:
v Memory DIMMs must be reside in quads. A quad is a group of four memory DIMMs.
v You do not need to install four new DIMMs in a quad when you are working to resolve a
memory problem. Exchange each DIMM, restarting the 3592 C06 controller after each change,
until the faulty DIMM has been replaced.
v Memory DIMMs must be installed in the correct slots. Quads are populated in DIMM slots 1, 3,
6, 8 first, and then 2, 4, 5, 7. These are the only two valid slot combinations that you can use.
v At least four (one quad) of DIMMs must reside in the 3592 C06 controller backplane. See
“Memory DIMM Removal.”
v Each memory DIMM in a quad must be the same type and size. However, both quads on the
3592 C06 controller backplane are not required to be the same.
Number Description Location Code

M1 Memory slot 1 (J0A) Un–P1–C9
M2 Memory slot 2 (J0B) Un–P1–C10
M3 Memory slot 3 (J0C) Un–P1–C11
M4 Memory slot 4 (J0D) Un–P1–C12
M5 Memory slot 5 (J2D) Un–P1–C13
M6 Memory slot 6 (J2C) Un–P1–C14
M7 Memory slot 7 (J2B) Un–P1–C15
M8 Memory slot 8 (J2A) Un–P1–C16
Memory DIMM Removal

Use this information to remove the memory DIMMs.
1. Refer to Figure 5-22.
Figure 5-22. Memory DIMM
1 Tabs 2 Memory DIMM

2. Use the procedures in “FRU Identify LEDs” on page 8-3, to locate the memory DIMMs, and determine
which DIMM you want to remove.
Attention: To prevent damage to the memory DIMM and the memory DIMM connectors, open or
close the retention latches at the same time.
3. Shut down the 3592 C06 controller as described in “Power Off 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-87.
disconnected.
6. Remove the service access cover as described in “Service Access Cover – Replace” on page 5-3.
7. Remove the fan tray assembly as described in “Fan Tray Assembly Removal” on page 5-21.
8. If necessary to access DIMM positions on the 3592 C06 controller backplane, remove the power
supply filler and the power supply as described in “Installing a power supply with the system power
on” on page 5-39.
9. If necessary to access DIMMs on the 3592 C06 controller backplane, remove the service processor
assembly as described in “Removing Service Processor” on page 5-43.
10. Before handling any card, board, or memory DIMM, touch any metal surface of the chassis with one
hand to minimize static electricity discharge. Refer to “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices” on page
5-1.
11. Refer to Figure 5-22 on page 5-31 to complete the following. Remove the memory DIMM by pushing
the tabs 1 out and then down. The tabs camming action forces the memory DIMM 2 out of the
connector.
12. Pull the memory DIMM out of the connector, refer to Figure 5-22 on page 5-31.
13. Proceed to “Memory DIMM Replacement,” if required.
Memory DIMM Replacement

Use this information to replace the memory DIMMs.
Refer to Figure 5-23 to perform these steps.

hand to minimize static electricity discharge. Refer to “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices” on page
5-1.
Figure 5-23. Locking Tabs Open and Closed
1 Locking Tabs Open 2 Locking Tabs Closed
2. Remove the memory DIMM from its anti-static package.

3. Ensure the connector locking tabs are pushed out in the unlocked position before installing a new
memory DIMM.
Note:
v Memory DIMMs must be installed in quads (groups of 4) and in the correct slots 1, 3, 6, and
8 first, then in slots 2, 4, 5, and 7. These are the only two valid slot combinations that you
can use.
v Memory DIMMs are keyed to prevent a DIMM from being installed improperly. Note the
locations of the key tabs within the DIMMS connector before attempting to install the DIMM.
4. Carefully grasp the memory DIMM along two edges, and align the connector.
5. Insert the memory card firmly into the connector.
6. Secure the memory DIMM with the locking tabs located at each end of the DIMM connector. Refer to
7. Replace the service processor assembly, as described in “Replacing Service Processor” on page
5-44.
8. Replace the power supplies, as described in “Installing a power supply with the system power on” on
page 5-39.
9. Replace the fan tray assembly, as described in “Fan Tray Assembly Replacement” on page 5-22.
10. Reconnect all power and signal cables to their respective connectors.

Power Distribution Unit (PDU) Replacement
If one of the PDU units (there may be as many as two installed) fails, refer to the IBM System Storage
Automated Tape Library (3494) Base 3494 Tape Library Maintenance Information for removal and
replacement procedures.
Note: If the customer wishes to have the FRU replaced during deferred maintenance, see the START
section of the IBM System Storage Automated Tape Library (3494) Base 3494 Tape Library
Maintenance Information to restore power to the library until the customer can relinquish the library
for maintenance.

PCI Adapter Card – Hot Swap
Use this procedure to replace an adapter card concurrent with customer operation.
Attention: It is important to verify the part number of the replacement unit matches the unit being
removed. If the part numbers do not match, contact your next level of support before continuing.
Note:
1. Some PCI adapter cards are shipped from the manufacturer with a blue handle or support along
the back edge of the card. To use in this 3592 C06 controller, you must remove the blue handle
or support from the card.
2. With this controller, you can install PCI adapters with the power on. These adapters are referred
to as hot-swappable PCI adapters.
3. If the PCI adaptor dividers are removed, note their location so that they can be returned to the
same place in the 3592 C06 controller.
4. If you are replacing a FICON host adapter card (FRU PNs 23R5614, 23R5615, or 23R5616)
you must perform the extra steps for FICON cards that are listed at the end of this procedure.
This procedure shows you how to replace the tape and host adapter cards in hot-swap mode using the
Service Terminal menus. You should know which adapter card is defective and have the replacement card
available. Refer to “3592 C06 Controller Plug Chart” on page 2-17.
Note: This is an example of a tape adapter card replacement. A host adapter card replacement will
follow the same steps.
Remove/Replace Defective Tape Adapter Card (Concurrent).
3. When the next screen is shown, you must read the complete screen. You must follow the directions
exactly. Return to the top of the screen with the cursor, and press F4 to allow the selection of yes, to
continue.
4. A pop-up menu appears under the heading WARNING...... Select yes, and press Enter. Press Enter
again after the change to yes has been made.
5. On the next screen, press F4 to select the tape adapter card that you are replacing.
6. A pop-up menu appears. Select Tape Adapter Card. On the pop-up menu, move the cursor to the
adapter card to be replaced, and press Enter.
7. The next screen shows the selected Tape Adapter Card in the entry field (I/O Slot Number 1 AIX
Dev). Press Enter with the entry field displaying the selected adapter card.
8. The next screen appears with a warning. Be sure to read and understand all 5 lines of NOTICE:.
An additional paragraph on the screen states the lighted amber LED in a PCI slot identifies the Tape
Adapter Card that is to be replaced.
9. The amber Identify LED indicator is ON in the PCI slot (PCI slot 1, in this example) to show that the
Tape Adapter Card is ready for replacement.
10. Place the 3592 C06 controller into the service position, as described in “Place Controller in Service
11. Open the service access cover, as described in “Remove Top Cover” on page 5-2.
12. Refer toFigure 5-24 on page 5-36. Turn the locking latch 2 and lift the plastic retainer seat 4 off
the adapter 7.

6
4
5
j70m0047
Figure 5-24. PCI Adapter Card and Retainer Mechanism
1 3592 C06 controller 5 PCI adapter faceplate (dotted lines)
2 Adapter Retainer Assembly 6 Adapter Retainer Assembly (in the unlocked
position)
3 Adapter Retainer Assembly (retainer seat 7 PCI Adapter
down and the retainer clip in the locked
position)
4 Adapter Retainer Assembly (retainer seat
down and the retainer clip in the unlocked
position)
13. Carefully grasp the adapter by the edges, and pull it straight out from the PCI riser card.
14. Remove the replacement adapter from the antistatic package.
Attention: Avoid touching the components and gold-edge connectors on the adapter.
15. Place the adapter, component-side up, on a flat, static-protective surface like the shipping bag.

16. To install the new adapter into the adapter slot, carefully grasp the adapter by the edges and align the
adapter in the slot guides. Fully insert the adapter into the adapter slot connector. If you are installing
a full-length adapter, ensure that both ends of the adapter engage the card guides.
17. See Figure 5-25 to perform this step. Lower the plastic retaining seat 3 over the PCI adapter
faceplate (dotted lines). Rotate the locking latch 4 clockwise until it clicks into the locked position.
Some full-length cards can be supported by rotating the blue adapter latch on the right end of the
adapter counterclockwise.
Figure 5-25. PCI Adapter Faceplate
2
5
j70m0046
1 3592 C06 Controller

2 Adapter Retainer Assembly (in the unlocked position)
3 Adapter Retainer Assembly (retainer seat down and the retainer clip in the unlocked position)
4 Adapter Retainer Assembly (retainer seat down and the retainer clip in the locked position)
5 PCI adapter faceplate (dotted lines)
18. Connect appropriate cables and devices to the adapter.

19. Press Enter to continue.
20. Follow the screen instructions until you receive a message that the replacement is successful.
Successful replacement is indicated by the OK message displayed next to the Command field at the
top of the screen. An additional paragraph on the screen will indicate that all tape device paths and
devices have been restored successfully and that the Adapter Hot-Swap Completed Successfully.
21. Press Enter to return to previous menu, and press F3 to return to the main menu.
22. If you have just performed a hot-swap of a FICON host adapter card, you must repeat this procedure,
but without actually replacing the new card. Continue with Step 23. If this is not a FICON card
replacement, skip to step 27 on page 5-38
Remove/Replace Defective Host Adapter Card (Concurrent).
24. Select yes.

25. Select the PCI slot of the FICON card which was replaced. Press Enter.
26. Do not replace the FICON card when you are prompted to do so, but press Enter. Wait to receive the
message that the replacement is successful.
27. Close the service access cover. See “Reinstall Top Cover” on page 5-3.
28. Return the 3592 C06 controller to the operating position. See “Returning Controller To Operating

Power Supply
This 3592 C06 controller has two power supplies. The system power can remain on when one of the two
power supplies in the system is replaced. If you are replacing a power supply, go to “Installing a power
supply with the system power on.”
Before performing any of the following procedures, read and understand all of the safety notices.
Power Supply LEDs

The power supply has three LEDs; two green LEDs (ac power good and dc power good), and one amber
LED, which indicate the power supply status. If both of the green LEDs are on solid (not blinking) and the
amber LED is off, then the power supply is operating correctly. If the ac power good LED is on, the dc
power good LED is blinking, and the amber LED is off, then the system is turned off, but the power supply
is still connected to the power source. If the amber LED is active, then the power supply is not operating
correctly.
Installing a power supply with the system power on

Directions to replace a power supply concurrent with customer operation.
The system power can remain on when a second power supply is installed or when one of the two power
supplies in the system is replaced.
To install a second power supply, or to replace a failing power supply when two are present in the system,
refer to Figure 5-26 and do the following:
Refer to Figure 5-26.

1. Open the frame door.
3. Open the service access cover as described in “Remove Top Cover” on page 5-2.
4. Disconnect the power cable from the supply to be replaced.
Figure 5-26. Power Supply
1 Power supply 4 Fault LED (Amber)

2 Power supply handle latch 5 DC Good LED (Green)

3 Retractable spring activated portion of the 6 AC Good LED (Green)
handle
5. Grasp the ends of the power supply handles 2, and press the retractable spring-activated portion of
each handle 3. This action releases the spring latch located on the bottom side of each handle.
6. Lift the power supply release handles until they are perpendicular (90 degrees) to the top of the
power supply. By placing the handles perpendicular to the top of the power supply, the base or
hinged portion of each handle acts as a cam and helps pry the power supply from its connector
located on the system backplane.
7. After the power supply is released from its connector, pull the power supply straight out from the
system.
8. Grasp the power supply handles located on top of the new power supply. Pivot the power supply
handles upward to 90 degrees. This action puts the handle cams into the correct position to help seat
the power supply into its connector.
9. Carefully insert the new power supply into the power supply bay.
10. Lower the power supply handles, carefully pressing the power supply into the connector. The spring
latch located on the underside of each handle will snap into place, indicating that the power supply is
seated correctly and locked into position.
11. Reconnect the power cable to the new power supply.
12. Note the state of the LEDs on the top of the power supply. If the LEDs indicate the power supply is
operating normally, continue to the next step. If not, repeat the procedure starting with step 4 on page
5-39. If, after repeating the procedure, the power supply is not operating normally, contact your next
level of support.
13. Close the service access cover as described in “Reinstall Top Cover” on page 5-3.
14. Place the 3592 C06 controller back into the operating position as described in “Returning Controller
To Operating Position” on page 5-4.
2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Power Supply

When a power supply or fan fault occurs, the switch will continue to operate normally as long as the faulty
power supply/fan module remains installed in the switch and there are at least two fans operational in
each module. If the power supply/fan module is removed from the switch, the switch will continue to
operate normally for approximately 20 to 30 minutes. However, to guarantee continued operation, the
malfunctioning module should be immediately replaced to maintain high availability.
The 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch has hot-swappable power supply/fan modules for high availability.
A power supply/fan module consists of an individual power supply and a bank of three-fans. The switch
can run on one functioning power supply/fan module indefinitely, as long as the faulty power supply/fan
module remains installed in the switch and there are at least two fans operational in each module's fan
bank. If the power supply/fan module is removed from the switch, the switch will continue to operate
normally for approximately 20 to 30 minutes.
Removing Power Supply With System Powered ON

The system can remain powered on when a second power supply has been installed or when one of the
two power supplies present in the system is replaced.

The switch can run on one functioning power supply/fan module indefinitely, as long as the faulty power
supply/fan module remains installed in the switch and there are at least two fans operational in each
module's fan bank. If the power supply/fan module is removed from the switch, the switch will continue to
operate normally for approximately 20–30 minutes. Nonfunctional modules should be immediately replaced
to maintain high availability.
1. Have the new power supply/fan module close to the switch for quick insertion. This step ensures that
the procedure takes no longer than necessary. The switch can only operate with one power supply/fan
module installed for approximately 20 to 30 minutes.
2. Unplug the power cord of the faulty module from the power receptacle.
Note: The alternate power supply/fan module should remain powered on while the faulty module is
removed and replaced to guarantee switch availability.
3. Slide the safety latch over the power receptacle to expose the thumbscrew.
4. Loosen the two thumbscrews. No tools are required.
5. Use the module handle to pull the unscrewed power supply/fan module out of the module bay of the
switch.
Replacing Power Supply With System Powered ON

1. Align the power supply/fan module with the module bay opening. Ensure the warning label is facing
upward on the module.
2. Carefully slide the module into the opening. Ensure that the module is seated firmly in the module bay
(the module should be flush with the switch's face).
3. Tighten the two thumbscrews. No tools are required.
Note: Do NOT use a screwdriver to tighten the thumb screws, ensure that the thumbscrews are
secure but not overtightened. Overtightening the thumbscrews may damage the screws or the
module.
4. This step applies to the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch only. Slide the safety latch over the
thumbscrew (uncovering the power receptacle).
5. Plug the power cord into the module's power receptacle.
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Power Supply

When a power supply or fan fault occurs, the switch will continue to operate normally as long as the faulty
power supply/fan module remains installed in the switch and there are at least two fans operational in
each module. If the power supply/fan module is removed from the switch, the switch will continue to
operate normally for approximately 20-30 minutes. However, to guarantee continued operation, the
malfunctioning module should be immediately replaced to maintain high availability.
The 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch has hot-swappable power supply/fan modules for high availability.
A power supply/fan module consists of an individual power supply and a bank of three-fans. The switch
can run on one functioning power supply/fan module indefinitely, as long as the faulty power supply/fan
module remains installed in the switch and there are at least two fans operational in each module's fan
bank. If the power supply/fan module is removed from the switch, the switch will continue to operate
normally for approximately 20 to 30 minutes.
Removing Power Supply With System Powered ON

Power Supply/Fan LED Power Supply/Fan LED
j70m0115
Figure 5-27. Fibre Channel Switch (Rear View)
The system can remain powered ON when a second power supply has been installed or when one of the
two power supplies present in the system is replaced.
The switch can run on one functioning power supply/fan module indefinitely as long as the faulty power
supply/fan module remains installed in the switch and there are at least two fans operational in each
module's fan bank. If the power supply/fan module is removed from the switch, the switch will continue to
operate normally for approximately 20 to 30 minutes. Nonfunctional modules should be immediately
replaced to maintain high availability.
1. Have the new power supply/fan module close to the switch for quick substitution. This step ensures
that the procedure takes no longer than necessary. The switch can only operate with one power
supply/fan module installed for approximately 20 to 30 minutes.
2. Unplug the power cord of the faulty module from the power receptacle.
Note: The alternate power supply/fan module should remain powered ON while the faulty module is
removed and replaced, to guarantee switch availability.
3. Loosen the two thumbscrews. No tools are required.
4. Pull the unscrewed power supply/fan module out of the switch's module bay by using the module's
handle.
Replacing Power Supply With System Powered ON

j70m0115
Figure 5-28. Fibre Channel Switch (rear view)
1. Align the power supply/fan module with the module bay opening. Ensure the warning label is facing
upwards on the module.
2. Carefully slide the module into the opening. Ensure the module is seated firmly in the module bay (the
module should be flush with the switch's face).
3. Tighten the two thumb screws. No tools are required.
Note: Do NOT use a screwdriver to tighten the thumb screws, ensure the thumb screws are secure
but not overtightened. Overtightening the thumb screws may damage the screws or the module.
4. Plug the power cord into the module's power receptacle.
Note: The System Fault indicator may remain on after Power Supply replacement, possibly for as long
as 30 minutes. The indicator is reset by system software on the half hour.

Service Processor Assembly
Directions to remove and replace the service processor card.
Removing Service Processor

1. Power off the 3592 C06 controller. See “Power Off 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-87.
2. Place the 3592 C06 controller into the service position. See “Place Controller in Service Position” on
page 5-2.
3. Disconnect the power sources from the controller.
Note: This controller is equipped with a second power supply. Before continuing with this procedure,
ensure that both power sources have been disconnected completely.
4. Remove the controller top cover. See “Remove Top Cover” on page 5-2.
5. Label and disconnect all cables, if any, connected to the service processor assembly.
6. Before handling any card, board, or memory DIMM, ensure you use your electrostatic discharge strap
to minimize static discharge. See “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices” on page 5-1.
7. Locate the service processor assembly, as shown in Figure 5-29 on page 5-44.
8. Unlock the two cam latches on top of the service processor assembly.
9. Using the cam latches, cam up the service processor assembly 1 in the following figure, and lift the
assembly out of the chassis.
10. Place the service processor assembly on a sturdy work surface.

1
c0600048
Figure 5-29. Service Processor Assembly
1 Service Processor Card
Replacing Service Processor

1. Before handling any card, board, or memory DIMM, be sure to use your electrostatic discharge strap
to minimize static discharge. Refer to “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices” on page 5-1.
2. Unlock the two camming latches on the top of the service processor assembly, and rotate them into
the open position.
3. Align the service processor with the slots in the controller chassis.
4. While holding the service processor by the cam latches, lower it into place. Ensure that the two
alignment pins on the top flange of the service processor align with the corresponding holes in the
rear bulkhead, as the service processor is pressed into place.
5. Press firmly on the top of the service processor until you feel it lock into place.
6. Rotate down the cam latches until they lock into place.
7. Reconnect any cables to the service processor.
8. Replace the controller top cover, as described in “Service Access Cover – Replace” on page 5-3.
9. Reconnect both controller power cables.

Note: When you power ON the controller, as instructed in step 10, you may encounter a power-up
stop with the System Reference Code 1100840E. If this occurs, perform these additional steps:
a. Connect the service terminal to the controller. See “Connecting the Service Terminal” on
page 4-102.
b. Press Enter from your service Terminal to access the Advanced System Management
Interface (ASMI). At the welcome screen, login with your userid and password (admin,
admin).
c. Press Enter again to access the Flexible Service Processor (FSP).
d. From the System Maintenance menu, select System Configuration > Processing Unit
Identifier >
e. Enter B4 into the 2-character text area.
f. Click Save settings to complete the operation. This operation resets the FSP. Continue to
step 10.
10. Power ON the controller, as described in “Power On 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-87. Service
processor firmware will be updated during activation if the firmware in the new Service Processor is
down-level. It is imperative that you do no press any keys during the firmware update while the
service terminal is connected to the 3592 C06 controller, even if it seems that the system is hung or
inactive. If you disturb the process by pressing a key, the service processor firmware will be
corrupted. The firmware load process can take as long as 60 minutes.
11. To ensure that the latest service processor firmware is loaded, activate the current microcode level by
going to the Subsystem Maintenance screen. Select Microcode Maintenance > Activate Code
Image > Activate Subsystem Code Image.
12. Select the current level of microcode. Press Enter when prompted to do so during activation.
13. When the login screen appears, wait five minutes before logging in. During this time, the controller
may reboot to update the firmware level on the new service processor.
| 15. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Run Control Unit Checkout. The first line of
| output will verify time and date in the default state, indicating the need to set the correct time and
| date.
| 16. When faulty date and time are detected, perform the steps in the procedure “Setting Correct Time On
| Controller” on page 4-107.

SFP
Installing SFPs
SFPs (small form-factor pluggable) are hot-pluggable into the switch and into the FICON SW and FICON
LW adapters. This capability allows you to dynamically add storage devices without a need to remove
power from the switch or any connected devices.
1. Remove dust covers or plugs from the SFPs, if provided.
2. Determine the correct polarity, then slide the SFP into the port until the latch clicks into place.
Replacing SFPs
To extract an SFP, determine what kind of extraction mechanism the SFP has and remove the SFP as
follows: .
If the SFP has a removal tag, remove the cable from the SFP and then pull the removal tag outward
and toward the side of the SFP with the tag.
– – OR – –
If the SFP has a small plastic slider on the top or bottom, remove the cable from the SFP , push in the
slider, and hold while pulling out the SFP
– – OR – –
If the SFP has a bale (small metal clasp), remove the cable from the SFP and then unlatch, pivot, and
pull the bale.

Slim-Line Media Devices (DVD-ROM, or DVD-RW)
Notes:
1. A slim-line DVD-ROM drive must be placed in the upper drive slot on the 3592 C06 controller.
2. Slim-line media devices are not hot-pluggable.
3. Hot-swap devices are not supported in the media device bays.
4. Data processing environments can contain equipment transmitting on system links with laser
modules that operate at greater than Class I power levels. For this reason, never look into the
end of an optical fiber cable or open receptacle.
Removing Slim-Line Media

disconnected.
3. Push the blue plastic retaining tab away from the drive. Refer to Figure 5-30 on page 5-48 1 for the
Slim-Line DVD-RW and 2 for the Slim-Line DVD–ROM.
4. While holding the blue plastic retaining tab, grasp the device and pull it out of the 3592 C06 controller.
Replacing Slim-Line Media

1. Push the blue plastic retaining tab away from the device slot.
2. If necessary, while holding the blue plastic retaining tab, pull the filler panel out of the 3592 C06
controller.
3. While holding the blue plastic retaining tab, grasp the device and push it into the 3592 C06 controller.
4. Reconnect the power sources to the 3592 C06 controller.

2
c0600045
1
Figure 5-30. Slim-Line Media Drives
1 Slim-Line DVD-RW

2 Slim-Line DVD–ROM

System Backplane
Before performing the following procedure, read the “Safety Notices ” on page xv.
Provides directions to remove and replace the System planar board.
Removing Backplane
Attention: Before you remove or disconnect any components, note where they are connected or
installed in the 3592 C06 controller.
To remove the 3592 C06 controller backplane, do the following:

disconnected.
4. Label and disconnect all other cables located at the rear of the 3592 C06 controller.
5. Remove the service access cover as described in “Remove Top Cover” on page 5-2.
to minimize static-electric discharge. Refer to “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices” on page 5-1.
7. Refer to Figure 5-31 on page 5-50 when doing the following steps.
8. Record the slot number and location of each adapter being removed.
9. Remove the PCI adapters as described in “PCI Adapter Card – Hot Swap” on page 5-35.
10. Remove the PCI adapter dividers by lifting them up out of the 3592 C06 controller.
11. Remove the primary power supply as described in “Power Supply” on page 5-39.
12. Remove the secondary power supply or power supply filler as described in “Power Supply” on page
5-39.
13. Remove the service processor assembly as described in “Removing Service Processor” on page
5-43.
14. Remove the fan tray assembly as described in “Fan Tray Assembly Removal” on page 5-21.
15. Remove the disk drives as described in “Disk Drives Hot Swap” on page 5-15.
16. Remove the disk drive backplane as described in “Disk Drive Backplane Removal” on page 5-11.
17. Remove the 7 hex-head screws holding the power supply bay chassis bracket as shown in the
following figure. Remove the power supply bay chassis bracket.
18. Remove the blue thumbscrew holding the backplane to the chassis.
Note: The blue thumbscrew is the only screw to be removed in order to release the backplane from
the chassis. No other screws should be removed from the backplane.
19. To remove the backplane from the chassis, lift the front edge of the backplane and pull it towards the
front of the 3592 C06 controller. Lift the backplane up and out of the 3592 C06 controller chassis.
Note: Care must be taken when removing the backplane. Standoffs attached to the chassis base
may damage the components attached to the bottom of the backplane. Do not lift the
backplane by any of the attached modules.
20. Place the backplane in a safe place.

1
c0600049
Figure 5-31. 3592 C06 controller Backplane
Index Number FRU Part Units Per Description

Number Assembly
1 39J4062 1 3592 C06 controller system backplane
Replacing Backplane
to minimize the risk of static-electric discharge. See “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices” on page 5-1.
2. Remove the backplane from the antistatic package.
3. Carefully grasp the backplane along two edges.

4. Lower the backplane at an angle, with the rear of the backplane connecting with the controller
chassis first.
5. Slide the backplane towards the rear of the controller chassis, and align the retaining-screw holes
with the mating screw holes located on the controller chassis.
Note: Avoid damaging the components that are attached to the bottom of the backplane with the
standoffs on the chassis base.
6. Replace the thumbscrew that secures the backplane to the controller chassis.
7. Replace the retention screws that hold the backplane to the chassis.
Note: For proper alignment, insert all screws, and finger-tighten only. Ensure that the backplane is
not binding.
8. Replace the power supply bay chassis bracket. Insert and tighten the five hex-head screws.
9. Perform the procedure “Disk Drive Backplane Replacement” on page 5-12.
10. Replace the disk drives, as described in “Disk Drives Hot Swap” on page 5-15.
11. Replace the fan tray, as described in “Fan Tray Assembly Replacement” on page 5-22.
12. Perform the procedure “Replacing Service Processor” on page 5-44.
13. Replace the primary power supply, as described in “Power Supply” on page 5-39.
14. Replace the secondary power supply or power supply filler.
15. Replace the PCI adapter dividers and spacers.
16. Replace the PCI adapters.
17. Ensure all signal cables are connected to the rear of the controller.
18. Perform the procedure “Service Access Cover – Replace” on page 5-3.
19. Reconnect the power sources to the 3592 C06 controller. The green AC Good LED located on the
power supply comes on solid.
20. Perform the procedure “Power On 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-87.
21. Perform the procedure “Returning Controller To Operating Position” on page 5-4.
22. To ensure the latest firmware is loaded, activate the current microcode level. From the Subsystem
Maintenance menu, select Microcode Maintenance > Activate Code Image > Activate
Subsystem Code Image.
23. Select the current level of microcode. Press Enter when prompted to do so during activation.
Note: System firmware may be loaded during the microcode activation process. The firmware
microcode load process may take as long as 60 minutes. Do Not press any keys in this
period of seeming inactivity or system firmware will be corrupted. Wait for system reboots to
complete.
24. When the login screen appears, wait 5 minutes before logging in. During this time the controller may
reboot to update the firmware level on the new backplane.
This is the end of the procedure. If you have no need to Login, you are done. Return to the

Voltage Regulator Modules (VRMs)
The controller backplane contains two 1.2V replaceable voltage regulator modules (VRMs). See
Figure 5-32 for the location of each module.
c0600069
Figure 5-32. Voltage Regulator Modules
1 3592 C06 controller System Backplane 2 1.2V Voltage Regulator Modules
Removing Voltage Regulator Modules


disconnected.
4. Perform the procedure “Remove Top Cover” on page 5-2.
5. Before handling any card, board, or memory DIMM, be sure to use your electrostatic discharge strap to
minimize static electric discharge. See “Handling Static-Sensitive Devices” on page 5-1.
6. Perform the procedure “Fan Tray Assembly Removal” on page 5-21.
7. Locate the voltage regulator module you wish to remove. See Figure 5-32 on page 5-52 and
Figure 5-33.
8. Remove the voltage regulator module by pushing the tabs out and down. The tabs' camming action
forces the voltage regulator module out of the connector.
9. Pull the voltage regulator module out of the connector as shown in the following illustration. You must
remove both 1.2V VRM modules.
1
j70m0019
Figure 5-33. Voltage Regulator Module Connector Tabs
1 Locking Tabs Open 2 Voltage Regulator
Replacing Voltage Regulator Modules

hand before contacting the component, to minimize static electricity discharge. See “Handling
Static-Sensitive Devices” on page 5-1.
2. Remove the voltage regulator module from its antistatic package.
3. Ensure that the connector locking tabs are pushed out in the unlocked position before installing a new
voltage regulator module, as shown in the following illustration.
4. Carefully grasp the voltage regulator module along two edges, and align it with the connector.
5. Insert the voltage regulator module into the connector.
6. Secure the voltage regulator module with the locking tabs located at each end of the module
connector. See Figure 5-34 on page 5-54.

1
2
j70m0020
1
Figure 5-34. Locking Tabs in Locked and Unlocked Positions
1 Locking Tabs Open (Unlocked) 2 Locking Tabs Closed (Locked)
7. Be sure you have replaced both 1.2V VRM modules.

8. If you removed the fan tray assembly, replace it as described in “Fan Tray Assembly Replacement”
on page 5-22.
9. Reconnect all the controller power cables.
10. Return the controller to the operating position, as described in “Returning Controller To Operating
12. Power on the controller, as described in “Power On 3592 C06 controller” on page 4-87.

Location Codes
This is a list of physical and logical location codes for the3592 C06 controller.
All physical location codes and all logical location codes will have a prefix of "Un" where Un =
Uffff.cccc.sssssss. The "ffff" characters designate the CEC Enclosure Feature Code, "cccc" indicates the
Enclosure Sequence Number and "sssssss" shows Enclosure Serial Number. Thus, the Un remains
constant and unique for each 3592 C06 controller.
Table 5-1. Location Codes – Part 1
Components Physical Loc Code Logical Loc Code Identify LED Description
Power Supply 1 Un - E1 Yes Rear view - left power
Ssupply
Power Supply 2 Un - E2 Yes Rear view - right power
supply
System Cooling Fan 2 Un - A2 Yes Front view - left
System Cooling Fan 3 Un - A3 Yes Front view - right
System IO Cooling Fan 4 Un - A4 Yes Front view - front fan in fan
cage
System IO Cooling Fan 5 Un - A5 Yes Front view - rear fan in fan
cage
System Backplane Un - P1 Yes Sysplanar
DASD Backplane Un - P3 Yes Serving 2 HDDs
Media Backplane Un - P4 Yes Serving DVD drives
PCI Slot 1 Card Un - P1 - C1 Yes Rear View - C1-C6
left-to-right
PCI Slot 2 Card Un - P1 - C2 Yes 2nd from left (Bus 3)
PCI Slot 3 Card Un - P1 - C3 Yes 3rd from left (Bus 3)
PCI Slot 4 Carrd Un - P1 - C4 Yes 4th from left (PHB2)
PCI Slot 5 Card Un - P1 - C5 Yes 5th from left (Bus7,8)
PCI Slot 6 Card Un - P1 - C6 Yes 6th from left (Bus1,2)
Integrated Dual 1 Gb Enet Un - P1 - T5 Upper 1 Gb connector
Port 1
Integrated Dual 1 Gb Enet Un - P1 - T6 Lower 1 Gb connector
Port 2
Integrated USB Port 0 Un - P1 - T7 Upper connector
Integrated USB Port 1 Un - P1 - T8 Lower connector
SCSI Ultra320-Bus 0 Un - P1 Un - P1 - T10 Devoted to HDDs
SCSI Ultra320-Bus 1 Un - P1 Un - P1 - T11 Not used in C06
IDE Controller Un - P1 Un - P1 - T12 Control of DVD drs
FSP Card Un - P1 - C7 Yes Flexible serv rroc
8th left DIMM Un - P1 - C9 Yes Front view-8th left

Table 5-2. Location Codes – Part 2
Components Physical Loc Code Logical Loc Code Identify LED Description
4th left DIMM Un - P1 - C13 Yes Front View-4th Left
3rd left DIMM Un - P1 - C14 Yes Front View-3rd Left
2nd left DIMM Un - P1 - C15 Yes Front View-2nd Left
1st left DIMM Un - P1 - C16 Yes Front View-1st Left
VRM 1.2 V Un - P1 - C17 Yes Front View-behind
DASD Backplane,
2-VRM FRU
System VPD Card Un - P1 - C20 Yes Plugs into sysplanar
behind Media bckpl
Serial Port 1 (Bottom Un - P1 - T1 Bottom Connector of
Connector) S1/S2 Combo
Front S1 on Op-Panl Un - P1 - T1 RJ45 S1 on Op-Pnl
Serial Port 2 (Top) Un - P1 - T2 Top Connectr - S2
Rack Ind Connector Un - P1 - T9 4-pin USB Connctr
HMC1 Connector Un- P1- C7 -T1 HMC Conn#1-Top
HMC2 Connector Un- P1- C7 -T2 HMC Conn#2-Lowr
SPCN 0 Un- P1- C7 -T3 SPCN Upper Conn.
SPCN1 Un- P1- C7 -T4 SPCN Lower Conn.
1st Left DASD Un - P3 - D1 Un-P1-T10-L8-L0 Yes Front View - 1st from
left
2nd Left DASD Un - P3 - D2 Un-P1-T10-L5-L0 Yes Front View - 2nd from
left
SES on DASD Bckp Un - P3 Un-P1-T10-L15-L0 Front View - DASD
Backplane
DVD ROM (Driv 1) Un - P4 - D2 Un-P1-T12-L0 Front Vw-Top Drive
DVD RAM (Driv 2) Un - P4 - D3 Un-P1-T12-L1 Front Vw-Botm Drv
Op-Panel (Bottom) Un - D1 Below DVD Drives
Temperature Sensor Un - D1 On Op-Panel
Time-of-Date (TOD) Un - P1 - C7 On FSP
Battery (Coin Type) Un - P1 - C7 On FSP
Finding Location Codes (Information Center)

Use this information to find location codes in the information center.
See “Location Codes” on page 5-55 for a list of logical and physical location codes if you do not want to
go to the information center.
1. Go to “Accessing Information Center through Internet” on page 4-160 or “Accessing Information Center
Through Service Terminal” on page 4-161 to start the information center.
2. In the Search field, type in “location codes.” Press Enter.
3. Click on Understanding location codes.
4. Click on Location code format.
5. Scroll down to 787F.00,1 and click on Locations–model 520, 52A and 285.
6. Scroll to the code that is of interest to you.


Chapter 6. Service and Media Information Messages (SIMs
and MIMs)
The SIM and MIM functions are a primary factor in the 3592 maintenance plan for improved product
availability.
v A SIM alerts the customer when an abnormal operational condition in the 3592 requires service
attention. Information in the SIM identifies the affected drive, or the C06 CU, the failing component and
the severity of the fault condition, and the expected operational impact of the pending service action.
This information helps the user to initiate and expedite appropriate recovery and service procedures so
that normal operation is restored with maximum efficiency and minimal disruption.
A SIM contains the machine type, machine serial number, and FID that allows the dispatch of the
appropriate service personnel and the replacement parts required to correct the machine fault. This
procedure helps improve service response time and helps reduce the time required for machine repair.
Physical location identifiers in the SIM directs the SSR to the failing unit in the customers account. The
SIM FID code specifies the parts to be replaced and directs the SSR to appropriate service procedures.
This allows the machine fault to be repaired without first looking in log records and without having to try
to recreate the failure with diagnostic procedures. Both of these advantages further contribute to
reduced outage durations.
v A MIM identifies problems with the media (tape) and the volume number of the bad cartridge. This
allows the customer to do maintenance within the tape library and to prevent unnecessary service calls
when the fault is media. The MIM contains a Volume Recovery Action, which tells the customer how to
fix the broken volume.
The detailed information within SIMs and MIMs is for use by the dispatcher or the SSR in the branch
office. This individual is responsible for decoding the information and scheduling for service based on data
content within the SIM or MIM.
The customer can select, depending on their software, the severities that they wish to see. For example,
one customer may only want to see the Acute SIM/MIM and another customer may want to see all the
SIMs and MIMs that are sent to the host. The 4 severity codes follow:
v Severity 0 (FID4) code means that the device needs service.
v Severity 1 (FID3) code means that the problem is moderate.
v Severity 2 (FID2) code means that the problem is serious.
v Severity 3 (FID1) code means that the problem is acute.
A service message within the SIM also informs the customer what the service impact will be; for example,
impact unknown disables access to the drive or requires the interface to be disconnected. A MIM specifies
what is wrong with the cartridge that is indicated. The 3 MIM severity codes follow:
v Severity 1 indicates moderate high temporary read/write errors were detected.
v Severity 2 indicates serious permanent read/write errors were detected.
v Severity 3 indicates acute block 0, cartridge type, or vol label errors were detected.
3592 C06 controller SIM/MIM Presentation

To reach the detailed information concerning any of the open SIMs, use a service terminal or library
manager to display the maintenance menus. Select the corresponding line on the service terminal screens
that are printed bold in the following figures.


Subsystem Error Log

Figure 6-1. Main 3592 Subsystem Maintenance Screen
Show List/Detail of an OPEN Control Unit SIM

Change an OPEN Control Unit SIM to CLOSED
Show List/Detail of an OPEN Tape Drive SIM
Change an OPEN Tape Drive SIM to CLOSED
Show List/Detail of any OPEN or CLOSED SIM
Show/Change SIM & MIM Severity Reporting Level

Figure 6-2. SIM Maintenance Screen

Show List/Detail of an OPEN Control Unit SIM
Type or select values in entry fields

Press Enter After making all desired changes.
[Entry Fields]
Enter two character hex SIM ID []
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* Enter two character hex SIM ID *
* *
* # SIM *
* # ID TYPE RefCodes 1 - 3 Status Last Occurrence *
* # --- ---- -------------- ------ -------------------- *
* 03 CUMDE E000 701F AA55 OPEN Jun 25 13:50:28 2002 *
* 06 CUHU 0000 0093 5121 OPEN Jun 25 13:56:17 2002 *
* 07 CHUH 0000 0085 0902 OPEN Sep 6 19:10:15 2002 *
* 08 CUHU 0000 0093 5121 OPEN Jun 6 19:10:07 2002 *
* *
* F1=Help F2=Refresh F8=Cancel *
F1* F8=Image F10=Exit Enter=Do *
F5* /=Find n=Find Next *
F9* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Figure 6-3. SIM Summary Log
The information obtained from looking at the SIM/MIM information from the Service Terminal or Library
Manager is used in the section “Decoding SIM Refcodes” on page 6-11. Decoding and using the SIM/MIM
information is described there.
The Actual SIM/MIM records sent to the host have a different format and are shown below (refer to “I/O
Subsystem Service Information Message,” “Media Information Message” on page 6-8, and “Device Service
Information Message” on page 6-4. MIM records are also sent to the host and will be described in “Media
Information Message” on page 6-8.
I/O Subsystem Service Information Message

The following text shows the message format for an I/O Subsystem Service Information Message:
msgnum dddd, TCU, type-mod, severity ALERT, SER=mmpp-sssss, MC=mc, ES=es, REF=ref1-ref2-ref3.
The lower case fields have the following meanings:
Table 6-1. ESCON/FICON I/O Subsystem Service Information Message
Message Code
Abbreviation Description
msgnum Operating System dependent message number
dddd Device number from subchannel.
severity Severity from sense byte 9 (0-1)
type-mod CU Type/Model from sense byte 30
mmpp-sssss pp=plant of mfg. sssss=sequence no. Decoded from sense bytes 25-29
mc Message Code from sense byte 6
es Exception Message Code from sense byte 8 (0-3) and Service Message Code from
sense byte 8 (4-7)
ref1-ref2-ref3 Ref Codes 1-3 from sense byte 17-21
Note: Refer to “Decoding SIM Refcodes” on page 6-11 for more details.
Example of I/O Subsystem SIM Console Message
07.22.50 *IEA480E 1B93,TCU,3592-A00,ACUTE ALERT, SER=0113-00018,

MC=F1,ES=11,REF=E000-3001-0000
Chapter 6. Service and Media Information Messages (SIMs and MIMs) 6-3
Device Service Information Message
The following text shows the message format for a device Service Information Message Console Message:
msgnum dddd, TAPE, type-mod, severity ALERT, SER=mmpp-sssss, MC=mc, ES=es, REF=ref1-ref2-ref3
Where the lower case fields have the following meanings:

Table 6-2. ESCON or FICON Device Service Information Message
Message Code
msgnum Operating System dependent message number
type-mod Dev Type/Model from sense byte 31
mmpp-ssss pp=plant of mfg. sssss=sequence no. Decoded from sense bytes 25-29
es Exception Message Code from sense byte 8 (0-3) and Service Message Code from
sense byte 8 (4-7)
ref1-ref2-ref3 REF Codes 1-3 from sense byte 17-21
Note: Refer to “Decoding SIM Refcodes” on page 6-11 for more details.
EXAMPLE of Device SIM Console Message

07.19.24 *IEA480E 1B91,TAPE,3592-J1A,ACUTE ALERT, SER=0113-00018,
MC=F2,ES=77,REF=60E4-3630-3335
Table 6-3 and Table 6-14 on page 6-22 provide the meaning of the SIM Sense Bytes:
Table 6-3. C06 Controller SIM Sense Bytes
0-7 Common Sense Bytes
Byte Meaning
0 Flags 0
1 Flags 1
2
Bit Description
0-1 Basic Recovery Action (BRAC)
1 Continue
2 Reissue
2-4 Logging Code (LC)
3 A3
5 VLF Active
6 Synchronous Transfer Mode
7 Medium Positioning
3 Recovery Action code (RAC)
C0 Basic Recovery Action (BRAC)

Table 6-3. C06 Controller SIM Sense Bytes (continued)
4-5 Reason Code (RC) - Reason Qualifier Code (RQC)
11-01 I/O-Subsystem SIM
11-02 Device SIM
6 Message Code (MC)
F1 I/O-Subsystem SIM
F2 Device SIM
7 Sense Format
71 SIM Sense
8-22 Format Dependent Sense Bytes
Byte I/O-Subsystem SIM Sense (Message Code=F1) Device SIM Sense (Message Code=F2) Meaning
Meaning
8-9 Message Modifier Message Modifier
Bit Description Bit Description
0-3 Exception Message Code 0-3 Exception Message Code
1 Effect of failure is unknown 1 Effect of failure is unknown
2 CU Exception - No performance 2 DV Exception - No performance
Impact Impact
3-F Reserved 3 DV Exception on Interface xx
4-7 Service Message Code 4 DV Exception on ACF
0 Reserved 5 DV Exception on Operator Panel
1 Repair Impact is unknown 6 DV Exception on Tape path
2 Repair will not impact CU 7 DV Exception in Drive
performance
8 DV Preventive Maintenance
3-F Reserved Required
8-9 Report Severity 9-F Reserved
0 Service Where italicized fields are determined as
follows:
1 Moderate
xx Format 71, byte 10
2 Serious
4-7 Service Message Code
3 Acute
0 Reserved
10 Repeated Report Presentation: set to 1 if this
SIM was previously reported. 1 Repair Impact is unknown
11 Message To Operator (MTO): set to 1 if this 2-6 Reserved
SIM should be reported to the Operator
7 Repair will disable access to DV
Console.
8 Repair will disable message
12-14 Reserved
display ids on DV
15 Message Data Flag
9 DV Cleaning Required
A DV Cleaning Complete
B-F Reserved
8-9 Report Severity
0 Service
1 Moderate
2 Serious
3 Acute
10 Repeated Report Presentation: set to 1 if
this SIM was previously reported.
11 Message To Operator (MTO): set to 1 if
this SIM should be reported to the
Operator Console.
12-14 Reserved

10-12 Message Data
Byte Meaning
Reserved, set to X'000000' 10 Exception Data xx
11 SIM Message Code
Value (ASCII)
Description
00 No Message
41 Device Degraded - Call for
Service
42 Device Hardware Failure - Call
for Service
43 Service Circuits Failed,
Operations Not Affected - Call
for Service
55 Drive Needs Cleaning: Load
Cleaning Cartridge
57 Drive Cleaning Complete:
Cleaning Cartridge Ejected
12 Reserved - set to X'00'
13 SIM Identifier SIM Identifier
This field contains the same value when a SIM is This field contains the same value when a SIM is
presented more than once and can be used in presented more than once and can be used in
interactions with the product during maintenance interactions with the product during maintenance
activities. activities.
14-15 Unit Modifier Unit Modifier
Reserved - set to X'0000' Expert Systems Data from Log Page 31, bytes
16-19 (ASCII->HEX)
16-17 REF Code 1 REF Code 1
0-2 SIM Type 0-2 SIM Type
B'000' Hardware, non-encoded SRN B'011' Device SIM
(HDWE)
3-7 Reserved
B'001' Hardware, encoded POST error
8-15 FRU Identifier (FID)
(EPOST) (future)
B'111' Microcode Detected Error (MDE)
3-15 Reserved (used for encoded POST errors in
future)
HDWE SIM Type For Device SIMs, this value will be set to the 1st
bits 0-7 are set to X'00' bits 8-15 are set to FSC code reported from the device.
the first 2 digits of SRN
MDE SIM Type
bits 0-15 are set to the CU MDE code
HDWE SIM Type For Device SIMs, this value will be set to the last
bits 0-15 are set to the last 4 digits of SRN FSC code reported from the device.
MDE SIM Type
bits 0-15 contain CU MDE supporting data
22 Reserved Reserved
Byte Meaning
23 Flags 3
24 Flags 4
25-26 Product Identifier (MM-PP)
27-29 Product Serial (SSSSS)
30 CU/Library Type-Model
31 Device Type-Model
Media Information Message

The following text shows the format for a Media Information Message Console Message:
msgnum, dddd, TVOL, severity ALERT, VOLUME=volid, MC=mc, ES=es, RC=vra-medi-fi
Where the lower case fields have the following meanings:

Table 6-4. ESCON / FICON Media Information Message Console Message
Message Code
msgnum Operation-system dependent message number
volid Volid from sense bytes 16-21
es Exception Message Code from sense byte 8 (0-3)
vra-medi-fi vra=Volume Recovery Action as defined in 3592 J1A MI Message Section as MIM
Message Code. REF code from sense bytes 10-11, MEDIA ID from sense bytes 12-13,
and FORMAT ID from sense byte 22.
EXAMPLE of MIM Console Message
09.36.07 IEA486E 1B90,TVOL,SERIOUS ALERT,VOLUME= ,MC=F0,

E=7,RC=6033-0130-23
Table 6-5 gives details on the contents of the MIM Sense Bytes:
Table 6-5. C06 Controller MIM Sense Bytes
Byte Meaning
0 Flags 0

Table 6-5. C06 Controller MIM Sense Bytes (continued)
1 Flags 1
2
Bit Description
1 Continue
2 Reissue
3 A3
5 VLF Active
3 Recovery Action code (RAC)
C0 Basic Recovery Action (BRA)
11-00 MIM
6 Message Code (MC)
F0 MIM
7 Sense Format
70 MIM Sense
Table 6-5. C06 Controller MIM Sense Bytes (continued)
8-9 Message Modifier
Bit Description
0-3 Exception Message Code
0-1 Reserved
2 Data Degraded
3 Data Degraded in Partition yyyy
4 Medium Degraded
5 Medium Degraded in Partition yyyy
6 Block 0 Error
7 Medium Exception
8-F Reserved
Where italicized fields are determined as follows:
yyyy Determined from sense format 70, bytes 14-15
4-7 Reserved
8-9 Report Severity
0 Reserved
1 Moderate
2 Serious
3 Acute
10 Repeated Report Presentation: set to 1 if this MIM was previously reported.
11 Message To Operator (MTO): set to 1 if this MIM should be reported to the Operator Console.
12-14 Reserved
10-11 REF Code
12-13 Medium Identifier (MID)
X'0120 - 013F'
Half Inch Cartridge Tapes
14-15 Medium Partition
16-21 VOLID
This field contains the volume id, in EBCDIC, associated with the reported condition. If the VOLID is not
known or is not reliable, then this field will contain EBCDIC blanks (X'40').
22 Format Identifier
X'23' 16X8 (128) Track
23 Flags 3
24 Flags 4

Decoding SIM Refcodes
Use this chart to decode the Refcodes bytes extracted from:
v Host console SIM message
v SIM sense record from a host EREP report
– – OR – –
v 3592 C06 controller SIM log
Refcode 1, 2, and 3:
The first digit of Refcode 1 is used to determine the source of the problem that caused the SIM. The
remaining digits in Refcode 1, Refcode 2 and Refcode 3 will have different meaning depending on the
source of the problem.
REFCODE 1 REFCODE 2 REFCODE 3
X X X X X X X X X X X X
|_| |_| |_| |_| |_| |_|
| +-- Refcode 1 | +--Refcode 2 | +--Refcode 3
| byte 2 | byte 2 | byte 2
| | |
+-- Source +--Refcode 2 +--Refcode 3
Identification byte 1 byte 1
Table 6-6. 3592 C06 controller SIM Source Decode

Source
Identification
Value (HEX) Explanation
'00' Control Unit hardware error
Refcode 2, byte 2 and Refcode 3, bytes 1 and 2 combine to form the SRN (Service Request
Number) that will be used to identify and resolve the 3592 C06 controller hardware problem.
Record this number and return to procedure that sent you here.
The diagram below is an example of how to decode the SRN from the Refcode bytes:
0 0 0 0 X X 8 6 5 5 0 3
| | | | | |
+-+ +----------+---------+ +-+-+
| | |
Unused 865 503
SRN = 865-503
Table 6-6. 3592 C06 controller SIM Source Decode (continued)
Source
Identification
'40' Unknown Control Unit hardware error
Refcode 2 and Refcode 3 combine to form the AIX error log sequence number of the failure that
resulted in this SIM. Record the AIX error log sequence number and return to the procedure that
sent you here.
The diagram below is an example of how to decode the AIX error log sequence number from
the Refcode bytes:
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 5 5 0 3
| | | | | | |
+-+ +----------+---------+ +-+-+
| | |
Unused 045 503
AIX error log sequence # = 45503
'50' IBM 2 Gb 20-port Fibre Channel Switch or 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch errors or path
errors and SMC Router errors
To decode Refcode 3, see Table 6-8 on page 6-14 for 2 Gb 20-port Fibre Channel Switch or
Table 6-9 on page 6-15 for 4 Gb 20-port Fibre Channel Switch or Table 6-10 on page 6-16 for
External Switch (director).
The diagram below is an example of how to decode the Fibre Channel Switch error codes from
the Refcode Bytes:
5 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 5
|_| | | | |
| +--+--+ +--+--+
| | |
Engineering Data Error Subcode

'60' Model 3592 tape drive Error
Refcode 1, Byte 2 contains the Drive FRU ID (FID) that will be used to direct service on the
Model 3592 drive. Refcodes 2 and 3 contain the first and second Fault Symptom Codes (FSCs)
associated with the drive error. Record the FID code and both FSCs and return to the procedure
that sent you here.
The diagram below is an example of how to decode the FID code and the FSCs from the
Refcode Bytes:
6 0 D 4 3 6 3 0 3 3 3 5
|_| | | | |
| +--+--+ +--+--+
| | |
FID = D4 FSC1 = 3630 FSC2 = 3335

Table 6-6. 3592 C06 controller SIM Source Decode (continued)
Source
Identification
'E0' Model 3592 C06 Microcode detected error:
Refcode 2 contains the Microcode Detected Error (MDE) code that will used to identify the
source of the microcode error and Refcode 3 contains supporting data (may be all 0s). Record
the MDE code and the data byte and return to the procedure that sent you here.
The diagram below is an example of how to decode the MDE code and the data byte from the
Refcode Bytes:
E 0 0 0 7 0 3 5 0 0 0 0
| | | | | |
+-+ +--+--+ +--+--+
| | |
Unused MDE = 7035 data = 0000
'F0' Model 3494 Library Manager Call Home.
Refcode 2 contains the error code identifying which component has become unavailable. See
“LM Call Home Error Codes” on to identify the unit. Refcode 3 is the error code modifier and will
contain all 0's.
The diagram below is an example of how to decode the MDE code and the data byte from the
Refcode Bytes:
F 0 0 0 E 4 X X 0 0 0 0
| | | | | |
+-+ +--+--+ +--+--+
| | |
Unused Error Code data = 0000
Table 6-7. Error code listing and identification (Call Home LM, Reference only)
Refcode 2 E4xx Severity Field Description
E400 Serious Convenience I/O station is
unavailable
E405 Acute Accessor A is Unavailable
E406 Acute Accessor B is Unavailable
E407 Acute Accessor A gripper 1 is Unavailable
E408 Acute Accessor A gripper 2 is Unavailable
E409 Acute Accessor B gripper 1 is Unavailable
E40A Acute Accessor B gripper 2 is Unavailable
E40B Acute Accessor A vision is Unavailable
E40C Acute Accessor B vision is Unavailable
E40D Acute LMA primary hard disk is Unavailable
E40E Acute LMB primary hard disk is Unavailable
E40F Acute Dual Write is Unavailable
E412 Acute LMA mirror hard disk fails
E413 Acute LMB mirror hard disk fails
E415 Serious LM Check1 on Active LM. Modifier
contains Check1 error code.
Table 6-7. Error code listing and identification (Call Home LM, Reference only) (continued)
E416 Serious LM Check1 on Standby LM. Modifier
contains Check1 error code.
E417 Serious LM Switchover due to error
E418 Serious LM Code Level has changed
E419 Serious Refcode 3 is equal to:
0001 – LMA read error
0002 – LMA write error
0003 – LMB read error
0004 – LMB write error
E41A Serious Refcode 3 is equal to:
0001 – Primary Switch Failure
0002 – Secondary Switch Failure
0003 – Primary Switch Configured
incorrectly
0004 – Secondary Switch
Configured incorrectly
E41B Serious Refcode 3 is equal to:
0001 – LMA
0002 – LMB
E41C Serious Test Call Home used by System
Console code
E41D Refer to the LM Maintenance manual
for EASH errors
E41E Refer to the LM Maintenance manual
for EASH errors
Table 6-8. 2 Gb 20-port Fibre Channel Switch Reported Errors

Code Probable FRU Text Description
0000 N/A This should not result in a SIM, you should not
see this. The error is informational only or a
non-error.
0001 Switch mother board The switch has reported an internal failure. Check
for the amber fault LED on the switch to be ON
0002 Switch mother board, GBIC, fibre channel cable, The switch or fabric (fibre cables, connections,
or 3592 drive GBICs, Host Bus Adapter, Switch Port or Drive
Port) may have a problem. Check for any amber
fault LEDs on any switch for fault indication.
0005 Primary Fibre Channel Switch, SMC Router, The 3592 Model C06 is unable to communicate
Ethernet cable or 3592 Model C06 Ethernet port with the Primary Fibre Channel Switch (251 Fibre
Switch in 3953 F05 frame).
0006 Power Supply One of the fan assemblies or one of the power
supplies has reported a problem in the Primary
Fibre Channel Switch (251 Fibre Switch in 3953
F05 frame).
0007 Power Supply One of the fan assemblies or one of the power
supplies has reported a problem in the Alternate
Fibre Channel Switch (250 Fibre Switch in 3953
F05 frame).

Table 6-8. 2 Gb 20-port Fibre Channel Switch Reported Errors (continued)
0008 Alternate Fibre Channel Switch, SMC Router or The 3592 Model C06 is unable to communicate
Ethernet cable with the Alternate Fibre Channel Switch (250
Fibre Switch in 3953 F05 frame).
0020 Switch confirmation failed. Check cabling, run fibre switch setup menu. Go to
“Running Fibre Switch setup” on page 4-93.
0021 Refers to Primary Fibre Channel Switch. No FRU 2 Gb 20-port Fibre Channel Switch changed since
replacement required. last setup. Run switch setup menu (“Run Fibre
Switch Setup”).
0030 Failed Interface Associated REFCODE 2 subcode with Dual Port
Fibre Channel Adapters:
v 0x0001 = Primary A (PriA) Interface down
v 0x0002 = Alternate A (AltA) Interface down
v 0x0003 = Primary B (PriB) Interface down
v 0x0004 = Alternate B (AltB) Interface down
See Note 1 following Table 6-10 on page 6-16.
0040 Failed path Associated REFCODE 2 subcode 0x0X0Y with
Dual Port Fibre Channel Adapters:
v 0X (Most significant byte)
– 01 = Primary path A
– 02 = Alternate path A
– 03 = Primary path B
– 04 = Alternate path B
v 0Y (Least significant byte): 0# = Device number
that had a failure
See Note 1 following Table 6-10 on page 6-16.
FFFF N/A Unknown Error
Table 6-9. 4 Gb 20-port Fibre Channel Switch Reported Errors

non-error.
0001 Switch mother board The switch has reported an internal failure. Check
for the amber fault LED on the switch to be ON
0002 Switch mother board, GBIC, fibre channel cable, The switch or fabric (fibre cables, connections,
or 3592 drive GBICs, Host Bus Adapter, Switch Port or Drive
Port) may have a problem. Check for any amber
fault LEDs on any switch for fault indication.
0009 Power Supply One of the power supplies or one of the fan
assemblies has reported a problem in the
Primary Fibre Channel Switch.
000A Primary Fibre Channel Switch or fibre cable from The 3592 C06 is unable to communicate with the
Fibre Channel Adapter to the Primary FC Switch Primary Fibre Channel Switch.
failed.
000B Power Supply One of the power supplies or one of the fan
assemblies has reported a problem in the
Alternate Fibre Channel Switch.
000C Alternate Fibre Channel Switch or fibre cable The 3592 Model C06 is unable to communicate
from the Fibre Channel Asapter to the Alternate with the Alternate Fibre Channel Switch.
Fibre Channel Switch failed.
Table 6-9. 4 Gb 20-port Fibre Channel Switch Reported Errors (continued)
0020 Switch confirmation failed. Check cabling, run fibre switch setup menu. Go to
“Running Fibre Switch setup” on page 4-93.
0021 Refers to Primary Fibre Channel Switch. No FRU 4 Gb 20-port Fibre Channel Switch changed since
replacement required. last setup. Run switch setup menu (“Run Fibre
Switch Setup”).
0030 Failed Interface Associated REFCODE 2 subcode with Dual Port
Fibre Channel Adapters:
v 0x0001 = Primary A (PriA) Interface down
v 0x0002 = Alternate A (AltA) Interface down
v 0x0003 = Primary B (PriB) Interface down
v 0x0004 = Alternate B(AltB) Interface down
See Note 1 following Table 6-10.
that had a failure
See Note 1 following Table 6-10.
Table 6-10. External Switch (Director) Reported Errors

non-error.
0030 Failed Interface Associated REFCODE 2 subcode:
v 0x0001 = Primary Interface down
v 0x0002 = Alternate Interface down
v 0x0003 = Both Interfaces down
See Note 1 following Table 6-10.See Note 2
following Table 6-10.
that had a failure
See Note 1 following Table 6-10.See Note 2
following Table 6-10.
Note: 1, For more detailed information on Refcode 3 – 0030 or 0040 on the failed interface or failed path,
select the following steps sequentially starting at the Main Service menu.

Subsystem Maintenance →
Control Unit Service Utilities →
SCSI/FCP Utilities Menu →
Check Status of Fibre Paths From FCP Switch
The last menu will list all failed paths/interfaces. If an individual failed path to a drive is listed, start
your failure analysis with that device fibre cable and drive. If a complete failed interface is listed,
start your failure analysis with the fibre cable from the Fibre Channel Adapter and continue to check
the switch.
When decoding path failures for a C06 with Dual Port Fibre Channel Adapters, the paths are associated
with adapter card ports as follows:
v Primary Path A indicates activity to top port (priA) of card in slot 1
v Alternate Path A indicates activity to top port (altA) of card in slot 4
v Primary Path B indicates activity to bottom port (priB) of card in slot 1
v Alternate Path B indicates activity to bottom port (altB) of card in slot 4
If it is necessary to find the exact location of a device in the 3584 library (drive is attached to a C06 in the
3953 F05 frame) select the following:
Display all 3584 tape drives Locations
After the problem has been resolved, select the following steps sequentially to re–enable the failed path.
Start at the Main Service menu.
Subsystem Maintenance →
Control Unit Service Utilities →
Reset Fibre Paths From FCP Switch Following Switch/Path Repair Actions
The final step (SSR option) will attempt to re–enable the failed paths. If all is successful, then the menu
will list “No failures”.
If there are remaining failures, they will be listed and the menu will return with the result “failed”. In this
case, go back to resolve the remaining problem and rerun these four steps again until all errors are
cleared.
Note: 2, If the 3592 Tape Drives are attached to the 3592 C06 controller via an External Switch
(director) and the failed path CANNOT be readily reenabled after repairs have been completed
(e.g. on a drive or fibre cable from drives to Switch, or Fibre Channel Adapter fibre cable to Switch
or on the Fibre Channel Adapter), check with the System Administrator for evaluation of the
following settings on the External Switch:
v a. “Switch Management Settings Policy” may have been implemented to disable the port or path
upon occurrence of errors. Ask the System Administrator to reenable the disabled path via the
Switch server.
v b. Ask the System Administrator to verify correct zoning at the Switch for the affected drive path
or for the complete interface (primary or alternate).
ES/9000 EREP Reports

An example of a SIM EREP report is shown below, as well as a table describing the entries.
SIM EREP Report (Format 71)

TAPE SERVICE INFORMATION MESSAGES REPORT DATE 263 96
PERIOD FROM 262 96

TO 263 96
*******************************************************************
DEVICE-0883 S/N 01113-00001 DATE-262/96 TIME-06:54:49:45 ID=21
* SERVICE ALERT D/T-3592-J1A REF1-60FF REF2-C559 REF3-C559 UM-1229
* DV PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE COMPLETED
* DV CLEANING COMPLETE
DEVICE-0887 S/N 0113-23456 DATE-262/96 TIME-09:26:32:65 ID=73

* SERIOUS ALERT D/T-3592-J1A REF1-E000 REF2-7019 REF3-0000 UM-0000
* EFFECT OF FAILURE IS UNKNOWN
* REPAIR IMPACT IS UNKNOWN
DEVICE-08A2 S/N 0113-00011 DATE-262/96 TIME-11:25:38:00 ID=3E

* SERVICE ALERT D/T-3592-J1A REF1-60FF REF2-C559 REF3-C559 UM-2229
DEVICE-08A3 S/N 0113-00011 DATE-262/96 TIME-11:25:56:01 ID=3F

* SERIOUS ALERT D/T-3592-J1A REF1-60FF REF2-C559 REF3-C559 UM-2229
An explanation of each of the reverse key fields is shown in Table 6-11.

Table 6-11. ESCON / FICON Service Information Message (SIM) format description
Field Field explanation
TAPE SERVICE Type of EREP report - Service Information Messages (SIM)
INFORMATION
MESSAGES
REPORT DATE Julian date the report ran
263 96
PERIOD FROM Julian date of the earliest record
262 96
DEVICE–0883 The 4 hex digits of the control unit address
01113–00001 Plant of manufacture and the machine sequence number
DATE–262/96 Date of failure ddd yy
TIME–06:54:49:45 Time of failure hh:mm:ss:.01
ID=21 SIM identifier. Contains the same value when presented more than once
SERVICE ALERT Severity: Moderate, Serious, Acute or Service
D/T–3592–J1A Machine type and model number
REF1–E000 Reference code 1 from bytes 16 and 17 in format 71 sense. See note.
REF2–C559 Reference code 2 from bytes 18 and 19 in format 71 sense. See note.
REF3–C559 Reference code three from bytes 20 and 21 in format 71 sense. See note.
UM–1229 Unit modifier for Expert System Data from bytes 14 and 15

Table 6-11. ESCON / FICON Service Information Message (SIM) format description (continued)
DV PREVENTIVE Exception Message from byte 8, bits 0-3
MAINTENANCE
COMPLETED
DV CLEANING Service Message from byte 8, bits 4-7
COMPLETE
Note: Refer to the MSG section starting with Chapter 6, “Service and Media Information Messages (SIMs and
MIMs),” on page 6-1 for detailed definitions.
MIM EREP Report (Format 70)

TAPE MEDIA INFORMATION MESSAGES REPORT DATE 262 96
PERIOD FROM 152 93

TO 300 93
*******************************************************************
VOLUME-0883 DEVICE-0333 DATE-300/93 TIME-07:45:44:04
* D/T- S/N 1804-MXGKM
* SERIOUS ALERT REFCODE-6033 MEDIA IDENTIFIER-0130 IDENTIFIER-23
Note: Refcode 60=REFCODE, 33=Engineering Data

* MEDIUM EXCEPTION
* REFERENCE MEDIA MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE xx
VOLUME-JANZ01 DEVICE-0338 DATE-300/93 TIME-07:40:45:04

* D/T-UNKNOWN S/N 160G-*****
* SERVICE ALERT REFCODE-0124 MEDIA IDENTIFIER-0051 IDENTIFIER-E8
* DATA DEGRADED IN PARTITION 0304
VOLUME-JANZ01 DEVICE-0338 DATE-300/93 TIME-07:40:45:04 **REPEATED**

* D/T-UNKNOWN S/N 16G4-*****
* MEDIUM EXCEPTION
VOLUME-JANZ04 DEVICE-0336 DATE-300/93 TIME-07:45:44:04

* D/T-UNKNOWN S/N 160G-*****
* DATA DEGRADED IN PARTITION 0304

* MEDIUM EXCEPTION

* MEDIUM EXCEPTION
Note: xx=Engineering Data
********************************************************************
An explanation of each of the reverse key fields is shown in Table 6-12.

Table 6-12. ESCON /FICON Media Information Message (MIM) Format Description
TAPE MEDIA Type of report - Media Information Messages (MIM)
INFORMATION
MESSAGES
REPORT DATE Julian date the report ran
262 96
PERIOD FROM Julian date of the earliest record and latest record
152 93
VOLUME–0883 The VOLID from bytes 16 - 21 in format 70 sense
DEVICE–0333 The Model 3592 tape drive the tape was on when the failure occurred
DATE–300/93 Julian date that the MIM was sent to the host
TIME–07:45:44:04 Time that the failure occurred
D/T– Device type
S/N 1804–MXGKM Machine sequence number
SERIOUS ALERT Severity: High number of temporary R/W errors, Serious permanent R/W errors, or Acute
block 0, cartridge type, or volume level errors were detected R/W errors,
REFCODE–6033 Reference code taken from bytes 10 and 11 of format 70 sense
MEDIA Media identifier taken from bytes 12 and 13 of format 70 sense indicates the type of media, for
IDENTIFIER–0130 example, 0130 is 3592 standard length.
IDENTIFIER–23 Format identifier taken from byte 22 of format 70 sense, 23 is 3592 128 track format.
MEDIUM Informational message for problem correction
EXCEPTION
JES2 Job Log

JES2 JOB LOG -- SYSTEM 91AA -- NODE
22.32.31 JOB01383 IRRO10I USERID PFE IS ASSIGNED TO THIS JOB.
22.32.32 JOB01383 ICH70001I PFE LAST ACCESS AT 16:28:39 ON FRIDAY DECEMBER 13, 1996
22.32.32 JOB01383 $HASP373 LB1EA2 STARTED - INIT D - CLASS A - SYS 91AA
22.32.32 JOB01383 *IEF233A M OEA2,DA4898,,LB1EA2,WRITEIT
22.32.32 JOB01383 IOS000I OEA2,28,IO2,1F,0600,,**,DA4898,LB1EA2
024410C050305650000 001FFF0000000000 0331003529333690 43042300
POSITIONING LOST
22.33.56 JOB01383 *IEC513D I/O ERR OEA2,DA4898,SL,LB1EA2,WRITEIT
22.33.56 JOB01383 *83 IEC513D REPLY ’U’ -ABEND OR ’M’ -MOUNT SCRATCH
An explanation of each of the reverse key fields is shown in Table 6-13 on page 6-21.

Table 6-13. ESCON/FICON JES2 Job Log Format Description
JES2 JOB LOG Type of report - JES2 Job Log
SYSTEM 91AA System path job was run on.
USERID PFE User ID assigned to this job.
LAST ACCESS AT 16:28:39 Last time this User ID had access to this system.
STARTED - INIT D - Job start information.
CLASS A - SYS 91AA
M OEA2,DA4898 ,,LB1EA2, Mount message for VOLID DA4898 on Drive EA2
WRITEIT
OEA2,28,IO2 ,1F,0600,,**, IOS000I is the error message with sense
DA4898,LB1EA2
024410C050305650 The sense data associated with the above message
001FFF0000000000
0331003529333690
43042300
POSITIONING LOST Describes the error
I/O ERR OEA2, The drive address and VOLID that failed. For example, Drive EA2, Volid DA4898
DA4898,SL,L
B1EA2,WRITEIT
REPLY 'U' -ABEND OR 'M' Operator recovery message
-MOUNT SCRATCH
Event History Log

EVENT HISTORY (S/370XA)
TIME JOBNAME RECTYP CP CUA DEVT CMD CSW SENSE 04 06 08 10
* DNO CRW CHP SCSW ESW

DATE 338 96
14 17 51 40 LB1EA0 OBRPRM 00 0EA0 3592 2F 02 0600 004810C0 50305650 0002FF0
14 17 51 88 N/A MDR 01 0EA0 3592 28
14 19 11 69 LAB1EA0 OBRPRM 01 OEAO 3592 2F 02 0600 004810C0 50305650 0002FF00

14 19 12 76 N/A MDR 01 0EA0 3592 2F
14 25 05 30 LAB1EA0 OBRPRM 00 0EA0 3592 2F 02 0600 004810C0 50305650 0002FF0
004810C0 50215751 002FF00 00000000 03310036 01333D90 43042300 00901011
08 46 00 62 N/A MDR 01 0E71 3592 2F
08 47 06 49 N/A MDR 01 0E71 3592 2F
08 48 05 30 LB4E71 OBRPRM 01 0E71 3592 2F 02 0600 084910D0 50215751
084910D0 50215751 0002FF00 00000000 00000000 00000090 41042300 00091011
********************************************************************
See Environmental Record Editing and Printing Program (EREP) User's Guide and Reference
(GC-28-1378) for more detailed information on Event History Log.
ES/9000 EREP Reports for ERA 48

Table 6-14 provides the meaning of the SIM Sense Bytes:
Table 6-14. RS/6000 SIM Sense Bytes
Byte Meaning
0 Flags 0
1 Flags 1
2
Bit Description
1 Continue
2 Reissue
3 A3
5 VLF Active
3 Error Recovery Action (ERA)
48 Unsolicited Informational Data
11-01 I/O-Subsystem SIM
11-02 Device SIM
6 Message Code (MC)
F1 I/O-Subsystem SIM
F2 Device SIM
7 Sense Format
71 SIM Sense
Byte I/O-Subsystem SIM Sense (Message Code=F1) Device SIM Sense (Message Code=F2) Meaning
Meaning

Table 6-14. RS/6000 SIM Sense Bytes (continued)
8-9 Message Modifier Message Modifier
0-3 Exception Message Code 0-3 Exception Message Code
1 Effect of failure is unknown 1 Effect of failure is unknown
2 CU Exception - No performance 2 DV Exception - No performance
Impact Impact
3-F Reserved 3 DV Exception on Interface xx
4-7 Service Message Code 4 DV Exception on ACF
0 Reserved 5 DV Exception on Operator Panel
1 Repair Impact is unknown 6 DV Exception on Tape path
2 Repair will not impact CU 7 DV Exception in Drive
performance
8 DV Preventive Maintenance
3-F Reserved Required
8-9 Report Severity 9-F Reserved
0 Service Where italicized fields are determined as
follows:
1 Moderate
xx Format 71, byte 10
2 Serious
4-7 Service Message Code
3 Acute
0 Reserved
10 Repeated Report Presentation: set to 1 if this
SIM was previously reported. 1 Repair Impact is unknown
11 Message To Operator (MTO): set to 1 if this 2-6 Reserved
SIM should be reported to the Operator
7 Repair will disable access to DV
Console.
8 Repair will disable message
12-14 Reserved
display ids on DV
9 DV Cleaning Required
A DV Cleaning Complete
B-F Reserved
8-9 Report Severity
0 Service
1 Moderate
2 Serious
3 Acute
10 Repeated Report Presentation: set to 1 if
this SIM was previously reported.
11 Message To Operator (MTO): set to 1 if
this SIM should be reported to the
Operator Console.
12-14 Reserved
10-12 Message Data
Byte Meaning
Reserved, set to X'000000' 10 Exception Data xx
11 SIM Message Code
Value (ASCII)
Description
00 No Message
41 Device Degraded - Call for
Service
42 Device Hardware Failure - Call
for Service
43 Service Circuits Failed,
Operations Not Affected - Call
for Service
55 Drive Needs Cleaning: Load
Cleaning Cartridge
57 Drive Cleaning Complete:
Cleaning Cartridge Ejected
12 Reserved - set to X'00'
13 SIM Identifier SIM Identifier
This field contains the same value when a SIM is This field contains the same value when a SIM is
presented more than once and can be used in presented more than once and can be used in
interactions with the product during maintenance interactions with the product during maintenance
activities. activities.
14-15 Unit Modifier Unit Modifier
Reserved - set to X'0000' Expert Systems Data from Log Page 31, bytes
16-19 (ASCII->HEX)
0-2 SIM Type 0-2 SIM Type
B'000' Hardware, non-encoded SRN B'011' Device SIM
(HDWE)
3-7 Reserved
B'001' Hardware, encoded POST error
8-15 FRU Identifier (FID)
(EPOST) (future)
B'111' Microcode Detected Error (MDE)
3-15 Reserved (used for encoded POST errors in
future)
HDWE SIM Type For Device SIMs, this value will be set to the 1st
bits 0-7 are set to X'00' bits 8-15 are set to FSC code reported from the device.
the first 2 digits of SRN
MDE SIM Type
bits 0-15 are set to the CU MDE code

HDWE SIM Type For Device SIMs, this value will be set to the last
bits 0-15 are set to the last 4 digits of SRN FSC code reported from the device.
MDE SIM Type
bits 0-15 contain CU MDE supporting data
22 Reserved Reserved
Byte Meaning
23 Flags 3
24 Flags 4
Table 6-15 gives details on the contents of the MIM Sense Bytes:
Table 6-15. RS/6000 MIM Sense Bytes
Byte Meaning
0 Flags 0
1 Flags 1
2
Bit Description
1 Continue
2 Reissue
3 A3
5 VLF Active
3 Error Recovery Action (ERA)
48 Unsolicited Informational Data
11-00 MIM
6 Message Code (MC)
F0 MIM
7 Sense Format
70 MIM Sense
Table 6-15. RS/6000 MIM Sense Bytes (continued)
8-9 Message Modifier
Bit Description
0-3 Exception Message Code
0-1 Reserved
2 Data Degraded
3 Data Degraded in Partition yyyy
4 Medium Degraded
5 Medium Degraded in Partition yyyy
6 Block 0 Error
7 Medium Exception
8-F Reserved
Where italicized fields are determined as follows:
yyyy Determined from sense format 70, bytes 14-15
4-7 Reserved
8-9 Report Severity
0 Reserved
1 Moderate
2 Serious
3 Acute
10 Repeated Report Presentation: set to 1 if this MIM was previously reported.
11 Message To Operator (MTO): set to 1 if this MIM should be reported to the Operator Console.
12-14 Reserved
10-11 REF Code
12-13 Medium Identifier (MID)
X'0120 - 013F'
Half Inch Cartridge Tapes
14-15 Medium Partition
16-21 VOLID
This field contains the volume id, in EBCDIC, associated with the reported condition. If the VOLID is not
known or is not reliable, then this field will contain EBCDIC blanks (X'40').
22 Format Identifier
X'23' 16X8 (128) Track
23 Flags 3
24 Flags 4

Chapter 7. Inspection
The Inspection chapter describes what may be required to put a machine back on an IBM maintenance
contract.
General Instructions
Use this checklist to ensure a machine not covered by an IBM Maintenance Agreement has the necessary
safety items installed and no other changes were made that would make it unsafe or inoperable. Each
machine, as it was designed and assembled, had needed safety items installed to protect the owners,
operators, and service personnel from injury.
Note: This equipment is designed for connection to IT (Impedance Transformer) power subsystems.
Materials Needed
The following items are needed or are useful during the inspection:
v Copies of safety service memorandums (SMs) and engineering change announcements (ECAs) for this
machine type
v Machine history
v Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers, S229-8124
Education
Service personnel must be trained on the new general maintenance agreement qualification (MAQ),
tailored-maintenance agreement qualification, and changed machine safety inspection procedures as part
of the electrical safety course.
Safety
Attention:
A Class I laser assembly is mounted on some of the adapter cards in the 3592 C06 controller and the IBM
2109 . This laser assembly is registered with the DHHS and is in compliance with IEC 60825.
Laser Safety and Compliance
These products contain components that comply with performance standards that are set by the U.S. Food
and Drug administration. This means that these products belong to a class of laser products that do no
emit hazardous laser radiation. This classification was accomplished by providing the necessary protective
housings and scanning safeguards to ensure that laser radiation is inaccessible during operation or is with
Class I limits. External safety agencies have reviewed these products and have obtained approvals to the
latest standards as they apply to this product type.
Laser Information

This product may contain a certified Class I Laser. Class I Laser Products belong to a class of laser
products that do not emit hazardous laser radiation. This classification was accomplished by providing the
necessary protective housings and scanning safeguards to ensure that laser radiation is inaccessible
during operation or is within Class 1 limits. This laser certification conforms to the Department of Health
and Human Services 12 Code of the Federal Regulations (DHHS 21 CFR) Subchapter J for Class 1 laser
products. Elsewhere, certification conforms to the requirements of the International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) 825 (1st edition 1984) and CENELEC EN 60 825:1991 for Class I Laser Products.
The general caution symbol
identifies conditions where caution must be used.
The electrical caution symbol
identifies electrical hazards where extreme caution must be used.
Perform this inspection before the normal inspection for a maintenance agreement. Suspect that the 3592
is unsafe until you verify that it is safe. If any unsafe conditions are present, decide how serious the
hazard is and whether you can continue without first correcting the problem. Possible safety hazards are:
Electrical
An electrically-charged frame can cause serious or lethal electrical shock.
Mechanical
Hazards, such as a safety cover missing, are potentially harmful to people.
Chemical
Do not use solvents, cleaners, or other chemicals not approved for use on this product.
Any of the problems listed above must be repaired before you use the 3592.
The following notices are translated into selected languages. Each notice contains an identifier
(Caution=Cx).
C2 CAUTION
The 3592 C06 controller weighs over 100 pounds;
it takes two persons to safely lift
this unit after both power supplies
have been removed from
the 3592 C06 controller.

Chapter 7. Inspection 7-3
Safety Inspection Procedures
Before performing a safety inspection, ensure that the customer's environment, such as the existing room
and electrical conditions, are safe.
Read all safety information on the label before starting.
Perform the following steps:
3592 C06 Controller AC Grounding Inspection

Attention: The 3592 C06 controller is grounded in all frames where it is used. Within the Controller, the
electronics are grounded to the C06 chassis. The chassis is mounted in the enclosure frame using screws
which complete the grounding circuit.

1. Power off the frame you are checking.
2. Disconnect the channel cables. Disconnect the power cord from its source.
3. Check that no voltage exists between the housing on the power source and building ground.
4. Check that resistance is less than 0.1 ohm from the building ground to the power supply enclosure.
5. Inspect the power cable for visible cracks, wear, or damage.
6. Check that the resistance between the power cable ground and the frame is less than 0.1 ohm.
Figure 7-1. IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Controller 3592 Maintenance Information Model C06 AC Grounding
Diagram (50 Hz and 60 Hz)
3592 Tape Drive AC Grounding Inspection

| To check the 3592 tape drive AC grounding, go to the IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140
| Tape Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and
| E07, Safety and Inspection section.
Completion Report
v Safety inspection for 3592 Controller Model C06
v General safety inspection
v Maintenance agreement qualification (MAQ)
| v Safety inspection for 3592 tape drives - go to IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130 and TS1140 Tape
| Drives (16th Edition - June 2011) Maintenance Information 3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6 and E07.
After the inspection, sign, date, and store the checklist with the Maintenance Agreement inspection.
_____________________ _________________ _____________
NAME DATE SERIAL NUMBER
SAFETY HAZARDS
LIST ALL SAFETY HAZARDS. iF NONE, SAY NONE.
1.___________________________________________________________________
2.___________________________________________________________________
3.___________________________________________________________________
4.____________________________________________________________________
5.____________________________________________________________________
6.____________________________________________________________________
7.____________________________________________________________________
Chapter 7. Inspection 7-5

8.____________________________________________________________________
9.____________________________________________________________________
10.____________________________________________________________________
This report completes the safety inspection.

1. Reconnect the device power cable into the customer's power receptacle.
2. Reconnect the channel cables to the subsystem.

Chapter 8. Problem Determination
Contains the various tools that will be used to maintain and repair the 3592 C06 controller.
AIX Problem Aanalysis

Use this procedure to perform AIX® problem analysis.
If you experience a problem with your AIX server or logical partition, you should attempt to gather more
information about the problem to either solve it, or to help your next level of support or your hardware
service provider to solve it more quickly and accurately.
Keep the following in mind while troubleshooting AIX server problems :

v Has there been an external power outage or momentary power loss?
v Has the hardware configuration changed?
v Has server software been added?
v Have any new programs or program updates been installed recently?
Check the following connections:

1. Check to see if the power cord is plugged in.
2. Check to see if all your cables are attached securely.
3. Is the server powered ON, or can you power ON your server?
v No: Go to step 4.
v Yes: Ensure that the server is turned on and then go to step 6.
4. Perform the following steps to verify that the server is receiving power:
v If your server is protected by an emergency power off (EPO) circuit, check that the EPO switch is
not activated.
v If you have an uninterruptible power supply, verify that the cables are correctly connected to the
server, and that it is functioning correctly.
v When a good power source is connected to the server, one of the following occurs:
– If you have a control panel, the Function/Data display on the control (operator) panel is
illuminated.
– If you do not have a control panel, the Bulk Power Controller system lights are illuminated.
5. Is the control (operator) panel illuminated?
v Yes: Start the server by either pressing the power button on the control (operator) panel, and then
go to step 6.
Note: If the server stops with a reference code appearing in the Function/Data display on the
control (operator) panel, record the reference code and any related information, and go to
Reference codes list for further information. This ends the procedure.
v No: There is a power problem. Verify that the power source to the server is functioning correctly
(for example, the wall outlet is functioning correctly and the power cord is not damaged). If you
cannot find a problem with the power source, contact your next level of support or your hardware
service provider. This ends the procedure.
6. Is the control (operator) panel blank?
v Yes: Go to step 11 on page 8-2.
v No: Continue with the next step.
7. Is the Attention light on the control (operator) panel illuminated?
v Yes: Go to step 11 on page 8-2.

8. Are any additional messages related to this problem displayed on the system console or sent to you
in e-mail from the operating system?
v Yes: Continue with the next step.
v No: Contact your next level of support.
9. Record any additional message information that is available from the control (operator) panel,
attached displays, or e-mail from the operating system.
10. If the additional message information contains recovery instructions, follow these instructions. Did this
solve the problem?
v Yes: This ends the procedure.
11. Record any SRN information that is displayed or available through e-mail.
Note: If you have not found an SRN, it is possible to display an SRN using the operating system.
Perform the following to display previous diagnostic results from online diagnostics in
concurrent mode:
v Log in to the AIX operating system as root user, or use CE login. If you need help, contact the
system operator.
v Enter the diag command to load the diagnostic controller, and display the online diagnostic menus.
v At the Function selection menu, select Task selection.
v From the Task selection list menu select Display previous diagnostic results.
v From the Previous diagnostic results menu select Display diagnostic log summary.
A Display diagnostic log will be shown with a time ordered table of events from the error log. Look
in the T column for the most recent entry that has an S entry. Press Enter to select the row in the
table and then select Commit. The details of this entry from the table will be displayed; look for the
SRN entry shown near the end of the entry and record the information shown.
v Record all other reference codes (if any are displayed) that you are receiving on the control
(operator) panel. See Collecting reference codes and system information for details.
v Go to the Reference codes list.
Control Panel Display – Description

Use this information to decipher the system information that displays.
When not displaying an error, reference, or progress code, the control panel displays controller status
information. Use the following information to interpret the display.
1. Enter control panel function into the search box, and press Enter , or click on go.
2. In the left hand frame, click on 100% Control panel function descriptions.
3. In the right hand frame, click on Primary control panel functions.
4. Select the functions that are of interest to you to see a description.
Note: The 3592 C06 has been configured in the factory. Do NOT change any of the settings that are
accessible from these menus.
Collecting Reference Codes

Used to collect reference codes and other system information.
The reference codes and system information can help determine the correct solution to fix a problem. The
reference codes and system information can appear on the C06 control panel. Use this only when directed
by your next level of support.

1. On the control panel, press the increment button until 11 appears in the Function/Data display. Press
Enter. Record the 32-character code: 16 characters from the first line, and 16 characters from the
second line of the Function/Data display.
2. Press the increment button until 12 appears in the Function/Data display. Press Enter. Record the
32-character reference code.
10. Press the increment button again until 20 appears in the first line of the Function/Data display. Press
Enter. Record the machine type, model, and serial number that appears.
Note: If 11 is shown in the Function/Data display on the control panel display, the numbers that
follow are the reference codes.
If a number other than 11 appears in the Function/Data display, the number might not indicate
a problem with the system. These reference codes might indicate functions you select from the
control panel.
System LEDs
LEDs provides a means to identify components in your system. For more information about these LEDs,
see “FRU Identify LEDs.”
System Attention LED

The system attention LED on the operator panel turns on when an entry is made in the service processor
error log. When the LED is on, it indicates that user intervention or service is needed. The error entry is
transmitted and recorded in the following logs:
v The system-level error logs
v The operating system error log
v The service action event log in the Service Focal Point application
FRU Identify LEDs

This system is configured with an arrangement of LEDs that help identify various components of the
system. These include but are not limited to:
v Rack identify LED
v CEC drawer identify LED
v I/O drawer identify LED
v RIO port identify LED (Not Used)
Chapter 8. Problem Determination 8-3

v FRU identify LEDs
– Power subsystem FRUs
– CEC subsystem FRUs
– I/O subsystem FRUs
v I/O adapter identify LED
v DASD identify LED.
The identify LEDs are arranged hierarchically with the FRU identify LED at the bottom of the hierarchy,
followed by the corresponding CEC or I/O drawer identify LED, and the corresponding rack identify LED to
locate the failing FRU more easily.
Any identify LED in the system may also be flashed by using the "Identify and Attention Indicators" task in
diagnostics. The procedure to operate the "Identify and Attention Indicators" task in diagnostics is outlined
in Chapter 27 of the RS/6000 e(logo)server pSeries Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
Controller Condition Codes

Table 8-1. Controller Condition Codes
If this value
displays... ...Perform this action
1c1 Common area check 1 (Not recovered). See Note.
1c2 Common area check 2 (Recovered). No service action is required.
2c1 ATAPE (Device Driver for the Model 3592 area check 1 (Not recovered). See Note.
2c2 ATAPE area check 2 (Recovered). No service action is required.
3c1 ATL (Automated Tape Lib. uCode) area check 1 (Not recovered). See Note.
3c2 ATL area check 2 (Recovered). No service action is required.
4c1 CU (Control Unit Process uCode) area check 1 (Not recovered). See Note.
4c2 CU area check 2 (Recovered). No service action is required.
500 Loading LP Code. (If on solid, see Note)
501 Loading EP Code. (If on solid, see Note)
502 Loading CDT. (If on solid, see Note)
503 Setting Subchannel (If on solid, see Note)
504 Setting Adapter (If on solid, see Note)
505 Go Online (If on solid, see Note)
506 Online (If on solid, see Note)
507 Offline. No action required - Indicates CU taken offline
508 Logout. No action required - Informational indicator only
509 Running Diagnostics No action required-Indicates ESCON or FICON diagnostics are currently
running
520 Tape Daemon Started (If on solid, see Note)
540 Library Started (If on solid, see Note)
560 Tape Device Online. No action required - Indicates Tape daemon may have been restarted

Table 8-1. Controller Condition Codes (continued)
If this value
displays... ...Perform this action
5c1 CADD (Channel Adapter Device Driver Ucode) area check 1 (Not recovered). (See Note)
5c2 CADD area check 2 (Recovered). No service action is required
7c1 TAPE (Tape uCode) area check 1 (Not recovered). (See Note)
7c2 TAPE area check 2 (Recovered). No service action is required
8c1 RAS (RAS uCode) area check 1 (Not recovered). (See Note)
8c2 RAS area check 2 (Recovered). No service action is required.
9c0 Install Procedures Drive Code Update (Informational). Code is currently being downloaded to a
drive and or card within the control unit. This process may take up to five minutes per drive. The
control unit will not go online until this operation has completed.
9c1 Install Procedures check 1 (not recovered). (See Note)
9c2 Install Procedures check 2 (Recovered). No service action is required.
u82 LP check 1 Microcode error. Contact your next level of support for direction.
The displayed If the condition code was not found in Table 8-1 on page 8-4, go to the RS/6000 e(logo)server
value is not in pSeries Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems, SA38-0509 “Start of Call Map”,
this table and follow instructions.
Note: If you did not find the condition code displayed in any of the previous tables, connect the Service
Terminal (see “Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102) and retrieve the dump data. (see
“Retrieving Engineering and Dump Data” on page 4-88). Contact your next level of support.
2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch LEDs
2
System LEDs
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2
j70m0070
Figure 8-1. 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
The switch incorporates sets of light-emitting diodes (LEDs) to indicate Ethernet, switch, port, and power
supply/fan module status.
v Ethernet LEDs – two separate LEDs indicating the network connection status
v System LEDs – four separate LEDs indicating the switch's status

v Port LEDs – two LEDs per port indicating the port's status
v Power Supply/Fan LED – a separate LED for each power supply/fan module, indicating the status of the
power supply/fan module
Table 8-2. 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch LEDs. See “Perform This Action – 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch”
on page 8-7 to read about the action you should take, which is provided in the Perform This Action column.
Ethernet LEDs Indication Perform This
Action
Ethernet Activity v When flashing, the Ethernet port is receiving data. A
(Green LED) v When flashing rapidly, the traffic level is high.
Ethernet Link When lighted, the switch is connected to an operational Ethernet. A
(Green LED)
System LEDs Indication Perform This
Action
Fault (Yellow v (Yellow LED) When lighted, one or more of the ports has failed or the F
LED) internal temperature has exceeded acceptable levels.
v When flashing, all ports are operational but another error has occurred.
Errors appear in an event log.
Power (Green When lighted, the switch is plugged in and the internal power supplies are A
LED) functional.
2 Gb/s (Green When lighted, the switch is set to operate at a speed of 2 Gb/s. When off, the A
LED) switch is set to 1 Gb/s.
Switch v When lighted, indicates that the switch has completed initialization for ports A
Operational with inserted SFPs, and that the switch is operational.
(Green LED) v When flashing, the switch has been configured for multiple zones, and one
or more zones are up with at least one zone down.
v If no zones (excluding hard zones) are operational, the LED turns off.
Power Indication Perform This
Supply/Fan Action
Module LED
(Green LED)
On No faults exist and AC power is supplied to the module. A
Off A power supply or fan fault has occurred in the module. B
Note: When a power supply or fan fault occurs, the switch will continue to
operate normally as long as the faulty power supply/fan module remains
installed in the switch and there are at least two fans operational in each
module. If the power supply/fan module is removed from the switch, the switch
will continue to operate normally for approximately 20-30 minutes. However, to
guarantee continued operation, the malfunctioning module should be
immediately replaced to maintain high availability.
Table 8-3. Additional Fibre Channel Switch LEDs

SFP Status LED Port Bypassed Indication Perform This
(Green LED) LED (Yellow Action
LED)
Off Off Normal port operational status when an SFP is not installed. A
Off On or Flashing The port is bypassed due to a faulty or improperly seated C
SFP. After fixing this problem, power may need to be cycled
before the LED indication will change.
Flashing Off Activity. Data is being transferred between the port and A
device.

Table 8-3. Additional Fibre Channel Switch LEDs (continued)
On Off Normal operation but no activity. Port and device are fully A
operational.
On Flashing Manually bypassed. A port can be manually bypassed using E
the Web Manager's Bypass Port feature.
On On Bypassed. SFP is installed but the port is not receiving a C
valid signal or is receiving an F8 Failure notification from the
attached device.
Flashing Flashing Beaconing. This is set manually using the Web Manager or E
CLI.
Perform This Action – 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch

A. This is a normal operating condition.
B. Go to “2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Power Supply” on page 5-40.
C. Go to “SFP” on page 5-46.
D. Go to “Replacing the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch” on page 5-28.
E. This condition should not occur. Contact your next level of support.
F. If flashing, the Power Supply is malfunctioning. If ON solid, check the SFPs. If the SFPs are OK and
the fibre cable is OK, perform action D.
2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch IP Setup (serial interface)

The new switch is shipped with the following default IP address settings:
v IP Address: 192.168.251.22
v Network Mask: 255.255.255.0
v Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0
These IP addresses are correct for the primary switches installed in frame 2 of a 3494 Tape Library or in
all standalone frames, for example, or for the 251 Fibre Switch attached to the bottom 3592 C06 controller
in the first 3953 F05 Expansion Frame. For a primary switch installation in a 3494 Tape Library frame
other than frame 2, and for all other 3592 C06 controller configurations in 3953 F05 frames, continue with
this procedure. Otherwise, return to the procedure that sent you here.
Note:
v Continue with this procedure if you are installing the alternate switch above the primary switch in
a Dual Switch configuration in 3494 Tape Library frame 2.
v If you are installing a Dual Switch configuration in a 3494 Tape Library frame other than frame 2,
complete this procedure for the primary switch, and return to step 1 to repeat this procedure for
the alternate switch.
v If you are installing a Dual Switch configuration for a 3592 C06 controller in a 3953 F05 frame,
complete this procedure for the 251 Fibre Switch, (except when the new 251 Fibre Switch is
attached to the bottom 3592 C06 controller in the first 3953 F05 Expansion Frame). Return to
step 1 to repeat this procedure for the 250 Fibre Switch.
To change the IP address setting, connect the switch to the Service Terminal through the serial interface.
1. Attach one 9-pin end of a RS-232 null modem cable to the Service Terminal COM1 port, and attach
the other end to the DB-9 serial port on the left side of the switch.
2. Open a terminal session through the HyperTerminal emulation program on the Windows operating
system.

3. Make the following selections on your Windows screen: START/PROGRAMS/ACCESSORIES/
Communications/HyperTerminal
a. Follow directions for a name and icon selection. Click OK.
b. Select COM1 in the Connect To menu. Click OK.
c. In the COM1 Properties menu, set up parameters, as follows:
v Bits per second: 19200
v Data bits: 8
v Parity: None
v Stop bits: 1
v Flow control: None
Click OK.
d. Press Enter to receive a prompt. Figure 8-2 is shown.
Invalid Password, logging in as visitor
root Menu:
1. show Go to submenu
2. ? Help
OK
root>
Figure 8-2. Invalid Password - IP Address
Attention: If the screen does not appear, recycle power by unplugging and re-plugging the
power cords.
e. Type 1 at the root> prompt, and press Enter to show the submenu.
f. At the root/show> prompt, type 3 (for sysinfo) to display system information and IP addressing. At
the bottom of the System Information display you will find the three IP settings.
The correct IP address settings for the primary 251 Fibre Switch are:
v IP Address: 192.168.251.X2 (X represents the frame number in the 3494 Tape Library where
the switch is installed or X represents the position number of the 3592 C06 controller in the
3953 F05 Base Frame. See the note below to determine the value for X.)
v Netmask: 255.255.255.0
v Gateway: 0.0.0.0
The correct IP address settings for the alternate (second) switch in the 3494 Tape Library are:
v IP Address: 192.168.251.X3 (X represents the frame number in the 3494 Tape Library where
the switch is installed)
v Netmask: 255.255.255.0
v Gateway: 0.0.0.0
The correct IP address settings for the 250 Fibre Switch in the 3953 F05 Base Frame are:
v IP Address: 192.168.250.X3 (X represents the position number of the 3592 C06 controller in the
3953 F05 Base Frame. See the note below to determine the value for X)
v Netmask: 255.255.255.0
v Gateway: 0.0.0.0
Note: Representation for X in the 3953 F05 frame environment is determined, as follows:
v For example, if the 251 or the 250 Fibre Switch is connected to the 3592 C06 controller
in the 3953 F05 Base Frame, X = 1.

v If the 3592 C06 controller is located in the first 3953 F05 Expansion Frame, X = 2 for the
bottom 3592 C06 controller X = 3 for the 3592 C06 controller in the middle and X = 4 for
the top 3592 C06 controller.
v Increment X by 1 for every 3592 C06 controller in additional 3953 F05 Expansion
Frames, always progressing from the bottom 3592 C06 controller to the top 3592 C06
controller in the 3953 F05 Expansion Frame.
– X = 5 for the bottom 3592 C06 controller in the second 3953 F05 Expansion Frame
– X = 8 for the bottom 3592 C06 controller in the third 3953 F05 Expansion Frame
– X = 11 for the bottom 3592 C06 controller in the fourth 3953 F05 Expansion Frame
– X = 14 for the bottom 3592 C06 controller in the fifth 3953 F05 Expansion Frame
4. If your 3494 Tape Library frame number is 2, the IP address is correct and does not need to be
changed for the primary switch. Perform steps 4a thru 4e. If you are configuring the alternate switch,
continue with Step
a. Type lo (for logout) at the root/show> prompt, and press Enter.
b. Then type n (for no), and press Enter at the "Save configuration parameters?" prompt.
c. Press Enter again. The original display in step 3d on page 8-8 is shown.
d. Disconnect the serial cable from the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch.
e. Return to the procedure that sent you here.
5. If the 3494 Tape Library frame number is greater than 2, or if you are configuring the alternate switch
or any 251 or 250 Fibre Switch in a 3953 F05 frame, continue at the next step.
6. At the root/show> prompt, type .. (two dots), and press Enter.
7. At the root> prompt, type li (for login).
8. Type password when prompted for the password, and press Enter. The root Menu will display.
9. Type 1 to select config, and press Enter. The config Menu displays.
10. Type 8 to select network, and press Enter. The network settings will be displayed as well as the
network Menu.
11. Type 3 to select ip - Configure IP address setting.
12. Enter the IP address for the primary 251 Fibre Switch in a 3953 frame at the prompt as follows:
192.168.251.X2
where X is your 3494 Tape Library frame number or where X represents the 3592 C06 controller
position number in the 3953 frame. Press Enter.
13. If you are configuring the alternate (second) switch in the 3494 Tape Library, enter the IP address for
the alternate (the second) switch at the prompt, as follows:
192.168.251.X3
where X is your frame number. Press Enter.
14. If you are configuring the 250 Fibre Switch in the 3953 frame environment, enter the IP address for
the 250 Fibre Switch as follows:
192.168.250.X3
where X represents the position number of the attached 3592 C06 controller in the 3953 F05 frame.
See the Note in step 3f on page 8-8. Press Enter.
15. The subnet mask and gateway IP settings should be in the correct default state. Type 4 (for mask),
and press Enter to change the subnet mask (255.255.255.0), or type 5 (for gateway), and press
Enter to change the gateway IP address (00.00.00.00). Skip to the next step if they are correct.
16. You will be told that the change will be effective only after a reboot. At the root/config/network>
prompt, type 1 for reset, and press Enter.
17. Type y to save configuration parameters, and press Enter.
18. Wait until reset is completed. Reset is completed when only green LEDs on the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre
Channel Switch remain lighted.

19. You may be asked for the password again. If so, type password, and press Enter.
20. You will return to the root> prompt. Type lo (for logout) at the prompt, and press Enter.
21. Type n (for no), and press Enter at the "Save configuration parameters?" prompt. Note that all
configuration changes have been saved in the previous step.
22. Press Enter again. The original display in step 3d on page 8-8 is shown.
23. Disconnect the serial cable from the 2Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch and return to the procedure
that sent you here, or return to step 1 on page 8-7 to configure the alternate switch or the 250 Fibre
Switch in the 3953 frame environment (if it is installed).
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch LEDs
Ethernet LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
j70m0114
RX ACT LINK
10101
POWER SYSTEM TEMP

ON FAULT FAULT
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Port LED System LEDs
Figure 8-3. 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
The switch incorporates sets of light-emitting diodes (LEDs) to indicate ethernet, switch, port, and power
supply/fan module status.
1. Ethernet LEDs – two separate LEDs indicating the network connection status
2. System LEDs – three separate LEDs indicating the switch's status
3. Port LED – one multicolored LED per port indicating the port's status
4. Power Supply/Fan LED – a separate LED for each power supply/fan module indicating the status of
the power supply/fan module
Ethernet Activity Ethernet Link
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
j70m0116
RX ACT LINK
10101
POWER SYSTEM TEMP

ON FAULT FAULT
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 8-4. Ethernet LEDs – 4 Gb Switch
Table 8-4. 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Ethernet LEDs. See “Perform This Action – 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel
Switch” on page 8-12 to read about the action you should take, which is provided in the Perform This Action column.
Perform This
Ethernet LEDs Indication Action
Ethernet Activity v When flashing, the Ethernet port is receiving data. A
(Green LED) v When flashing rapidly, the traffic level is high.
Ethernet Link When lit, the switch is connected to an operational Ethernet. A
(Green LED)

POWER SYSTEM TEMP
ON FAULT FAULT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
j70m0117
RX ACT LINK
10101
POWER SYSTEM TEMP

ON FAULT FAULT
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 8-5. System LEDs
Table 8-5. 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch System LEDs

Perform This
System LEDs Indication Action
Power On (Green When lit, the switch is plugged in and the internal power supplies are A
LED) functional.
System Fault When lit, one or more of the ports has failed. C
(Yellow LED) Note: The switch will continue to operate. Switch functionality may be
impaired depending on the event that triggered the System Fault LED.
Regardless of the cause, the switch requires immediate attention.
Temp Fault When lit, the internal temperature has exceeded acceptable levels. B
(Yellow LED) Note: The switch will continue to operate. Switch functionality may be
impaired depending on the event that triggered the System Fault LED.
Regardless of the cause, the switch requires immediate attention.
j70m0115
Figure 8-6. Power Supply/Fan LEDs. Power Supply/Fan #1 is on the right; Power Supply/Fan #2 is on the left.
Table 8-6. 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Power Supply/Fan LEDs
Power
Supply/Fan
Module LED Perform This
(Green LED) Indication Action
On No faults exist and AC power is supplied to the module. A
Off A power supply or fan fault has occurred in the module. B
Note: When a power supply or fan fault occurs, the switch will continue to
operate normally as long as the faulty power supply/fan module remains
installed in the switch and there are at least two fans operational in each
module. If the power supply/fan module is removed from the switch, the switch
will continue to operate normally for approximately 20-30 minutes. However, to
guarantee continued operation, the malfunctioning module should be
immediately replaced to maintain high availability.
Note: Power Supply/Fan #1 is on the right; Power Supply/Fan #2 is on the left.

1 2 3 4 5
11 12 13 14 15
Port 11 LED Port 2 LED

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
j70m0118
RX ACT LINK
10101
POWER SYSTEM TEMP

ON FAULT FAULT
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 8-7. Port LEDs
Table 8-7. 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Port LEDs

Port LED Indication Perform This
Action
Off Normal port operational status when an SFP is not installed. A
On (Green) Normal port operational status when an SFP is installed and a link has A
been established.
On (Yellow) The port has an SFP installed but a link has not been established. F
Flashing (Green) Activity. Data is being transferred between the port and device A
Perform This Action – 4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch

A. This is a normal operating condition.
B. Go to “4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Power Supply” on page 5-41.
C. Go to “SFP” on page 5-46.
D. Go to “4Gb 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch Replacement” on page 5-30.
E. This condition should not occur. Contact your next level of support.
F. If flashing, the Power Supply is malfunctioning. If on solid, check the SFPs, the adapter card, or the
fibre cable. If the SFPs are OK and the fibre link is OK, perform action D.
Setting Cisco Router to factory defaults

Using Hyperterm:
v Setup the com port you are using to (VT100 9600 8/N/1 Xon/Xoff).
v Connect the serial cable.
v login cisco
v enable cisco
v copy flash:sdmconfig-1811-1812.cfg startup-config (It will ask you to confirm the filename - just press
ENTER)
v Destination filename [startup.cfg]? (hit Enter)
– Copy in progress...C
– 2.202 Kb (2.160 Kib) copied in 0.148 seconds 14.592 Kib/second (14.878 Kb/second)
v Router#reload
v Proceed with reload? [confirm] (hit Enter)
v Connection closed. Wait 5 minute.
v Best Regards
Verify 3577 L5U Tape Library configuration
For verification of 3577 L5U Tape Library configuration.
1. Press F3 repeatedly to return to the Subsystem Configuration screen. Select Show / Change 3577
Tape Library Configuration Menus, press Enter. Figure 8-8 is shown..
Show / Change 3577 Tape Library Configuration
Show 3577 Tape Library Configuration Menus (No Router)

Show / Change 3577 Tape Library Router Configuration

Figure 8-8. Show / Change 3577 Tape Library Configuration
2. Select Show 3577 Tape Library Configuration Menus (No Router), press Enter. Figure 8-9 is
shown.
COMMAND STATUS
library0:13F0076:IPv4:9.11.219.170:IPv6:2002:90B:E002:219:9:11:219:170

Figure 8-9. COMMAND STATUS
Ping Hardware Test for 3577 L5U Tape Library

This procedure allows you to verify the hardware connections by testing the Ethernet connections between
the 3592 C06 controller and the routers, LAN Network Switches, and other controllers.
1. Unless it is already connected, connect the Service Terminal to the 3592 C06 controller. See
“Connecting the Service Terminal” on page 4-102.
2. From the Subsystem Maintenance menu, select Control Unit Service Utilities > Issue Ping
Command
Note:
v There are no Ethernet connections to the 4 Gb Fibre Switches.
3. Select Issue Ping Command. Press Enter.
4. Select the appropriate IP address for your configuration. Example. 192.168.251.25 for LAN address in
251 Router. Press Enter.
Note: Failures can be caused by:

v An open or missing Ethernet cable.
v A failing Ethernet Router Assembly.

v The integrated Ethernet ports in the 3592 C06 controller (if you cannot communicate through
any connection). For the Integrated Ethernet ports refer to Figure 2-6 on page 2-15 and
Figure 3-20 on page 3-71. See Ethernet Port 1 (en0) 10 and Ethernet Port 2 (en1) 9.
Checkout Of ESCON Or FICON Adapters Before Host Attach – 3577

L5U Tape Library
Note: These ESCON wrap tools are in the ship group. This also applies to the FICON wrap tools, if they
are installed.
4. This completes the diagnostic checkout of the ESCON or FICON adapters.

Chapter 9. Notices
References in this publication to IBM programs or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these
available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is
not intended to state or imply that only IBM's product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally
equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any of IBM's intellectual property rights may
be used instead of the IBM product, program, or service. Evaluation and verification of operation in
conjunction with other products, except those expressly designed by IBM, is the user's responsibility.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically
made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM
may make improvements and/or changes in the products and/or programs described in this publication at
any time.
This document contains general information, as well as requirements, for use on IBM and third-party
products. IBM makes no warranty, express or implied, as to its completeness or accuracy, and the data
contained herein is current only as of the date of publication. It assumes that the user understands the
relationship among any affected systems, machines, programs, and media.
IBM or third parties may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in
this document, including appearance design patents or applications. The furnishing of this document does
not constitute or imply a grant of any license under any patents, patent applications, trademarks, copyright,
or other rights of IBM or of any third party, or any right to refer to IBM in any advertising or other
promotional or marketing activities. IBM assumes no responsibility for any infringement of patents or other
rights that may result from use of this document or from the manufacture, use, lease, or sale of apparatus
described herein.
Licenses under IBM's utility patents are available on reasonable and non-discriminatory terms and
conditions. IBM does not grant licenses under its appearance design patents. You can send license
inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood
NY 10594, U.S.A.
For on-line versions of this book, we authorize you to:

v Copy, modify, and print the documentation contained on the media, for use within your enterprise,
provided you reproduce the copyright notice, all warning statements, and other required statements on
each copy or partial copy.
v Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when you transfer the related IBM product
(which may be either machines you own, or programs, if the program's license terms permit a transfer).
You must, at the same time, destroy all other copies of the documentation.
You are responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property taxes, resulting from this
authorization.
THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this authorization. Upon termination, you must
destroy your machine readable documentation.

Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business
Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. If these and other IBM trademarked
terms are marked on their first occurrence in this information with a trademark symbol (® or ™), these
symbols indicate U.S. registered or common law trademarks owned by IBM at the time this information
was published. Such trademarks may also be registered or common law trademarks in other countries. A
current list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at "Copyright and trademark information" at
www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml
The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries or both:
9076 SP2 AIX AIX 6000 Application System/400®

AS/400® Enterprise System/9000 ES/9000 ESCON/FICON
IBM POWERparallel RISC System/6000 RISC/6000
RS/6000® Scalable POWERparallel Systems® SP2 System/390®
The following terms are trademarks of other companies: StorageTek is a registered trademark of Storage
Technology Corporation.
Sun and SunOS are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
TDS is a registered trademark of Texas Digital Systems, Inc.
3M is a registered trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through
X/Open Company Limited.
Symbols
The following symbols are used in this manual:
Symbol
Description
Imprinted on the panel to indicate that the device requires service if the Processor Check LED is
lighted. Also imprinted on the Change Mode switch to allow the SSR (System Service
Representative) to change between the operator menus and the CE menus.
Displayed on the panel to indicate that trace data is stored in the device. Also printed in text as an
attention notice.
Printed in text and in figures to indicate an ESD-sensitive part.

Displayed on the panel to indicate that the thumbwheel on the cartridge is set to the file-protected
position. Also imprinted on the magazine of the ACF to indicate the position where the magazine
door is locked.
Displayed on the panel to indicate that the host file-protected the volume.
Displayed on the panel to indicate that the thumbwheel on the cartridge is set to the not
file-protected position. Also imprinted on the magazine of the ACF to indicate the position where
the magazine door is unlocked.
All Countries
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/EC on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility.
IBM cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a
non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.
Chapter 9. Notices 9-3

Chapter 10. Glossary
This glossary defines the special terms, abbreviations, and acronyms used in this publication and other
related publications. If you do not find the term you are looking for, see the IBM Glossary of Computing
Terms located at the following Web site:
www.ibm.com/ibm/terminology __________________
A
AC alternating current
access method
A technique for moving data between main storage and input or output devices
adj adjustment
AEN asynchronous event notification
AES Advanced Encryption Standard. A block cipher adopted as an encryption standard by the US
Government.
AIX Advanced Interactive Executive. IBM's implementation of the UNIX operating system. The RS/6000
system, among others, runs the AIX operating system
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ARTIC
A real time interface processor. In a tape library, the RS-422 communication path between the
drive and the library manager
ASCII American National Standard Code for Information Interchange. A 7-bit coded character set (8 bits
including parity check) that consists of control characters and graphic characters
assigning a device
The establishing of the relationship of a device to a running task, process, job, or program
assignment
The naming of a specific device to perform a function
asynchronous
Pertaining to two or more processes that do not depend upon the occurrence of specific events
such as common timing signals
attention (notice)
Calls attention to the possibility of danger to a program, device, or system, or to data. Contrast
with caution and danger
ATTN attention
B
backhitch
Magnetic tape that makes a slight backward motion just prior to moving forward
backup
To make additional copies of documents or software for safekeeping
bar code
A code representing characters by sets of parallel bars of varying thickness and separation that
are read optically by scanning.
BCR buffer channel remainder register

BCSE buffer channel status/error register
BDSE buffer device status/error register
beginning-of-tape (BOT)
The location on a magnetic tape that indicates the start of the permissible recording area
bezel Decorative and safety cover
bicolored
Having two colors
BM or bill of materials
A list of specific types and amounts of direct materials expected to be used to produce a given job
or quantity of output
BOB beginning-of-block
BOT beginning-of-tape
buffer A routine or storage used to compensate for a difference in rate of flow of data or time of
occurrence of events, when transferring data from one device to another
bus A facility for transferring data between several devices located between two end points, only one
device being able to transmit at a given moment
C
canister
Complete 3592 tape subsystem including the housing, internal tape loader, head, and electronics,
but without DC or AC power
cartridge
Term used to refer to either the IBM Cartridge System Tape or the IBM Enhanced Capacity
Cartridge System Tape.
caution (notice)
Calls attention to possible personal harm to people. Contrast with attention and danger
CCW channel command word
CCW chain
A list of channel command words to be performed in sequence
CE customer engineer. See preferred term service representative
CEM customer engineering memorandum
CER channel error register
certificate
A digital document that binds a public key to the identity of the certificate owner, thereby enabling
the certificate owner to be authenticated.
channel command
An instruction that directs a data channel, control unit, or device to perform an operation or set of
operations
char character
CHK check
cm centimeter
command
A control signal that initiates an action or the start of a sequence of actions

concurrent
Refers to diagnostic procedures that can be run on one control unit while the rest of the
subsystem remains available for customer applications
contingent connection
A connection between a channel path and a drive caused when a unit check occurs during an I/O
operation
controller
A device that provides the interface between a system and one or more tape drives
CP circuit protector
cradle Mechanical frame capable of housing two tape canisters. Can be installed in 3494 L22, D22 or
D24 frame
CRC cyclic redundancy check
CRR channel request register
ctrl control
CU control unit or controller
D
danger (notice)
Calls attention to possible lethal harm to people. Contrast with attention and caution
data Any representations such as characters or analog quantities to which meaning is or might be
assigned
data buffer
The storage buffer in the control unit. This buffer is used to increase the data transfer rate
between the control unit and the channel
data check
A synchronous or asynchronous indication of a condition caused by invalid data or incorrect
positioning of data
dc direct current
degradation
A decrease in quality of output or throughput or an increase in machine error rate
degraded
Decreased in quality of output or throughput or increased machine error rate
deserialize
To change from serial-by-bit to parallel-by-byte
detented
A part being held in position with a catch or lever
DEV device
DIAG Diagnostic section of the maintenance information (MI)
direct access storage
A storage device in which the access time is independent of the location of the data
diskette
A thin, flexible magnetic disk and a protective jacket, in which the disk is permanently enclosed.
Compare with hard disk
DK data key. An alphanumeric string used to encrypt data
Chapter 10. Glossary 10-3

DLR device level register
DLX device configuration register (hexadecimal 13)
DRAM dynamic random-access memory
drive, magnetic tape
A mechanism for moving and controlling magnetic tape
DRV drive
DSE data security erase
DSE (register)
device status and error register
DSH Control unit serial high register
DSL Control unit serial low register
DSP digital signal processor
E
EBCDIC
extended binary-coded decimal interchange code
EC edge connector
engineering change
ECC error correction code
EEDK externally encrypted data key. A Data Key that has been encrypted (wrapped) by a Key Encryption
Key prior to being stored in the data cartridge. Compare with KEK
EEFMT2
Enterprise Encryption Format. AES 256 bit encrypted data written recorded at the performance
and capacity format used by the native 3592 Model E05.
EEPROM
electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
EIA Electronics Industries Association
EIA unit
A unit of measure established by the Electronic Industries Association, equal to 44.45 millimeters
(1.75 inches)
EMC error match code
Encryption Key Manager
A server that issues and validates encryption keys.
encryption
The conversion of data into a cipher. A key is required to encrypt and decrypt the data. Encryption
provides protection from persons or software that attempt to access the data without the key
end-of-block (EOB)
A code that marks the end of a block of data
end-of-file (EOF)
A code that marks the end of a file of data
end-of-tape (EOT)
The end of the recording area on a tape
EOB See end-of-block

EOF See end-of-file
EOT See end-of-tape
EPO Emergency power off, or, the switch that removes all power from the equipment
EPROM
erasable programmable read-only memory
EQC equipment check
equipment check
An asynchronous indication of a malfunction
EREP environmental record editing and printing program
A program that makes the data contained in the system recorder file available for further analysis
error log
A dataset or file in a product or system where error information is stored for later access
ERP See error recovery procedure
ESCON
See Enterprise Systems Connection
Enterprise Systems Connection (ESCON)
IBM products that provide a connected environment within an enterprise. The ESCON channel
connections allow the controller to communicate with a System
ESD electrostatic discharge
F
fault symptom code (FSC)
A hexadecimal code generated by the drive or the control unit microcode in response to a
detected subsystem error
fiducial
A target used for teaching a physical location to a robot
FC feature code
FICON
fibre connection
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FID FRU identifier (may be more than one FRU)
field replaceable unit (FRU)
An assembly that is replaced in its entirety when any one of its components fails
file A named set of records stored or processed as a unit. Also referred to as a dataset
file protection
The processes and procedures established in an information system that are designed to inhibit
unauthorized access to, contamination of, or deletion of a file
Flash EEPROM
An electrically-erasable, programmable, read-only memory (EEPROM) that can be updated
FMR field microcode replacement
format
The arrangement or layout of data on a data medium

formatter
Part of a magnetic tape subsystem that performs data conversion, speed matching, encoding, first
level error recovery, and interfaces to one or more tape drives
FP file protect
frayed Damaged, as if by an abrasive substance
FRU field replaceable unit
FSC fault symptom code
FSI fault symptom index
functional microcode
Microcode that is resident in the machine during normal customer operation
G
g gram
gnd ground
H
hard disk
A rigid magnetic disk such as the internal disk used in personal computers. Compare with diskette
hertz (Hz)
Unit of frequency. One hertz equals one cycle per second
hex hexadecimal
host system
A data processing system that is used to prepare programs and the operating environments for
use on another computer or controller
hot pluggable
Ability to remove or insert a component of a subsystem with power applied without electrically
damaging that component or the subsystem
Hz Hertz (cycles per second)
I
IBG interblock gap
icon A pictorial representation of an object or a selection choice. Icons can represent objects that users
want to work on or actions that users want to perform
ID identifier
identifier (ID)
In programming languages, a lexical unit that names a language object; for example, the names of
variables, arrays, records, labels, or procedures. An identifier usually consists of a letter optionally
followed by letters, digits, or other characters
One or more characters used to identify or name data element and possibly to indicate certain
properties of that data element
A sequence of bits or characters that identifies a program, device, or system to another program,
device, or system
IDRC improved data recording capability
IML initial microprogram load

improved data recording format
An improved data recording mode that can increase the effective data capacity and the effective
data rate when enabled and invoked
initial microprogram load (IML)
The action of loading a microprogram from an external storage to writable control storage
initial program load (IPL)
The initialization procedure that causes an operating system to commence operation
initiator
The component that executes a command. The initiator can be the host system or the tape control
unit
INST installation
interblock gap (IBG)
An area on a data medium to indicate the end of a block or physical record
interface
A shared boundary. An interface might be a hardware component to link two devices or it might be
a portion of storage or registers accessed by two or more computer programs
IP Internet Protocol
When in a tape library, the LAN communication path between the host and the library manager.
This communication path is used for tape library commands that do not require the controller,
while the SCSI bus is used for commands, data, and responses that do require the controller. All
SCSI-attached processors require an RS-232 or a LAN attachment for library control
interposer
The part used to convert a 68-pin connector to a 50-pin D-shell connector
intervention required
Manual action is needed
INTRO
introduction
I/O input/output
IOP input/output processor
IPL initial program load
ITST idle-time self-test
K
KEK key encrypting key
key encrypting key
An alphanumeric string used to encrypt the Data Key. Compare with EEDK
keystore
A database of private keys and their associated X.509 digital certificate chains used to
authenticate the corresponding public keys
km kilometer
KVM switch
keyboard, video, mouse switch
The switch is designed to accept three sets of three inputs, and to connect them to one set of
output devices

L
LAN local area network
A computer network within a limited area
LED light-emitting diode
loadable
Having the ability to be loaded
LMA Library Manager A
LMB Library Manager B
LZ-1 Lempel-Ziv electronic data compactor
M
magnetic tape
A tape with a magnetic surface layer on which data can be stored by magnetic recording
MAP maintenance analysis procedure
mask A pattern of characters that controls the retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of
characters. To use a pattern of characters to control the retention or elimination of portions of
another pattern of characters
master file
A file used as an authority in a given job and that is relatively permanent, even though its contents
may change. Synonymous with main file
media capacity
The amount of data that can be contained on a storage medium, expressed in bytes of data
menu A panel containing a list of functions available for selection
MI maintenance information
micro one millionth of
microcode
One or more microinstructions
A code, representing the instructions of an instruction set, implemented in a part of storage that is
not program-addressable
To design, write, and test one or more microinstructions. See also microprogram
microdiagnostic routine
A program that runs under the control of a supervisor, usually to identify field replaceable units
microdiagnostic utility
A program that is run by the customer engineer to test the machine
microinstruction
A basic or elementary machine instruction
Represents microinstructions used in a product as an alternative to hard-wired circuitry to
implement certain functions of a processor or other system component
microprogram
A dynamic arrangement or selection of one or more groups of microinstructions that, when
executed, performs a preplanned function
MIM media information message
mm millimeter

modifier
That which changes the meaning
mount a device
To assign an I/O device with a request to the operator
MP microprocessor
ms millisecond
MSG message
multipath
Pertaining to using more than one path
N
N/A not applicable
node In a network, a point at which one or more functional units connects channels or data circuits
NVS nonvolatile storage
A storage device whose contents are not lost when power is cut off
O
offline Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit without the continual control of a computer. Contrast
with online
online Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit that is under the continual control of a computer.
Contrast with offline
OPER operation, operator
ov over voltage
overrun
Loss of data because a receiving device is unable to accept data at the rate it is transmitted
P
p bit parity bit
parameter
A variable that is given a constant value for a specified application and that may denote the
application
PC parity check
PDU power distribution unit
PE parity error
PGID path group identification
PM preventive maintenance
POR power-on reset
port A physical connection for communication
POST power-on self-test
power-on self-test (POST)
A series of diagnostic tests that are run automatically by a device when the power is turned on
PROM programmable read-only memory

PS power supply
PTF program temporary fix
PWR power
R
RAM random access memory
random access memory
A storage device into which data is entered and from which data is retrieved in a nonsequential
manner
RAS An IBM engineering group that is responsible for product reliability, availability, and serviceability
record
A collection of related data or words, treated as a unit
recording density
The number of bits in a single linear track measured per unit of length of the recording medium
recoverable error
An error condition that allows continued execution of a program
ref reference
reg register
retension
The process or function of tightening the tape onto the cartridge, if it is sensed that the tape has a
loose wrap on the cartridge
RPQ request for price quotation
R/W read/write
RS-422
An EIA standard for serial interfaces between computers and communication equipment, using
serial data interchange
A four wire interface consisting of a differential pair for receiving serial data and separate
differential pair for transmitting serial data
S
SARS Statistical analysis and reporting system
The microcode in the drive that assists in determining if read and write errors are caused by the
tape or the hardware
screen
The viewing area of a workstation's display
SCSI small computer system interface
segment
A part
SEK session encrypted key
A data key that has been encrypted (wrapped) for secure transfer between the Encryption Key
Manager and the 3592 (TS1120) Tape Drive. Compare with SK
sel select
service representative
Person who services your IBM equipment

Synonym for CE, customer engineer, field engineer, SSR
serialize
To change from parallel-by-byte to serial-by-bit
serializer
A device that converts a space distribution of simultaneous states representing data into a
corresponding time sequence of states
servo An adjective noun for use in qualifying some part or aspect of a servomechanism
servomechanism
A feedback control system in which at least one of the system signals represents mechanical
motion
SFP small form-factor pluggable (similar to GBIC)
SIM service information message
SK session key
An alphanumeric string used to encrypt the Data Key for secure transfer between the Encryption
Key Manager and the 3592 TS1120 Tape Drive. Compare with SEK
small computer system interface (SCSI)
An input and output bus that provides a standard interface between the host system and the
controller or tape drive
SNS sense
special feature
A feature that can be ordered to enhance the capability, storage capacity, or performance of a
product, but is not essential for its basic work
SRAM static random access memory
SRN service request number
SS status store
ST store
standard feature
The significant design elements of a product that are included as part of the fundamental product
Stoplock
A position-hold mode used when the tape is in a stopped position and under tension
subsystem
A secondary or subordinate system, usually capable of operating independently of, or
asynchronously with, a controlling system
SUPP support
sync synchronous, synchronize
Occurring with a regular or predictable time relationship
T
TAC technical area code
tachometer, tach
A device that emits pulses that are used to measure rotation speed
tape cartridge
A container holding magnetic tape that can be processed without separating it from the container

tape void
An area in the tape in which no signal can be detected
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
When in a tape library, the LAN communication path between the host and the library manager.
while the SCSI bus is used for commands, data, and responses that do require the controller. All
TCU tape control unit
TH thermal
thread/load operation
A procedure that places tape along the tape path
TM tapemark.
tty When in a tape library, the RS-232 communication path between the host and the library manager.
while the SCSI bus is used for commands, data, and responses that do require the controller,. All
U
UART universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
uCode or Ucode
microcode
unload
Prepare the tape cartridge for removal from the drive
utilities
utility programs
utility programs
A computer program in general support of the processes of a computer; for instance, a diagnostic
program
uv under voltage
V
VOLSER
volume serial number
volume
A certain portion of data, together with its data carrier, that can be handled conveniently as a unit
VPD vital product data
The information contained within the tape drive that requires nonvolatile storage that is used by
functional areas of the drive. This information is required by Manufacturing, RAS, and Engineering
W
WAN wide area network
A computer network within a wide area
word A character string that is convenient for some purpose to consider as an entity
WORM
write once, read many

Write write command
WT World Trade
An IBM group responsible for marketing and service of products outside the U.S.A.
X
XR external register
XRA external register address

Communication Statements
People's Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission Statement
Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Avis de conformité à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conform à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
European Union (EU) Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/EC, on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot
accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a
non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A Information Technology
Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for
commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication equipment.
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product might cause radio
interference in which case the user might be required to take adequate measures.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Class A Statement

This equipment has been tested and complies with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission
limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than
recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 A-1

Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:
Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Verträglichkeit
Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG zur Angleichung der
Rechtsvorschriften über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die
Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein.
Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu
betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der IBM empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM
übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne
Zustimmung der IBM verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne
Empfehlung der IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden.
EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:

"Warnung: Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich
Funk-Störungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene
Maßnahmen zu ergreifen und dafür aufzukommen."
Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten
Dieses Produkt entspricht dem "Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG)".
Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit

von Geräten (EMVG) (bzw. der EMC EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EG) für Geräte der Klasse A
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformitätszeichen -
CE - zu führen.
Verantwortlich für die Einhaltung der EMV Vorschriften ist der Hersteller:
International Business Machines Corp.
New Orchard Road
Armonk, New York 10504
Tel: 919-499-1900
Der verantwortliche Ansprechpartner des Herstellers in der EU ist:

IBM Deutschland GmbH
Technical Regulations, Abteilung M456
IBM-Allee 1, 71139 Ehningen, Germany
Generelle Informationen:
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse A.
Japan VCCI Class A ITE Electronic Emission Statement

vcci
A-2 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Taiwan Class A Electronic Emission Statement
Taiwan Contact Information

IBM Taiwan Product Service Contact Info:
IBM Taiwan Corporation
3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd., Taipei Taiwan
Tel: 0800-016-888
Communication Statements A-3

A-4 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information
Part number index
Part Asm– Part Asm–
Number Index Page Number Index Page
03N4712 1–7 C-3 39J5218 1–24 C-3
03N4713 1–6 C-3 39J5301 1– C-3
03N5002 1–19 C-3 39J5328 1– C-3
03N5029 1– C-3 39J5590 1– C-3
03N5830 1–21 C-3 39J5674 1– C-3
03N6000 1–20 C-3 39M5102 2– C-5
03N6005 1–22 C-3 39M5123 2– C-5
03N6325 1–2 C-3 39M5130 2– C-5
03N6353 1–11 C-3 39M5144 2– C-5
03N7039 2– C-5 39M5151 2– C-5
12R8251 1–16 C-3 39M5158 2– C-5
12R9312 1– C-3 39M5165 2– C-5
12R9314 1– C-3 39M5172 2– C-5
12R9561 2– C-5 39M5206 2– C-5
12R9583 2– C-5 39M5247 2– C-5
12R9587 2– C-5 39M5254 2– C-5
12R9592 2– C-5 40K5325 2– C-5
12R9596 2– C-5 40K5330 2– C-5
12R9656 2– C-5 41U0123 2– C-5
12R9674 2– C-5 44V2774 1–15 C-3
12R9914 2– C-5 44V2774 1–15 C-3
16G8095 1– C-3 44V2817 1–15 C-3
19K1280 2– C-5 53P4521 1–12 C-3
19P5445 2– C-5 53P5869 1–10 C-3
23R2550 2– C-5 95P2155 2– C-5
23R2770 1– C-3 95P2360 1– C-3
23R2770 2– C-5 95P2793 2– C-5
23R3164 2– C-5 95P2816 2– C-5
23R5547 2– C-5 95P2817 2– C-5
23R5549 2– C-5 95P2818 2– C-5
23R5614 1– C-3 95P2819 2– C-5
23R5615 1– C-3 95P2824 2– C-5
23R5616 1– C-3 97P4178 1–3 C-3
23R5659 2– C-5 97P4179 1–1 C-3
24R0515 2– C-5 97P5263 1–4 C-3
24R0831 2– C-5
24R2051 2– C-5
25R5552 1– C-3
28L0657 1–14 C-3
39J0998 1–13 C-3
39J1002 1–8 C-3
39J1268 1–25 C-3
39J2159 1– C-3
39J2432 1–17 C-3
39J2473 1–26 C-3
39J3273 1–5 C-3
39J4062 1–15 C-3
39J4588 1–23 C-3
39J4951 1–9 C-3
39J5065 1–18 C-3
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 B-1

B-2 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information
Parts Catalog
Parts Catalog
Assemblies List
3592 C06 Controller Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Cable List and Miscellaneous Hardware Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 C-1

Assembly 1: 3592 C06 Controller Parts
3 8
7
1
2 6
4
5
12
11
9 13
18
10 14
17
15
16
19
26 20
25 21
24
22
23
c0600053
C-2 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Assembly 1: (continued)
Asm– Part
Index Number Units Description
1– 25R5552 NP 3592 C06 Controller Assembly
–1 97P4179 2 Filler, DASD
–2 03N6325 2 Hard Drive ( HDD), 73.4 GB
–3 97P4178 2 Bezel, HDD
–4 97P5263 1 Cable, Operator Panel
–5 39J3273 1 Operator Panel Assembly
–6 03N4713 1 DVD RAM Drive
–7 03N4712 1 DVD ROM Drive
–8 39J1002 1 Filler, Removable Media
–9 39J4951 2 Power Supply
–10 53P5869 2 PCI Divider
–11 03N6353 1 VPD Card - Gordon Card
–12 53P4521 1 Mounting Divider, PCI
–13 39J0998 1 Mounting Bracket, Power Supply
–14 28L0657 1 Thumbscrew, Card Mounting
–15 39J4062 1 832D Card, 2-Way, 1.9 GHZ, System Backplane (Sysplanar)
–15 44V2774 1 832D Card 2-Way, 1.9 GHZ, System Backplane (Sysplanar)
–15 44V2817 1 53C5 Card 2-Way, 1.9 GHZ, System Backplane (Sysplanar)
–15 44V2774 1 2-Way, 1.9 GHZ, System Backplane (Sysplanar)
–16 12R8251 4 DIMMs, 512 MB
–17 39J2432 4 Filler, DIMM Baffle
–18 39J5065 2 Voltage Regulator Module, 1.2 V
–19 03N5002 1 Card, Backplane
For Fan Cage, Poe Card
–20 03N6000 1 SCSI Backplane Card
For HDDs, Force Card
–21 03N5830 1 Service Processor Card Assembly F(flexible) SP, Alpha Card
–22 03N6005 1 Removable Media Backplane, Ridley Card
–23 39J4588 1 Fan Box Assembly
Contains Fans A4 and A5
–24 39J5218 1 Fan Cable Assembly
–25 39J1268 1 Fan Tray
For Fans A2 and A3
–26 39J2473 2 Fan Assembly
Fan A2 or A3
– 03N5029 2 Adapter, 2-port FCP Tape Adapter
– 95P2360 AR Adapter, ESCON (NP4M)
– 23R5615 AR Adapter, 4 km LW Card FICON
– 23R5616 AR Adapter, 10 km LW Card FICON
– 23R5614 AR Adapter, SW Card FICON
– 16G8095 AR Battery, Coin Type (In FSP)
– 39J5674 AR Bracket Assembly for Latching Front Cover, Left
– 39J5590 AR Bracket Assembly for Latching Front Cover, Right
– 39J5328 AR Front Cover Assembly, Blue
– 39J2159 AR FSP Filler Tailstock
Metal Part on Top of FSP
– 23R2770 AR GBIC (SFP) Insert for FICON SW Adapter Card
Left and Right Rails For Mounting Controller in Frame or Rack
– 39J5301 AR Rail Kit
– 12R9312 AR Wrap Plug, ESCON
– 12R9314 AR Wrap Plug, Fibre/FICON
Parts Catalog C-3

Assembly 2: Cable List and Miscellaneous Hardware Items
2
System LEDs
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2
j70m0070
Ethernet LEDs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
j70m0114
RX ACT LINK
10101
POWER SYSTEM TEMP

ON FAULT FAULT
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Port LED System LEDs

Asm– Part
Index Number Units Description
2– NP Cable List
– 19P5445 AR Cable, Fibre, 3 meter 50 Micron LC/LC
– 12R9914 AR Cable, Fibre, 5 meter LC/LC
– 12R9561 AR Cable, Fibre, 31 meter 50 micron LC/LC
– 12R9583 AR Cable, Fibre, 2 meter 9 micron LC/SC
– 12R9656 AR Cable, Fibre, 31 meter 62.5 micron MT-RJ to MT-RJ
– 12R9674 AR Cable, Fibre, 31 meter 62.5 micron MT-RJ to ESCON
– 41U0123 AR Cable, Fibre, 2 meter 62.5 micron MT-RJ to ESCON
– 23R3164 AR Cable, RS-232 Interface
Used with TSSC
– 95P2816 AR Cable, Ethernet, 1 meter
– 95P2817 AR Cable, Ethernet, 3.2 meter
– 95P2818 AR Cable Assembly Ethernet, 5 meter
– 19K1280 AR GBIC (SFP)
Insert for 2 Gb, 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
– 23R2770 AR GBIC (SFP)
Insert for 4Gb, 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
– 95P2155 AR Label Package, 3953 Frame
– 39M5102 AR Line Cord - Australia
– 39M5206 AR Line Cord - China
– 39M5130 AR Line Cord - Denmark
– 39M5123 AR Line Cord - France
– 39M5172 AR Line Cord - Israel
– 39M5165 AR Line Cord - Italy
– 39M5144 AR Line Cord - South Africa
– 39M5158 AR Line Cord - Switzerland
– 39M5254 AR Line Cord - Thailand
– 39M5151 AR Line Cord - United Kingdom
– 39M5247 AR Line Cord - USA
– 03N7039 AR Modem - China
– 40K5325 AR Monitor 4938-7NU - Northern Hemisphere
– 40K5330 AR Monitor 4938-7EX - Equatorial Regions
– 24R0831 AR Null Modem Cable
– 24R0515 AR Power Supply, 2 Gb, 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
– 95P2824 AR Power Supply, 4 Gb, 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch
– 23R5549 AR SMC 8-Port Router
– 24R2051 AR Switch, 2 Gb, 20-Port Fibre Channel
– 23R2550 AR Switch, 4 Gb, 20-Port Fibre Channel
– 23R5547 AR Switch, 16-port Ethernet
– 23R5659 AR Router, Cisco 1811
Parts Catalog C-5


Index
Numerics attachment in 3953 F05 Tape Frames, IP chart for 3592
C06 3-26
1.86Gib (2Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch 2-17
attention led, disturbance or system 4-158
2Gb fibre channel switch 5-28
attention LED, system 8-3
removal 5-28
attention LEDs 8-3
replacement 5-28
3.72Gib (4Gb) 20-Port Fibre Channel Switch 2-21
3592 C06 Controller 2-15, 2-17
3592 C06 controller board 5-49
B
3592 C06 controller features battery 5-5
rack installation 2-13 bezels, disk drive 5-13
3592 C06 controller VPD replacement 5-8
3952 F05 frame features 2-10
3953 F05 expansion frame check out 3-18 C
3953 F05 Frame C20
features 2-6 quantity of drives and controllers allowed 3-2
3953 F05 frame, cabling to the external switch (director), verify 3-76
configuring LAN for 3592 C06 controller in 4-12 card hot-swap, PCI adapter 5-35
3953 F05 Tape Frame catalog, parts C-2
quantity of drives and controllers allowed 3-2 CD-ROM 4-58
quantity of drives and controllers attached to C20 channel switch, fibre 8-5, 8-10
frame 3-2 characteristics, RAS 2-25
3953 F05 Tape Frames, IP chart for 3592 C06 controller checking
attachment in a3953 F05 Tape Frames 3-26 3494 D22 Frame 3-41
4Gb fibre channel switch 3592 C06 controller attached to 3-29
removal 5-30 3592 C06 controller in 3-41
replacement 5-30 rack 3-63
507 3592 C06 controller in a 3-18, 3-55
display of 1-2 3953 F05 expansion frame 3-18
C06 in
F05 frame cabled to C20 3-55
A C20 frame 3-55
about 3-1 D24/D22 frame 3-29
ac grounding diagram 7-5 checking the number of attached devices 4-3
accessing information center checkout
via Internet 4-160 ESCON or FICON adapters 3-15
via Service Terminal 4-161 Verify/Checkout Instructions
Activate Microcode in 3592 C06 controller 4-74 Diagnostic Checkout Of ESCON Or FICON
adapter card hot-swap, PCI 5-35 Adapters Before Host Attach – 3953 F05 Base
adapters, diagnostic checkout of ESCON or Frame 3-15
Ficon 3-15 checkout of ESCON or FICON adapters,
adding diagnostic 3-15
new microcode images to controller 4-2 codes
new microcode to controller, alternate method 4-2 reference 8-2
tape drives to 3592 C06 controller - codes, location
concurrently 4-1 information center 5-56
AIX listing 5-55
analyze log 4-2 collecting
Installing AIX code 4-58 dumps 4-88
problem analysis 8-1 reference codes 8-2
alternate commit temporary firmware image 4-152
method to add new microcode to controller (using communication statements A-1
TSSC) 4-2 completion report form 7-5
analyze the AIX log 4-2 concurrent 2Gb switch removal and replacement 5-27
ASMI, power ON controller 4-87 concurrent 4Gb switch removal and replacement 5-29
assembly, fan tray 5-21 condition codes 8-4, 8-5, 8-10
attach, point-to-point drive 4-85 configuration
attach, point-to-point drive 3584 Tape Library 4-86 250 Encryption Router 4-118
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 X-1

configuration (continued) drive attach, point-to-point 3584 Tape Library 4-86
251 Encryption Router 4-112 drive setup for external switch 4-41
dual 4-65 drives hot-swap, disk 5-15
Encryption Key Manager IP addresses Dual LAN configuration 4-65
non-library managed environments 4-146 dump data, retrieving engineering and 4-88
frames 3-1 DVD-ROM 4-58
LAN in 3494 Tape Library environment 4-65, 4-66
second 250 Encryption Router 4-134
second 251 Encryption Router 4-130 E
single 4-66 EBTERM, start up on library manger 4-43
terminal emulator (NetTerm) set up 4-51 EKM
TSSC router LAN or WAN 4-89 procedures
configuration matrix dual, LAN 3-77 making entries for path to out-of-band EKM 4-3
configuration matrix single, LAN 3-81 electrical safety xxii
configuration, dual LAN 4-65 enable drive encryption 4-54
configuration, single LAN 4-66 encryption
configuring enable drive 4-54
LAN for 3592 C06 controller in 3953 F05 In-Band Key Flow 2-2
frame 4-12 key paths 2-2
control panel 5-7 keys, about 2-5
replacement control panel 5-8 Out-of-Band Key Flow 2-2
controls overview 2-5
security 2-27 router configuration
security for remote support access 2-27 Encryption Key Manager 250 4-118
Controls and Connections 2-15 Encryption Key Manager 251 4-112
create non-library managed environments 4-146
dump 4-88 second 250 Encryption Router 4-134
second 251 Encryption Router 4-130
setting 250 Encryption Router configuration 4-118
D setting 251 Encryption Router configuration 4-112
decoding SIM refcodes 6-11 setting Encryption Key Manager IP addresses
description of expansion frame lan network non-library managed environments 4-146
connections 3-16 setting second 250 Encryption Router
determining configuration 4-134
firmware level 4-151 setting second 251 Encryption Router
device SIM 6-4 configuration 4-130
diagnostic checkout of ESCON or FICON End-of- call procedure 4-55
adapters 3-15 engineering and dump data, retrieving 4-88
diagnostics ERA 48
execute from the 3592 C06 controller 4-101 ES/9000 EREP 6-22
diagnostics, running FICON 4-94 ES/9000
DIMMs EREP
location 5-31 Format 71 6-17
removal 5-31 ESCON
replacement 5-32 checkout
direct attach point-to-point 4-85 3494 D22 Frame 3-54
direct attach point-to-point 3584 Tape Library 4-86 3494 D24 Frame 3-40
disk drive C20 3-62
bezels and fillers 5-13 rack 3-68, 8-14
hot-swap 5-15 ESCON or FICON adapters, diagnostic checkout
disk drive backplane of 3-15
removal 5-11 ESD kit 2-29
replacement 5-12 ethernet port 2 4-80
disturbance or system attention led 4-158 external switch (director), verify cabling to the 3-76
download, firmware 4-39 external switch, drive setup for 4-41
drive
activate microcode 4-156
fillers (disk) 5-13 F
hot-swap (disk) 5-15 F05 frame
replacement 5-20 configuring LAN for 3592 C06 controller in
drive attach, point-to-point 4-85 3953 4-12
X-2 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

F05 frame (continued) installation (continued)
ethernet connections 3-41 information center on service terminal 4-57
unpack 3-41 prior to 3-1
fan tray assembly 5-21 starting point 1-1
fans, hot-swap 5-23 troubleshooting 3-1
features Installation
3953 F05 Frame 2-6 tools 3-2
fibre channel installation instructions
2Gb switch LEDs 8-5 C20 frame 3-55
4Gb switch LEDs 8-10 rack frame, installation instructions 3-63
fibre channel switch 8-5, 8-10 Installing AIX code 4-58
fibre switch setup, run 4-93 installing SFP 5-46
FICON instructions, rack safety xxii
checkout Internet
3494 D22 Frame 3-54 accessing information center via 4-160
3494 D24 Frame 3-40 intervention required (starting point) 1-7
C20 3-62 Introduction xxvii
rack 3-68, 8-14 IP chart for 3592 C06 attachment in 3953 F05 Tape
FICON adapters, diagnostic checkout of ESCON Frames 3-26
or 3-15
FICON diagnostics, running 4-94
field merge 3592 C06 controller 3-86 J
fillers, disk drive 5-13 J70 control unit features 2-11, 2-12
firmware 4-151 JES2 job log
level 4-151 description 6-20
update 4-151 JES2 job log, description 6-20
Firmware Update Via AIX 4-56
firmware updates
system 4-151 L
flash EEPROM definition 10-5 LAN
frame F05 unpack, configuration
ethernet connections 3-29, 3-55 dual 4-65
general information 3-29, 3-55 setting router (TSSC) 4-89
single 4-66
LAN configuration matrix dual 3-77
G LAN configuration matrix single 3-81
glossary 10-1 LAN or WAN configuration (TSSC) router 4-89
grounding diagram 7-5 laser compliance statement xxv
laser safety and compliance information xxv
led, disturbance or system attention 4-158
H LEDs
handling static–sensitive devices 5-1 2Gb fibre channel switch 8-5
history log event 6-21 4Gb fibre channel switch 8-10
hot swap system attention 8-3
2Gb fibre channel switch power supply 5-40 leds, power supply 5-39
4Gb fibre channel switch power supply 5-41 location codes
disk drives 5-15 information center 5-56
fans 5-23 listing 5-55
hot-swap
PCI adapter card 5-35
M
matrix dual, LAN configuration 3-77
I matrix single, LAN configuration 3-81
icon media drives 5-47
symbol description 9-2 media information message (MIM)
information center 4-161 description 6-1
install on service terminal 4-57 severity codes 6-1
via Internet 4-160 media, slim-line replacement 5-47
information, related xxvii memory DIMMs
inspection, safety 7-1 location 5-31
installation 3-1 removal 5-31
Index X-3
memory DIMMs (continued) power ON controller (continued)
replacement 5-32 common method 4-87
menu tree 4-67 power supply 5-39
menus, service terminal connection 4-102 2Gb 20-port fibre channel switch 5-40
MIM 4Gb 20-port fibre channel switch 5-41
bit meaning description 6-8 removal 5-40, 5-41
EREP replacement 5-41, 5-42
Format 70 6-19 power supply leds 5-39
format 70 EREP 6-19 pre-configured router
show/change reporting 4-150 setting controller routes to use
start entry 1-4 250 Encryption Router 4-127
MIM reporting, show/change SIM 4-150 251 Encryption Router 4-123
modules, voltage regulator 5-52 preparing controller for service 4-88
problem
analysis (AIX) 8-1
N procedure
NetTerm removal
connection to remote modem 4-52 2Gb 20-port fibre channel switch 5-40
direct connect to S1 port 4-51 4Gb 20-port fibre channel switch 5-41
start up 4-46 replacement
terminal emulator set up 4-51 2Gb 20-port fibre channel switch 5-40
non-disruptive drive addition 4-111 4Gb 20-port fibre channel switch 5-41
notices 9-1 procedures
about xxi 3592 C06 controller in 3953 F05 Tape Frame
rack safety xxii connected to 3494 D24 Frame 3-29
safety 3592 C06 in 3952 F05 frame connected to
electrical xxii C20 3-55
laser xxv 3592 Tape Drive replacement 5-20
safety (Portuguese) 7-2 activate tape drive microcode 4-156
number of attached devices, checking 4-3 add tape drives
concurrently 4-1
alternate power off the 3592 C06 controller 4-87
O analyze the AIX log 4-2
open cover to service position 5-2 C20 frame installation 3-55
operating position 5-4 checking 3592 C06 controller in a rack 3-63
OS/2 operating system, using to connect Service collecting engineering and dump data 4-88
Terminal 4-103 commit temporary firmware image 4-152
overview, product 2-1 configuring 251 Encryption Router 4-112
overview, pSeries 9131 - Model 52A 2-1 configuring LAN for 3494 Tape Library 4-8
configuring LAN for 3592 C06 controller
controller 4-6
P configuring second 250 Encryption Router 4-134
connecting service terminal 4-102
parts catalog C-2
determining firmware level 4-151
assemblies list C-1
disk drives hot-swap 5-15
cables C-4
EBTERM start up 4-43
how to use C-1
EKM
switches C-4
making entries for path to out-of-band EKM 4-3
PCI adapter card hot-swap 5-35
enable drive encryption 4-54
ping hardware test 4-79, 8-13
Encryption Key Manager 4-147
Plug Chart 2-17
configuring 250 Encryption Router 4-118
point-to-point direct attach 4-85
configuring second 251 Encryption Router 4-130
point-to-point direct attach 3584 Tape Library 4-86
controller routes for using pre-configured
point-to-point drive attach 4-85
routers 4-121
point-to-point drive attach 3584 Tape Library 4-86
End-of- call 4-55
port LEDs
firmware download 4-39
2Gb switch 8-5
installation 3-29, 3-55
4Gb switch 8-10
installing
position, operating 5-4
SFP 5-46
power OFF controller 4-87
Installing AIX code 4-58
power ON controller
CD-ROM 4-58
alternate method (using ASMI) 4-87

procedures (continued) procedures (continued)
Installing AIX code (continued) setting ninth through fourteenth controller IP routes to
DVD-ROM 4-58 second 251 Encryption Router 4-138
microcode, activate tape drive 4-156 setting number of drives 4-111
microcode, add and activate 4-2 setting service mode 4-103
PCI adapter card hot-swap 5-35 setting up EBTERM 4-42
ping hardware test 4-79, 8-13 show/change SIM and MIM reporting 4-150
placing controller in service position 5-2 updating system firmware from AIX command line,
point-to-point drive attach using locally-available image 4-153
3584 Tape Library 4-86 using information center
most applications 4-85 via Internet 4-160
point-to-point drive attach 3584 Tape Library 4-86 via Service Terminal 4-161
power OFF controller 4-87 varying on/off controller 4-162
power ON 3592 C06 controller 4-87 varying on/off drives 4-162
Power ON 3592 C06 controller by using ASMI 4-87 view SIMS 4-163
preparing controller for service 4-88 processor assembly, service 5-43
reinstall controller top cover 5-3 publications xxvii
removal
4Gb fibre channel switch 5-30
backplane, disk drive 5-13 Q
backplane, system 5-49 quantity of drives and controllers allowed
battery 5-5 3953 F05 Tape Frame 3-2
control panel 5-7 C20 3-2
disk drive backplane 5-11
fan tray assembly 5-21
hot-swap disk drives 5-15 R
media, slim–line 5-47 rack
power supply 5-40, 5-41 installing controller 3-2
service processor 5-43 rack safety instructions xxii
voltage regulator module 5-52 RAS characteristics 2-25
remove controller top cover 5-2 Rear View of the SMC Router 2-15
replacement reference codes 8-2
2Gb fibre channel switch 5-28 regulator modules, voltage 5-52
4Gb fibre channel switch 5-30 reinstall controller top cover 5-3
backplane 5-50 related information xxvii
bezel, disk drive 5-13 relocation 3-90
control panel 5-8 remote support access
cover, service access 5-3 hierarchy 2-28
disk drive backplane 5-12 removal 5-28
fan tray assembly 5-22 2Gb switch concurrent 5-27
hot–swap, fans 5-24 media, slim–line 5-47
media, slim-line 5-47 removal and replacement
memory 5-32 2Gb 20-port fibre channel switch power supply 5-40
PDU 5-34 2Gb switch concurrent 5-27
power supply 5-41, 5-42 4Gb 20-port fibre channel switch power supply 5-41
service processor 5-44 4Gb fibre channel switch 5-29
SFP 5-46 concurrent 4Gb switch 5-29
replacing disk drive backplane 5-11
voltage regulator module 5-53 memory DIMMs 5-31
restart AIX and control unit code 4-88 service processor 5-43
retrieving engineering and dump data 4-88 remove and replace
return to operating position 5-4 PCI adapter card 5-35
router LAN or WAN configuration (TSSC) 4-89 replacement
running diagnostics from controller 4-101 2Gb switch concurrent 5-27
running path test 4-147 reporting, show/change SIM and MIM 4-150
SCSI/FCP configuration procedure 4-100 restart AIX and control unit code 4-88
setting correct time 4-107 retrieving
Setting DNS/IP address fields 4-111 engineering and dump data 4-88
setting Encryption Key Manager IP addresses reference codes 8-2
non-library managed environments 4-146 router
LAN or WAN configuration (TSSC) 4-89
Index X-5
router (continued) SFP 5-46
setting controller routes to use pre-configured replacement 5-46
250 Encryption Router 4-127 SFP, installing 5-46
251 Encryption Router 4-123 show/change SIM and MIM reporting 4-150
run fibre switch setup 4-93 SIM
running diagnostics decoding 1-4
from the C06 controller 4-101 decoding refcodes 6-11
running FICON diagnostics 4-94 device 6-4
format 71 EREP 6-17
show/change reporting 4-150
S start entry 1-5
safety Single LAN configuration 4-66
inspection 7-1 special tools 2-29
instructions SRN 6-7
electrical xxii start
laser xxv controller symptom 1-2
rack xxii miscellaneous symptom 1-16
laser 7-1 tape drive symptom 1-14
notices xxi, 7-1 start installation here 1-1
Portuguese 7-2 start table 1-1
SCSI drives statements
power cable 5-47 communication A-1
security safety xxi
controls 2-27 supply, power 5-39
for local access 2-27 switch (director), verify cabling to the external 3-76
for remote support access 2-27 switch LEDs
remote login for code level 1.16.2.8 or above 2-28 2Gb fibre channel switch 8-5
service terminal 2-29 4Gb fibre channel switch 8-10
security precautions 2-27 switch removal and replacement, concurrent 4Gb 5-29
Sense Bytes switch setup, run fibre 4-93
MIM switch, concurrent removal and replacement 2Gb 5-27
RS/6000 6-25 switch, drive setup for external 4-41
service menus switch, fibre channel 8-5, 8-10
subsystem maintenance 4-67 symbol
service mode symbol description 9-2
setting 4-103 system
service position 5-2 attention LED 8-3
open cover to 5-2 system attention led, disturbance or 4-158
service processor system firmware updates 4-151
removal 5-43
replacement 5-44
service processor assembly 5-43 T
service terminal 2-29 tape drive
connecting 4-102 activate microcode 4-156
install information center by using 4-57 terms 10-1
Service Terminal test
accessing information center via 4-161 ping hardware 4-79, 8-13
connecting using OS/2 operating system 4-103 time, setting correct 4-107
connecting using Windows operating system 4-102 tools
service terminal connection and menus 4-102 ESD kit 2-29
setting service terminal 2-29
controller routes to use pre-configured Router special 2-29
250 Encryption Router 4-127 wrap 2-29
251 Encryption Router 4-123 Tools 3-2
correct time 4-107 trademarks 9-2
number of drives 4-111 tray assembly, fan 5-21
setting correct time 4-107 tree, menu 4-67
setting ninth through fourteenth controller IP routes to troubleshooting
second 251 Encryption Router 4-138 2Gb fibre channel switch LEDs 8-5
setup for external switch, drive 4-41 4Gb fibre channel switch LEDs 8-10
setup, run fibre switch 4-93

TSSC
router LAN or WAN configuration 4-89
using to add microcode to controller 4-2
U
unpack F05 frame 3-41
unpack frame F05 3-29, 3-55
Using EBTERM in a 3953 or 3494 Tape Library 4-43
using information center
via Internet 4-160
via Service Terminal 4-161
V
verify cabling to the external switch (director) 3-76
Verify Checkout Instructions
3592 C06 controller 3-2
Verify/Checkout Instructions
3953 F05 Base Frame with 3592 C06 controller 3-3
Check Out 3592 C06 controller in a 3953 F05 Base
Frame 3-3
via Service Terminal 4-161
voltage regulator module
removal 5-52
replacing 5-53
voltage regulator modules 5-52
VPD replacement procedure 5-8
W
WAN configuration (TSSC), setting router 4-89
Web sites
firmware updates 4-151
microcode updates 4-151
Windows
using operating system to connect to Service
Terminal 4-102
WORM 2-2
wrap tool 2-29
write once read many 2-2
Index X-7
Readers’ Comments — We'd Like to Hear from You
IBM System Storage TS1120 Tape Controller
3592 C06 Maintenance Information
IBM 3592 Model C06
Part Number 95P8957
We appreciate your comments about this publication. Please comment on specific errors or omissions, accuracy,
organization, subject matter, or completeness of this book. The comments you send should pertain to only the
information in this manual or product and the way in which the information is presented.
For technical questions and information about products and prices, please contact your IBM branch office, your IBM
business partner, or your authorized remarketer.
When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. IBM or any other organizations will only use the
personal information that you supply to contact you about the issues that you state on this form.
Comments:
Thank you for your support.

Send your comments to the address on the reverse side of this form.
If you would like a response from IBM, please fill in the following information:
Name Address
Company or Organization
Phone No. Email address

___________________________________________________________________________________________________
Readers’ Comments — We'd Like to Hear from You Cut or Fold
Along Line
_ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ _Tape
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Please
_ _ _ _ _do
_ _not
_ _ staple
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ Tape
______
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
International Business Machines Corporation

Information Development
Building 9032-2, Department GZW
9032 South Rita Road
Tucson, Arizona U.S.A. 85744-0002
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape
Cut or Fold
Along Line

Part Number: 95P8957
EC M11962
(1P) P/N: 95P8957

Spine information:
IBM System Storage TS1120 Tape

Controller 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information IBM 3592 Model C06

3592C06 Mi 20110826 Mi.95p8957

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

3592C06 Mi 20110826 Mi.95p8957

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

3592C06 Mi 20110826 Mi.95p8957

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IBM System Storage TS1120 Tape Controller

3592 C06 Maintenance Information

August 19, 2011

About This Information

Send Us Your Feedback

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 iii

Safety Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi

Laser Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv

Chapter 1. Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Chapter 2. Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 v

Chapter 3. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

vi 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Chapter 4. Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Chapter 5. Removal and Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

viii 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Chapter 7. Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Chapter 8. Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Chapter 9. Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

x 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Communication Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Part number index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Parts Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

xiv 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

xvi 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

xx 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 xxi

In the system you are about to setup or service:

xxii 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

The battery connector is polarized; do not attempt to reverse polarity.

Dispose of the battery according to local regulations.

Safety Notices xxiii

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 xxv

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 xxvii

Installation Starting Point

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2011 1-1

3592 C06 Controller Start

1-2 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Chapter 1. Start 1-3

1-4 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Chapter 1. Start 1-5

1-6 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Chapter 1. Start 1-7

1-8 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Chapter 1. Start 1-9

Decode the Refcodes (see “Decoding SIM Refcodes” on page 6-11).

1-10 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Chapter 1. Start 1-11

1-12 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Perform these steps;

Chapter 1. Start 1-13

1-14 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Chapter 1. Start 1-15

1-16 3592 C06 Controller Maintenance Information

Chapter 1. Start 1-17

pSeries 9131 - 52A Information

Controller Supported Host Attachments